《Trash of the Count's Family》 Chapter 1: Prologue Chapter 1: Prologue 3Chapter 1: Prologue Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist # Prologue# When I opened my eyes, I was inside a novel. [The Birth of a Hero]. [The Birth of a Hero] was a novel focused on the adventures of the main character, Choi Han, a high school boy who was transported to a different dimension from Earth, along with the birth of the numerous heroes of the continent. I became a part of that novel as the trash of the Count¡¯s family, the family that oversaw the territory where the first vige that Choi Han visits is located. The problem is that Choi Han bes twisted after that vige, and everyone in it, are destroyed by assassins. The bigger problem is the fact that this stupid trash who I¡¯ve be doesn¡¯t know about what happened in the vige and messes with Choi Han, only to get beaten to a pulp. ¡°...This is going to be a problem.¡± I feel like something serious has happened to me. But it was worth trying to make this my new life. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 2: When I Opened My Eyes (1) Chapter 2: When I Opened My Eyes (1) 1Chapter 2: When I Opened My Eyes (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist The man could feel someone gently tapping his body. The rough hand made the man think of the hands of an exhausted parent. It was that warm. ¡°Young master, it is morning.¡± But the voice was very profound. The man felt chills throughout his body and his eyes subconsciously opened. Rather than the bright sunlighting in through the window to warm the man¡¯s eyes, what he saw was an old man standing there with a satisfied expression. ¡°It is surprising to see you wake up after a single attempt.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± ¡°The master wishes to dine with the young master since it has been a while. It looks like it will be possible today.¡± The man could see a mirror past the old man¡¯s shoulder. Inside the mirror was a red-haired man who seemed to be confused looking back at him. ¡®I guess that guy is me.¡¯ ¡°Young master Cale?¡± The man turned toward the source of the worried voice to find the old man, who looked like a servant, looking toward him. But that concerned man was not the problem. The man clearly heard it. Young Master Cale. It was a familiar name. He slowly blurted out the name. ¡°Cale Henituse?¡± The old servant was looking at him like he was looking at his own grandson. ¡°Yes. That is your name, young master. I¡¯m guessing you are still a bit drunk.¡± Listening to the concerned response of the old man, the man naturally thought about a name that was even more important than the name Cale Henituse. ¡°...Beacrox.¡± ¡°Are you talking about my son?¡± ¡°...Chef.¡± ¡°Yes. My son is the chef. Do you need him to make something for your hangover?¡± The man felt his surroundings turn dark and he started to feel dizzy. He lowered his head and put it into his hand. ¡°Young master, are you still drunk? Should I call the doctor? Or will you wash right now?¡± The man looked at the red hair that was falling in front of his face. It was a bright red color, much too different from his original ck hair. Cale Henituse. Beacrox. Beacrox¡¯s dad, Ron. They were the characters that appeared at the beginning of [The Birth of a Hero], the novel the man was reading before he fell asleepst night. He jerked his head up and looked around. He could see the bedroom that waspletely different from a typical Korean design. It made the man think about Europe. Every single thing in the room was extremely extravagant and luxurious. ¡°Young master?¡± The man responded to Ron, the old man who was pretending to be concerned and worried. ¡°Cold water.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± He needed something to clear his mind. He could see the face of Cale Henituse in the mirror behind old man Ron. ¡®Still looks normal.¡¯ ¡®I guess Cale hasn¡¯t been beaten to a pulp by the main character just yet. ¡® His handsome face caught his attention. The man had be Cale Henituse when he opened his eyes. Cale Henituse. The trash who was beaten to a pulp by the main character in the beginning of [The Birth of a Hero]. That was who he was. ¡°Young master, I presume you will not be bathing in cold water. Are you asking for drinking water?¡± Cale turned his gaze toward Ron. Ron may be pretending to be a benign old man, but he was actually hiding his true identity as a cruel and vicious individual. He made the request to Ron. ¡°Please get me some drinking water.¡± He needed to drink some cold water and clear his mind first. ¡°I will prepare it right away.¡± ¡°Great. Thanks.¡± Ron flinched for a second and had an odd expression on his face, but Cale did not notice it. *** Ron had to leave the bedroom as there was only warm water in the room. Once he was left alone, Cale got off the bed and headed to the bathroom. If he really was inside of the novel, he knew that there should be arge mirror inside. As expected, the full body mirror was inside the bathroom. Cale Henituse, who had a lot of interest in his appearance and physique, had this mirror set up in here. Nobody else in the household had such a mirror. The man in the mirror had red hair and a pretty fit body. It wouldn¡¯t be wrong to say he had a body that would make any style look good. ¡°I really am Cale.¡± The man in the mirror indeed was Cale Henituse from the novel. [The Birth of a Hero] was very descriptive about each of the character¡¯s appearance. That was why the man had no choice but to agree that he had indeed turned into Cale Henituse. Do people usually be calmer when they are surprised and shocked? Cale, no, Kim Rok Soo, calmly thought about the night before. It was a typical day off. It had been a while since he had read an actual book instead of on his phone, so he went to the library to check out some books. He borrowed the entire series since he nned to read all day long. The name of that book was, of course, [The Birth of a Hero]. He managed to finish the fifth volume before he fell asleep. But when he woke up, he had turned into Cale Henituse, the individual that the main character mercilessly beat up in volume 1. ¡®Will things go the way they did in the novel?¡¯ He felt unnaturally calm. Once he got past the point of shock, his mind had calmed back down. He started to remember the contents of volume 1. [The Birth of a Hero.] This novel was about the birth of the heroes in the Western and Eastern continents, as well as their trials and growth. The main character was, naturally, Korean. He was a student who had been transported into the world when he was a freshman in high school. Furthermore, his lifespan became as long as a dragon¡¯s lifespan, making him pretty much never age. ¡°... This is bad?¡± He was going to be beaten into a pulp by such a person. The important thing, however, was that he had not been beaten up just yet. Cale took his eyes off the mirror and walked into the tub that was full of warm water. He leaned against the tub and looked up at the ceiling. It was that expensive marble that was described in the novel. The estate that Cale lived in was actually full of marble. Cale started to mumble as he looked toward the ceiling. ¡°It¡¯s not like there¡¯s much I¡¯ll miss.¡± His life as Kim Rok Soo. There really wasn¡¯t much to it. He was an orphan and didn¡¯t have much money. He also didn¡¯t have a person he loved to death, nor a friend he would give his life to save. He only continued to live because he could not die. Yes, he could not die. Hepletely hated the thought of death or pain. He became an orphan after both of his parents passed away from a car ident when he was little. He didn¡¯t like pain or death. No matter what it was, even if he was rolling in a pile of dog shit, it was still better than being dead. ¡®For that reason, I need to first make sure I don¡¯t get beaten up.¡¯ Cale did not know what day it was in the novel right now, but he was sure that he had not met with the main character just yet. The reason was simple. ¡®I don¡¯t have the scar on my side.¡¯ Cale Henituse, the trash of Count Henituse¡¯s family. A few days before meeting the main character, Cale was drinking and causing a ruckus. He was flinging things around and got stabbed on his side by a broken desk leg, resulting in the scar. What an interesting character. He didn¡¯t get the scar from fighting someone else. He got it because he got angry that the alcohol didn¡¯t taste good and threw a tantrum. He meets the main character after he gets the scar, and, after a short discussion, he gets beaten to a pulp. ¡°Mm.¡± Cale crossed his arms and started to think. He did not know what happened to Cale after getting beaten to a pulp in volume 1. All he knew was that the main character, Choi Han, has many fateful encounters and ovees a lot of trials to grow into a hero along with his party members. Thus the era for him to prove that he is a hero will begin. The Roan Kingdom that Cale currently lives in, as well as many other locations in the Eastern and Western continents, will be filled with war. It truly will turn into the time for the heroes to show their full potential. Cale started to frown. Kim Rok Soo, the man who became Cale. His life motto was pretty simple. Living long without pain. Enjoying the small joys of life. Living a peaceful life. ¡°... As long as I make the story proceed like normal while taking out the fact that I get beaten up, the main character will take care of the rest.¡± For some odd reason, he could recall every single line in the book without any issue. Cale rxed in the warm water whileing to a final conclusion with his now clear head. ¡°It¡¯s worth trying.¡± It was worth trying to avoid the continent¡¯s war and living peacefully. This trash¡¯s situation was much better than when he was Kim Rok Soo. The location of this estate was also in the corner of the Western Continent, making it an ideal location to avoid the war. In the novel itself, there were many nobles who managed to avoid the influences of war. Even if he could notpletely avoid it, he should be able to at least reduce the damages to a minimum. ¡°Young master, are you inside the bathroom?¡± He could hear Ron¡¯s voiceing from outside. Cale thought about Ron¡¯s true identity. Ron was an assassin who crossed over from the Eastern Continent by sea. He pretended to be a benign old man, but the true Ron was a cruel and merciless man. ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll be right out.¡± His natural response was to talk informally to the old man. Cale realized what he was doing and made up his mind about what to do in the future. He needed to push that old man to the main character and send him away. That old man could easily kill Cale with a single blow but treated Cale like a puppy you left alone because you felt bad for it. He was smiling gently, but there was not an ounce of care about Cale on the inside. In the novel, Ron leaves with the main character and his son after Choi Han beats Cale to a pulp. Cale put the bathrobe on as he quickly exited the bathroom. Ron was standing there with a smile on his face and a tray with a cup in his hands. ¡°Young master, here you go.¡± Cale picked up the cup and walked past the old man. He did not want to make eye contact with such a dangerous old man. ¡°Great, thanks.¡± Ron¡¯s expression turned odd once again, but Cale had already walked past him. Cale took a drink of the cold water as he started to think. ¡®There are too many strong people here.¡¯ In fact, there were too many of them. No matter where the main character went, there were either strong individuals or individuals with hidden secrets. These individuals were both human and other races. ¡®I at least need the strength to protect myself.¡¯ In order to live long without pain in the continent that will soon be filled with war, you needed a decent level of strength. Of course, you could not be too strong. Then otherplicated things will happen. Cale thought about the different fateful encounters that urred in the beginning parts of the novel. The powers that strengthen the main character and his party members. He was thinking about the ones that would help him live long without pain. There were a couple that came to mind. He just needed to pick one of them. ¡°Young master, we will start to dress you now.¡± ¡°Oh, right. Thanks.¡± The door soon opened and couple servants entered to help Ron dress Cale. Cale did not notice that Ron had a stoic expression unlike his usual self as he looked at the clothes the servants were bringing in. ¡°Ah, something simple today.¡± He hated reallyplicated attires. Simple clothes that let you rxfortably were the best. ¡°Yes, young master.¡± The servant in charge of the attires quickly pulled out some simple clothes and Cale changed into the simplest of them all. He lightly frowned after finishing getting dressed. Even this, ¡®simple,¡¯ attire was extremely extravagant and not to his liking. However, the reflection in the mirror was quite handsome. ¡®He really is handsome and makes any clothes look good.¡¯ The face really was the final piece to fashion. He looked in the mirror and fixed his sleeves before turning around to look at Ron. Ron was once again smiling like a gentle old man. ¡°Ron, let¡¯s go.¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± Cale walked behind Ron. It was nice that he did not need to know theyout of the estate. He just needed to follow Ron wherever he needed to go. All of the servants that Cale saw flinched and bowed respectfully before they seemed to run away. ¡®Why are they so scared? Cale never hit people.¡¯ He just liked to drink and y. Sometimes, when he was drunk, he did break things. But that was why he was the trash of the family. He also did not treat people like people, other than the few people he liked. ¡®Well, it¡¯s better if nobody talks to me.¡¯ Cale thought about it peacefully. It would be more difficult if he was in the body of a model citizen. A trash can do as they please without worry. It was only possible because there was no desire to live as a model citizen. ¡°I will now open the door.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± Cale nodded his head toward Ron. The book mentioned that Cale treated Ron, someone who raised him like he was his own grandson since he was little, as nicely as he treated his own father. It mentioned that he always responded to Ron and treated him like a person. Of course, Ron did not really think that way. That was why it was easy for Cale to talk to Ron. He just needed to answer Ron¡¯s questions and treat him like a human being. ¡°I hope you enjoy your breakfast.¡± ¡°Thanks. Ron, make sure you eat a good meal too.¡± Cale walked past Ron and into the dining room. He could see his family sitting there. His father and the current head of the Henituse household, Deruth. Next to him was Cale¡¯s stepmother, the Countess, as well as her son and daughter. The four people looked toward Cale. ¡°You arete again, today.¡± Cale¡¯s gaze turned toward his father who spoke. [The Birth of a Hero] described Cale¡¯s feelings for his father like this. ¡®His father was the one person that Cale listened to. The reason the trash did not leave the area and got everything he wanted inside the Count¡¯s territory was because of his father, Count Deruth Henituse.¡¯ But, unfortunately, Cale¡¯s father was unlike the other strong fathers in this novel. He did not have any special skills or influence. He just had a lot of money. However, Cale liked this a lot. It was the perfect family environment to live a simple life. Then there were the other three individuals. His stepmother who knew that he did not like her and avoided him. Her smart first-born who found it difficult to deal with his much older brother Cale. And the cute youngest of the family who avoided her older brother Cale. But it wasn''t like Cale bothered them or they bothered Cale. They just treated each other like strangers. Cale thought this was such a great environment to quietly live alone. ¡°Take a seat.¡± ¡°Yes, father.¡± Cale looked at the feast on the table that did not meet his definition of breakfast and sat down on his seat. He then felt something was odd and lifted his head up. ¡°Is there something you need to say, father?¡± ¡°... No, I do not.¡± Deruth was staring at Cale. The rest of the family was doing the same. Cale made eye contact with each of these family members. They all quickly turned away whenever he made eye contact and continued to eat. ¡®I guess they find me really difficult to handle.¡¯ Cale turned his head toward the table as well. This luxurious feast that was different than the breakfast he used to eat just to fill his belly made him start to smile. He first started by cutting the sausage in half with the knife. ¡®It is so juicy.¡¯ He didn¡¯t know if juice flowed out as soon as he cut into it because it was handmade or because it was cooked well, but the color on the sausage made him hungry. Cale started to smile without realizing it. ng. He heard something fall down and made eye contact with his younger brother Basen. He could see that Basen had dropped the fork in his hand. ¡°My apologies.¡± Basen calmly apologized like the personality described for him in the novel. The servant in charge of the meal quickly came over to hand Basen a new fork and picked up the fork on the floor. Watching that made Cale think that it was nice to be a noble before he focused once again on the food in front of him. Cale had found the first good thing abouting into the novel. This breakfast was extremely luxurious and so tasty that his stomach waspletely happy. The smile on his face could not disappear. ¡°...Ho?¡± That was why he did not hear his brother Basen¡¯s shocked promation. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 3: When I Opened My Eyes (2) Chapter 3: When I Opened My Eyes (2) 3Chapter 3: When I Opened My Eyes (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale looked around at all of the dishes in front of him. He then moved his fork towards a sd made of fruits that he did not recognize. After filling his stomach with meat, soup, and bread, he wanted to try something new. The fruit looked like an orange, but the color was closer to that of grapes. Cale put the fruit in his mouth and took a bite. ¡°Mm.¡± In that instant, sweet fruit juice filled his mouth. He really hated sour fruits, so this extremely sweet vor in his mouth made him subconsciously start to drool. At that moment, he made eye contact with his father Deruth, who was looking at him. ¡°Cale.¡± Deruth quietly called Cale¡¯s name before hesitating. He then started to frown and move his mouth. Cale did not like that awkward atmosphere and started to speak. ¡°It¡¯s delicious.¡± ¡°Yes, it tastes like trash...huh? Did you say it is delicious?¡± ¡°Yes. Everything tastes wonderful.¡± Cale picked up a different fruit this time and smiled after tasting the sweetness in his mouth once again. The trash, Cale Henituse, never cared for etiquette anyways. He probably shouldn¡¯t do this while speaking with his father, the head of the household, but whatever. He¡¯s just trash in the first ce. ¡®It really is best to be the trash.¡¯ Nobody really cared no matter what he did. As long as he can prevent himself from getting beaten up by the main character, it will be a good life. As Cale expected, nobody criticized hisck of manners. In fact, Deruth actually had a smile on his face as he started to nod his head. ¡°Yes, it really is delicious. It is nice to see you enjoying food so much.¡± Deruth really seemed like the only person who cared for Cale. He didn¡¯t even seem to care about Cale¡¯sck of manners. Well, a truly caring father should probably try to fix this personality of Cale... but this Cale did not care as he was not the real Cale Henituse. ¡°Yes. Please make sure you eat a lot as well, father.¡± Basen let out another, ¡®Ho,¡¯ and Cale, who heard it this time, turned his gaze back to the dishes. The 15 year old Basen. The three years younger brother of the Cale that he possessed was difficult to handle. Unlike the trash Cale, Basen was smart, sincere, and very responsible. The people of the family were pushing for Basen to be the next head of household. Kim Rok Soo agreed with this sentiment even after turning into Cale. ¡®Rather than having aplicated life being in charge of this territory, I¡¯d rather use my position as the Count¡¯s older brother toze around and live peacefully in a section of the territory.¡¯ Cale did not try to argue with Basen. He could hear Basen¡¯s gasp of shock and knew that Basen was looking down on him, but what could he do about it? Once Basen bes the head of the household, his personality was one that he would probably not kill Cale, but in order to not get hurt and quietly move to a small vige, he needed to not get on Basen¡¯s nerves. ¡®If that¡¯s not possible, I¡¯ll just make some money beforehand and go somewhere that the war will not reach.¡¯ Cale pretended not to hear Basen¡¯s gasp and continued to eat. Once the meal was over, his father, Deruth, was the first to get up. He seemed to have been satisfied with breakfast, as his face was filled with a smile. ¡®It really was delicious.¡¯ If breakfast was like this every day, Cale would probably give up some sleep toe eat breakfast all the time. Deruth looked around at the family members who got up after he did, before resting his gaze on his first-born son, Cale. ¡°Cale, is there anything you need?¡± Cale was confused at Deruth¡¯s sudden gesture, but he decided to honestly answer. ¡°Please give me some money.¡± ¡°Sure, I¡¯ll give you a lot.¡± Deruth answered without any hesitation. This really was a well-off family. As a territory that mined for marble and grew grapes for wine, they were overflowing with money right now. ¡°Great. Please give me as much as you can.¡± Cale could feel his two younger siblings looking at him, but there was no need for him to be embarrassed. Wasn¡¯t it better to ask for money instead of drinking and causing a ruckus? Furthermore, he needed money to proceed with his ns. That fateful encounter to get himself a strong enough power to keep himself safe. He needed some money in order to cause that fateful encounter to happen. ¡°Sure. I¡¯ll give you as much as I can.¡± Cale started to smile after being satisfied with his father¡¯s response. However, he was at a loss of words after returning to his chamber and receiving the cheque from the deputy butler, Hans. The cheque that was issued through a partnership with the treasury department and the magic department made Cale¡¯s heart run wild. ¡®So much money?¡¯ This family didn¡¯t seem to only have a bit of money. In fact, they seem to have a lot of money. The novel did mention that Cale received arge allowance, but it did not mention the exact amount. However, he could realistically understand howrge it was based on the amount listed on the cheque. ¡®10 million gallon.¡¯ It is about equivalent to 10 million Korean won. If it is like this, Cale could change his ns. Cale¡¯s brain started to quickly think about his options. ¡°I¡¯ll be heading out now, young master.¡± The deputy butler delivered the cheque and bid goodbye, but Cale did not respond. Deputy Butler Hans just treated this as normal and headed toward the door. However, he soon stopped moving. It was because Cale had gotten up from his seat and said something to Ron. ¡°Ron, let¡¯s go to the study.¡± Hans then became anxious at Cale¡¯s words. Ron was the same. ¡°...Did you say the study?¡± Cale found this odd. This sly old man¡¯s voice was shaking a bit. Was there a reason he could not go to the study? ¡°Yes.¡± He needed to go to the study to form his n. There were no desks or even any paper in his chamber. There were a lot of expensive looking alcohol bottles though. ¡°Excuse me, young master.¡± ¡°What is it?¡± Cale looked toward the anxious looking deputy butler. ¡°This, we have not been able to do our morning cleaning of the study just yet.¡± ¡°Is that so? It¡¯s fine if it goes a day without cleaning.¡± ¡°No sir. We cannot let that happen.¡± The deputy butler was extremely pushy about this for some reason. He then smiled brightly and put up a single finger. ¡°Please just wait one hour! I will put my name on the line to make sure that the study ispletely clean, not like a study that has not been used in ten years, but one that was used just yesterday!¡± ¡°Sure, whatever.¡± He didn¡¯t mind waiting an hour. ¡°Great. Then I will go report this to the master.¡± ¡°No need to do that, but go ahead if you want to do so.¡± ¡°Yes, young master. I will be off now.¡± ¡°Okay. Sure.¡± Like a well-trained deputy butler, Hans closed the door without making any noise and disappeared. He seemed to be in a rush. Cale knew that there were three deputy butlers vying to be the official butler. Maybe that was why Hans was so passionate about it. ¡°Ron.¡± ¡°Young master?¡± ¡°Why are you nking out like that?¡± ¡°My apologies, young master.¡± ¡°No need to apologize.¡± Ron had another odd expression on his face, but Cale put the precious cheque in his inner pocket as he asked. There was so much going on that he did not even have any time to ask about today¡¯s date. ¡°What is today¡¯s date?¡± This question would seem odding from anybody else, but the servant Ron answered in a gentle voice. ¡°It is the 29th day of the 3rd month in the 781st year of the Felix Calendar.¡± ¡°Mm, that is a problem.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± ¡°Nothing.¡± Cale tightly clenched on the 10 million gallon in his pocket once more. The only thing he could trust was money. Yesterday, the 28th day of the 3rd month in the 781st year of the Felix Calendar. That was the day that the vigers of Harris Vige, the vige that the main character Choi Han went to after escaping from the Forest of Darkness, the ce that Choi Han felt human affection for the first time in this world, made friends, and created a second family, were all murdered by an unknown group of assassins. Even Cale, who had read until the fifth volume, did not know the true identity of this secret organization that murdered the vigers. Some readers may be saying something like this while reading about this situation. ¡®I thought he was really strong. What was Choi Han doing while they were murdered?¡¯ It is only natural to think like that. However, there is a reason this novel is called, [The Birth of a Hero], and not, [The Strength of the Hero], or, [The War of the Heroes]. Birth. It was the story of a person who overcame all sorts of obstacles and carried the pains of his past as he became a hero. Love and friendshipes up along the way as he meets enemies and friends. Something that cannot be missing from a story is the, ¡®awakening.¡¯ He may have explosive talents and have lived for tens of years in the Forest of Darkness, but, through all of that, Choi Han was still an innocent and gentle person who could not kill another human being. He had no issues killing monsters, but Choi Han had never hurt another person. In order to turn someone like him into a hero, the novel had created a situation for Choi Han. In order to heal thedy who treated him like her own son, Choi Han had gone into the Forest of Darkness to find some precious medicinal herbs. He had to travel deep into the forest to find it, and, when he finally managed to find the herb and headed back towards the vige, he found the corpses of the murdered vigers, the burning houses, and the assassins who were about to leave. Choi Han went berserk after seeing this and killed someone for the first time. Of course, the people he killed are the members of this secret organization, and this secret organization shes against Choi Han every so often throughout the novel. Choi Han only returns to normal after killing all of the assassins from the secret organization, before falling into a state of despair as he is unable to gather any information from the dead bodies. He then buries the bodies of the vigers before making a promise to himself. ¡®I will kill them all. I will kill all of the people that made this happen.¡¯ Choi Han realized what the sadness of death was at this moment, but his first kill starts to twist his mind. Of course, he starts to feel again and starts to be more human-like after meeting his party memberster in the novel, and grows to be a true hero. ¡°...Ron.¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± ¡°A cup of cold water please.¡± ¡°... I understand.¡± After Ron left and he was alone in the room, Cale covered his face with both of his hands. The problem was that the city that this twisted Choi Han arrives at after leaving Harris Vige is the city called Western, located in the center of the Henituse territory. Cale who happens to run into Choi Han annoys Choi Han and ends up getting beaten up. That is when Choi Han gets his first subject/party member, the reliable chef Beacrox. ¡®... I was going to head there in advance and help him out.¡¯ The best scenario to not get beaten up is no longer avable. I did care more about potentially saving the people of the vige, but there is nothing I can do about it at this point. Now, all that is left is to make sure I act in a way to avoid getting beaten up by the angry Choi Han, who is moving at a crazy speed to arrive at Western City by tomorrow. ¡®Avoiding the main character is not a good idea.¡¯ He needed to run into Choi Han so that Ron and Beacrox run into him as well. That was the only way for the three of them to leave this ce together to start their official journey. Then that left just one course of action. ¡®Have them run into each other and then get out of their way.¡¯ With the best possible first impression, if possible. ¡°Young master.¡± ¡°Ah, thanks, Ron.¡± Cale took a sip from the cup that Ron brought over. He then started to frown. ¡°It¡¯s not cold water?¡± ¡°It is lemonade.¡± He really is an insidious man. He knows that, just like Kim Rok Soo, the original Cale hates sour things. But he still chose to bring lemonade, which would take more work to prepare than cold water. Cale wanted to be angry at the sour taste, but he could not do so because he was afraid of that assassin old man. He could only drink the lemonade. ¡°Thanks, it was wonderful.¡± ¡°No problem. Young master. We should be able to head to the study soon.¡± ¡°Great.¡± Ron¡¯s benign and gentle smile caused Cale to have the chills. He once again clenched onto the 10 million gallon cheque for support. Money really was the only thing you could trust. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 4: They Met (1) Chapter 4: They Met (1) 1Chapter 4: They Met (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist He could not think about anything else while food was in front of him. He could not even prevent the admiration that was flowing out of his mouth. ¡°Ha. It¡¯s so delicious.¡± The deputy butler Hans flinched at the words that came out of Cale¡¯s mouth. Cale was sitting alone at the table, with Hans standing next to him. Other than breakfast, Count Henituse¡¯s family tended to take care of the other meals freely. To be honest, it was mainly because they each had their own responsibilities. Nobody said that it was easy to be a noble. Especially if you were in administration or politics, you had to follow a strict schedule, dropping everything else if you received an order from someone above you. Count Deruth had responsibilities as the lord of the region, making it difficult to share other meals together, while Cale¡¯s younger siblings timed their meals based on their studies. The Countess was busy interacting with the wives of the influential households in the region, as well as other tasks. ¡®Now that I think about it.¡¯ Cale put the fork down after suddenly remembering something. Hans started to get nervous, thinking to himself that this was the normal Cale. He was worried because he did not know when that fork may fly toward his face. Cale did not care whether Hans was nervous or not as he got lost in his own thoughts. ¡®There are a lot of experts hiding as artists or craftsmen.¡¯ The Roan Kingdom was pretty advanced in construction and the arts, especially sculpting. It was because there was a lot of marble in the Roan Kingdom. Thanks to that, the Henituse region became the fifth best marble mining region, bringing in a lot of money. Furthermore, a mountain range took up most of Count Henituse¡¯s region. Even though it was located in the northwest, the mountains were extremely fertile, allowing the residents to grow grapes in between the mountains for wine. Although there was not arge quantity of wine from these fields, it were still treated as one of the best wines in the entire continent. However, Cale¡¯s mind was filled more about the, ¡®strong individuals,¡¯ and not these facts. He had even missed lunch as he sat in the study thinking about that all day. ¡®Why are there so many experts on this stupidnd? This isn¡¯t the murim.¡¯ There were so many hermit experts here like in the murim. That was why Cale came to a conclusion. Do not mess with just anybody. An average looking chef could be a poison expert, and the person working in the repair shop could be someone who viciously killed people with his wires. This was that type ofnd. ¡°Sigh.¡± A deep sigh came out of Cale¡¯s mouth. He had justpleted his n to prevent himself from dying and living peacefully. ¡°Young master.¡± Cale, who wanted to let out another sigh, turned his gaze to the source of the cautious voice. It was the deputy butler Hans. ¡°What?¡± ¡°Should I get them to make something else?¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Hans held back his sigh after seeing Cale frowning and opening his eyes widely. He was thinking that Cale would now flip the table. Hans didn¡¯t know why the Count would assign him to take care of Cale, but held back his rising despair as he waited for Cale¡¯s response. And Cale did respond. ¡°Why would you remake something this delicious?¡± ¡°...Excuse me?¡± Cale picked his fork back up and sliced the meat. Dinner was even fancier than breakfast. It was not delicious because he had never had something like this when he was still Kim Rok Soo, but because it was an extravagant taste, even for the original Cale. Kim Rok Soo didn¡¯t know how Cale grew up, but the original Cale had issues with anything that was not fancy. He liked that fact quite a bit. Everybody knew that was the case and only brought the best of the best. Cale put a piece of the well-cooked, but still juicy, piece of steak in his mouth as he asked Hans. His attitude was one that said he did not care about etiquettes at all. ¡°Hans, who made this meal?¡± ¡°Ah, it was second chef Beacrox.¡± ...Cale suddenly lost his appetite. Beacrox. He was clean cut and was the son of the servant Ron. However, unlike his father, he specialized in the way of the sword and not assassinations. Beacrox was also obsessed with cleanliness and sharpened his spotless de every day, using that same sword to slice the heads of his enemies off their bodies. ¡®...He also specializes in torture.¡¯ That kind of guy ends up admiring Choi Han¡¯s sword skill and chooses to follow him. His father Ron makes a deal with Choi Han to help him, and chooses to leave with the two of them for the sake of his son. Although he may not look like it, Ron cherishes his son quite a bit. Cale looked down at the medium rare steak that was still slightly pink on the inside and gulped a few times. ¡®I can¡¯t allow my blood to shed like this steak.¡¯ He turned his gaze toward Hans who was still looking at him before cutting another piece of steak and putting it in his mouth. ¡°It is delicious. He is Ron¡¯s son, right? I did not know he was such a talented chef.¡± ¡°...I will deliver your message to chef Beacrox. I¡¯m sure he will be very happy to know that young master Caleplimented his cooking.¡± ¡°Is that so? Let him know that I truly enjoyed this delicious meal.¡± ¡°...Yes, sir.¡± Hans was looking at Cale with a stiff expression, but Cale had made up his mind. He was not going to mess with Beacrox and would work to make a good impression. Cale enjoyed the meal once again with a rxed heart. Everything will be settled once he made Beacrox run into Choi Han and leave the region. Cale had already made what he thought to be a pretty good n to make that happen. Just like during breakfast, Calepletely emptied the dishes. He had a satisfied smile on his face as he got up and looked toward Hans. ¡°Hans, why did you suddenly end up being assigned to me?¡± Hans had mentioned before dinner that his father, Deruth, had sent him to personally handle Cale¡¯s needs. Although Cale did not know about the situation in Count Henituse¡¯s family once Choi Han leaves, Hans was extremely skilled and probably had the best chance of all the deputy butlers in bing the official butler. Hans slightly bowed his head and answered the question. ¡°The Count-nim was concerned after hearing that young master had missed a meal while working in the study and ordered me to make sure that the young master makes sure to eat every meal. As a result, I will be overseeing just the meal-rted duties for the young master.¡± To be specific, Hans was responsible for the meals. ¡°Is that so? My father did something he didn¡¯t need to do. I would eat properly on my own. But I guess I would not have realized it was time for dinner if Hans did note tell me.¡± Cale was busy writing down all the fateful encounters in the first five volumes of the novel in Korean. After leaving the dining room, Cale smiled toward Hans. ¡°Hans, take good care of me.¡± ¡°Ah, of course. Please take good care of me as well. I will do my best.¡± Hans stumbled a bit as he answered, but Cale just let it be. Cale saw Ron standing there as soon as he opened the door and started to frown. ¡°Ron, didn¡¯t I tell you to go eat?¡± Cale told him to go away because he did not want to see this old man¡¯s face, but he would not leave. He just roamed around Cale like a fly. Ron had been waiting outside the door when he was in the study, but even that got on Cale¡¯s nerves. ¡°Young master, it is my duty to take care of you.¡± Cale clicked his tongue after seeing Ron smiling at him. He then threw a bit of a tantrum. ¡°Enough. I don¡¯t need it so go eat. Why don¡¯t you go eat even when I tell you to go eat? Don¡¯t follow me. You know my temper if you do, right?¡± Cale threatened Ron with his gaze to reinforce that he did not want Ron to follow as he headed back to the study. When he peeked back, Ron was standing there with a stiff expression while Hans was looking towards him with shock. ¡®Should I not have thrown a tantrum?¡¯ Cale was scared of the assassin old man¡¯s stiff expression and turned his head back around before speeding back to the study. The desk waspletely empty. The document that he had been working so hard on to write in Korean was already burnt in the fire. Cale had done so himself. There was nobody here who knew Korean, but he had to be careful. He had also told all the servants not to enter the study without his permission as well. ¡®I remember everything anyways.¡¯ Kim Rok Soo had always been good at remembering things he enjoyed. Comic books, novels, movies, no matter what it was, as long as he enjoyed it, he was able to remember the names and appearances of the characters. Of course, if he didn¡¯t like something, he would not remember anything about it at all. Cale leaned his back onto the chair and thought about what he needed to do in the future. ¡®First, I need to see Choi Han tomorrow and do that.¡¯ The corners of his lips started to slowly rise. ¡®I need to pick up a shield.¡¯ To live long without dying. He had no intentions of fighting. In order to achieve that goal, the first step was raising his defenses. Second was finding a recovery method. Third was being faster than anybody else. Fourth was a strength that does not hurt him but can kill others. Of course, the most important thing was to avoid the battlefield or anywhere where there may be bloodshed. Cale thought about these so called ns of his as he slowly closed his eyes with satisfaction. He was thinking about it even as he fell asleep. ¡®At least, I will not be beaten up even when the timees for it in the novel.¡¯ The Indestructible Shield. Cale was thinking about this first shapeless strength he was going to get as he fell asleep. The corners of his lips that had gone up did not seem like they would evere down. Fateful encounters did not have an owner. It was a firste first serve type of deal. The important day. What did he need to do in order to calm his nerves and be sessful? Cale thought the first step was to have a hearty breakfast. He felt like the only thing he did aftering to this world was eating, but he was going to enjoy the meal since he will be busy for a while starting tomorrow. ¡°Mm, ahem. I heard you fell asleep in the studyst night.¡± ¡°It somehow ended up that way.¡± He casually answered his father¡¯s question and continued to focus on the food. The fact that he did not even look at his father probably seemed rude, but it was fine since he was known for being the trash. Cale finished eating first and stood up. The screeching noise of the chair made everyone focus on him. ¡°I will head out first.¡± It was not proper etiquette, but Cale¡¯s father Deruth just seemed to like his son no matter what. He looked back and forth at Cale and the empty tes before starting to smile. ¡°Sure. Go ahead.¡± ¡°Thank you.¡± Cale needed to quickly leave because he had a lot of things to do today. But Deruth held him back for a second. ¡°You don¡¯t need any allowance today?¡± ¡°...I do need some.¡± This really was a family with a lot of money. Cale held back his smile after hearing that his father will send him the allowance through Hans and left without even saying thank you. He did make eye contact with his brother, Basen, for a moment, but Cale just ignored it and headed toward the dining room door. He saw that Ron was following him and shooed him away. ¡°Ron. I¡¯m going out. Don¡¯t look for me.¡± Don¡¯t look for me. That was Cale¡¯s code for letting Ron know that he was leaving the estate that was located near the rear of the city to go drinking. Whenever he did this, Ron just smiled and told him to have a safe trip. ¡°Will you not go to the study today?¡± But for some reason, Ron asked a rare question today. Cale started to frown. ¡°Ron, I don¡¯t think that is something you need to be curious about.¡± ¡°...I understand, young master. I will be waiting for you.¡± Cale¡¯s forehead started to show even more wrinkles after hearing that Ron will be waiting for him. ¡°Don¡¯t wait for me.¡± Cale flicked his finger to beckon one of the servants standing at the entrance of the residence over and walked out with him. Cale still seemed angry, so that servant did not say anything as he followed behind Cale. Once he exited the residence, he could see the garden and the gate of the exit farther away. It was only then that Cale let out a sigh and peeked backwards. He could see Ron¡¯s stiff expression through the closing door. ¡®I¡¯m d I was able to shake him off.¡¯ He was d that Ron did not follow him. However, Cale was afraid of that stiff expression. He was an assassin after all. Cale decided that he will treat Ron better and not make him angry starting the next interaction as he exited the estate. Of course, he was on a carriage. He arrived at his destination a little bitter. ¡°Young master. Is this the right ce?¡± The driver cautiously asked as he opened the door. He then peeked toward the shop in front of him. The driver¡¯s face was clearly filled with confusion. ¡°Yes. This is it.¡± Cale, who was wearing clothes that would be fancy to others but was the simplest thing in his closet, walked out of the carriage. Nobody was around them, as they had moved away as soon as they saw the carriage with the count¡¯s crest on it. [The Fragrance of Tea with Poetry] It was a tea shop that allowed you to read poems while drinking tea. This clean three story building looked to be pretty expensive. It was true that the owner of the shop was very wealthy. In fact, as the bastard son of a concubine of arge merchant guild, he was even wealthier than Cale. The only thing was that he was living here while hiding that identity. ¡®If I recall correctly, the owner goes to the capital around volume 3 to meet Choi Han there. It is there that he ims that, he may be a bastard son of a concubine of the merchant guild, but that he will be the owner of the merchant guild.¡¯ The man who shouts and swears to Choi Han that he will be the owner of the merchant guild. Cale only read the first five volumes, and thus did not know if the man ever ended up bing the owner of that merchant guild, but since he was one of the main character¡¯s partners, he probably will seed. Cale looked toward the driver who was sweating like a hog and gave an order. ¡°You can leave now.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± ¡°Are you going to make me say the same thing twice?¡± ¡°No, that, do I not need to wait for you, young master?¡± Cale casually answered as he opened the door to the tea shop. ¡°Yeah. I¡¯ll be here for a while.¡± Gulp. He could hear the driver¡¯s gulp behind him, but a much clearer and pleasurable noise filled Cale¡¯s ears. ng. A quiet but clear bell sound announced Cale¡¯s entrance into the tea shop. Cale stood at the entrance and looked around the tea shop. It was still early, and there were not many people there. Cale could see that all of them were shocked to see him there. Well, the novel did say there was nobody in this region who did not know about Cale. He was public enemy number one for the merchants because he had a tendency to break everything in their shops. ¡°Wee.¡± However, the owner of this shop warmly weed Cale in. Cale looked toward the baby pig-like man who weed him in from the counter. ¡®He must be the owner.¡¯ The wealthy bastard, Billos. His round face and full body definitely looked like a baby pig like the novel described. His charm was his extremely bright smile. ¡®He looks like a piggy bank.¡¯ Cale took out a gold coin and put it on the counter as he ordered. ¡°I n on staying on the third floor all day today.¡± Billos stared at Cale with a smile on his face. Cale pretended not to notice as he pointed to the bookshelf. ¡°Any tea that is not bitter. Do you have novels here too or just poems?¡± ng. The sound of someone putting their teacup down rang through the shop. Cale just thought of it as someone putting the teacup down hard and looked toward Billos. He prefered novels to poems. ¡°Of course. We have a lot of novels as well, young master Cale.¡± ¡°Really? Then send up the most interesting book and a cup of tea.¡± ¡°Yes. I understand.¡± Cale¡¯s gold coin fell onto Billos¡¯s chubby hands. Cale turned away as Billos tried to give him change. ¡°I¡¯ll drink more teater so just keep it.¡± ¡°...But it is still too much, young master.¡± A gold coin was worth 1 million gallon. Having that coin, that was worth 1 million Korean won, Cale did something that he had always wanted to try. ¡°I have a lot of money. Consider it as your tip.¡± Talking about how rich you are. Who cares if Billos actually has more money than he does? He also knew about many fateful encounters that will earn him a lot of money. Cale tried to look cool as he pointed toward the tables on the first floor with his chin. ¡°Well, if it is too much, you can treat everyone here to a cup of tea on me.¡± Golden Bell. He wanted to do something like this once. After he told his father that he needed allowance, he received three gold coins which were worth a total of 3 million gallon. ¡°Young master, still...¡± ¡°Ah, enough. Just bring my tea.¡± It really was good to be the trash. Cale did not care about being respectful as he headed up to the third floor. He could hear whispersing from behind him, but he did not need to care because there were already enough rumors about him, the trash of the Count¡¯s family. ¡°Just like I thought.¡± There was nobody else on the third floor right now because it was early in the morning. Cale took a seat in the innermost corner of the third floor. He then looked out the window. ¡®This is the right spot.¡¯ The spot where you could best see the Northern Gate of Western City. Cale nned to watch Choi Han from this location today. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 5: They Met (2) Chapter 5: They Met (2) 3Chapter 5: They Met (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist ¡®He gets chased away from the gate early in the morning.¡¯ Choi Han headed in the direction he remembered hearing about from the vigers after he finished burying all of his beloved vigers. He was heading toward Western City. Choi Han had been transported to this world when he was a freshman in high school, but he had lived here for tens of years already. Of course, the fact that most of that life was spent trying to survive in the Forest of Darkness made him mature in a slightly twisted way, and, as such, he was more rational than anybody would expect after such an incident. ¡®I need to go report this to the lord at the castle.¡¯ Harris Vige may have been a remote vige, but it was still under Count Henituse¡¯s jurisdiction. That was why Choi Han headed to Western City, hoping to at least prepare a small funeral for the vigers. He was also nning on looking for information regarding the assassins he had killed when he had lost his calm, as he was unable to ask them any questions. However, sending the dead off properly came before revenge. ¡®If you think about it, he really is an affectionate person.¡¯ But losing all of the first people who showed him love after tens of years in the Forest of Darkness at once made it impossible for Choi Han¡¯s mind to not be twisted. In the novel, that was when Cale messes with Choi Han and touches a nerve. He remembered what the Cale in the novel said to Choi Han. [¡°Why should my father care whether or not some useless vigers are dead? This cup of alcohol in my hand is worth more than all of your useless livesbined.¡±] Choi Han starts tough at Cale¡¯s words as he asks back. [¡°What an interesting thought. I am very curious to know whether you will change your mind or not.¡±] [¡®Shall we test it out?¡¯] That test was beating Cale to a pulp so that he was almost dead. The amazing thing was that Cale never changed his mind even after he was beaten to a pulp. ¡°Ah, I¡¯m getting the chills.¡± Cale started to rub his arm after seeing the goosebumps that were developing. He quickly took a sip of the tea that Billos had brought for him. He then looked out the window once again, only to get the chills right back. ¡®It¡¯s that punk.¡¯ The moment the gates opened for the morning, a young man wearing clothes with ck marks everywhere, such that it made it seem like the clothes were burnt in multiple ces, approached the gate. It was Choi Han. Cale did not get up from his seat as he observed Choi Han. His speed was admirable, as he ran like a lunatic through a distance that would normally take a carriage a week to travel, but, as a result, he looked like a mess. Of course, the events in the vige were responsible for a bit of his messy look as well. The guard blocked Choi Han¡¯s path as he walked in with his head down, lookingpletely exhausted. Cale didn¡¯t know what they were saying, but he could see Choi Han shake his head at the guard¡¯s question. ¡®I¡¯m sure they¡¯re asking if he has any identification.¡¯ The guards of Western City were generally gentle, but they were strict when it came to the rules. They replicated their liege, Count Deruth¡¯s personality. ¡°They kicked him out.¡± As expected, Choi Han walked back out of the gate. He did not even throw a fit. After continuously running for a day, his slightly recovered conscience told him not to kill an innocent man. ¡®Choi Han will now wait until night time before he stealthily jumps over the city wall to enter.¡¯ He then runs into Cale who was busy drinking away. Screech. Since Cale was alone, the sound of the chair being pushed as he stood up sounded pretty loud. He went downstairs and informed Billos who was at the counter. ¡°I¡¯ll be back soon. Don¡¯t clear my spot.¡± ¡°Yes, young master. I look forward to your return.¡± Cale ignored the smile on Billos¡¯s chubby face as he walked out of the tea shop. ¡°He didn¡¯t break anything!¡± Cale could hear someone¡¯s voiceing from inside the shop, but he did not care. He needed to set the foundation to earn that Indestructible Shield today. The Indestructible Shield. It is not talking about a physical item. The bestparison might be a mage¡¯s mana shield. Something that does not actually have a physical form. However, it was very different from a mana shield, as it was closer to superpower than magic. The funny thing was that the human who created the power, but ended up dying, was someone who served a god but ended up being emunicated. ¡®All sorts of weird things are in this novel.¡¯ As with the history of any fantasy world, this world also had its ancient history. During that ancient time, neither magic nor weaponry was developed. Instead, it was a society where your own innate talent or talents gathered from supernatural urrences yed a pivotal role. The strongest powers in that society were superpowers, divine powers, and natural forces. It was a very primitive time. Some of those powers havested all the way until now, staying hidden in certain locations or items. It was possible to take those powers for yourself if you meet the right conditions. Ancient powers. The heroes would find these powers, however, these powers were all supporting powers, not strong enough to be used as a hero¡¯s mainstay. These were the powers that Cale was looking to find. ¡®Everything but the divine powers.¡¯ Whether it be god or angels or devils, Cale did not want to get involved with any of them. That was why Cale was looking for the powers that people naturally developed or came from nature. ¡®That is the way to make sure I don¡¯t need to put in any effort.¡¯ Those were the types of powers he was looking for. Something like sword art or magic would require him to put in effort to practice. He didn¡¯t want to do something like that. Unlike other books, the ancient civilization in the novel, [The Birth of a Hero], was not that strong. As civilization developed, the magic and summoning skills that were developed outshined the natural powers left behind by the ancient civilization. Superpowers were the same way. Most subtle superpowers would be blown away by a single hit from the, ¡®Aura,¡¯ that was used in present day. It wasn¡¯t like the heroes just used these powers sparingly for no reason. ¡®And my goal is to collect these subtle superpowers to be decently strong.¡¯ It was a satisfying goal. Especially because he also knew the ancient power that could strengthen these subtle super powers. In order to take the first step in his n, Cale started to look for the ancient power that was hidden in Western City. He knew the requirement to earn that power. ¡°Youn, young master. Wee.¡± Cale just nodded his head at the baker, who bowed so low that it looked like his head might touch the ground, to respond. Gasp. He could hear the baker gasping, but Cale pretended not to hear it. He felt bad about how his trash reputation was making this baker so fearful. ¡°Give me some bread.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Cale pointed at all of the bread in the bakery and sternly responded. ¡°Everything from here to there.¡± ng. The gold coin that Cale took out started to spin on the counter. ¡°Pack it all up.¡± The baker seemed to be frozen in ce as Cale continued to speak. ¡°Two or three more gold coins should be enough for a week¡¯s worth of bread, right?¡± The baker¡¯s gaze, which had been on the gold coin, moved to Cale. It was too much money to pay for the bread. Cale just stoically responded to the baker¡¯s shaking eyes. ¡°I can go somewhere else if you don¡¯t want it.¡± ¡°No, it is nothing like that! Young master! I will pack it as fast as possible!¡± The baker was extremely respectful for a different reason than before as he moved around quickly. After a few minutes, Cale left the bakery with a bag full of bread over his shoulder. Even though it was just bread, it weighed quite a bit. The weight made Cale start to frown, and he ignored the baker who was watching him leave as he stepped into the street. Cale leisurely walked down the street, noticing that anybody who made eye contact with him would quickly turn and walk away. The majority of the people even ran away to avoid eye contact with him. ¡®It really is different than Korea. It is truly a fantasy world.¡¯ Cale looked around as he wandered around this market that gave off the typical fantasy feel. ¡°Mm.¡± ¡°Mmph.¡± Any time he made eye contact with a merchant, they became shocked and avoided his gaze. Tsk tsk. Cale really must have lived up to his title of trash in the past. Cale was talking shit about himself as he walked past the market and toward the western part of Western City. The slum is located to the west. No matter how wealthy a territory may be, there are always going to be poor people. In a situation like this, most people would probably expect something along these lines to happen. ¡®Ah, it is a fateful encounter that you can earn by sharing food with the poor.¡¯ Unfortunately, that was not the case. Cale could feel people peeking at him as soon as he entered the slums. This was the ce where both the idlest and the most vicious people lived together. Although the poor may not know the face of their liege, the count, they knew Cale¡¯s face. These people who had nothing needed to pay even closer attention to the type of person that would cause a ruckus in the market, pub, za, well, you name it, and Cale has probably caused a ruckus there too. ¡°Tsk.¡± Even though they knew all these stories about Cale, they couldn¡¯t resist the sweet smell of the bread in Cale¡¯s bag. Cale just ignored all these gazes as he continued to walk. The tip of his expensive leather shoe started to be dirty from the dirty water. An unknown stench also filled Cale¡¯s nose, making him naturally start to frown. This made him start to walk even faster. The slums were on one side of a small hill and constituted of old houses. Cale was heading toward the top of that hill. As he got closer, the gazes and steps of the people following him started to lessen as well. Cale¡¯s sharp re probably yed a role in this as well. ¡®It¡¯s better here.¡¯ After being freed from the stench, Cale stood at the top of the hill and turned around to look down at Western City. Of course, this hill was not as high as the count¡¯s estate. There was no way that they would allow the lord of the territory to live somewhere that was lower than that slums. Cale came back to his senses as he headed toward a tree that was fenced off in all directions. The fence, that was made of nks the width of Cale¡¯s body, had an entrance that had rotted. It was easily broken once Cale pushed at the fence. Thisrge tree seemed to havested for hundreds of years. Trees in the slums were usually chopped into firewood or had itsyers peeled off to make it useless, but this tree was not like that. The reason was simple. The reason could be heard in Cale¡¯s ear. These two were the only two who had followed him until the end from the slums. ¡°You can¡¯t approach that t-tree!¡± Cale ignored that warning. He heard another worried voice as well. ¡°You can¡¯t go there! It¡¯s a man-eating tree!¡± A man-eating tree. Anyone who hung themselves on this tree became mummies overnight. Furthermore, any blood thatnds on this tree instantly disappeared. Finally, there was only dirt around this tree. Grass, and even weeds, were nowhere to be found. This was the tree that Cale was looking for. A long time ago, during ancient times, there was a person who loved food so much that his gluttony in the ce of worship got him kicked out. That person ended up starving to death. This tree is said to have grown on top of his body, and that person¡¯s grudge and strength were both in this tree. The Indestructible Shield that Cale was looking for was here. How primitive, mysterious and strange was this! The majority of the ancient powers were mysterious like this. Cale took a bread out of the bag and carefully observed a hole that was the size of an adult¡¯s head. He needed to first send away the owner of that voice before starting his work. However, before Cale could even say anything, the voice was even louder this time as they could no longer see Cale from outside the fence because he crouched down. The voice was shaking quite a bit. ¡°You¡¯re going to die! Don¡¯t do it!¡± Cale pressed his temples with his fingers. ¡°Sigh.¡± The number of people following him decreased the closer he got to the man-eating tree at the top of the hill, however, the owner of that voice continued to follow him. ¡®There are always nosy punks no matter where you go.¡¯ Cale frowned as he turned his head around. When he did, he noticed a girl who seemed to be around 10 years old, holding her younger brother¡¯s hand while looking at him. Her eyes were full of concern. Seeing that Cale was frowning and staring at her, the young girl stumbled on her words and started to mumble. ¡°It¡¯s a man-eating tree. You¡¯re going to d, die.¡± ¡°I won¡¯t die.¡± Cale took two breads out of the bag and threw it toward the little girl. It didn¡¯t matter if it rolled on the ground because they were all individually wrapped. ¡°Take that and get lost.¡± The young boy instantly grabbed the bread, but the young girl was still hesitating. In the end, Cale needed to use his identity. He stood up and pushed his head outside of the fence. ¡°You two don¡¯t know about Cale the trash?¡± The young girl¡¯s face turned pale. Her younger brother just looked toward Cale before picking up the other bread for his sister and started to tug on her arm. ¡°Noona.¡± ¡°Uh huh.¡± The young girl looked back and forth at the tree and Cale even as she was being pulled. ¡°You can¡¯t die.¡± Cale clicked his tongue at the young girl who continued to say that, before making sure nobody else was around as he sat down underneath the tree. Nobody would be able to see what he was doing unless they came right up to the fence. ¡°Let¡¯s get started.¡± He started by taking a loaf of bread out of the bag and putting it into that hole. His hand soon disappeared into the darkness underneath the tree, and Cale could feel a cold sensation as the bread in his hand disappeared. He felt like his whole hand might be sucked in, and quickly took it out. The darkness in the hole underneath the tree was still the same. ¡°If you die with a grudge, you have to resolve that grudge.¡± This man-eating tree wasn¡¯t actually a man-eating tree. It was a tree that would eat anything. It was the side effect of the power that was left behind by the person who starved to death. But for such a thing to be rted to an ancient strength...it wasical, but made it seem more realistic. ¡®I remember it said I need to feed it until the darkness disappears.¡¯ The darkness in the hole underneath the tree was not the result of shade. It was darkness formed by the grudge. This could not be done with other people. One person had to continue to provide arge amount of food until the darkness disappeared. Once the darkness finally disappears, the light that was hiding underneath would appear. Once he eats that light, the, ¡®Indestructible Shield,¡¯ will be Cale¡¯s. ¡°Eat all you want.¡± Cale put the opening of the bag into the hole and emptied all of the bread into it. In a normal situation, that small hole should have be filled with bread, however, only the darkness continued to remain once Cale removed the bag. ¡°I guess I¡¯ll need about ten morerge bags.¡± The darkness in the hole was slightly fainter than before. Ten bags. Only someone like Cale, with 3 million gallons as allowance, could casually say such a thing. Rumble- An odd cry seemed to resonate from the tree. It seemed to be saying that it was hungry and asking for more food. Cale felt like the darkness might suddenly reach out and grab him. ¡°...It is a bit scary.¡± Cale quickly got up. He felt like he should not be here for a long time. ¡°Just what can a stupid grudge do?¡± Gluttony was a scary thing. ¡°I¡¯lle back tomorrow.¡± Cale said goodbye to the rumbling tree as if it was a person and exited the fenced area. Cale noticed the siblings eating the bread as soon as he entered the slums. For someone who was iming that he should not go there because it was a man-eating tree, they seemed to be enjoying the breads. They must be liking the vor, because both of them seemed very happy. ¡°My my.¡± Cale snorted at the siblings before ignoring their gazes. However, their gazes were not on him, but on the bag that was filled with bread earlier but was now empty. They were probably curious. But what could they do? They couldn¡¯t do anything. These children were probably too scared to even go near the man-eating tree. However, it is always good to be on the safe side. It would be bad if they went up to the tree and put their head into the hole and got eaten. [The children of the slums have no fear. It was because they treasured a single grain of rice more than a deing their way. Death is always around them, so they do not fear death. They fear being hungry more than death.] It was something that was written in [The Birth of a Hero]. That was why Cale decided to speak to the pair of siblings. ¡°If you want to eat bread again tomorrow, don¡¯t say a thing.¡± The two siblings did not say anything. They were immediately following Cale¡¯s order. The young girl, who seemed hesitant earlier, put her hand on her brother¡¯s mouth and pretended to not see Cale. Cale smiled and thought that she was pretty smart, as he quickly left the slums. The people in the slums who knew Cale had gone to the top of the hill were looking at him wondering what crazy thing he was doing now, but Cale liked that kind of gaze. The people outside the slums looked at Cale weirdly as well, but Cale didn¡¯t care about these gazes. ¡°Ah, young master. You are back.¡± Once Cale returned to the tea shop, Billos greeted him pretty happily. ¡°Yes. Bring me a new cup of tea. A refreshing one this time.¡± Cale headed back to his seat on the third floor. It should have been pretty busy at this time, but there was nobody else on the third floor. They were all avoiding the trash of the Count¡¯s family. That was why Cale could rx. ¡°Here is your tea, young master. I also brought up some desserts.¡± ¡°Ah, great. Thanks.¡± Cale only continued to look toward the city gate as he took a sip of the tea. Billos observed Cale¡¯s face with an odd expression before he quietly left the third floor. It was weird to hear Cale thanking someone. Cale continued to order tea and desserts as he looked outside the window until the sky slowly turned orange and the sun set. He only got up when night arrived and it was dark outside. It was now time to go interact with the dangerous dude who wille from outside the wall. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 6: They Met (3) Chapter 6: They Met (3) 3Chapter 6: They Met (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist When does a person get more angry? Is it when they get hit by a strong straight or when they are hit five or six times by annoying jabs? It is, of course, thetter. Cale threw five jabs before he was hit. Which means, one jab should be okay. ¡°Are you heading out?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± There were not many people left in the tea shop. It was past 9pm. This was the time when there were more people in the bars than tea shops. Since this was the time that the people mining in the pits went to drink, the bar should be full of people. ¡°I look forward to your next visit, young master.¡± Cale nodded his head at Billos¡¯s statement. ¡°The tea was great.¡± Cale shared his observations with Billos. ¡°And the book was good even though I only got through half of it. I especially liked the main character whose abilities are appreciated and the way he grows.¡± In that instant, the corner of Billos¡¯s eyebrows frowned for a moment before returning to normal. His eyes were cloudy as he observed Cale. However, Cale did not notice, as he was trying to remember the contents of the book. He was too worried about Choi Han that he did not pay too much attention to it. However, it was still fun to read while having this sense of urgency in his heart. It might be an auto-setting from possessing the original Cale¡¯s body, but Cale was able to understand thenguage of this world, and had no issues reading and enjoying the book. A smile formed on Cale¡¯s face as he continued to speak to Billos, who was standing there with a nk expression on his face. ¡°Don¡¯t let anyone else read that book,so that I can read it whenever Ie.¡± This truly was the immature son of the Count, who was trying to monopolize someone else¡¯s property. Billos, the bastard son of a wealthy merchant guild might not like it, but what could he do? Cale was the son of the Count. ¡°Yes! I will reserve this book only for young master Cale!¡± However, Billos¡¯s response was different from what Cale expected. Billos smiled brightly as he urged Cale toe back soon. ¡°Pleasee again soon. I will be waiting for you.¡± ¡°Sure, whatever.¡± Cale didn¡¯t want to go, but had to leave to go meet Choi Han. Ring. The bell rang once more and it suddenly felt like the tea shop became louder once Cale left. However, it was even louder outside the tea shop than it was inside. Even though this territory was far from the capital, the fact that a lot of artists resided here and that they had a special product made it a popr location. These individuals, as well as the miners who were looking to rx after a long day in the mines, all were outte to drink. Cale walked that street alone. ¡®If you think about it, he really is a unique person.¡¯ Normally in fantasies or martial arts novels, the trash of the family tend to hang out with the gangsters or bad crowds. They drink, fool around with women, and cause a ruckus on the streets or stores. The funny thing was that Cale Henituse actually hated gangsters and scammers. In fact, he despised them. ¡®He thought that they were all scumbags.¡¯ The worst of all scumbags. It was better to at least be the citizens who worked hard even though there was no hopes for a better future. That was why he never beat people up when he was drunk but had no issues throwing things at the gangsters he saw. Well, attempted to throw things, since his aim when drunk was terrible. Maybe that was the reason. ¡®Aigoo, young master, you¡¯re here?¡± The owner of the bar was extremely afraid of Cale. It was because of that one day when Cale broke pretty much everything around where he was sitting to drink. In fact, Cale was probably number one on the cklist for Western City bars. He did not respond to the owner¡¯s greeting and just threw a gold coin at him. ¡°Bring a bottle of my usual. Oh, and roasted chicken breast. Don¡¯t put salt on it.¡± ¡°Excuse me? Y, you don¡¯t want to find a seat first?¡± Cale started to frown. The owner immediately waved his hands and bowed his head. ¡°Immediately! I will bring it immediately!¡± The owner was moving quickly, but it looked like he was smiling. It was because it looked like Cale was not nning on sitting down. Cale looked around the bar that became quiet once he walked in. Everyone was avoiding his gaze and turned their heads. It was like they were wondering why he had to choose this bar of all bars in the city. The gangsters and scammers in the bar were all extremely nervous right now. ¡°Tsk.¡± The sound of Cale clicking his tongue could be heard through the silence in the bar. ¡°Young master, here is the bottle you requested.¡± ¡°Great.¡± Cale grabbed the bottle and bag of chicken. It was the alcohol he drank often. It was probably the most expensive alcohol in this bar. He epted the bottle with no regret and left the bar. Cale immediately opened the bottle and drank about half of it as soon as he stepped out of the bar. ¡°Oh.¡± The alcohol tasted pretty good. Since Cale had a high tolerance to alcohol, it did not affect him at all to drink half of the bottle at once. He just flushed easily, making people think he was a lightweight. Cale quickly walked along with the bottle in his hand. He walked back past the tea shop he stayed in all day until he saw the guards stiffen up after seeing him. Seeing them acting like that made him want to go out of the gate, but unfortunately, that was not his destination. ¡°Ah, I¡¯m starting to get hot.¡± Cale felt himself heating up as he continued to drink. He walked a bit further until he reached the city wall not too far away. The tall city wall that started at the gate seemed to defend against any potential intruders. ¡®Well it depends on the person.¡¯ Cale recalled the information from the book. ¡®Approximately 100 steps from the city gate.¡¯ That was the location where Choi Han jumped over the city wall. Cale clenched the bottle in his hand as he quickly ran toward the location. There were not many people on the streets because it was the residential area. Cale took a deep breath once he arrived at the calcted location. Exactly 100 steps away from the city gate. It was a corner of the residential area so there wasn¡¯t any other light other than the torch the guards put on top of the wall, as well as the lightsing out of the residential windows. But that was enough light. Cale slowly approached his destination after letting his eyes adjust to the dark. ¡®Just as I expected.¡¯ He could see something curled up underneath the city wall. Actually, there were multiple things. Delicate looking things that were shaking because of the cold. Cale continued to walk toward the location. He could hear the voices of the curled up lifeforms. Meow Meeeeeow. Two cats were meowing as theyy curled up underneath the city wall. Cale started to smile. ¡®It¡¯s right here.¡¯ He found the right spot. The moment Choi Han jumps over the wall, a baby kitten is body mmed by the alpha cat of the neighborhood and gets sent tumbling to the city wall. Choi Han quickly twists his body to avoidnding on the kitten. This was a world where coincidences yed a big role. ¡®He really is a good guy.¡¯ Choi Han twists his ankle after unexpectedly twisting his body to avoid hurting the kitten. He had run like crazy to reach Western City after killing tens of people for the first time and burying the corpses of the vigers. His body had reached its limit making him unable tond properly after making such a movement. Meeeeow Meeeeeeow. Cale gazed at the kitten that was curled up and shaking, as well as the other kitten that seemed to be its sibling licking the shaking kitten. He then turned his gaze. He turned to look at one of the alleys that was close to where was standing. He could see him. ¡®I found him.¡¯ The man who was wincing in pain while looking like one of the homeless that lived in the slums. Cale could see the shaggy ck hair and the old and burnt clothes. ording to the novel, Cale and Choi Han would meet tomorrow. Tonight was the night Cale got drunk and got the scar on his side. Things were already different than in the novel, even though it was just minor details. Cale stood up as he had crouched down to look at the kittens. Choi Han must have felt his gaze from a few moments ago, as Choi Han slowly raised his head and his eyes focused on Cale through his shaggy ck hair. ¡®Damn it, I¡¯m shaking.¡¯ Cale could hear his heart going crazy. Although it was too dark to see clearly, Choi Han¡¯s eyes that Cale could see through his hair were extremely cold. Cale thought that it was a good idea that he chose to drink. Cale congratted himself for making such a smart decision and calmed himself down as much as possible. Jab. He needed tounch a jab and leave a good first impression. Cale took a deep breath as he started to speak to Choi Han who was staring at him. ¡°You look like you are hungry.¡± Tsk tsk. Cale clicked his tongue and took the chicken breast out of the bag. Then with an extremely gentle movement, Cale offered the roasted chicken breast not to Choi Han, but to the kittens. ¡°You poor things. Go ahead and eat it.¡± Cale didn¡¯t know that the kittens would be this small. He hope that they could still eat the chicken breast. Tsk. He clicked his tongue as he ripped the chicken breast into pieces so that the kittens could eat it better. He was wondering what the hell he was doing crouching here feeding these kittens. To be honest, Cale did not like cats. However, Choi Han treasured small animals. Grrooooowl. Groooooowl. The injured kitten must have understood Cale¡¯s dislike for cats, as it showed its teeth and started to growl, but Cale started to pet the kitten¡¯s silver fur as he looked into its golden eyes. The kitten must not have liked it, as it did its best to avoid Cale¡¯s hand. ¡°You poor things. Eat this and get better soon.¡± He didn¡¯t even look at Choi Han when he said that, however, he was thinking that Choi Han was definitely looking at him. ¡°Do you have somewhere to go?¡± He did not hear a response. However, Cale continued to speak. The guards would soone to patrol this area, and he needed to make a move before Choi Han started to limp away to avoid the guards. ¡°Or a ce to stay?¡± Cale petted the growling silver furred kitten with golden eyes and pushed away the red kitten that was trying to attack him as he asked. The red kitten kept trying to hit Cale for some reason. It¡¯s golden eyes, that matched its sibling¡¯s eyes, shined brightly even in the darkness. But Cale needed to focus on Choi Han. ¡°Are you hungry?¡± There still was no response. Cale had expected this. Choi Han was probably observing him right now, but he also probably wanted to rest. Both his body and mind had reached their limit. In addition, he had received a huge shock just the other day. For someone like Choi Han who had lived on his own without any human contact other than the vigers of that small vige, Western City waspletely foreign to him. He may have lived for tens of years already, but he was still young. ¡°Are you not going to say anything?¡± ¡°...Why are you talking to me?¡± Choi Han finally seemed to have decided that Cale was weak. Cale was weak enough that he could easily kill him even though he was at his limits. That was why Choi Han felt that it would be okay to ept Cale¡¯s goodwill even though he had no idea why Cale was being nice to him. Cale stood up and walked toward Choi Han. The guards would soone patrolling through this location. ¡°Hey.¡± He could see Choi Han¡¯s situation better once he got closer. He was a mess. However, maybe it was because he was the main character, but his eyes were clear. The ck hair and ck pupils that showed that Choi Han was Korean were actually quite nice to see. That was why Cale smiled as he casually spoke to Choi Han. ¡°Follow me. I¡¯ll feed you.¡± The best first impression was to be the one who provides delicious food. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 7: They Met (4) Chapter 7: They Met (4) 2Chapter 7: They Met (4) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Choi Han stopped leaning against the wall and pushed his body up. His body was leaning to his left probably because his right ankle was ufortable, but Cale did not help him or say anything about him. There was no reason to be any nicer to him than he had already been. Cale told Choi Han to follow him as he headed toward the Count¡¯s estate. However, an existence blocked his path. Meeeeeeeeow. The red furred golden eyed kitten ran toward Cale and rubbed its cheeks on Cale¡¯s shoes. Cale started to frown. He didn¡¯t like cats, but this one seemed pretty cute. However, he suddenly felt chills all over his body and turned around. Choi Han was staring at him. ¡®Damn it.¡¯ Cale awkwardly started to pet the kitten. ¡°It seems like it likes me. But I have to go. See you next time.¡± Cale never understood why people talked to animals. However, Cale, who had now be that person that was speaking to animals, quickly stood back up and walked away from the kitten. Grroooooowl. The silver furred golden-eyed kitten growled as if it was telling the red-furred kitten toe back while telling Cale to get lost. The red-furred kitten seemed to not want to go back as it continued to look back at Cale as it walked away. However, Cale did not turn back. Meow, meoooooooow. The sad cries of the kittens were getting farther away. Cale took a peek backwards. Choi Han was limping, but keeping up with him. They made eye contact once more. Cale flinched as he quickly turned his head back. He was walking slowly to make it easier for Choi Han to keep up. They passed the residential area and Cale took another sip of the alcohol. The bars. Market. za. They then passed the residences of the wealthy and finally arrived at the Count¡¯s estate located in the rear of the city. ¡°What are you doing?¡± Cale looked toward Choi Han, who had stopped moving. Choi Han must have seen how the soldiers greeted Cale, as well as how the citizens avoided him, on their way here. Choi Han was probably questioning whether it really would be easy to kill Cale. Cale asked once more. ¡°Are you not going toe?¡± As expected, Choi Han resumed walking. His reason for following Cale now was probably to get some information as well as to host the funeral for the vigers of Harris Vige. ¡°Y, young master?¡± As soon as Cale stood at the main entrance of the estate, the guards and knights stumbled over their words as they greeted him. ¡®Sigh. I wish they would stop with that y, young master business.¡¯ It was odd hearing them stumbling over their words every time. Since he possessed the body of a trash, he was trying his best to act like one. It was easier to be a trash young master than a noble young master. He was trying to make his life as easy as possible. Cale frowned at the guards¡¯ stumbling of words while the guards quickly opened the gate. ¡°Please head on in.¡± Cale turned back to look at Choi Han. The rest of them looked at Choi Han as well. They were probably curious about this beggar that followed their young master back. The knights observed Choi Han with suspicion in their eyes. ¡°Follow me.¡± Choi Han should know of Cale¡¯s status by now. He continued to limp as he approached Cale. Cale looked calm and turned back as soon as he saw that Choi Han was behind him and entered through the gate. But his heart was going crazy. ¡®I¡¯m sure he¡¯s thinking about taking me as a hostage if something dangerous happens. That is probably why he stood right behind me.¡¯ He was sure that Choi Han would not kill him. However, just thinking about being taken as hostage caused serious mental strain that Cale frowned as he looked at the two knights who were following them. ¡®Don¡¯t follow me.¡¯ The knights flinched at Cale¡¯s clear order. They looked back and forth between Cale and Choi Han before one of the knights approached Choi Han and Cale with a stiff expression on his face. The knights cared about their creed more than anything else. It was fitting of the knights that Deruth treasured. ¡®Well, I guess they have to act like this to be good knights.¡¯ Cale was satisfied at the knight¡¯s response to this beggar-like foreigner and left the knight alone to follow them. He just led Choi Han to the entrance of the Count¡¯s residence. ¡°Young master, you¡¯re back.¡± ¡°...Yes, Ron.¡± This scary old man. He had been waiting for Cale outside the door. Cale didn¡¯t expect him to really be waiting. Cale was scared, but thought that it was actually for the better. Ron¡¯s gaze turned toward Choi Han, and his benign smile suddenly stiffened. ¡®Ron should be at a level where he can estimate Choi Han¡¯s strength.¡¯ Choi Han also stared back at Ron. Cale didn¡¯t care what kind of attacks they were sending each other through their eyes and did what he needed to do. He was not done just yet. ¡°Follow me.¡± Cale called out to Choi Han once more and started to walk. The servant, Ron, quickly followed Cale. ¡°Young master, what is going on? I will take care of this guest if you tell me what is needed.¡± ¡°No need.¡± Someone else approached Cale as Ron was speaking. ¡°Young master. You returned after drinking today.¡± It was the deputy butler Hans. ¡®Ah, he was responsible for me.¡¯ Cale clicked his tongue and ignored Hans¡¯s statement. Instead, he lifted up the alcohol bottle and pointed toward Hans. It was at that moment. ¡°Aaack!¡± Hans covered his face with both of his arms as he curled up. Silence filled the air. ¡°Tsk.¡± Cale clicked his tongue and Hans looked up with a facepletely red from embarrassment as he looked back at Cale. ¡°Put this away.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Hans received the alcohol bottle from Cale with a nk expression on his face. ¡°I will actually throw it at you next time.¡± Hans turned pale at Cale¡¯s words. Cale did not seem to care at all as he continued to walk. With the inclusion of Hans, there were now a total of four people following him. Cale peeked every so often to make sure they were following him properly and arrived at his destination. Kitchen #2. Cale pushed the door open as soon as he saw the sign. ¡°Young master?¡± He could hear Hans¡¯s confused voice behind him. However, there was a thick smile on Cale¡¯s face. The end was near. Now, Beacrox and Choi Han will meet. Cale¡¯s heart was beating fast. The door easily opened. Cale¡¯s expression stiffened at the scene in front of him inside the door. ng. ng. Second Chef Beacrox was smiling while sharpening his de. He seemed to be enjoying himself while sharpening his de all alone in kitchen #2. However, that smile disappeared as soon as he saw Cale. That was why Cale was scared. It was always scary to deal with lunatics. You never knew what crazy things a lunatic would do. Cale made a move before Beacrox could respond. He put a hand on Choi Han¡¯s shoulder and pointed at him. ¡°Give him something to eat.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Beacrox asked with a stiff expression on his face. The sharp de in his hand was shining as it reflected the light. Cale calmed his shaking heart as he said it once more. ¡°Give him something to eat. He¡¯s hungry.¡± Ho. The knight let out a shocked noise from the back, but Cale did not have the time to pay attention to that right now. He waited for Beacrox¡¯s response with anxiety. Finally, Beacrox answered with a stiff expression still on his face. ¡°I will do as you instructed, young master.¡± It was done. Beacrox and Choi Han. And even Ron, someone that he did not expect. The three of them were connected now. A bright smile formed on Cale¡¯s face. He could finally rx as he gave Beacrox another order with a slightly higher tone. ¡°Also prepare something for me. I¡¯m hungry.¡± Cale thought about the steak fromst night¡¯s dinner. ¡°Your steakst night was the best. You are a great chef.¡± The tip of Beacrox¡¯s knife slightly shook. ¡°Something like that steak would be a wonderful meal. Prepare it quickly.¡± Cale turned around without waiting for Beacrox¡¯s response. He then left the kitchen and headed towards his chamber. The knight and Hans followed him, and Hans quickly asked. ¡°What should I do about that guest?¡± ¡°I guess he is my guest. You take care of it.¡± Since he connected the three of them, he didn¡¯t want to deal with anything else for today. Beacrox and Ron should be able to tell Choi Han¡¯s strength. In the novel, Beacrox originally swears his loyalty to Choi Han because of his strength, so he should pledge his loyalty after figuring out Choi Han¡¯s strength this time too. Of course, Cale had some other ns in the case that Beacrox was unable to determine Choi Han¡¯s strength. All Cale had to do was make Choi Han beat someone or something up, without it being him. Oh, and Beacrox had to be there to watch. Even if it might have some holes, Cale had thought about a lot of different things. ¡°Hans. Stop annoying me and just bring the meal over to my chamber when it¡¯s ready.¡± As expected, Ron did not follow him. Cale left the knight and Hans outside his chamber door as he closed the door andid down on the bed. He was happy. His exhaustion and the alcohol made him fall asleep before the food ever showed up. That was why he did not know that Beacrox¡¯s cooking knife shed toward Choi Han¡¯s neck and that Ron¡¯s sharp dagger was flung toward Choi Han¡¯s heart. Of course, both of their attacks had failed. Well, this was actually a situation that nobody, other than the three involved individuals, would know about. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 8: Picked It Up (1) Chapter 8: Picked It Up (1) 2Chapter 8: Picked It Up (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Late at night. Deputy butler Hans had to stand in front of Count Deruth. He started to make his report while Deruth quietly listened until he was finished. ¡°He is currently sleeping in his room.¡± Hans finally finished his report and Deruth started to speak. ¡°The driver reported that he went to the Flynn Merchant Guild¡¯s illegitimate son''s tea shop. Today, he brought a young man whose identity we cannot verify. In terms of drinking, he only drank a little bit and kept a clear head.¡± Hans¡¯s report was short, but Deruth found that short report interesting. ¡°Should we put a tail on him?¡± He waved his hand to oppose Hans¡¯s question. He didn¡¯t want to know what his son was doing on the outside to the point he would put a tail on him. ¡°No need. As long as he is in the city, anything he does is under my authority to handle.¡± Deruth cherished Hans the most out of all the young deputy butlers. It was because he fulfilled orders well and was a good person. ¡°Do what you have been doing in terms of observing Cale inside the house and reporting what you see.¡± ¡°I understand.¡± Hans did not say anything else as he bowed his head. Deruth. He was someone who did not have any special abilities nor any solidworks. However, just like the previous Count, he was able to rule over the Henituse territory and grow his wealth by selling marble and wine. He was someone who was able to protect his territory properly. ¡®Cale has changed.¡¯ Cale felt different than normal. It wasn¡¯t that he suddenly got smarter or stronger, but that his actions were clearly different from before. ¡°Ah, Hans.¡± ¡°Yes, Count-nim?¡± ¡°Bring me some information about the Flynn Merchant Guild.¡± Tea shop owner, Billos. Deruth knew about this bastard son of the Flynn Merchant Guild. This was because the Henituse¡¯srgest trading partner for wine was the Flynn Merchant Guild. ¡°I will get right on it.¡± ¡°Great.¡± Deruth watched Hans walk out of his office as he started to think. There was a lot of things for him to think about other than the change in Cale¡¯s demeanor. The atmosphere around the continent was dangerous. It was like a volcano right before it erupts. Deruth could clearly feel the dangerous atmosphere despite the fact that he was in the corner of the kingdom. It was because he was always receiving an endless amount of information about it. But the message from the Imperial Court that he received today made Deruth even more certain about the current atmosphere of the continent. The former Counts of the Henituse territory always passed on a single piece of advice to the next in power. ¡®There is no need to be recorded in history. Just live for peace and happiness.¡¯ ¡°I guess I need to reinforce the city walls.¡± He may not be a good fighter, but Deruth was always thinking about ways to protect himself and his family. There are times when the body is stronger than the mind. ¡°Young master, you were sleeping so soundly that I did not wake you up.¡± Cale had slept in. The fact that Ron brought lemonade instead of cold water again made things even worse. However, Cale could not say anything about it. It was because there was a bandage around Ron¡¯s neck. ¡°Are you hurt?¡± ¡°...Are you worrying about me?¡± ¡°No. It¡¯s just annoying to look at.¡± ¡°It is nothing much. I was just scratched by a cat¡¯s w.¡± Is a, ¡®cat,¡¯ another reference to an innocent person? Cale was sure that someone would have had their fated meetingst night. He avoided the gaze of Ron, who was smiling, and headed toward the chamber''s window. He needed to move faster because he slept in.'' ¡°Will you be heading out right away?¡± ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll take care of everything on my own outside.¡± ¡°I understand. Oh, young master.¡± Cale let go of the door handle and turned to look at Ron. Ron had an odd smile on his face. ¡°What do you think about the lemonade?¡± ¡°Great. It¡¯s delicious.¡± Ron¡¯s voice became an octave lower. ¡°...Is that so?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡®What kind of question was that?¡¯ Since Ron was someone he could not ignore, Cale just answered the question as nicely as possible while opening the door. m. He then quickly closed it right back. ¡°...Ron.¡± Ron approached Cale at his calling and whispered with a smile on his face. ¡°Young master, were you surprised? Your guest from yesterday is waiting for you outside.¡± Cale was surprised. Cale had seen Choi Han staring at him as soon as he opened the door, which caused him to close the door in shock. His hand headed to the inner pocket of his shirt. The 10 million gallons in his pocket calmed him down. Ron gazed toward Cale as he continued to speak. ¡°I didn¡¯t have a chance to tell you because you opened the door right away. I told him to waitfortably in his room, but he insisted that he needed to see you and waited outside the door.¡± ¡®Didn¡¯t have a chance to tell me my ass.¡¯ Cale could not say anything to this terrible old man who definitely had the chance but chose not to tell him. Cale moved a step away from Ron as he opened the door again. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± Cale pretended like he never mmed the door as he started to chat with Choi Han. He was paying attention to Choi Han¡¯s appearance as he asked. After taking a shower, fixing his hair, and wearing new clothes, a pure and clean feeling wasing from Choi Han. However, it was difficult to think like that after seeing his eyes. Choi Han was still in a twisted state. That was why looking at his eyes made Cale feel a bit scared. Choi Han was also staring back at Cale before finally starting to speak. ¡°Pay you back.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± ¡°I will pay you back for the meal.¡± Choi Han was speaking formally unlike yesterday. More importantly, Cale started to frown at the words, ¡®pay you back.¡¯ ¡®Pay me back? Is he trying to make me have a heart attack?¡¯ Who in their right mind would use Choi Han for manualbor? Cale just wanted Choi Han to get out of this city as soon as possible. Of course, Choi Han would agree to help Cale out if he said it was to pay him back. He was that kind of person. However, Cale didn¡¯t have anything he needed from Choi Han. ¡°No need. Is there anything else you need?¡± He quickly rejected Choi Han¡¯s offer and asked if there was anything else he needed. Choi Han started to observe Cale even more closely. That gaze made Cale think about how Cale got beaten to a pulp in the novel, and his arms started to develop goosebumps. Choi Han started to speak at that point. ¡°There is something I would like to request for your help.¡± Cale closed his eyes at the word, ¡®help.¡¯ He did not want to get involved with Choi Han. The, ¡®help,¡¯ that Choi Han would ask about could be nothing other than something regarding Harris Vige. The Cale in the novel called the vigers of Harris Vige useless and ended up getting beaten up because of it. Cale thought about that as he opened his mouth. ¡°Tell Hans your request. He will take care of everything.¡± After opening his eyes again, Cale made eye contact with Choi Han, who was standing there as still as a statue. ¡°He is a talented deputy butler. He will be able to help you out with almost any normal request.¡± Cale then put a hand on Ron¡¯ shoulder. He could feel Ron flinch, but Cale decided to get both of them out of his sight at the same time. ¡°Ron here is pretty useful as well. He will also be able to help you out. Ron, he is my guest. Make sure to take proper care of whatever he needs.¡± Cale also gave Ron an order before moving his hand off of Ron¡¯s shoulder. He then heard Choi Han calling out to him. ¡°But you don¡¯t even know who I am.¡± Cale turned around to look. He could see Choi Han still observing him. The scary feeling emitting from him had disappeared, and Cale could only feel an unexinable puritying from Choi Han. ¡°Why do I need to know who you are? Is there a reason to help someone who does not have as much as I have?¡± Choi Han started to frown a bit at Cale¡¯s words. It was very faint, but Cale, who had been closely observing Choi Han, definitely saw it. ¡®Is he annoyed that I said someone who does not have as much as I do?¡¯ Cale quickly continued on. ¡°Based on your situation, I doubt you¡¯ll ask for something difficult. Well, if it is something difficult, I¡¯m sure Hans will know where to draw the line.¡± He pushed Ron toward Choi Han as he turned away from the two of them. ¡°Then goodbye. I have a lot of things to do.¡± Cale quickly headed toward his father Deruth¡¯s office. He needed to get arge amount of allowance today. He could hear Ron¡¯s voiceing from his behind him. ¡°Young master, I will do as youmanded.¡± ¡®I don¡¯t care whether you do or do not.¡¯ Frying and stirring was for them to do as the main characters, not Cale. Wouldn¡¯t they get closer to each other faster since they met four days earlier thanks to him? Ron looked toward Cale, who was moving away from both of them, before looking down at the empty cup in his hands. ¡°Interesting.¡± That fearless puppy did not like sour things. He still did not like it. However, he now drank it. Ron touched his neck. He had been hurt for the first time in a long time, but something more interesting than the injury kept nagging at him. The fearless puppy was scared of him. Does he know something? ¡°Lead the way.¡± Ron turned his gaze toward the source of the voice. He could see Choi Han looking at him with disgust. This punk seemed to have figured out that he was someone who has killed after their short sparst night. ¡°Sure.¡± This punk, who also gave off a simr scent of blood, was pretending to be clean. Ron found it funny that such a twisted punk was acting that way. This punk, that they metst night, gave off the violent, disgusting, and murderous aura of the Forest of Darkness. It was an aura that Ron and Beacrox could instantly tell apart from other auras. Of course, that murderous aura was not Choi Han¡¯s own. Choi Han had gotten that aura from the assassins he had killed, and now that he had showered and cleaned up, the murderous aura was no longer surrounding him. ¡®I guess there is no way those people would cross over.¡¯ Ron thought about the events ofst night as he started to talk to the boy who seemed to have gone through a lot in the past few days. ¡°Follow me.¡± Ron started to walk in order to follow his puppy young master¡¯s order, and Choi Han followed behind him. Choi Han¡¯s gaze momentarily headed toward Cale¡¯s direction before turning back to Ron. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 9: Picked It Up (2) Chapter 9: Picked It Up (2) 1Chapter 9: Picked It Up (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale held a bag that was twice the size of yesterday¡¯s bag as he headed back up to the top of the slums. The two siblings were there to greet him once again. The children kept their mouth shut as they looked toward Cale. Cale smiled as he took out two small bags and pushed them toward the children. ¡°Take it.¡± The young girl slowly approached him. Cale frowned as he watched the girl with coarse grey hair approach him. She had a hand on her side as she limped over to him. ¡°Hey.¡± Cale pushed the two bags toward the young boy. ¡°Youe here and take it.¡± The young boy quickly rushed over and snatched the bags before quickly running back. Compared to Cale¡¯s bright red hair, the boy had coarse dark red hair that shook as he ran. Cale then turned around and headed toward the man-eating tree. ¡°Wow.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not bread. It¡¯s meat and cake.¡± He could hear the siblings talking about the food, but he did not care. He continued to walk toward the man-eating tree¡¯s territory. Oooooooooooooong- ¡°...It¡¯s a bit scary.¡± The ck tree without any leaves seemed to be moving its branches to wee Cale. This eerie feeling made Cale nervous, but he still poured the contents of the bag into the hole underneath the tree. The bread quickly disappeared. It was at that moment. ¡°...More, give me more.¡± ¡®...It¡¯s driving me crazy.¡¯ The response he read about in the novel showed up. It was the voice of a weak girl. Yes, the person who starved to death was a priestess who served a god. However, unlike the present day priestesses of the temples or churches, the ancient priestesses were shamans. The majority of the ancient shamans could be considered people who had superpowers or natural forces under theirmand. Cale quickly grabbed the bag and started to move. ¡®Cale,e to my study tonight.¡¯ That was what his father, Deruth, had said to Cale when he went to get some allowance. That was why he had to leave here before evening at thetest. ¡®Half.¡¯ He came here with the intention of taking care of half of the gluttony of the tree today. He went back down the hill to get more bread. He could see the two siblings looking at him with cake on their lips. ¡°Tsk.¡± Cale frowned and clicked his tongue as he walked past the two siblings. Cale then walked to the street where there were a lot of bakeries. He had already swept the stock of the bakery he went to yesterday this morning, so it would take them some time to restock. That was why he needed to look for another bakery. It was at that moment. ¡°Y, young master.¡± A woman¡¯s voice made Cale turn his head. A middle-aged woman smiled awkwardly as she pointed to her shop. Her hand was shaking and she was full of fear, but she still had some confidence. ¡°We have a lot of bread.¡± Cale started to smile. Now this was a woman who knew how to do business. The other vendors were peeking their way while looking at what was going on. Cale threw her a gold coin and the woman quickly picked it up. ¡°Give me everything you have. Pack it quickly.¡± In that instant, the smile on the middle-aged woman¡¯s face grew wider. She instantly went into the store and immediately came back out with arge bag full of bread. She had already packed it all up in advance. ¡°Here it is, young master.¡± ¡®Wow. She really is a good merchant.¡¯ This was someone who knew how to make money. ¡°I can also prepare some more.¡± Cale liked this woman even more. However, at that instant... ¡°Young master! We can make even more bread than that!¡± An old man across the street raised his hand as he rushed over. He was wearing a baker¡¯s uniform. Cale liked his fitting outfit and threw a gold coin to him as well. ¡°I will head to your shop next. Have a bag ready.¡± ¡°Thank you very much!¡± Cale was amazed by these vendors. They were still afraid of him because of his identity as the trash of the Count¡¯s family, but they had no issuesing up to him to make some easy money. It was probably because they knew that Cale did not hit anybody who was not a gangster, but he still could see why the Henituse territory was doing so well. The fact that Cale had spent a gold coin to buy a bag of bread yesterday had already spread like wildfire. 1 million gallons. The others gasped at the week¡¯s worth of profit while their eyes started to sparkle. ¡®I can go around to those three ces tomorrow to get bread.¡¯ Since he gave each of them a gold coin, he should be able to get another bag from them tomorrow. Cale was happy that things were going so smoothly. However, there was someone who was watching him from afar. ¡°Hmm.¡± It was the chef, Beacrox. Just like his father, he had a bandage around his neck, and he was watching Cale from behind a corner. He just watched Cale buy the bag of bread and some medicinal herbs before heading back to the slums. ¡°...Did he go crazy?¡± Cale seemed like he had gone crazy since yesterday. Beacrox had never cared about Cale, even when his father had said that Cale was an interesting kid, but, the more he saw, the more he started to agree. It felt like it would be just as fun to watch Cale as it was to watch the ck-haired punk. Beacrox¡¯s eyes started to sparkle. Billos, the owner of the tea shop with the highest view, took a sip of his tea as he received his subordinate¡¯s report. ¡°Young master Cale is going in and out of the slums?¡± ¡°Yes, Billos-nim.¡± ¡°I see.¡± ¡°We also receivedmunication from the capital.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Billos¡¯s round eyes, that were hard to see because of his fat, opened widely. The subordinate flinched for a moment before continuing his report. ¡°Yes. It mentioned that the crown will soon gather people. That is why they wish for Billos-nim to return and get to work.¡± nk. Billos put the teacup on the table as he motioned with his chin. ¡°You can head out now.¡± The subordinate quickly moved into the shadows and disappeared. Billos stared at the spot his subordinate was standing in as one corner of his lips twisted upward. ¡°Do they think I will be their dog and watch the house again?¡± His gaze headed out of the window. It felt like his gaze could reach the far away capital. ¡°This, this isn¡¯t bread. Isn¡¯t bread.¡± ¡°And?¡± Seeing the young girl who was mumbling, ¡®isn¡¯t bread,¡¯ over and over as she held the medicinal herbs in her hand, Cale just snorted as he headed back to the man-eating tree. However, the young boy got in his way. ¡°You cannot die.¡± It was the young boy saying he cannot die now. Cale did not even frown as he just walked past the young boy. Cale, no, Kim Rok Soo. He was an orphan and didn¡¯t have anything to his name. That was why there were a lot of people who showed the poor Kim Rok Soo a lot of sympathy. ¡®Is there a reason to show sympathy for the needy?¡¯ That was something he heard all the time when he was younger. ¡®Young beggar.¡¯ ¡®Poor orphan.¡¯ ¡®You don¡¯t need a reason to show sympathy.¡¯ There was a time he just took that at face value, but he started to understand the real meaning of it as he got older. There wasn¡¯t a logical reason for the things your heart draws you to do. You didn¡¯t need a reason. ¡°So annoying.¡± Cale hated to see young children being hurt. However, he didn¡¯t have any thoughts about nursing the young girl nor thoughts of consoling her. He frowned toward the young girl who was limping toward him and the young boy next to her as he answered them. ¡°I won¡¯t die.¡± The siblings finally stopped following him once he said that. Cale was unhappy at the thought that he did something he hated the most. He hated people who got involved in other people¡¯s business without being asked, but he had done just that by giving the young girl the medicinal herbs. Oooooooooooong. -More, give me more. ¡°Yes. Eat it all.¡± Cale dumped the whole bag into the man-eating tree without caring about how itnded. He was not afraid. The bread instantly disappeared into the darkness that was now too light to be called darkness. Cale could now see a new grey light. However, it would only seem grey to him. ¡®I guess it is paying off for the money I spent.¡¯ Cale poured the other bag of bread into the hole as he headed back home. He didn¡¯t see the siblings anymore, but that was better for Cale. However, he saw the two struggling cats on his way back home and flinched. ¡®It¡¯s the cats from yesterday. They shouldn¡¯t remember me, right?¡¯ Silver fur and golden eyes, dark red fur and golden eyes. The two cats did not even meow as they stared at Cale. Cale did not want to cause a scene, and just looked away as he headed back home. He then heard something from his father that almost made him faint. ¡°... Could you please say that one more time.¡± ¡°Yes. Cale.¡± Basen was standing next to Cale as well. The story of the Henituse family that was not mentioned in the novel was happening in front of Cale¡¯s eyes. ¡°You shall go to the capital as our family¡¯s representative.¡± Cale could feel a headacheing. ¡°Originally, Basen was supposed to go. However, you are the first born of our family.¡± Cale just opened and closed his mouth repeatedly as he watched Count Deruth sitting there with a gentle smile. Going to visit the crown at such a time. Cale was quickly thinking about the contents of ¡®The Birth of a Hero¡¯ as Deruth continued to speak. ¡°The crown is hosting a big event, and the noble families of each territory have been invited to gather. It will be your first time to go visit the crown, but Basen has been going to simr functions for thest two years. However, I am hoping for you to go this time.¡± Big event hosted by the crown. That made Cale think about a single incident. The za Terror Incident. A secret organizationmits a terrorist act when many of the citizens of the capital are gathered in one ce. Our hero Choi Han is the one who manages to block about half of their plot. That would be the fourth time that Choi Han and the secret organization woulde into contact with each other. As a result, Choi Han is able to save a lot of the citizens at the za and bes connected with the crown prince. They then quickly develop a friendship with each other. Cale suddenly got the chills. Since the novel described the event from Choi Han¡¯s point of view, it did not talk much about the gathering of the nobles. All it mentioned was that Choi Han gains some party members before and after the incident, as well as the strong backing of the crown prince. But he had to go to the scene of that terrorist attack? Of course, he did not know whether the nobles would gather in the za as well. Cale started to recall the information in ¡®The Birth of a Hero. [Tons of people were gathered in the za. The tform was still empty. It was for the royal family that would soon arrive. Choi Han could see some other people who looked like they held important positions. However, more important to Choi Han, was the fact that a lot of citizens, young, old, male, female, were gathered here. Choi Han¡¯s heart started to beat faster. He did not want to see a group of innocent people dying ever again.] Would people who looked like they held important positions include the nobles? Cale turned to look at Basen even as his father was continuing to speak. Basen stood there stoically, looking at his father without giving Cale a single nce. ¡®Deruth said Basen normally goes to events like this. Should I tell him to go?¡¯ Cale¡¯s mouth continued to repeatedly open and close. He did not want to go to a dangerous area. However, he could not bring himself to say Basen¡¯s name. A rtionship that was neither good nor bad. That was the rtionship between the original Cale and Basen. Basen found Cale to be difficult, but that was it. Cale¡¯s mind started to getplicated. Would Cale have gone in the story? There was no way Deruth would send the trash to the capital. Just why was he trying to send him then? Cale was wondering if he had done something wrong to have caused this to happen. ¡°You will leave in five days.¡± Five dayster. Hearing Deruth say that, Cale knew that the Cale in the novel had not gone to the capital. In the novel, he was beaten to a pulp by Choi Han four dayster and carried into the Count¡¯s estate. There was no way he could go to the capital in that condition. ¡°Cale. Before Basen started to do it, you had participated in all of these ceremonies. Think back on those times and have a rxed journey.¡± ¡°Father.¡± Deruth looked toward Cale at his calling. Basen slowly turned to look at his older brother as well. ¡°I am a bit anxious because of this sudden development. I have not gone to any of these since two years ago. I don¡¯t understand why I would suddenly have to go. Please let me think about it.¡± Deruth agreed and told his two sons that they could leave. The siblings quickly left the study. Cale was busy thinking about all sorts of things. If Cale threw a fit and caused a scene, Deruth would probably send Basen, but that would leave a bitter taste in his mouth. It was at that moment. ¡°Hyung-nim.¡± Cale could hear his young brother, Basen¡¯s voice. Cale turned his head. He could see Basen still stoically walking without looking at him. The 15 year old Basen always talked like this without ever making eye contact. ¡°Hyung-nim, there is no reason you cannot go.¡± Sigh. Cale let out a sigh. Basen did not even look at Cale as he left the study and headed to his own room. Cale stared at Basen for a long time. ¡°...It¡¯s not supposed to go like this.¡± Cale had been pushed out of the sessor spot. Cale could not stop acting like trash even when his younger brother t out acted like he was the family¡¯s sessor since two years ago. He was the joke of the family. That was why there were a lot of reasons he should not go as the family representative to the crown¡¯s summon. However, Basen was saying that there were no reasons not to go to the event. Basen was saying that there were enough reasons for Cale to go as the family representative. ¡®Things will beplicated like this.¡¯ Cale stated to frown. He did not like how things were going. But the other problem was... ¡®It¡¯s worth a shot.¡¯ He thought it was worth going through the events that were about toe up. The reason was that the chances of Caleing back without dying or getting hurt were pretty high. ¡®It will also make it difficult for me if Basen dies without being able to take the Count position.¡¯ In order for Cale to live a peaceful life, Basen needed to survive. There was still their youngest sister, Lily, but she was too young. Furthermore, Cale needed to head out of Western City after taking the ancient power located at the man-eating tree in order to take some other ancient powers located outside the Henituse territory. The scale inside Cale¡¯s mind started to tilt. He started to stare at deputy butler Hans who was heading his way. Hans¡¯s expression was intense, but not dark. He seemed to be a bit bitter, but his eyes were clear. ¡°Young master, the request that your guest has asked for-¡± ¡°Hans.¡± Cale cut him off as he said something else. ¡°Bring that guest here.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Cale was not going to be pushed around. If he was going to have to move, he might as well do it in a way that was mostfortable for him and in a way that was most beneficial for him. ¡°Ah, if he doesn¡¯t want toe, just tell him this.¡± Based on Hans¡¯s expression, Cale was certain that Choi Han¡¯s issue was settled properly. In the novel, Count Deruth gave a proper funeral for the vigers and took care of everything even after Choi Han beat Cale to a pulp. That shouldn¡¯t have changed at all. ¡°Payment.¡± ¡°Pardon?¡± ¡°Tell him toe because a way for him to pay me back hase up.¡± If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 10: Picked It Up (3) Chapter 10: Picked It Up (3) 2Chapter 10: Picked It Up (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Deputy butler Hans immediately ordered another servant to call Choi Han over. ¡°Where is he right now?¡± ¡°Ah, he is with Ron in chef Beacrox¡¯s kitchen.¡± Cale¡¯s heart jumped as he walked into the study. Were the three of them getting along as expected? ¡°Based on what I¡¯ve been told, he is learning how to cook basic dishes from chef Beacrox.¡± ¡°Cooking?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± One corner of Cale¡¯s lips went up. ¡®Cooking my ass.¡¯ They were calling it, ¡®cooking,¡¯ but he was probably learning about torturing or Beacrox and Ron were admiring Choi Han¡¯s sword skill. Cale didn¡¯t need to see it to know the truth. Cale naturally walked over and sat down at his desk. He then casually asked Hans, who was idly standing in the corner. ¡°What did he ask for?¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Hans seemed shocked at Cale¡¯s sudden words, before quickly putting on a serious expression and started to report. It was the information Cale expected it to be. Hans could not hide his sorrow and disappointment while sharing about what happened to Harris Vige, and had gone to the Count with Choi Han to deliver the Vige Chief¡¯s que that Choi Han brought. ¡°Father met with him?¡± ¡°Yes. The Count immediately ordered for a funeral and will be sending inspectors, knights, and soldiers to investigate.¡± Mm. Hans stopped for a moment and hesitated before continuing to speak. ¡°However, the guest has indicated he will not be going back with us.¡± Hans recalled meeting the Count with Choi Han, as Choi Han exined the situation to the Count. Choi Han was speaking normally, but the tips of his fingers were shaking. It was then that Hans found out that Choi Han was 17 years old. He was able to keep his life because he happened to be searching for medicinal herbs on his own at the time of the massacre, but he still had to watch his neighbors and friends all being killed at such a young age. Just how much shock would he have received? ¡°Will that be okay?¡± That was why Hans had asked Cale. Will it be okay for him to not say his final farewell? ¡°It is his decision.¡± Cale answered Hans¡¯s question and changed the topic. He already knew why Choi Han did not want to return. He had already said his goodbye as he buried them. All that was left was to get his revenge on the people that took their future away. ¡°Has Ron been taking care of him?¡± ¡°Yes. He has made sure that the guest eats every meal. He has also been very friendly with him.¡± The three of them did indeed seem to be getting along. ¡°Ah.¡± Hans seemed to have remembered something as he continued to speak. ¡°Mr. Ron seems to have hurt himself while working again. He had bandages around his wrist.¡± ¡°Really? Make sure to give him some medicine.¡± ¡®He probably killed someone again.¡¯ That was what Cale was thinking. He heard Hans¡¯s voice at that time. ¡°...I will make sure to deliver young master¡¯s words and feelings to Mr. Ron.¡± ¡°Sure, whatever.¡± Hans opened his mouth to say something as he looked at Cale¡¯s nonchnt expression, but a different noise filled the study. Knock Knock Knock Choi Han had arrived. Hans opened the door, and Cale could see Choi Han standing outside. Cale waved his hand to send Hans away, and Hans bowed his head as he quietly exited the study. Only Cale and Choi Han were left in the room. Cale kept the desk between them as he pointed at the chair across from him. ¡°Come sit down.¡± Choi Han slowly looked around the study as he sat down on the chair. Cale gave him enough time to look around the study. Like a typical pure and smart hero, Choi Han liked books. That was why the first thing he did aftering out of the Forest of Darkness and arriving in Harris Vige was to learn how to read from the Chief. After looking around for a long time, Choi Han¡¯s gaze finallynded on Cale. ¡°What is the payment?¡± ¡®Getting right to the point.¡¯ Cale smiled looking at how Choi Han didn¡¯t beat around the bush. Payment. Choi Han was thorough when it came to debts he owed. Cale, Kim Rok Soo, realized that he had changed the contents of the beginning of ¡®The Birth of a Hero.¡¯ He could see that even more things would change because of it. That was why he was trying his best to not change too many things, but... He had to go to the capital. Then even more things will change. Cale put a piece of paper on the desk as he looked toward Choi Han. ¡°There is a way for you to pay back for the meal, but I need to first determine whether you will be capable of doing it. In simple terms, this is an interview.¡± ¡°Please go ahead.¡± Choi Han immediately agreed to Cale¡¯s talk of checking his qualifications. Cale started to ask. ¡°Do you know how to protect people?¡± ¡°... What do you mean?¡± Choi Han flinched for the first time and asked after a moment. Cale¡¯s gaze started to turn sharp. He was looking at the piece of paper on the desk and not at Choi Han. Although he had to quickly change the n, it might bring him more gains than before. He could prevent Choi Han¡¯s party from getting the ancient powers while taking the ones that he needs for himself. Those powers were useless to them anyway. Cale kept his gaze on the paper as he continued to speak. ¡°Simple. Are you capable of protecting people instead of killing people?¡± Silence filled the room. Choi Han did not have an answer. Cale removed his gaze from the paper and looked at the person sitting on the chair. Choi Han was sitting there with his head down, but eventually answered. ¡°I am not sure.¡± Tsk. Cale clicked his tongue. This was why it was dangerous to provoke Choi Han right now. ¡°But you can kill someone?¡± The answer came easily this time. ¡°Absolutely.¡± ¡°Then you should be able to protect people as well.¡± Choi Han¡¯s eyes shook for a moment. ¡°That is difficult.¡± ¡°But difficult does not mean impossible.¡± There were not many things in the world you could avoid because it was difficult. The life that Cale had lived was like that. That was why he was so happy to possess the body of a trash like Cale who could do whatever he wants. But, unfortunately, there was now a mountain he needed to first climb in order to have that damn peaceful future. Cale was looking for someone to climb and flip that mountain for him. Choi Han had a bitter smile on his face. ¡°I guess that¡¯s true.¡± ¡°Yes, it is. Now the final interview question.¡± ¡°Yes. Please ask.¡± Cale looked into Choi Han¡¯s firm gaze as he asked thest question. ¡°What is your name?¡± ¡°You don¡¯t know my name?¡± ¡®Of course, I do. You¡¯re the person who was going to beat me up.¡¯ ¡°I have heard from other people, but I want to hear it directly from you.¡± ¡°Choi Han.¡± Choi Han reached his hand out. ¡°My name is Choi Han.¡± Cale shook Choi Han¡¯s hand. ¡°Great. I am Cale Henituse.¡± The short conversation called an interview quickly finished. Of course, it was a passing grade. Cale pushed the paper on the desk toward Choi Han. ¡°The way you can pay me back is simple.¡± There were two names written on the paper. It also indicated where he would meet them. ¡°Go to the capital with these people.¡± These were the party members Choi Han would meet on his way to the capital. Beacrox and these two people would grow and get strong with Choi Han until volume 5. Rosalyn and Lock. One was the princess of a neighboring kingdom who was returning to her kingdom after surviving an assassination attempt, and the other was an injured kid. Of course, that kid was the heir to the Wolf King. It was possible for him to transform into a wolf. Princess Rosalyn was strong and cold. She had the most explosive strength after Choi Han and used her strength logically. She was not interested in taking control of the throne. Instead, her goal was to create the continent¡¯s greatest Magic Tower, and she would grow into a hero as she moved closer to her goal. ¡®The Archduke of the kingdom, who attempted the assassination on Rosalyn, will be tortured by Beacrox in the future.¡¯ Cale¡¯s heart started to shake as he recalled just how clear and descriptive that torture scene had been in the novel. His heart seemed to be shaking quite a bit these days. ¡°Rosalyn. Lock.¡± Cale nodded his head at Choi Han¡¯s voice. ¡°Yes. Those two people. I¡¯m d you know how to read.¡± Choi Han continued to stare at the two names. Cale¡¯s gaze fell on the name Lock. Lock. This world had other races such as Elves, Dwarves, and Beast People. However, the most secretive of all races were the Beast People. Beast People. This included beasts, birds, and even insects. Beast People were different from monsters because of the existence of a conscience. ¡®Lock has the purest blood of the wolf people.¡¯ Lock had received the bloodline to dominate the wolves. The Beast People with the purest bloodline tend to look weak and average when they are in their animal form or their human form. However, once they enter their berserk state, they be more cruel and violent than anyone else. And Lock was the only survivor of the entire Blue Wolf tribe. Cale took a map out of a drawer and opened it up on the desk. ¡°You will start the journey with me.¡± He then pointed to a location on the map. ¡°We will separate at this point. You just follow what I wrote on the paper.¡± Choi Han didn¡¯t ask any questions and just quietly listened. Cale watched Choi Han for a bit. There was a reason Choi Han had to go with him until that specific point. ¡®I need to avoid the crazy dragon.¡¯ The beginning of ¡®The Birth of a Hero.¡¯ Like any other novel, new viins had to appear after Cale. However, those viins were not easy picking like Cale. The next viin involved a Marquis who led one of the noble factions. Throughout the beginning of the novel, he gets in the way of the crown prince and Choi Han. He ends up being ruined around volume 2, but Choi Han runs into the Marquis for the first time on this trip to the capital. ¡®That bastard raised the crazy dragon.¡¯ It definitely was a crazy dragon. It was still just a baby dragon. That ck dragon was being tortured by the Marquis¡¯s future sessor in secret. They were training it to obey the Marquis¡¯smands. ¡®They¡¯re crazy too. Dragons are the strongest beings in the world. How do they think they will be able to tame a dragon?¡¯ It actually does make sense. The Marquis managed to get his hands on a Dragon egg through the secret organization and chained it down with mana restricting chains as soon as it hatched. Cale could not fathom the extent of the strength of that secret organization. But would dragons be called the strongest beings in the world for no reason? This ck dragon, that was less than 5 years old, was still a dragon. In the end, the dragon goes crazy and berserk. It may be young, but in the novel, it exploded with enough mana to remove the mana restricting chains. Since its mana was restricted, the mana it exploded was actually its own life force. After living in a cave and being tortured every day without ever being able to see sunlight, the young dragon cuts into its own life force to find freedom. After managing to escape, the dragon ends up losing its rationality and goes berserk. The vige that Choi Han is staying at the time almost ends up in danger because of the berserk dragon, and Choi Han ends up fighting against the ck dragon. [Choi Han gazed at the small dragon that was less than 1 meter long. It managed to blow up a mountain with that small body and put the vigers in significant danger. However, Choi Han could not easily attack this dragon.] [The eyes of this dragon that had lost its rationality, were in pain and full of sorrow. However, the ck dragon¡¯s mouth was smiling. Choi Han found that to be extremely sad.] Choi Han ends up killing that ck dragon and gifting it the freedom called death. Cale had to go to that vige. ¡®Either Choi Han takes care of it or I prevent it from going crazy and find a way to release it.¡¯ There was no other choice because it was on his way to the capital. He would need to take an extremely long detour to avoid that vige, and that would require a long time and change the flow of the story. He would also bete in arriving at the capital if he took that detour. ¡®For being a crazy dragon, it¡¯s described as being a really cute dragon.¡¯ The novel described it as a cute ck dragon with short legs. It mentioned that it was even scarier that such a cute existence had gone crazy and caused chaos. Cale decided to stop thinking about the dragon for now, and instead gave Choi Han the rest of the order. ¡°Come to the capital with the owners of these two names. That is your way of paying me back.¡± Choi Han asked a question. ¡°...I just need to protect these two people?¡± ¡°If you want to.¡± These two people should be strong enough to not require Choi Han¡¯s protection. Especially princess Rosalyn, she wouldn¡¯t even budge an inch even if a truckload of Cales with the Indestructible Shield attacked her at the same time. ¡°Do as you wish. However, you must definitelye to the capital. You must also meet me there without being injured. You can at least keep yourself safe, right?¡± Cale and Choi Han should have no reason to meet again after that. Choi Han has another negative encounter with the secret organization after getting involved with Lock. Meeting with Lock should allow Choi Han to stop the danger in the capital like in the novel. ¡°Why are you not answering? Can you do it?¡± Choi Han¡¯s gaze became a bit clearer. ¡°Yes. I can do it.¡± He seemed to be speaking in a more respectful tone than before, but Cale just let it be. He rxed a bit after seeing Choi Han put the paper in his chest pocket. ¡®I should have been drinking as I did that.¡¯ It was really tiring to talk to Choi Han with Cale¡¯s body. ¡°You can leave now.¡± Cale waved his hand at Choi Han. Choi Han started to walk toward the door after seeing Cale¡¯s gesture. Cale leaned his back on the chair and watched Choi Han reach for the door before starting to speak again. ¡°In addition, everything we discussed here is a secret. I¡¯m sure I don¡¯t need to tell you that?¡± Choi Han did not look back and answered as he opened the door. ¡°Of course.¡± Choi Han¡¯s voice seemed to indicate that he was smiling, but Cale did not care. Once he was alone, Cale took out a piece of paper and pen and started to write in Korean. After writing for a while, he left the study and headed for his father¡¯s office. ¡°Father.¡± ¡°Yes?¡± ¡°I need money.¡± ¡°Okay. I will tell Hans to give you some.¡± Cale needed a lot of money. Once Caleid down on the bed with another 10 million gallon check in his chest pocket, Ron approached him and put a bottle on the nightstand as he started to speak. ¡°It is warm lemon honey tea. My son made it especially for you, young master. Please have a good night. I am always by your side.¡± Cale¡¯s sleepiness went away in an instant. No matter what happened, he needed to make sure the two of them went away with Choi Han. The next day, Cale Henituse headed to the slums as soon as he woke up. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 11: Picked It Up (4) Chapter 11: Picked It Up (4) 0Chapter 11: Picked It Up (4) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist ¡®Young master. I heard about everything from deputy butler Hans. This Ron will do whatever I can with mycking abilities to make sure you can shine at the capital.¡¯ Cale¡¯s shoulders were starting to shake as he walked out of the Count¡¯s estate. He was thinking about the conversation he had with Ron as soon as he woke up this morning. ¡®This is going to be your first time outside the Henituse territory, right? I am very good at hunting rabbits. I will hunt some rabbits for you when we are camping outside.¡¯ Ron¡¯s calm and benign voice echoed in Cale¡¯s ears. He felt as if he could still hear Ron¡¯s voice echoing like a hallucination throughout the fog outside. Cale was scared of the fact that Ron was exining to him about how to hunt a rabbit first thing in the morning. ¡®You need to be careful when handling a small animal like a rabbit that gets scared easily. Since you don¡¯t know when or how it will run, you need to pay attention to the surroundings and kill it in an instant. Ah, you also need to remove the innards after catching it. I am also very good at that.¡¯ Cale had to turn away as Ron mimicked cutting open a rabbit with his hands. Ron was excited. However, the only thought Cale was having right now was that Ron was toying with him. Cale was just happy that Ron was heading to the capital with him. I can tack on Beacrox as my personal chef. Ron. Beacrox. Cale had already told Hans this morning, so that he could bring the father and son duo with him. Of course, Ron was there as well. ¡®Hans, I want to take Beacrox as my personal chef for this trip.¡¯ ¡®May I ask, why Beacrox? He is extremely busy running Kitchen #2.¡¯ ¡®I don¡¯t know. But I can¡¯t eat anything other than Beacrox¡¯s cooking. I will be taking him, so you figure out the rest.¡¯ Hans became anxious, but Ron seemed to be happy to be going with his son. ¡®Young master, my son will be very happy. We had a need to go to the capital anyways. I will deliver your exact words to him.¡¯ Cale rxed after hearing Ron¡¯s words. He was worried that they would say no, but Beacrox should enjoy leaving the Henituse territory and traveling to the capital as well. Cale walked through the foggy Western City as he thought about the people he would take with him to the capital. The story was progressing a little differently than the novel, but it wasn¡¯t like he could give up on gaining some benefits for himself. ¡°Young master, you are here early today.¡± The baker seemed to be pretty rxed around Cale after seeing him a couple of times. Cale just stoically asked the baker. ¡°The bread?¡± The baker smiled as he handed Cale a bag full of bread. ¡°Of course, I have it all ready. But is today really thest day?¡± ¡°Why? Greedy for more money?¡± ¡°Yes, I definitely am.¡± Cale started to smile. He liked honest answers like this. Cale patted the shoulder of the baker, who seemed to be a bit more rxed around him, and headed for the slums. ¡°I¡¯lle back when I want to eat it again.¡± The baker longingly watched as Cale disappeared into the fog and then started to pray. He was praying for Cale toe back and spend a ton of money. Cale naturally did not know about the baker¡¯s prayer as he walked over to the slums. He then saw the siblings waiting for him. ¡®Do these kids not have a home?¡¯ Cale hade much earlier than usual. However, the siblings were curled up together and waiting for him, as if they had been waiting at the top of the hill all night. The younger brother seemed to be leaning into his older sister¡¯s embrace. The siblings were quietly looking up at Cale. Their hair and clothes seemed damp, probably because they stayed here through the foggy morning. Of course, Cale pretended not to notice. ¡°Here, take it.¡± The young boy took both of their shares from Cale. Cale waited until the boy picked it up before turning around and heading for the man-eating tree. ¡®I¡¯m d it is foggy.¡¯ The fog made it difficult to see. Since this hill was the highest point in Western City, other than the Count¡¯s estate, the fog was even thicker up here. Nobody else would be able to see what Cale is doing, or more importantly, what Cale receives from the tree. - More, give me more. Please. Cale poured a bag of bread into the hole while listening to the eerie voice of the grudge-filled soul as usual. The darkness inside the hole was slowly turning from grey to white. Cale started to smile, thinking that all his efforts were not for naught. It was at that moment. - More, more, more! ¡®What?¡¯ Cale flinched and stepped backwards at the voice that now turned into a shriek. ¡®The novel didn¡¯t mention something like this.¡¯ - More, more! I will give you a present if you bring me more. A present. Present. That word made Cale¡¯s eyes start to sparkle. Although he didn¡¯t expect the soul to go crazy like this, the end was near. ¡°Just wait.¡± The ck branch started to sway, as if nodding at him. It felt like a scene out of a horror movie. Cale shivered as he started to move back through the fog. It was the middle of the morning now, but the sun was not out, and the fog continued to get thicker. It looked like it would start to rain soon. The siblings must have gone somewhere, as he did not see them, but Cale just thought they went to dodge the rain and put the third bag of bread in front of the man-eating tree. ¡®This should be thest bunch.¡¯ The light inside the hole was now as white as the fog surrounding Cale. ¡®It should be transparent after I put thisst bag of bread in.¡¯ Cale was full of anticipation as he poured thest bag into the tree. And finally. Ooooooooooong- A rumbling that was worlds different than the past rumblings poured out from the tree toward Cale. This rumbling, that was only aimed at Cale, did not catch his attention because of the hole that was starting to turn transparent. It should be dark inside the hole because of the shadow of the tree, but such a realistic situation did not ur. That was the Ancient Power. The moment Cale saw the Ancient Power, he could hear the voice that had been asking him for more food until now. - It was so, so good! That voice was ... obnoxious. - That soft texture of bread! I especially liked the third bag of bread you brought. I guess even food develops as time goes by. There was no such thing as bread back in my days! The wheat itself must grow on a really fertilend! Yes, not all wheat is the same ¨C ...The voice was evaluating the taste of the bread. A storm caused by the voice started to rush toward Cale. ¡®This wasn¡¯t in the novel!¡¯ The spirit that was tied down to the earth because of its grudge was resolving that grudge by evaluating the taste of the bread. Cale started to frown further. He was only thinking about the Ancient Power in ¡®The Birth of a Hero.¡¯ This Indestructible Shield was the only Ancient Power that was written about in the novel but never imed by anyone. ¡®No wonder nobody ended up taking control of it. But then why would the author mention something that could be useful but was never actually taken by anybody?¡¯ That was the thought in Cale¡¯s head, however, the obnoxious voice continued to chatter away, making him unable to focus. - ... That¡¯s why I am so full! It was delicious! Chatter chatter. It felt like the grudge was from not being able to speak instead of not being able to eat. After hearing the spirit chat on and on for a couple of minutes, evaluating all of the different types of breads that Cale had brought, Cale nodded his head and tried to cut the voice off. - Things like this were not avable in ancient times. The people of the Forest of Darkness imed to be servants of a god yet only gave me tasteless things. However, Cale decided to wait a little longer after hearing the spirit mention the ancient times. - I was, naturally, banished from that ce. They said I was a glutton. A glutton my ass. Of course, I left with my friends. We were nning on putting the world back on the right track. For someone like him who needed Ancient Powers, it was important to listen to stories about the ancient times. However, the story soon ended, and the spirit went back to talking about food and other useless things. Cale quickly cut it off. - I don¡¯t think I could give up this taste even if I got fat. It¡¯s so unfair that I had to eat dirt and ended up dying! ¡°Yes, it was an amazing and professional evaluation. You¡¯re a bit lou-¡° The spirit cut Cale off. - You understand my evaluation. You are a really good guy! Thanks! ...Cale couldn¡¯t tell whether he could reallymunicate with the spirit or not. Cale really could not figure out the situation at hand. At least the voice stopped after telling him thanks. Called looked toward the tree in front of him. ¡°How interesting.¡± The man-eating tree, the originally ck man-eating tree, was starting to turn white. It then started to slowly grow some green leaves. The scene looked even more mystical because he was surrounded by fog right now. Ooooooooong- The noise held some heavinesspared to before. Cale kneeled on one side and sat down underneath the trunk of the tree. A bright white light was pouring out from the hole. Cale put his hand into the light. He then closed his eyes. ¡®This must be it.¡¯ A warm and strong power that wrapped around his hand. He started to smile before hearing the voice one more time. It was a pure and warm voice. - It will protect you. Shiiiiiine. For a very short moment, a bright light wrapped around Cale. The light was silver in color, and the light started to be absorbed by his body. The absorbed light all gathered at Cale¡¯s heart. ¡°Huuuuuuuh.¡± Cale let out a long sigh as he opened his eyes. It did not hurt. It was warm, and the pure power was making him feel happy. Cale quickly lifted up the shirt that he was wearing. ¡®I did it.¡¯ There was a small silver shield inscribed over his heart. It was different from a tattoo. Such a beautiful and fancy shield left its mark over Cale¡¯s heart. The shield will prioritize its owner¡¯s safety above anything else. The location of that promise was at the heart. This shield will be with Cale until his heart stops beating. ¡°How nice.¡± Cale could feel the strength wrapping around his heart. It was not causing any issues. In fact, it felt like the shield had surrounded his heart, and was doing its best to protect him. Ancient Powers like this left their unique mark when they are activated. Cale quickly used the method that was written in the novel to trigger the Ancient Power. Paaaaaat. The ¡®Indestructible Shield¡¯ appeared in front of Cale¡¯s eyes. It was a silver shield that was justrge enough to cover Cale¡¯s upper body. There were two silver wings on both sides of the shield, which allowed the shield to move within a certain radius from Cale. The size of the shield was also controble. Cale started to control the size of this shield that already felt like it was a part of his body. This immediate familiarity was one of the special traits of Ancient Powers. That was why heroes used it, even if it was just as a support. Cale started to smile. ¡®A maximum of two times.¡¯ Cale was thinking in terms of Choi Han, the strongest person around him right now. The shield should be able to block two of Choi Han¡¯s attacks. ¡®The strength of this shield is stronger than I expected. Why would the heroes not use it all the time?¡¯ The Indestructible Shield, unlike its name, actually is capable of breaking. However, it does not disappear upon breaking. If the shield receives an attack stronger than its abilities, it will store as much of its strength as possible to protect the owner¡¯s heart before it breaks. After a while, the shield will recover its strength and can be used again. The strength of the shieldes from the owner¡¯s heart. The beating heart. That heart bes the strength of the shield. The heart strengthens the shield while the shield protects the heart. So, what would happen if the heart gets stronger? ¡®It will get even stronger.¡¯ There were many ways to strengthen Ancient Powers. Cale will be strengthening this shield on the way to the capital. Once that happens, he should be able to make a shield that canst 10, no, at least 5 minutes when someone of Choi Han¡¯s caliber tries to kill him with all of their strength. Ancient Powers, as seen with this man-eating tree, are difficult to earn unless you, ¡®coincidentally run into them.¡¯ The person who knows the most about these ¡®coincidences¡¯ in the first five volumes is probably Cale Henituse, well, the current Cale Henituse. Cale started to smile. He reached out and touched the shield. It felt nice. However, there was one thing he didn¡¯t like about it. ¡°...It seems too divine.¡± At full strength, it looked like a Holy Shield that the Knights of God carry with their swords in myths. Of course, the former owner of this shield was a priestess who was tired of the term god, and the current owner, Cale, just didn¡¯t like gods. ¡®It¡¯s not like there will be many reasons for me to use this.¡¯ He was nning on leaving the fighting to everyone else. The terror attack at the capital. He may have to use it if something dangerous happens there. But he will make sure it is small and faint so that other people will not notice it. Cale returned the shield to his heart and patted the now white tree as he started to walk away. The misty rain inside the fog started to wet Cale¡¯s shoulders. Cale liked the fog, but did not like rain. He started to walk faster toward home. He needed a carriage. It was at that moment. Meeoooooow. Meow. Cale suddenly felt a chill on the back of his neck. It was the alley right outside the Count¡¯s Estate. He could see two pairs of round, golden eyes. Cale started to frown. There were two kittens who looked extremely pitiful and drenched in the rain. They continued to meow as they approached Cale. They then started to rub their cheeks on Cale¡¯s legs. ¡°Sigh.¡± Cale let out a sigh and started to walk. The two little kittens followed behind them. The tiny things somehow managed to keep up with Cale, even with their short legs. ¡°Young master, what is going on?¡± The person who greeted Cale at home was deputy butler Hans. Hans had a confused expression as his eyes opened wide. He seemed to be shocked. Cale clicked his tongue and handed Hans the things in his hands. ¡°Don¡¯t ask stupid questions and just take them.¡± Hans¡¯s eyes started to shake. ¡°W, what cute and lovely kittens!¡± This deputy butler really did seem to be butler material. Cale carefully put the two kittens in the hands of the extremely excited Hans. The two kittens, that were dangling in Hans¡¯s hands, continued to look at Cale, even when they were in Hans¡¯s arms. ¡°Young master, may I take care of these two lovely kitten-nims?¡± ¡°Whatever you want." Hans started to smile in joy. Cale started to walk past the excited Hans as he added on. ¡°Ah, for your information, they be quiet if you give them food. The two of them are also siblings.¡± The two kittens flinched and started to shake. Their golden eyes opened widely as they looked toward Cale. ¡°Excuse me?¡± The moment Hans asked in confusion, Cale moved back toward Hans. He then lowered his head and caressed the two kittens. He had wondered about it for thest few days, but how could he not know by now? The silver kitten had a faint smell of the medicinal herbs he had given to the girl. When he picked the two kittens up earlier, he could also smell the beef steak and bacon cream pasta that he had given them this morning as well. That made Cale certain. The events of thest few days were finally resolved in Cale¡¯s head. ¡°Did you think I wouldn¡¯t know?¡± The two kitten¡¯s golden eyes continued to shake. Cale looked at the siblings he had been feeding thest few days and started to smile. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 12: Picked It Up (5) Chapter 12: Picked It Up (5) 2Chapter 12: Picked It Up (5) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Tap. Tap. Even at the rough patting, the baby kittens could only stiffly stare at Cale. Cale thought about the moment when he first met Choi Han. The injured silver kitten was growling while the red kitten was whining next to it. ¡®The silver kitten should be the older sister with grey hair and the younger brother must be the red kitten.¡¯ Cale had a bright smile on his face. He looked toward the kittens and started to speak. ¡°We¡¯ll talkter.¡± The siblings who seemed to be beast people avoided his gaze and Hans confusingly replied. ¡°...Are you talking to me?¡± ¡°Not you.¡± Hans looked at Cale and the two kittens with an even more confused expression on his face, before holding the kittens even tighter. It was a movement that seemed to show that he was trying to avoid a dangerous person. However, he soon had to approach Cale once again. ¡°Are you heading back out?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± It was because Cale changed his coat and was preparing to leave again. ¡°Where will you be going?¡± ¡°I have a promise to keep and someone to meet.¡± ¡°...Young master, you are going to keep a promise?¡± Hans looked to be shocked again, as he questioned Cale. ¡°You seem to be getting ruder.¡± ¡°My apologies.¡± The deputy butler¡¯s apology was very quick. ¡®Is he really the best of the butler candidates? He seemed decent by the way he handled Choi Han¡¯s issue.¡¯ Cale felt like Hans, who was caressing the kittens with a wide grin on his face, was not very reliable. ¡®I¡¯m going to take him to the capital as well.¡¯ Cale was thinking about this, something that Hans would never expect even in his dreams, no, something that Hans wouldment even if he learned about it in his dream, before Cale asked about the person he had not seen for a while. ¡°Where¡¯s Ron?¡± Hans had a satisfied smile on his face at that question. ¡°I heard that Choi Han-nim will be going with you as one of your guards for the beginning part of your journey to the capital. Is that true?¡± Hans was thinking about Choi Han, who had defeated all of the Count¡¯s Knight Brigade members today. He was more skilled than expected, making it easy for him to be Cale¡¯s guard as Cale wanted. Of course, neither Hans nor the knights knew that Choi Han had hidden his true power. ¡°Mr. Ron found out that Choi Han-nim will be going with you and went out with Choi Han-nim to purchase some clothes and other necessary items for travel. Ah, Chef Beacrox went with them a well.¡± ¡°I see. I¡¯m relieved.¡± ¡®They seem to be getting along well.¡¯ There was a rare, extremely bright smile on Cale¡¯s face. The smile was very fitting with his beautiful red hair. Hans started to speak while being happy about Cale¡¯s bright smile. ¡°Mr. Ron, Choi Han-nim, and even Beacrox seem to be excited about serving you.¡± He could see an instantaneous change in Cale¡¯s face as he said that. Why would Cale suddenly look like he lost his appetite? Hans could not figure it out. Both individuals headed outside the main gates once again. As he got on the carriage, Cale asked Hans who was watching him leave. ¡°Oh, Hans. Don¡¯t the deputy butlers learn basic martial arts?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± ¡°And you are the greatest Butler candidate?¡± The corner of Hans¡¯s lips started to move up and down. Count Deruth cherished Hans because he took care of things well and had the best personality as well. ¡°Yes sir. I know the basics for three different styles: martial arts, dagger arts, and spear arts.¡± A good butler needed to learn a couple different basic fighting styles, just in case something happened and the family members needed to run away. ¡°Amazing.¡± ¡°I guess I am a bit amazing.¡± Cale could not hold back his smile watching Hans shrug his shoulders, while his lips continued to flicker. The two kittens could only shake their head as they watched Hans and the sly smile on Cale¡¯s face. ¡°I¡¯m leaving now.¡± Cale made up his mind to take Hans to the capital to take care of all of the annoying things he didn''t want to deal with before he then closed the carriage door. The carriage headed into the fog and the now stronger rain to head to his destination. [The Fragrance of Tea with Poetry] Cale looked up at the sign before opening the door. Ring. The clear ringing of the bell and a deste shop weed Cale. ¡°I guess nobody is here because of the rain.¡± ¡°Wee, young master.¡± Billos. The bastard of the Flynn Merchant Guild. He weed Cale as if they had known each other for a long time. Cale sat in front of the counter and made eye contact with Billos. ¡°I promised toe back. I needed to keep my promise.¡± ¡°Of course. Promises need to be kept. Should I prepare the book and tea fromst time?¡± ¡°Yes. 3 cups of tea please.¡± ¡°Which teas should I make?¡± Cale ordered three types of tea and set a time for Billos to bring the teas up before turning around and heading up to the third floor. Drip drip- The rain was getting even worse. Tsk. Cale clicked his tongue and went back to sit at the same spot near the third floor window and looked out. ¡°The rain is pretty strong, isn¡¯t it?¡± Billos came up and sat across from him and put down a single cup of tea. Cale was observing Billos closely. ¡®Choi Han, Beacrox, Ron. And finally, Billos.¡¯ These were the names of the individuals who continued to show up in the novel past volume 1. Of course, Billos only has about two sentences written about him in volume 1, as the owner of the tea shop that Choi Han stops by to rest. He returns in volume 3 to swear his loyalty to Choi Han and reveal his ambitions. ¡®Reveal.¡¯ That word was important. ¡®He¡¯s always been a greedy person.¡¯ Billos was different from Hong Gil-dong. He was not sad that he could not call his father, ¡®father,¡¯ or his brother, ¡®brother.¡¯ In fact, he was just trying to beat them. He wanted to make it so that they had no choice but to ept him. He wanted to create a situation where they will have no choice but to introduce him as son, to introduce him as the younger brother. ¡®He must be exhausted.¡¯ Cale thought Billos lived an exhausting life. However, he did not hate that. In fact, having that type of greed made him seem more human. He didn¡¯t like the people who had the abilities and strength, but said things like, ¡®Hoho, I¡¯m just going to give up. I have no choice.¡¯ Why would you give up on something that could be yours? You should always take what is yours. Anyways, this person had to meet with Choi Han at least once during the time frame of volume 1. It had to just be a short encounter. Cale could hear Billos¡¯s voice breaking his train of thought. ¡°Young master, I heard that you are going to head to the capital.¡± ¡°Are you going to keep sitting there? Don¡¯t you have work to do?¡± Seeing Cale pretending to be annoyed made Billos smile. He did not even try to hide it. This really was a very, very interesting young master. However, Billos could tell that he had a pretty sharp mind. ¡°I will be heading to the capital as well. I guess I will be following after you.¡± ¡°And?¡± Cale already knew about it. In order for Billos and Choi Han to have an encounter in volume 3, Billos needed to head for the capital soon as well. Billos had a stoic expression as he asked Cale, who was sipping his tea and looking out the window, a question. ¡°Young master, it seems like you have changed.¡± Seeing Cale turn to look at him, Billos started to smile. Cale motioned with his chin for Billos to continue. ¡°You seem different than your nickname.¡± ¡°Which one? Trash?¡± Billos could see the corners of Cale¡¯s lips starting to go up. He definitely was different. This Cale was not the trash that he knew about. That trash did not know how to make such an expression. It was a slightly bitter smile. ¡®...Should I have gotten a bit drunk and broken a chair or something?¡¯ Billos did not know what Cale was thinking. ¡°Yes. You are right. Trash. Haven¡¯t you always been a trashy young master?¡± Did he not have any fear? Cale could not help but wonder, as Billos said such a thing to the Count¡¯s son, the firstborn of the ruler of the territory. Was Billos the one who had something to drink? But Cale did not want to fight with Billos. Billos was someone who was going to take over arge merchant guild. And Billos was being sincere. He was not smiling, he was actually sincerely asking the question. ¡®Haven¡¯t you always been a trashy young master?¡¯ Cale decided to answer the question. It was not a hard question to answer anyways. It was easier than figuring out how to make money when you have no money. ¡°Billos.¡± Cale had a smile on his face but did notugh as he called out to Billos. ¡°You can¡¯t call your father, ¡®father.¡¯ You can¡¯t call your brother, ¡®brother.¡¯¡± Billos¡¯s gaze turned chilly. He started to take notice of the young master in front of him who had no problem touching his sore spot. Just like he had touched Cale¡¯s sore spot, he was returning the favor by touching his most painful sore spot. Cale just silently made eye contact with Billos for a bit. The rain started to pour even harder outside. Cale broke the silence and started to smile as he asked. ¡°Are you going to keep being the bastard? Are you satisfied with that?¡± Billos could feel Cale¡¯s sharp gaze on him. ¡°I know you¡¯re not.¡± Cale leaned back on the chair and continued on with an expression that seemed to be thinking about the past. ¡°I¡¯ve acted like trash for about ten years, ever since I started when I was 8-years-old.¡± ¡®Wow. Now that I think about it, Cale Henituse has been doing trashy things since he was 8 years old. He started drinking when he was 15. What a guy.¡¯ Cale thought about the past of the original Cale that was present in his mind and started to smile. That smile looked scary to Billos. At that moment, a small noise cut through the rain to reach Cale and Billos. Squeak. Squeak. It was the sound of someoneing up the stairs. Cale looked past Billos¡¯s shoulder to the entrance of the third floor. He could see someone¡¯s head. ck hair. It was Choi Han. Behind him was Ron. Cale had told a servant to tell Choi Han toe to this tea shopter in the day. Cale moved his gaze away from the two of them and started to speak to finish his conversation with Billos. Choi Han and Ron finisheding up the stairs and looked toward Cale as he started to speak. ¡°Billos.¡± Billos¡¯s stoic face felt pretty chilly. ¡°It¡¯s okay to throw away something you¡¯ve been doing for around ten years.¡± Cale¡¯s eyes started to look more alive as he continued. ¡°I can¡¯t live as trash forever.¡± Of course, Cale would still spend all the money he wants and do whatever pleases him, even if he wasn¡¯t trash. He was going to live peacefully and enjoy life as the son of a rich noble. Although that was different than the direction of Billos¡¯s life, what mattered was that both of them were not going to continue living the way they had been living. ¡°Aren¡¯t you the same?¡± The corner of Billos¡¯s lips started to slowly move upward. He then bowed and started to snicker. After silently snickering for a bit, Billos raised his head up and looked toward Cale. ¡°I am indeed tired of it.¡± Billos wasughing as he said he was tired of it. ¡°See? I told you.¡± Cale shrugged his shoulders and motioned for Choi Han and Ron toe over. At that moment, Billos got up from the seat and started to speak. ¡°Young master.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°I will see you at the capital.¡± Cale started to frown. It would beplicated if they met at the capital right away. ¡°Why bother?¡± Cale motioned for Billos to go away, and Billos respectfully bowed before leaving. Ron, Choi Han, and the descending Billos made eye contact, but they all just ignored each other. ¡®Good.¡¯ Cale weed that scene. Choi Han and Billos just barely ran into each other. It was just like in the book. Cale started to smile at the other two people with satisfaction. ¡°Ron, I knew you woulde with him. ording to Hans, Beacrox went with you too, but I presume he went back to the kitchen. He has a strong sense of responsibility for that kitchen.¡± ¡°Young master, are you close with that person?¡± Cale shrugged his shoulders at the unexpected question from Ron. ¡°No?¡± ¡°...I see.¡± Cale pushed it aside as nothing important, but Ron definitely heard it. He heard Cale say that he cannot keep living as a trash. Cale stopped looking at Ron whose response trailed off and made eye contact with Choi Han. ¡°I guess you can¡¯t trust the rumors.¡± ¡®What the hell is he saying?¡¯ Cale ignored Choi Han¡¯s words. At that moment, Billos brought up the other two cups of tea that Cale had ordered earlier. ¡°Should I give these cups to these two gentlemen?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Cale started to smile again. ¡°I ordered them in advance.¡± Cale personally picked up the teacups and put one in front of each person. In front of Choi Han was the tea he just randomly ordered from the menu. As for Ron. ¡°I specially ordered this for you since it seems like you like it a lot. Why else would you bring it for me every day?¡± It was warm lemon tea. Cale could see Ron looking odd and felt the biggest satisfaction he had felt all day. 1. Hong Gil-dong was a Korean ouw during the Joseon Dynasty who had a simr story of being an illegitimate son If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 13: Picked It Up (6) Chapter 13: Picked It Up (6) 1Chapter 13: Picked It Up (6) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist But behind that satisfaction, Cale suddenly felt chills on the back of his neck. It was because Ron drank the lemon tea without anyints. ck. Why did the sound of the teacup being ced on the table feel so loud? Thankfully, it was not just Cale being paranoid. Choi Han, who had been quietly enjoying his tea, started to frown. ¡°Why don¡¯t you enjoy your tea a little more quietly?¡± Ron held back hisughter after seeing Choi Han take a peek at Cale before speaking in a more respectful tone to him. Today, he had found a decently useful sword for Choi Han. It was a sword made by the same cksmith as the one who made Beacrox¡¯s cooking knife. ¡®Want to try it out?¡¯ ¡®I will not fight against someone who is trying to cut someone else with a cooking knife.¡¯ His son, Beacrox, kept nagging Choi Han to fight him with that sword. It was because Beacrox learned a bit about Choi Han¡¯s strength from that short boutst time, and wanted to find out more. However, Choi Han continued to reject him. ¡®Ho, what a funny punk. What, do I need to bring a bloodied sword like you?¡¯ Choi Han closed his eyes for a moment before opening them back up and responded to Beacrox as if he was confirming it for himself. ¡®I, I will now be someone who protects. He said even I could do it.¡¯ ¡®What the heck are you saying?¡¯ Ron watched his son and Choi Han¡¯s cute bickering, before following Choi Han toe see Cale. He didn¡¯t expect to hear such a precious thing. ¡®I can¡¯t live as a trash forever.¡¯ That was what Ron was thinking about as he drank the lemon tea. But it looked like he was ring at Choi Han. Cale was watching that scene with satisfaction. Ron and Choi Han¡¯s rtionship in ¡®The Birth of a Hero¡¯ was just like this. They were always at each other¡¯s throats, but still continued to travel together. They were tied together by a contract, but they both knew they could also rely on one another. Cale thought that a lot of things got twisted because of his actions to not get beaten up, but it looked like their rtionship was forming in a simr manner. ¡®It is disappointing that it got twisted a bit, but my lifees first. I can¡¯t let the novel dictate my life.¡¯ For Cale, his life was the first priority. After that, it was that everybody living within his territory lived peacefully. What else could you need? ¡°Sweet teas are really the best.¡± Ron flinched at the words that Cale happily said. The tea time for these three individuals ended in the middle of the downpour. ¡°I guess the next time I will see you will be at the capital.¡± Cale shook his head toward Billos, who greeted Cale as he came down from the third floor after tea time. ¡°I will being here everyday for a while.¡± ¡°Is that so? To read the book?¡± ¡°Whatever I feel like doing.¡± ¡°Please feel free to visit whenever you would like. This tea shop is open to you at all times young master.¡± Billos was watching Cale, who walked by while pretending not to hear what he said, with curiosity. Ron was just quietly observing them from behind. The bastard son of the Flynn Merchant Guild. The fact that he was extremely talented made the official children resent him. That was why Billos had toe to this remote, yet profitable region in the Henituse territory. He couldn¡¯t even use the family name of, ¡®Flynn,¡¯ either. Ron was observing Cale being friendly with this greedy Billos and clicked his tongue. It was because he thought to himself, ¡®Why does it matter to me if that puppy young master is close to Billos?¡¯ ¡°Tsk. I guess even dislike creates affection.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t want my dislike of you to turn into affection.¡± Ron let out a sigh after seeing that the clueless Choi Han had misunderstood. ¡°Not you, punk.¡± Ron¡¯s gaze was on Cale. Ron was nning on heading to the capital anyways. It was because he had a bad feeling about it. He had been thinking about it countless times ever since Choi Han came out from the Forest of Darkness and entered the city with that dense murderous aura on him. The reason Ron had to hide out in this territory. The reason he had to escape from the Eastern Continent. It looked like he needed to research the people responsible for it one more time. ¡®Wouldn¡¯t it be appropriate for me to make sure our puppy young master safely arrives at the capital and safely leaves as my final duty as his servant?¡¯ He imed to others whileughing that he would be by the young master¡¯s side because he found Cale¡¯s scared expression to be funny, but would an assassin ever tell the truth to others? ¡®I should tell Beacrox to make food that our little puppy young master will like during the journey.¡¯ Cale was someone he looked after even more than his own son, Beacrox. Ron knew very well about the terrible things Cale has done, and the terrible personality that Cale had. However, there was someone else he knew. Ron remembered how the young Cale had consoled his father when his mother died. He also saw how Cale hated his stepmother and her family, but never caused a ruckus with them, even when he was drunk. ¡®But he definitely is still trash, tsk.¡¯ 18 years. Ron had watched over Cale for too long. *** Cale returned to his chamber immediately after returning to the estate, only to find the two baby kittens staring up at him. ¡°Ah, I forgot about the two of you.¡± He should have brought Choi Han, who cherishes small animals. Choi Han had returned to his own room after saying that his heart needed to be stronger to be someone who protects. When Caleughed and asked who Choi Han was going to protect, Choi Han responded that he would let Cale know once he became stronger. That answer gave Cale the chills. Cale didn¡¯t know why someone as strong as Choi Han would want to be even stronger. ¡°Young master.¡± Hans approached Cale as he was staring at the kittens. ¡°Young master, what do you think? Aren¡¯t they even cuter, lovelier, and more adorable now? They are so mean though, they wouldn¡¯t even let me pet them. Haha!¡± Hans crouched next to the kittens and looked up at Cale with satisfaction. His expression was so full of admiration that it surprised Cale and Ron. His expression was not rted to the cuteness of the kittens. ¡°Don¡¯t you agree?¡± This strong butler candidate seems to like cats very much. ¡°Oh, um, I guess so.¡± The two kittens, that were sitting on a silk cushion that came from who knows where, definitely looked fuller and healthier. What kind of magic did this deputy butler do in that short amount of time? However, the two kittens continued to avoid Hans¡¯s gaze. It seemed to be a very stereotypical rtionship between a butler and a cat. ¡°Then I will be heading out now, young master. Please call me if there is anything you need for the kitten-nims.¡± ¡°Just go.¡± After verifying that Ron got Hans to leave, Cale avoided the sparkling eyes of the kittens as he went into the bathroom. At that moment, the kittens¡¯ ears fell down. But then. ¡°Hooo.¡± Ron approached the kittens after getting Hans to leave. Only Ron and the two baby kittens were currently in the bedroom. ¡°You are children of the Cat Tribe.¡± The golden eyes of the kitten¡¯s turned sharp. However, Ron did not seem to care, as he verified that the bathroom door was closed before standing in front of the kittens. ¡°Good.¡± There was an odd smile on Ron¡¯s face. The Cat Tribe was known for their sensitivity to their surroundings. The Cat Tribe was one that was better known in the Eastern Continent than the Western Continent, but there was no way that someone like Ron, who was involved with assassinations, would not know about them. Unlike most beast people, who became violent when they went berserk, the Cat Tribe became stealthier and sharper. That was why they were a scary tribe, although they were not at the level of the Wolf, Tiger, or Lion Tribes. There was only one thought on Ron¡¯s mind as he watched the two Cat Tribe children. It was a sudden thought, and they were still young, but... ¡®I can teach them.¡¯ Ron checked to make sure that the door to the bathroom was closed once again. The Cat Tribe put a lot of importance on rtionships. If they trust someone once, they will never betray them. They were suspicious by nature, but, like the Wolf Tribe, they valued interpersonal rtionships. Children of such a tribe came looking for Cale on their own ord. Ron thought it would be nice to give his puppy young master a farewell present. Ron moved a bit closer to the Cat Tribe children. He then reached out to caress the head of the slightlyrger silver kitten. p. The silver kitten pped his hand away and quickly moved away to the corner of the room along with the red kitten. ¡°Hoo.¡± Ron¡¯s eyes turned curious. These Cat Tribe children seem to have already figured him out. It made sense, since they needed to quickly recognize people like him, people who were close with death, in order to live for a long time. Even if cats do have nine lives, they needed to treasure them. The Cat Tribe was known for their long lives as well as their stealthy night movement. In this regard, they were stealthier than anyone else. Ron started to smile. ¡°One child is fog and the other one is poison.¡± The silver one was fog and the red one was blood, or poison. Even if they did not be killers, they had the right foundations to be shadows. The silver kitten turned its head away as Ron said that, while the red kitten snorted. The two siblings had no desire to be killers who gave off such a thick scent of death. The two kittens scoffed at Ron, as if they knew about his identity as an assassin already. Once Cale came out of the bathroom, they were still sticking very close to each other as they looked up at Cale. ¡°Stop looking at me.¡± They immediately stopped looking at him once he said that. ¡°Ron. Go get me my meal from Beacrox.¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± Ron left and Cale sat down on the couch and looked toward the two kittens. He then spoke to the two kittens who were whining in a corner far away from him. ¡°You two are part of the Cat Tribe, aren¡¯t you?¡± The two kittens nodded their heads without making eye contact with Cale. ¡°Are you nning on following me?¡± There were no responses to this question. Instead, the red kitten slowly walked over and rubbed its cheek on Cale¡¯s leg, while the silver kitten approached Cale soon after and started to tap Cale¡¯s foot with her front paw. Cale already had a n for these two siblings. He nodded his head and made up his mind about the kittens. ¡°Then make yourselves useful.¡± The kittens immediately responded. Meeeow. Meow! ¡°Answer in humannguage.¡± The pupils of the silver kitten, the older sister named On, started to sparkle as she spoke. ¡°I want to eat meat. I¡¯m still hungry.¡± The red kitten, the younger brother Hong, tapped Cale¡¯s leg as he added on. ¡°I want to eat cake.¡± Cale responded to both of them. ¡°I will give you a lot of meat and cake, so you know what to do, right?¡± ¡°Be useful!¡± ¡°Be useful!¡± The kittens immediately replied, and that was how the two siblings, who were kicked out of the Fog Cat Tribe, became a part of of Count Henituse¡¯s household. Four dayster, Cale joined his family for breakfast for the first time in a while. Count Deruth looked at his son, who was wearing extremely simple clothes, and started to smile. ¡°I guess you are leaving today.¡± Today was the day that Cale would leave the Henituse territory and head toward the capital. 1. There are many Chinese characters for ¡°On,¡± but I think the author is referencing the, ¡°On,¡± that means conceal, because she is the fog that Ron describes. 2. The name ¡°Hong¡± is probably from the Chinese character for Red. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 14: Heading Out (1) Chapter 14: Heading Out (1) 3Chapter 14: Heading Out (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist ¡°It doesn¡¯t look like you are nervous.¡± Cale smiled instead of responding to his father¡¯s statement. Cale¡¯splexion had gotten much better in thest few days. It had no choice but to get better. ¡®Since I didn¡¯t get beaten to a pulp.¡¯ It was raining in the Henituse territory until yesterday. If the story went as it did in the novel, Cale would have been beaten to a pulp on a rainy day. Of course, Cale was not beaten up yesterday. He could also sleep well now. This was because he could feel the Indestructible Shield always surrounding his heart. Knowing that he could manage to survive, even if he did something wrong to someone like Ron or Beacrox, made it easier for him to sleep at night. ¡°Father.¡± Cale looked at the breakfast spread that was fancier than ever before, as he asked. ¡°It looks like the number of people in the envoy has grown again. I asked you to reduce the number.¡± He had asked his father to decrease the number of servants apanying him to help with his needs. He said that Hans and Ron were enough. Of course, Hans turned pale at first, however, he started to pack right away after hearing that the kittens will be traveling with them as well. ¡°Ah, about that...¡± For some reason, Deruth stopped his sentence without finishing. At that moment, someone else¡¯s voice interjected itself into their conversation. ¡°That was my decision.¡± It was the Count¡¯s wife, Vin. Her hair was perfectly formed in a bun, without a single stray hair, as she was looking down at her te. She looked so simr to her son, Basen. Even the way they both did not make eye contact with Cale and had a stoic expression was the same. ¡°We can¡¯t have someone from our family looking poor and terrible just because you want to go with such a small envoy.¡± It was an extremely stoic voice. Vin then lifted up her gaze to look in Cale¡¯s direction before continuing on. ¡°... I am not saying you are terrible.¡± ¡°Even I know that much.¡± Vin hesitated for a moment after hearing Cale¡¯s response, before taking another bite of her food and continuing to speak. ¡°People, especially nobles, care a lot about appearances.¡± The Countess Vin. Cale quietly watched her. She was born as the eldest daughter of a poor artist¡¯s family, and had dreamt about being the head of a merchant guild when she grew up. She was influenced by the luxury items being sold to the nobles and came to the Henituse territory. Once she got here, she fell in love with the art of sculpting. Eventually, she met Count Deruth and fell in love, living as the director for the territory¡¯s cultural business operations. In Cale, no, Kim Rok Soo¡¯s opinion, she had a lot of pride for herself and her life, which was why she had a lot of pride for this family as well. Even though she knew that Cale was silently observing her, she continued on without a single change in her expression. ¡°Art is not for those human tras- mm.¡± (PR: Cut off without the, ''h,'' on purpose) She was a bit of a coarse speaker because she worked in the merchant world for a while. ¡°Anyways, there are a lot of people who think that appearances reveal everything about a person.¡± That was her way of telling Cale to take a lot of servants with him. Her goal was for Cale to not be judged negatively just because he only took a few servants with him. Naturally, Cale wanted to take a lot of people to do his biddings for him as well. ¡®How nice and rxing would it be?¡¯ He was finding it difficult to get changed without a servant now. Kim Rok Soo had been in this world as Cale for only about a week, but he already could not let go of that easy life. However, a few days into Cale¡¯s future was a crazy ck Dragon. If he cannot release this crazy dragon in advance, it might go wild and kill a lot of people. Although Cale didn¡¯t care about what happened to other people, he still did not want to see people dying in front of his eyes. Furthermore, he also didn¡¯t want to take responsibility for those people who will be injured because of the dragon. Responsibility was a heavy burden, and for someone like Kim Rok Soo, who had taken responsibility for his own life since he was a young boy, he knew that responsibility rted to people and people¡¯s lives was the scariest and heaviest burden. That was why he started to speak. ¡°Art is the mirror of the soul.¡± Vin lifted her gaze off of her te and looked toward Cale. This was the first time in a long while that the two of them had made eye contact with each other. ¡°...You do know about that.¡± ¡°Yes. I do know.¡± Cale had roamed around the entire territory thest four days to prepare the things he needed on this trip. He just recited one of the things he saw on one of those trips. ¡°Sculpting is not just cutting into a chunk of marble. It is creating a reflection of what is in your heart.¡± This time, it was Cale who looked at his te and continued to eat while Vin was watching him. ¡°I read that on the que at the Gallery.¡± The Gallery in the Henituse territory disyed the works of new sculptors. That statement that was written on the que in the Gallery was something that Vin had personally written. ¡°...Do as you wish. I will reduce the number of people going with you, but, in return, the carriage and everything in it shall be of the highest quality. That is how it should be for us Henituse people.¡± ¡°That is fine with me. Please give me the most expensive stuff.¡± ¡°Great. I will make sure you have a carriage that won¡¯t even hurt your butt as you travel across bumpy roads.¡± ¡°Only the best.¡± Cale could not see it because he was looking at his te, but there was a slight smile on Vin¡¯s face before it disappeared. Count Deruth, who had been watching this from the start, let out a fake cough to cover up his slowly rising smile and asked Cale. ¡°Did you verify the information from Hans regarding the personalities of all the nobles who will be going to the capital?¡± Deruth had used his ownwork, as well as the information guild to purchase information on the other nobles, and had handed it to Hans to give to Cale. ¡°Yes. It was pretty entertaining.¡± It was probably difficult to purchase that file. In fact, it probably cost a fortune. Although it only had about three or four lines about each person, it was precious and expensive to purchase information on nobles. ¡°There are some petty ones, some stupid ones, some smart and scary ones, even some who are desperate for power. Looks like all sorts of people areing this time.¡± Of course, there were also some stupidly nice people, viins, and trash as well. ¡°You read the file I sent you. Ahem. Anyways, do as you please. But Cale.¡± ¡°Yes, father.¡± ¡°I heard a strange rumor.¡± Cale¡¯s shoulders flinched just ever so slightly. ¡°Apparently the man-eating tree, that ck tree, has changed. It is now a white three with beautiful blue leaves. There are even grass growing in that spot where nothing used to grow.¡± The ce that had changed the most in thest four days was none other than the top of the hill in the slums. It was a location where only the ck tree had resided, however, that tree turned white with blue leaves after Cale had resolved its grudge, and it was now a beautiful tree that looked almost divine. ¡°Isn¡¯t it an interesting rumor?¡± ¡°It is. What an interesting rumor.¡± Cale had no intentions of revealing his Ancient Power right now, so he simply pretended to have no knowledge of it. There was no way that Count Deruth did not know about the fact that he went to the slums. However, he would not have any knowledge of the Ancient Power. He would just suspect that something happened with Cale and the man-eating tree. ¡°Yes, but it isn¡¯t that big of a deal. However, you need to pay attention to rumors no matter what you do. There is nothing scarier than human eyes and mouths. However, anything that happens inside the territory is fine for members of our household.¡± ¡°I will keep that in mind.¡± Cale felt like he really could live a peaceful life, as long as he remained in their territory. How great would it be to quicklye back from the capital and live the life of a couch potato? The luxurious breakfast that was made for Cale, who was leaving for the capital, finally came to an end. He received goodbyes from the Count and Countess, who couldn¡¯t watch him leave because they had work to do, and then made eye contact with his siblings, who were awkwardly standing there. ¡°What?¡± His younger brother, Basen, just shook his head at Cale¡¯s question. His younger sister, Lily, slowly approached him. 7 years old. This youngest sibling of his was 11 years apart from him. ¡°P, please have a safe trip.¡± ¡°Thanks. You be safe here too.¡± Lily vigorously nodded her head. ¡°Yes!¡± She then quietly looked at Cale. Cale just casually asked in response to her gaze. ¡°Should I buy you a present while on my trip?¡± ¡°Really?¡± ¡®As I thought. She wanted a present.¡¯ Cale nodded his head as he watched the surprised, amazed, and happy expression all taking turns showing up on Lily¡¯s face. ¡°Yes. What would you like?¡± ¡°A sword.¡± ¡°...What?¡± ¡°Please buy me a sword.¡± ¡®A 7-year-old wants a sword?¡¯ Seeing the shock on Cale¡¯s face, Basen started to speak. ¡°Hyung-nim, Lily¡¯s dream these days is to be a swordsman.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Cale seriously looked toward Lily. The people of this household all had long arms, long legs, and a good physique. Lily was only 7 years old, but she was tall for her age and could easily be a good swordsman if she put in the effort. ¡°I guess it would suit her.¡± Lily¡¯s eyes started to sparkle. ¡°I will buy you an expensive one.¡± Lily started to smile as she lowered her head in embarrassment instead of responding. Cale did not see this, as he looked toward his 15-year-old younger brother, who was looking at him. ¡°You want something too?¡± ¡°A fountain pen.¡± ¡°Got it.¡± The breakfast came to an end once he got the list of presents from his siblings. *** Cale¡¯s expression was odd as he stood in front of the carriage that would take him to the capital. ¡®How odd.¡¯ He had an odd expression as he asked the person standing next to him. ¡°Why is it that their seat is better than my seat?¡± Cale was looking at the expensive and soft cushion next to him, as well as the two kittens sitting on the cushion. ¡°Young master, shouldn¡¯t our precious cats travelfortably on this trip? They are so small and precious.¡± Hans answered as he put the special treats he prepared for the cats in the carriage as well. Cale and Ron both had nk expressions on their faces. ¡®It¡¯s because he has not seen them create fog and fill it with poison.¡¯ Cale called On and Hong to an empty corner of the garden three days ago. ¡®What can you do?¡¯ In response to his question, On created fog while in her cat form, while Hong used a bit of his blood to spread poison into the air. Of course, On was able to control the poisonous fog to prevent Cale from dying. Furthermore, the poison Hong could spread was only at the level of paralysis right now. ¡®You two are quite useful.¡¯ On and Hong proudly answered back after hearing Cale¡¯s praise. ¡®We were able to run away because of our poisonous fog!¡¯ ¡®We are quite useful!¡¯ Starting from that day, On and Hong were able to eat delicious food all day long. Naturally, Hans was happy to provide for them. ¡°Young master, I will be sitting with the driver up top.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Ron jumped up next to the driver, and Cale was about to board as well when Choi Han approached him. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± Choi Han said that he did not want to call Cale young master, instead choosing to call him Cale-nim. ¡°What?¡± ¡°Is it okay for me to not be in the same carriage protecting you?¡± Cale¡¯s expression turned like he had eaten some bitter persimmon. ¡°...Is there...¡± ¡®Is there a reason to do that?¡¯ That was what Cale¡¯s expression was saying, and Choi Han didn¡¯t say anything else, instead just nodding his head. Cale started to squint his eyes while watching Choi Han walk away. ¡®It¡¯s really weird.¡¯ Choi Han¡¯s eyes were still not very clear. His mind still seemed to be full of anger and thoughts of revenge. When Cale mentioned yesterday that they had sent people to Harris Vige, he could see the anger in Choi Han¡¯s eyes. But he felt a little different than before. He wasn¡¯t inplete despair like in the novel, thinking something along the lines of, ¡®The world does not want me to be happy! How could they kill all of my loved ones?!¡¯ That was why it was weird. ¡®He recovered pretty quickly.¡¯ He seemed to be at the stage in the novel when he was traveling with Beacrox, Rosalyn, and Lock, with a sword in his heart but a calm demeanor on the outside. He let it be since it wasn¡¯t bad, but Cale had an oddly bitter feeling in his mouth. It was at that moment. ¡°I don¡¯t think this is your spot.¡± The leader of the envoy, the Vice Captain of the territory¡¯s Knight Brigade, approached Choi Han and started to speak. The Vice Captain looked at Choi Han from head to toe before smirking, like he was looking down at Choi Han. ¡®I knew we would have at least one person like this.¡¯ Cale clicked his tongue. Choi Han had hidden his abilities to that of an average level. The problem was that Choi Han was the first person Cale brought to the Count¡¯s Estate as a guest, and the fact that Count Deruth treated him like an important guest. Adding on the fact that he was going as part of Cale¡¯s guards this time made some people start to dislike and oppose him. They didn¡¯t annoy him visibly because he was still Cale¡¯s guest, but there were a lot of things they were secretly doing to annoy Choi Han. ¡®Young master, I do not think Choi Han-nim is getting along with the other knights who will be going with us to the capital.¡¯ ¡®Is that so?¡¯ ¡®Yes. I think the Vice Captain is responsible for it.¡¯ ¡®I got it Hans. You can stop worrying about it.¡¯ Cale thought about Hans¡¯s report and felt bad, not for Choi Han, but for the Vice Captain. ¡®Soon enough, he¡¯ll realize that his eyes were not just at the ground, butpletely underground.¡¯ It¡¯ll be fine as long as he doesn¡¯t do anything to get beaten up. Cale did not choose to try to resolve their issues. The Vice Captain will not be able to sleep properly once he sees Choi Han¡¯s real skills. How could he sleep when he is extremely scared? ¡°Young master, shall we leave now?¡± The Vice Captain asked Cale, and Cale closed the carriage door as he answered. ¡°Yes. Let¡¯s go.¡± 15 soldiers, 5 knights, and one special guard. Cale¡¯s envoy, which consisted of this protection squad and then some other people, finally started to head toward the capital. Of course, as with most fantasy world travels, it was not a very uneventful trip. Nobody dared to touch Cale¡¯s carriage in the Henituse territory. The carriage did not have the g that represented the family, but the carriage itself had the Golden Turtle, the symbol of the Henituse family, drawn on it. It was representative of the Henituse family¡¯s love for wealth and longevity. However, as soon as they left the Henituse territory, they ran into a situation. ¡®As expected, they really do show up.¡¯ While they were rushing through a mountain range, tens of people suddenly showed up in the valley. ¡°Pay the toll if you want to cross this mountain!¡± ¡°Take out everything you have! If we find anything after you im to have taken everything out, it will be 1 p for every 1 bronze we find!¡± Yes, it was the bandits. There were bound to be bandits in a fantasy story, but the fact that there were tens of them was surprising. They probably relied on their numbers to attack this carriage, which only had 5 knights. Cale looked toward the kitten On, who was yawning and asked. ¡°You think they can¡¯t see the symbol on my carriage?¡± ¡°I guess so.¡± ¡°Idiots! Beginners!¡± Cale nodded his head at Hong¡¯s assessment. He was not afraid of bandits. Why would he be? Knock Knock. The knocking came from the small window by the driver¡¯s seat before the window slightly opened, and Ron looked inside. ¡°Young master, it looks like we will need to take a break. There seem to be quite a lot of rabbits here.¡± Rabbits. Cale shook for a moment. Ron went, ¡®Ah!¡¯ before smiling and added on. ¡°Ah, this rabbit is different from the rabbit I was going to catch for you, young master. Of course, these rabbits will not be caught by me but by other people.¡± Cale was being protected by someone who was scarier than the bandits. He listened to the sound of the bandits¡¯ screamsing from outside the carriage, as he started to calcte the time. ¡°About a day and a half.¡± In about a day and a half, they would arrive around the area where the ck Dragon was being tortured. It was earlier than when Choi Han arrived in the novel. This was the reason he had made them rush forward without taking any breaks. 1. Looking really calm even though he still has a strong desire for revenge internally. 2. Been really blind. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 15: Heading Out (2) Chapter 15: Heading Out (2) 1Chapter 15: Heading Out (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist In order to achieve the results he wanted, Cale had to choose to camp outside. There were no viges along the way until the vige near the hidden cave of the ck Dragon. Meeeeeow. The red Cat Tribe kitten Hong meowed and wagged his tail, as if he was excited. It was because of the delicious smell filling the area. ¡®The joy of the dayes from eating a delicious dinner.¡¯ That was what Cale was thinking. A warm dinner was the signal to end the long and tiring day and the start of a rxing night. Tonight¡¯s main course was a soup with rabbit meat. ¡°Damn it.¡± It was not Ron¡¯s doing. Cale turned his gaze to the side. Choi Han, the person who had caught the rabbits, was happily eating his soup. Meeeeow. Tap. Tap. On and Hong were tapping on his leg, asking him to give it to them if he didn¡¯t want it. Hans had a wide smile on his face as he cautiously approached the two children. ¡°Would our precious kitten-nims like to eat the jerky that I prepared for you? It is very healthy, without any salt or preservatives.¡± Naturally, On and Hong ignored Hans. Hans, who did not know they were part of the Cat Tribe, found that sass to be cute as well and continued to linger around them. Contrary to the fact that they had their first battle, it was a very rxed and peaceful environment. However, the atmosphere around the knights seemed to be a bit odd. They kept peeking toward Choi Han, who was eating his soup next to Cale. The Vice Captain seemed to be full of agony. ¡°Tsk.¡± Cale clicked his tongue. Cale¡¯s party had to fight off tens of bandits today. The one to handle most of those bandits was naturally Choi Han. He did not kill the bandits. However, he had no issues cutting off a limb or leaving them a deep scar. Not only that, he did it in an unbelievable speed too. ¡®Young master, the battle is over.¡¯ The Vice Captain had reported this to Cale with a shocked expression on his face. He had not expected it to end so quickly. The bandits were ones who were pushed out of power in a different area nearby. The bandits they had thought were stupid were at their limits and felt that they could handle five knights because of their numbers. Unfortunately, their first target ended up being Cale¡¯s carriage with Choi Han. The reason the Vice Captain¡¯s face waspletely pale was not because of the strength of the bandits. Choi Han approached next to the Vice Captain and added on. ¡®It was a light battle. Not even enough for a warm-up.¡¯ Cale could see the Vice Captain slightly flinch after hearing Choi Han¡¯s words. He could also see Choi Han smirking while looking at the Vice Captain flinch. ¡®He really isn¡¯t the type to let people do as they please with him.¡¯ There was no way that someone like Choi Han, who had no issues beating up the Count¡¯s son, would be nice and let people just continue to mess with him. ¡°Do you have no appetite?¡± Cale seemed to be frustrated, as Ron approached him with his usual benign smile. He looked back and forth between the rabbit soup and Ron, before suddenly realizing something. This old man enjoyed making fun of him. ¡°Yes. None at all.¡± Choi Han responded to that statement. ¡°Are you feeling unwell?¡± ¡°No, nothing like that.¡± ¡®I would have no issues if you caught anything other than rabbits.¡¯ Cale looked toward Choi Han and waved his hand to tell Choi Han to not mind him. However, Choi Han continued to look toward Cale with a serious gaze. ¡°What are you looking at?¡± ¡°...Was that your first time experiencing a battle?¡± Cale just casually responded back to Choi Han who asked with a serious expression. ¡°What battle? You mean with the bandits earlier?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°Of course. I¡¯ve never seen so many bandits before.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Choi Han nodded his head and quietly mumbled to himself. ¡°...Must have been your first time facing potential death.¡± Ha. One of the soldiers let out a gasp. Ha! Cale let out a loud gasp as if he waspletely shocked. ¡®First time facing potential death my ass. Do you know how nervous I¡¯ve been thest few days because of you?¡¯ That wasn¡¯t even it. Ron¡¯s smile as Choi Han brought back the rabbits, the sight of Beacrox sharpening his cooking knife, Cale was also nervous because of them. Cale started to think about all of the nervous moments he has had since they left the Henituse territory. ¡®Now I really have no appetite.¡¯ He had lost all of his appetite. ng. The spoon in Cale¡¯s hand just fell onto the soup bowl. That was why he didn¡¯t realize that the soldiers were looking at him with an understanding gaze, or that Choi Han had stopped paying attention to everyone around him as he nostalgically thought about the past. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What?¡± Cale was thinking about how he didn¡¯t need to be so nervous anymore because he managed to avoid getting beaten up and also got the Indestructible Shield, when Choi Han¡¯s voice snapped him back to reality. ¡®Why does he keep talking to me?¡¯ ¡°The first time is always difficult to handle.¡± ¡°What are you talking about?¡± As Cale stoically asked back, Choi Han had a slight smile on his face before he asked in a stoic expression. The gaze in his eyes was extremely serious. ¡°Cale-nim, do you not study any martial arts?¡± ¡°No need.¡± ¡°Shouldn¡¯t you at least have the strength to protect yourself?¡± There was concern in that seriousness. Cale wondered why Choi Han was suddenly bing so serious, but decided to answer the question anyway. ¡°I have plenty of ways already.¡± Cale took his gaze off of Choi Han and looked around. 15 soldiers who were stronger than him, and 5 knights who would do well no matter where they went. There were only a few servants aside from them, but Ron, Beacrox, the two kittens, and even deputy butler Hans were much stronger than himself. Cale made eye contact with each of the people before turning back to Choi Han to ask. ¡°You can see them too, right?¡± ¡®This is the protection for a wealthy Count¡¯s son.¡¯ Cale started to smile. He knew that they would all protect him. Of course, he wasn¡¯t sure about Ron or Beacrox, but they would at least prevent him from getting killed by someone. ¡®And they are not the only protection.¡¯ Cale decided to be a little more honest to Choi Han, who was sitting there looking at him. He patted his heart as he answered. ¡°I trust my heart. I will live.¡± Of course. The Indestructible Shield surrounding his heart will protect him. Well, as long as he avoided people like Choi Han that is... Choi Han looked toward Cale with shaky eyes. Meeow. Meow. ¡°Hmm? What are you doing?¡± On and Hong approached Cale and started to push on his legs with their small paws. The ws on their paws hurt, making Cale frown, but the Cat Tribe siblings stopped eating and started to rub their cheeks on Cale¡¯s leg. ck. Choi Han put down his empty soup bowl and stood up from his seat. ¡°...I¡¯ll be practicing with my sword now.¡± ¡°Right after eating?¡± ¡°I feel like I need to get stronger.¡± ¡®...Scary punk. Are you trying to get strong enough to blow the whole Earth away?¡¯ Cale turned away in disgust. At that time, Beacrox approached him with a new dish. ¡°Please enjoy.¡± ¡°Oh! Thanks.¡± Cale looked at the te that was filled with the highest quality spices and highest quality beef steak, and started to smile. ¡°Bitter food and drinks like lemonade are best to restore your appetite.¡± This was the first time Ron had handed him a lemonade since their interaction at the tea shop. Cale just ignored the lemonade because he was excited about the steak. ¡°If everyone has finished eating, we will start our evening training session soon.¡± Cale could hear the Vice Captain¡¯s loud voice and started to think. ¡®The Vice Captain must have been motivated by Choi Han.¡¯ Cale looked at the fired up knights and soldiers as he chowed down on the steak and even the rabbit soup as well. The rabbit soup was pretty good once he tried it. Of course, he adamantly declined the jerky the kittens offered him. There was no seasoning on it so he wouldn¡¯t even touch it. * * * ¡®3 days.¡¯ Cale calcted as they entered the vige. ¡®The ck Dragon will cause a mana explosion in 3 days.¡¯ They were now in a Viscount¡¯s territory that was right next to the Henituse territory. A vi belonging to the Viscount was built in the mountain on the right side of this vige a few years ago. Naturally, while it wasbeled as the Viscount¡¯s vi on the outside, in reality, it belonged to Marquis Stan, the person responsible for making the ck Dragon go crazy. The viscount of this territory was nothing more than a dog of the Marquis. ¡®And in the mountain behind the vi hides the cave with the ck Dragon.¡¯ The ck Dragon causes a mana explosion and sends the cave and the mountain flying. Cale looked at the small peak to the right of the mountain he crossed and clicked his tongue. Venion of Marquis Stan¡¯s family. Cale was thinking about the Marquis¡¯s second son. He was a crazy psycho who crippled his own older brother to rise to the position of heir. That psycho visits the vi every so often to torture the ck Dragon for fun. ¡°Tsk.¡± Hans flinched at Cale clicking his tongue, and quickly brought Choi Han over and started to speak. ¡°Young master, I will take Choi Han-nim and quickly look for an inn. Please wait a moment.¡± The carriage was currently stopped outside of the vige entrance. ¡°Whatever.¡± ¡°We will be right back.¡± Cale nodded his head at Hans¡¯s statement while observing Choi Han. He had a nostalgic look in his eyes. Just why would Choi Han fight with an existence that caused a mana explosion? It was because he could not throw this small and quiet vige away. Harris Vige. This vige was simr to the vige that taught him about both love and hate. That was why he made a move to save the lives of these vige people that he did not even know. Cale started to frown as he called Choi Han over. ¡°Choi Han.¡± ¡°...Yes?¡± ¡°Hurry back.¡± Ah. A small gasp came out of Choi Han¡¯s mouth. This 17-year-old boy who had lived for tens of years started to have an innocent smile on his face as he nodded his head. ¡°Yes sir. I will be right back.¡± Cale motioned as if he was annoyed, but Choi Han bowed before quickly starting to walk toward the vige with Hans. Cale, who preferred this focused Choi Han to the one who had a nk expression, continued to watch him before suddenly starting to frown. He could see a carriage quickly heading in their direction. ¡®I have a bad feeling about this.¡¯ Cale felt like someone with extremely sweaty hands was handing him a poisoned apple. It was a really bitter feeling. The cause of that bitter feeling was soon to be revealed. ¡°Such-¡± Cale could not believe it. He could see an old man who could not manage to avoid the carriage, fall down on the road. He could also see Choi Han rushing toward the old man, as well as the carriage continuing to travel down the road like it was not going to stop. ¡®Such a cliche!¡¯ There was a g hanging on that carriage. A red snake. It was the symbol of Marquis Stan. Cale¡¯s eyes started to shake. It was about to happen. An incident was about to happen. Bang! Choi Han flung himself to rescue the old man, and the momentum forced him to smash into a building wall. Only then did the ck carriage belonging to Marquis Stan finally stop. ¡°Sigh.¡± Cale let out a sigh as he opened the carriage door. It looked like he had no choice but to head over to the site of that cliche event. 1. Remember, Choi Han really doesn¡¯t age If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 16: Heading Out (3) Chapter 16: Heading Out (3) 0Chapter 16: Heading Out (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist ¡°Young master, are you heading over there?¡± Ron approached him as soon as he stepped out of the carriage. ¡°Who will go if I don¡¯t?¡± Ron and the Vice Captain started to chase after Cale, who was heading toward the incident location without any hesitation. The two surrounded Cale, as if the world was going to end soon, but Cale did not care. A man slowly walked out of the other carriage. Venion Stan. Cale started to frown deeply as soon as he saw him. There was only one line in the file that his father Count Deruth gave him regarding Venion Stan¡¯s personality. [A typical and authoritative noble] Cale, well, Kim Rok Soo, could also use the information from, ¡®The Birth of a Hero,¡¯ to evaluate Venion. Your typical viin. However, it was quite a headache to meet that typical viin in real life, than it was as a character in a novel. Cale could not beat someone up for doing something bad or because he didn¡¯t like them like Choi Han could. The situation had already escted a bit by the time Cale arrived. In those few short moments, Choi Han had already be so angry that his shoulders were shaking violently. ¡°How can you get in the way of a noble person like that?¡± ¡°What the hell are you saying when someone could have gotten hurt? Who was in the way? This only happened because you were driving the carriage like a maniac!¡± ¡°Peasants should move out of the way when they see a noble¡¯s carriage. It is not my fault that this peasant was so stupid he just stood there without moving!¡± Choi Han was arguing with one of Venion¡¯sckeys, and Hans, who had been standing next to Choi Han, had a frown on his face as he approached Cale and whispered to into his ear. ¡°Choi Han-nim seems to be extremely agitated.¡± Hans seemed to have already realized that the owner of the carriage belonged to the Marquis¡¯s family. He also seemed to have realized that the person standing behind thatckey was none other than Venion Stan. That narcissist probably only stepped out of the carriage because he saw the symbol of the Henituse family on Cale¡¯s carriage. ¡°Enough.¡± Venion, the man with beautiful blonde hair, gently spoke to hisckey. As soon as Venion¡¯s words came out, theckey quickly moved behind Venion, as if he had never been angry in the first ce. Only Choi Han was left huffing and puffing while consoling the scared old man. Tsk. Cale clicked his tongue. Theckey wasn¡¯t actually angry. He was pretty far away from Cale¡¯s carriage, but just like Venion, he probably saw the Golden Turtle on Cale¡¯s carriage. That was why he was exaggerating, being extremely loud while scolding Choi Han, so that it will draw Cale out to the scene. Hans knew what theckey was doing, which led him to frown while waiting for Cale to arrive. Cale red at Venion and theckey before putting a hand on Choi Han¡¯s shoulder. ¡°You too.¡± ¡°But-!¡± Cale knew why Choi Han was angry. This ce was very simr to Harris Vige, his second home. He was angry at the fact that these people put someone else¡¯s life in danger but didn¡¯t show even an iota of remorse, or any signs of apologizing. However, the victim in this, the old man, was unable to get angry. It was because he did not have anything to support him like Choi Han had. ¡°They could have used another road, but decided not do so and could have hurt someone. How can I just let this be.¡± ¡°Choi Han.¡± Cale put some pressure to push down on Choi Han¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Calm down.¡± Choi Han¡¯s ck pupils looked directly at Cale. Cale could see the angry Choi Han, no, to be specific, the Choi Han that was being held down by the memories of Harris Vige, starting to calm down. After verifying that Choi Han was calming down, Cale turned his gaze to look at Venion Stan. Beautiful blonde hair and a slight smile on his lips. Perfectly ironed attire without a single wrinkle. Boots without a single scuff mark. However, the thing that caught Cale¡¯s attention was the small amount of red at the tip of Venion¡¯s white dress shirt. ¡®Some blood must havended on him while he was enjoying watching the ck Dragon being tortured.¡¯ A crazy bastard. This Venion Stan was someone who enjoyed his meal while watching the torturer whip the ck Dragon until it was covered with blood. ¡°Nice to meet you. Are you someone from Count Henituse¡¯s household?¡± ¡°Yes. Nice to meet you, Young master Venion Stan.¡± As expected, the other party knew of Cale. Venion was not someone who had an easy life in reaching the heir position. The problem was that he was a quite a bit rude. ¡°Mm.¡± Venion Stan was the type that could gently smile at you, but you still feel nothing but disgust for him. ¡°I have not had any reason toe to this area, and have only heard stories, but I heard there was someone in the Count¡¯s family who was a free spirit and did not seem like a noble.¡± Venion smiled as he observed Cale. It was a very annoying look, as if he was trying to start something. ¡°I heard that young master Basen Henituse had been taking part in all of the gatherings of the nobles sincest year-.¡± ¡®Why ask something you already know about?¡¯ Cale was not talented in these kinds of small talk. That was why he smiled brightly and respectfully answered. ¡°Yes. I am indeed that trash.¡± Trash. The moment that word personally came out of Cale¡¯s mouth, Venion¡¯sckey flinched. ¡°One of the trashiest of all of the trash probably.¡± The corner of Venion¡¯s mouth started to twist up. His expression seemed to say that he had never seen such a crazy person before, but Cale did not care. Marquis Stan was someone who was strong enough to lead a faction, but Venion could not do as he pleased with other nobles until he was officially proimed as the future sessor of the Marquis title. A Marquis would normally officially proim a child as their sessor in order to provide protection to that child, as well as have that child start building theirwork at an early age. However, Marquis Stan had not done that yet. ¡®There are still three other children.¡¯ Venion had two younger sisters and one younger brother. The Marquis enjoyed watching thepetition between the siblings. Venion enjoyed watching the ck Dragon being tortured in order to destress from thepetition with his siblings. The Marquis considered thepetition between his children to be like an exciting sport. Naturally, the crippled eldest son was the result of thispetition. It was apletely crazy household. ¡®Our Henituse family is an extremely great family inparison.¡¯ ¡°You¡¯re a very interesting person.¡± Venion just casually responded to Cale¡¯s statement. The wealthy Count, who resided in the outskirts of the northeast without being a part of any faction. Who would try to develop a rtionship with that family? If anything, people would just be greedy to take thatnd as their own. However, Venion didn¡¯t like Cale as a person. The trash eldest son and a pretty smart younger son. Knowing about Cale and Basen¡¯s rtionship made Venion think of his own older brother when looking at Cale. However, Venion kept up the act of a proper noble, and handed the reigns of this incident to Cale. ¡°An unexpected obstacle has made me waste time, but I guess it was a pretty good thing since I got to make your acquaintance, young master Cale.¡± An unexpected obstacle. Venion was referring to the old man. He was disappointed at the fact that his time was wasted because of this old man, and wanted to finish this on a happy note. ¡°But it looks like you need to teach your subordinate to clearly distinguish between the people who have the right to travel across this road and this earth, as well as the people who have the right to make them stop.¡± As a well-known Marquis¡¯s unofficial sessor, this was the most he could do to the trash of a Count¡¯s family. His tone was saying that, although they were both young masters, their statuses werepletely different. Of course, Cale was quietly listening, but he wasn¡¯t the type to pay attention to a dog¡¯s yapping. Venion finished what he had to say and looked toward the most ufortable looking person in the group. Plop. The old man kneeled on the ground once Venion looked in his direction and bowed his head. ¡°M, my apologies.¡± The hands of the old man, who was bowing so low that his head could touch the ground, were shaking. Choi Han¡¯s hands were shaking as he watched the old man apologize. Each territory¡¯s residents would be shaped by the personality of the reigning noble. With the Viscount of this territory being one of Marquis Stan¡¯s dogs, they were also very authoritative and looked down on themoners. The corners of Venion¡¯s lips started to go up. He was satisfied. After observing Venion, Cale called out to him. ¡°Young master Venion.¡± Once Venion turned his head, Cale asked him a question. ¡°Are you done?¡± ¡°...I am.¡± Cale crouched down. His expensive clothes started to touch the ground. He then looked toward the shaking hands of the old man. ¡®It¡¯ll be dangerous if this continues.¡¯ Cale was certain that he heard it. ¡°Huuuuuuuu~.¡± The sound of Choi Han taking a deep breath. That had to be the sound of him holding back his anger. The moment Cale heard it, he could feel chills on the back of his neck, and felt that if this continued any longer, the one to get beaten to a pulp would not be himself, but Venion. It didn¡¯t matter to him whether or not Venion was beaten to a pulp, but Choi Han could not punch a noble while he was associated with him. Cale put a hand on the old man¡¯s shoulder. Venion¡¯s eyebrow started to twitch. A noble¡¯s hand was on amoner¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Old man.¡± The old man seemed to be extremely shocked as he lifted his head to look at Cale. ¡°Y, yes?¡± Cale casually asked. ¡°Where¡¯s the bar?¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± ¡°Where can I get some delicious alcohol? As you¡¯ve heard, I am trash. I don¡¯t feel refreshed in the morning if I don¡¯t have something to drink. I need to drink to make sure tomorrow is another great day. So.¡± Cale lifted the old man¡¯s upper body up. Venion, who had been watching Cale, quietly judged Cale and shook his head after hearing Cale mention alcohol. ¡°Lead the way.¡± Making eye contact with the shaking pupils of the old man, Cale started to frown as he continued. ¡°Are you not going to get up?¡± The old man hesitated and looked back and forth between Venion and Cale. Cale just ignored him as he got back up and reached out the hand that had been on amoner¡¯s shoulder toward Venion. ¡°It was nice meeting you today, Young master Venion.¡± Cale was asking for a handshake. Venion quietly stood there and looked at Cale. At that moment, one of Venion¡¯s servants urgently approached them and whispered quietly to Venion. However, it was loud enough for everyone to hear. ¡°Young master, we have been dyed enough already.¡± ¡°...Do not interrupt a conversation between nobles.¡± Venion looked down at his servant without a smile on his face, and the servant quickly bowed. Venion smiled once again as he grabbed Cale¡¯s hand. ¡°I will just be on my way then, as I am very busy.¡± He then let go. It was a very short handshake. Cale started to smile like a drunk person, as he responded back. ¡°If we happen to meet in the capital, let¡¯s have a drink together.¡± ¡°...I do not think we would appreciate the same thing, but sure.¡± Venion¡¯s smile was lukewarm. Cale decided to do something big to finish this conversation. ¡°Yes. Based on our interaction today, it truly looks like only young master Venion deserves to be the future patriarch of the Stan family. You are a very cool person.¡± Patriarch. That word made Venion¡¯s eyes get cloudy. As Cale expected, Venion started to smile brightly once again, and offered praises for Cale as well. ¡°Young master Cale is also a very interesting and free-spirited person. Let us meet again in the future.¡± ¡®No. I have no desire to see you ever again. Even if I do, it will be from far, far away.¡¯ Cale hid his true feelings and nodded his head. Venion quickly got back on his carriage, as if he was truly busy, and disappeared. Cale watched the carriage disappear before patting Choi Han¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Half of the nobles are like that.¡± Choi Han¡¯s shoulders flinched at Cale¡¯s words, but Cale was already crouching in front of the old man again. ¡°Old man. You can¡¯t get up? Did you hurt your leg?¡± Pat pat. Cale inspected the old man¡¯s body as he said that. He did not seem to be injured. Cale started to observe the man with a confused expression. He then called Choi Han over. ¡°Choi Han.¡± Instead of responding, Choi Han just looked at the back of the crouching Cale. ¡°You take this old man home.¡± ¡°N, no, I am okay. That bar you were talking about.¡± ¡°No need. I¡¯m not in the mood to drink.¡± Cale stopped the old man from trying to lead him to a bar, and looked toward Choi Han, who was standing next to him. ¡°Since you saved him, might as well do it all the way and take him safely back home.¡± Choi Han¡¯s mouth opened and closed a couple of times, but he could not say anything. At that moment, the old man¡¯s voice filled Cale¡¯s ears. ¡°My ce sells alcohol.¡± ¡°Hmm? Old man, your ce was a bar?¡± Cale¡¯s eyes showed that he was really surprised. The old man awkwardly smiled, but continued to speak in a slightly more rxed expression. ¡°Yes, sir. It is this vige¡¯s only inn. It has a bar and a restaurant as well.¡± ¡°Since it is the only inn, that must be the best ce. Hans!¡± Even without Cale saying anything else, Hans quickly approached the old man and helped him up, before starting to ask about the inn. Once the two of them started to move, things started to get rowdy around them. Ron quickly approached Cale and brushed the dirt off Cale¡¯s clothes. The Vice Captain and the rest of the group headed toward the vige entrance. The only people left there were Cale and Choi Han. ¡°...Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°Are you not angry?¡± ¡°About what?¡± Choi Han hesitated for a moment, and could not continue speaking. Cale shrugged his shoulders as he started to speak. ¡°The fact that he looked down on me? Or how he made such an unbelievable statement to you? How he almost killed that old man and, instead of apologizing, said that he was an obstacle?¡± Cale¡¯s voice was calm and firm. He did not seem angry at all. In fact, it sounded indifferent. Cale continued to speak. ¡°Do you have to keep moving when you see someone in front of you? Why didn¡¯t you try to avoid him? Don¡¯t you see that you could have hurt the old man? How can you casually say that a person was an obstacle when you almost killed him?¡± Choi Han paid attention to Cale, who was looking at a faraway mountain range. At the same time, he made sure to listen to Cale¡¯s every word. Cale continued to speak firmly. ¡°Venion, why is the old man apologizing to you? You should properly apologize to him.¡± Cale could speak like Choi Han, and there were times he wanted to do that. But. ¡°I am not someone who can speak like that. Nor do I want to. I¡¯m also not that angry.¡± But this was not the time. Cale knew that this was one of the things that made Choi Han look cool, but he did not want to look cool like that. The old man wasn¡¯t injured, and he didn¡¯t do anything that would get the de pointed toward his family. The fact that he himself looked bad would be beneficial to Basen, so it was good anyways. ¡°Also.¡± Cale was someone who always returned the favor, no matter how long it took. If someone looked down on him or does something to him, he will always get his revenge. ¡°That bastard will probably soon be kicked out of his house.¡± ¡°...Huh?¡± Choi Han could tell that the bastard Cale was referring to was Venion. That was why Choi Han showed a rare shocked expression on his face, as he looked toward Cale. Cale had a mischievous smile on his face. The two kittens, who were approaching him silently, halted their movement. Cale¡¯s smile grewrger as he continued to look toward the mountain to the right of the vige. He thought to himself the thing he could not tell Choi Han. ¡®I n on snatching that bastard¡¯s dragon.¡¯ Once the dragon is gone, Venion will have to face the wrath of the Marquis, and would have a new obstacle in his way of bing the family patriarch. Shouldn¡¯t someone who doesn¡¯t know when to stop on the road face at least one obstacle? Cale was willing to put arge obstacle in Venion¡¯s way. Of course, it would be done in secret. He casually spoke to Choi Han, who was looking at him with curiosity. ¡°If you¡¯re curious, you can help me out.¡± ¡°Whatever it is, I definitely want to help.¡± Choi Han started to smile as well. It was a pretty evil smile for such a good-natured person, but the kittens were intrigued by that smile as well. Cale looked toward the mountain that was supposed to blow up in three days time, and started to mumble. The fact that he was looked down upon by Venion, as well as the blood on Venion¡¯s sleeves and the sight of the old man bowing to Venion were all still on Cale¡¯s mind. ¡°You won¡¯t regret it.¡± He will be able to pay him back for it. ¡°You definitely won¡¯t regret it.¡± If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 17: Heading Out (4) Chapter 17: Heading Out (4) 0Chapter 17: Heading Out (4) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist ¡°Young master, this is the best room we have.¡± ¡°Seems eptable.¡± The old man led Cale¡¯s group to his inn. The exterior of the inn looked as rustic as the vige, but it had everything you would need, probably because the merchants visiting the Henituse territory stayed at this inn on their travels. ¡°This is the first time we have had a noble staying with us. Please look favorably upon us, even if it iscking quite a bit, and just consider it as a ce where lesser beings live.¡± Cale stared at the old man. He seemed morefortable than when talking to Venion Stan, but he still seemed scared at the fact that a noble would be staying at his inn. It was fine for him to have a little bit of anxiety, but too much was ufortable for Cale as well. ¡®It¡¯s no good like this.¡¯ Cale patted the old man¡¯s shoulder and tried to calm him down. ¡°Old man. Rx. I don¡¯t like people who put themselves down like that. This is the ce that people whoe and go from our territory stay to rest. There is no way such a ce will becking.¡± The old man¡¯s pupils started to shake. He wet his upper lip with his tongue, before finally starting to speak after a bit of hesitation. ¡°Young master, are there a lot of good people like you in the Henituse territory?¡± ¡°What the hell are you talking about?¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± ¡°I am the biggest trash in our territory. Almost anybody you find will have a better personality than me.¡± ¡°Ah.¡± The old man let out a gasp. On and Hong, who had taken control of the couch in the room, were meowing and shaking their heads, but nobody seemed to notice. ¡°You can go do what you have to do.¡± The old man bowed deeply at Cale¡¯s dismissal and left the room. Cale found it annoying that the old man still seemed to be stiff, but decided not to care. Knock knock knock. Someone else was knocking on the door. ¡°Come in.¡± The door opened, and deputy butler Hans brought a small box inside. ¡°Young master, you asked only for this box, right?¡± ¡°Yes. Hand it over.¡± Deputy butler Hans showed curiosity as he handed the box to Cale. It was the only luggage Cale personally brought with him. He would just assume there was alcohol or snacks inside if it was a normal box, but this box was not normal. It was the highest quality magic box with a magic lock on it. The seal on the magic box was the logo of the Flynn Merchant Guild, one of the threerge merchant guilds, and one that had an intimate rtionship with the Henituse family. Cale casuallymented while looking at Hans. ¡°Isn¡¯t a butler not supposed to show their emotion on their face? Especially curiosity?¡± ¡°One of the proper etiquettes of a butler is to show all of their emotions to their master.¡± ¡°Funny man.¡± ¡°I guess I am a bit funny.¡± For someone who didn¡¯t want to go to the capital other than for the kittens, Hans was a bit impudent, but Cale still thought he was much more personable than the other butler candidates. Seeing Hans starting to get used to him, Cale just responded like normal. ¡°Get out.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡± And Hans left immediately, as usual. However, he had a question about their travels before closing the door. ¡°Will we be staying here for three days?¡± ¡°Yes. Take care of everything.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡± Hans responded as he closed the door. Other than the Vice Captain taking charge of the envoy¡¯s safety, Hans was responsible for everything else. However, he did not show any struggles in doing so, and efficiently took care of everything. ¡°He seems like a good butler.¡± The silver kitten, On, said that as she approached Cale. Cale nodded his head. Then, the red kitten, Hong, followed behind. ¡°It doesn¡¯t seem that hard for him either.¡± Cale agreed with that statement as well. Ron was one thing, but other than Ron, Hans was the one who had the least difficulty dealing with Cale. He was scared of Cale, but did not find him to be difficult. ¡®He¡¯s a pretty decent butler.¡¯ Cale brushed aside the kittensing toward him and opened the box. The method of opening a box with a magic lock was simple. Cale¡¯s fingerprint. That was the only key that could open this particr box. Cale put his index finger on the center of the magic seal. Beep. Click. The box made a small noise before opening. Inside the box were the items Cale had prepared during the four days prior to leaving for the capital. ¡°I¡¯m really curious about what this is.¡± ¡°Really curious.¡± Cale ignored the two pairs of golden pupils looking at him, and just vaguely answered. ¡°Things that will help rescue a poor soul, screw over some douchebags, and prevent me from getting hurt.¡± On and Hong looked up at him with curiosity, but Cale just caressed the items inside the box with satisfaction. He recalled the conversation he had with Billos, the Flynn Merchant Guild¡¯s bastard, before he left. ¡®Young master, just where do you n on using these things?¡¯ ¡®I don¡¯t see why I have to exin that to you.¡¯ ¡®...I see. But it is going to cost quite a bit to purchase all of these items.¡¯ ¡®...Is it possible to rent them?¡¯ ¡®For you, of course, it is possible.¡¯ The majority of the items inside the box were magic tools. Cale had expected them to be expensive, but it really was too much. Cale had to use up all of the allowances he had earned from his father. He also had to return it all to Billos once he got to the capital. ¡®Annoying. I didn¡¯t want to get involved with him at the capital, but I have no other choice.¡¯ ¡®Two of the items are not able to be rented out to outsiders. I rented them in my name, for you. So you must return these to me at the capital. In person.¡¯ ¡®Sure.¡¯ Cale grabbed one of the items in the box. It was a round, ck orb with a lot of symbols engraved on it. The red kitten Hong put his paws on Cale¡¯s knee to ask. ¡°Really curious about this.¡± ¡°A Mana Disturbance Tool. It is worth almost a billion gallon.¡± Gasp. Both On and Hong let out a gasp. ¡°It cost 20 million gallons just to rent it.¡± Hong slowly lowered the paws that were on Cale¡¯s knee, before going toward the corner of the bed with his sister, On. They were trying to keep as much distance as possible from the ck orb. Cale recalled the information about the orb. Billos had found exactly the item Cale was looking for. ¡®It causes a disturbance in the flow of mana within a certain range, making all magic tools stop working. It is also sturdy enough that, even if something like a mountain blowing up happens, it will not break.¡¯ ¡®Something like a surveince tool will break right away then?¡¯ ¡®Of course. However, you do need to install this 27 hours in advance. It is created to slowly infuse a force that will disrupt the mana flow so that it will not be noticed by mages.¡¯ ¡®How long will itst?¡¯ ¡®40 minutes. Isn¡¯t it great? Of course, if there are mages nearby, they will be able to resolve the issue within 5 - 10 minutes.¡¯ ¡®I will keep that in mind.¡¯ The corner of Cale¡¯s lips started to go up. It was the most expensive item he rented from Billos, but he will have many uses for it on this trip. ¡®I really like how durable it is.¡¯ The Flynn Merchant Guild was a very useful ce. Cale smiled with satisfaction, before throwing this ck orb, that was smaller than the size of a toddler¡¯s fist, toward the kittens crouching in the corner. ¡°Huk!¡± Meeeow! One of them gasped, while the other meowed and avoided the ck orb, but in the end, they had to sit quietly in front of Cale with the ck orb in front of their eyes. ¡°You know how to read a map right?¡± On tapped her tail on the ground in response. ¡°Of course. We were potential sessors to the Fog Cat Tribe at one point.¡± ¡°Right. My sister is right.¡± Cale took out another important item, a map, from the box. It wasn¡¯t very detailed, just having the generalndmarks around the Henituse territory. Most of the merchants going to and from the Henituse territory used this map. ¡°We are in this vige right now.¡± Cale pointed to the mountain to the right of the vige. ¡°You see this mountain?¡± ¡°I see it.¡± ¡°Very easy to see.¡± This was what Billos had said. ¡®Ah. The range is simr to the durability.¡¯ One mountain. ¡°If you go toward this mountain, you will see a vi in the distance. Behind that is a cave.¡± There were no mages around the ck Dragon right now. The people of the Magic Tower respected Dragons as the greatest magic race, and did not wish for humans to torture and domesticate a dragon. They considered it to be a big disgrace to magic. The people around the cave and the vi were knights and soldiers that the Marquis trusted, as well as the people who do the dirty work for them. ¡°Don¡¯t go near there at all. You cannot get caught.¡± Cale had heard about these two children¡¯s situation. That was why he was confident they could do this, but he still wanted to give them a warning. It would be bad if their curiosity led them to go around the cave. ¡°There is something being tortured in there. We¡¯re going to rescue him, so you have to be careful.¡± ¡°Something?¡± ¡°Yes. It is even younger than you, Hong.¡± ¡°...Even younger than me?¡± ¡°Yes. 4 years old.¡± Of course, that 4 year old was strong enough to send On or Hong flying once the mana restriction chains were removed. ¡°We¡¯re going to save him?¡± On and Hong¡¯s eyes lit up as they pressed down on the bed with their paws. ¡°Save? Sure. Just stay in your cat form and go bury this orb in the mountain without getting caught.¡± There should be close to no chance of getting caught in their cat forms. Cale put the ck orb in a small pouch, before putting it over On¡¯s neck like a ne. ¡°Where should we bury it?¡± ¡°Anywhere on the mountain.¡± ¡°Really, anywhere?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The siblings looked at each other before nodding their heads. ¡°Easy.¡± ¡°We even managed to get past our Cat Tribe¡¯s elders to escape.¡± Cale agreed with them. ¡°It should be easy for the two of you. You two have enough skill for it. I wouldn¡¯t ask someone useless to do something like this in the first ce.¡± The two kittens looked up at Cale with their golden pupils again. This pair of siblings, who were almost killed by their own tribe for not having abilities, even though they never got a chance to learn, were starting to get emotional. Their tails were wagging, and they crunched their noses to hold back their tears. Cale understood what these two were thinking and sternly continued. ¡°I will give you as much beef as you want once you sessfully return.¡± The two siblings immediately jumped through the window and stealthily headed into the mountain. Naturally, the siblings did as Cale expected and earned their reward. They were able to have a 10-tier beef steak to themselves. The next day, Cale drank the lemonade that he had now gotten used to drinking, and asked Choi Han. ¡°Have you ever seen a dragon?¡± If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 18: Saw A Dragon (1) Chapter 18: Saw A Dragon (1) 0Chapter 18: Saw A Dragon (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist ¡°...A dragon?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°I¡¯ve seen something simr once.¡± ¡®Simr, my ass.¡¯ Cale knew what Choi Han was talking about when he said something simr. Forest of Darkness. He was talking about the vicious monsters deep inside the Forest of Darkness. Among those terrifying monsters were creatures that were somewhere between lizards and dragons. Choi Han had killed that dragon-like monster as soon as he advanced from the middle stage to the final stage of his Dark Destruction Sword Art. ¡°You did? How was it?¡± Cale pretended to not know about the event, and asked Choi Han. Choi Han was the only other person in Cale¡¯s room right now. ¡°...It was a monster.¡± ¡°How so?¡± ¡°Its appearance, its strength, everything. It was a monster in all aspects.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Cale nodded his head and continued to speak. But his actions and his words werepletely opposite. ¡°Then you have not seen a dragon.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± ¡°Dragons are like people.¡± ck. Cale put the cup with the lemonade that was both sweet and sour down on the table. He then responded to Choi Han, who was looking at him with curiosity. ¡°Dragons, Beast people, Dwarves, Elves, they are all like humans. Why? Because they also have emotions and lives.¡± That aspect wasn¡¯t important to Cale. His main point started from here. ¡°However.¡± Choi Han might have noticed Cale¡¯s sudden change in demeanor. He sat up straight and focused on what Cale had to say. ¡°Such an existence has fallen into darkness since it was born. The only thing currently lighting up the darkness in its life is torches, and it has never even seen the light of the sun. What kind of life do you think it is having?¡± Tap. Cale tapped the table with his index finger. ¡°It is being forced to be an existence without rationality.¡± Tap. He tapped on the table once again. ¡°It has had to suffer through its loneliness, without any family or anything to lean on.¡± Tap. Choi Han¡¯s gaze fell every time Cale¡¯s finger tapped the table. Choi Han¡¯s fists were clenched underneath the table, to the point you could see his veins starting to re up. Cale did not know about this, as he continued on. ¡°It is tortured and abused every day, and is only left alone when it is barely alive.¡± Choi Han¡¯s expression stiffened, and anger was in his eyes. Cale knew Choi Han would react this way. There was no way a good person like this would not get angry after hearing such a story. He should also have figured out why Cale brought up such a story in the first ce. Cale took another sip of his lemonade, before finishing up his story. ¡°And that existence is nearby.¡± A short silence filled the room. Cale looked out the window, before slowly turning his gaze to look at Choi Han. He didn¡¯t know what Choi Han was thinking about, but his whole body was surrounded by a bloody aura. ¡®Is he getting angry at the fact that it is abused because he is a good person?¡¯ Contrary to Cale¡¯s hypothesis, Choi Han was currently recalling the tens of years he had to survive on his own in the Forest of Darkness. That was why the silence continued for a while. Finally, Choi Han made eye contact with Cale and asked. ¡°Will you save it and try to tame it?¡± ¡°Are you crazy?¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Cale acted on reflex, and asked back in shock. Choi Han also became shocked at Cale¡¯s questioning his sanity. ¡°Why would I try to tame it?¡± Cale waved his hand around like Choi Han was crazy. There was no way that a dragon that was abused by humans would be willing to serve a human. In fact, it probably was full of hate and disgust for any and all humans. Even if that human was the person that saved it. Dragons believe that they are above all creatures, including humans. This is a natural instinct for dragons, so, even without being in contact with any other Dragon in its whole life, it will still feel this way. That was why dragons cannot grow under humans. This attitude makes it impossible to domesticate and train Dragons without using torture and abuse to break down its mind. ¡®Dragons are born extremely arrogant. But, most importantly, if I raise a dragon...¡¯ Cale could feel it. He felt like he would get wrapped up in some annoying incidents if he raised a dragon. There were less than twenty total dragons in the Eastern and Western continentsbined. Raise one of those dragons? That was pretty much the same as saying, ¡®I will be at the center of all the happenings of the continents.¡¯ It was also a dragon that was supposed to die. It would be better for it to go off into its own little world and not get in anyone¡¯s way. Cale was definitely against this dragoning with them. As long as he gets rid of the mana restriction chains, this four year old dragon will live a much better life than Cale. Dragons weren¡¯t called the kings of the world since birth for no reason. ¡°Then?¡± ¡°Why are you asking such an obvious question?¡± Caleughed at Choi Han¡¯s question before he answered. ¡°Let it go so it can live a free and peaceful life. Shouldn¡¯t a dragon live like a dragon?¡± ¡°...I see.¡± Choi Han¡¯s clenched fists slowly started to rx. ¡°Then will we be saving that dragon?¡± ¡°Yes. So I need your help.¡± ¡°Anything. I really will do anything to help.¡± Cale was worried that Choi Han would escte the situation, and shook his head. ¡°No need to go overboard. I have no ns to kill anybody, if possible, either. We will do it as quietly as possible.¡± ¡°Cale-nim, you really-¡± Choi Han started to speak with admiration, but Cale looked at the clock, before cutting him off and saying what he needed to say. ¡°Go tell Ron to prepare some alcohol on the first floor.¡± ¡°Are diff- what?¡± Cale was prepared to drink first. He started drinking even though it was the middle of the day. Choi Han just sat there with confusion on his face while looking around. Everybody other than himself looked peaceful. In the middle of that peaceful environment was Cale Henituse, drinking bottle after bottle. The growing flush on his face made anybody who was watching him know that he was drunk. ¡°Is it okay to let him drink so much?¡± Choi Han looked toward Hans, who was next to him, and asked. Deputy butler Hans was delivering food to On and Hong, who were in their cat form. He still did not know that they were part of the Cat Tribe. He then refreshingly answered Choi Han¡¯s question. ¡°Yes! There is nothing in his hand. Thus, it is safe! He promised he won¡¯t throw any bottles!¡± Choi Han was talking about Cale¡¯s safety, but Hans was referring to themselves. Choi Han just shut up after seeing the conversation take an odd turn, and moved away from Hans. It was better to leave Hans alone when he was next to the kittens. Instead, Choi Han looked toward Cale to make sure he was safe. ¡°Owner. Your alcohol tastes great! Much better than I expected.¡± Cale didn¡¯t seem to know that Choi Han was looking at him, instead focusing on just praising the alcohol. They had been drinking for two hours already. There were some who were not drinking, just in case something happened, but the majority of the envoy was enjoying the festive atmosphere. ¡®They were all so nervous for the first hour, tsk.¡¯ When Cale had ordered them to gather, as he would be drinking, the soldiers showed up with their helmets on. Cale couldn¡¯t believe it, but told them that he will not throw any bottles to help them rx. ¡°This vige may be small, but there are a lot of mountains around it. The alcohol is a special alcohol I made with fruit and herbs from the mountain. That is why it is a bit expensive.¡± As the old man mentioned, the alcohol really did taste great. Cale admired the alcohol, and lifted the bottle up to the old man. ¡°Do you have a lot of these?¡± ¡°Yes. Quite a bit.¡± ¡°Then get some more and send it around to everybody here.¡± ¡°Young master, you don¡¯t need to-¡± The Vice Captain shouted out with a flushed face, but his eyes were focused on the bottle in Cale¡¯s hand. The rest of the soldiers were looking at the same thing. Naturally, Cale was aware of what they were thinking. ¡°Just drink. I¡¯m telling you to drink. Got it?¡± The eyes of the soldiers who were present all started to sparkle. It was the first time they became excited to see a bottle in Cale¡¯s hands. Cale watched the excited inn owner bring alcohol and snacks for everyone there with a sharp gaze. Cale Henituse. This human had a strong alcohol tolerance. Everybody thought he had a low tolerance because his face flushed easily and he caused a ruckus whenever he drank, but the truth was that he did all those things without being drunk at all. That was why Cale¡¯s head was perfectly clear right now. He drank for another thirty minutes or so before looking toward Choi Han and starting to speak. ¡°Choi Han. Come support me. I¡¯m going up to rest now.¡± ¡°Young master, I will do it.¡± ¡°It¡¯s okay. Vice Captain, rest a bit today. The rest of the soldiers as well. Didn¡¯t you fight in a battle yesterday? This is not a dangerous area, and I feel bad for the soldiers on guard duty, but the rest of you can rx and enjoy yourselves.¡± ¡°Young master-¡± ¡°I¡¯m tired. Bye.¡± It would beplicated if the Vice Captain or the others followed him. Thankfully, none of them approached after seeing Choi Han supporting him. It was probably because Choi Han did not drink at all, and was also the strongest person there. They had nothing to worry about since such a person was going to be guarding Cale. ¡®Just one person left.¡¯ It was easy to avoid the guards at the gate and around the inn, but Ron was still left. Hans and Ron would nevere into the room if he told them not toe in. However, the difference between the two was that Hans was not skilled enough to know if Cale was still in the room, while Ron was so skilled that he would easily be able to tell if Cale snuck out. ¡®It¡¯s not like that old man will care about what I am doing.¡¯ Realistically, Ron would not care whether Cale snuck out and what he did once he snuck out. That was how he had been until now. However, Cale didn¡¯t want things to get annoying in the future, so he decided to tell Ron in advance. Seeing Ron follow behind Choi Han, Cale quickly informed Ron. ¡°Ron, I¡¯m going to go out to y. It¡¯s a secret. Got it?¡± This old man liked to drink, but did not drink a single drop tonight. Instead, he was just staring at Cale all night. He really was a scary person. This benign smile that Ron was giving him right now was even scarier. ¡°I understand. I will be waiting for you.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t.¡± ¡®Wait for me, my ass.¡¯ As expected, Ron agreed without saying anything else. Cale continued to be supported by Choi Han as he went into his room. ¡°I¡¯m going to be resting. Hans, Ron, don¡¯te in to wake me up unless it is an emergency. You know how I get when someone messes with my sleep, right?¡± In the past, a servant received a barrage of swearing when they had to wake Cale up in Ron¡¯s ce. Although Cale did not physically hit anybody, that servant went around the estate telling all the other servants about how he felt like he was hit by a flurry of swear punches. ¡°Of course I do, young master. Please rest well.¡± ¡°Young master, this Ron will be standing right outside your room.¡± Cale¡¯s expression stiffened at Ron¡¯s response, but he watched the two of them leave, before stealthily giving an order to Choi Han. ¡°Use the windows to quietlye back to my room.¡± Choi Han nodded his head and quickly followed the other two out of the room and closed the door. Meeeeeow. ¡°Is it time now?¡± Cale nodded his head at On and Hong, who followed him up to his room, and immediately opened the box. Click. The magic lock clicked open, and Cale removed an outfit from inside the box. Once he finished changing, Choi Han entered through the window, and then his eyes opened wide in shock. ¡°Cale-nim?¡± Before putting on the mask, Cale threw the ck outfit in his hand toward Choi Han. ¡°You wear it too.¡± The orb from yesterday should temporarily stop the magic recording devices, but that was not enough. Cale did not want to get caught. That was why he had been drinking since the middle of the day and prepared these outfits. ¡°What is this?¡± The ck outfit had a single red star and five smaller white stars surrounding it on the chest area. ¡®What is it? The outfit of the secret organization.¡¯ ¡®The Birth of a Hero¡¯ novel clearly and urately exined the outfit of the secret organization that Choi Han runs into time after time. This outfit was specially ordered by Cale following the exnation as urately as possible. Just to be on the safe side, Cale even had the outfit created separately, and personally added the stars. That was why it was a bit crude up close, but it was pretty decent from a distance. People who see this outfit will not remember the crudeness of the stitching, they will just remember that it was, ¡®A ck outfit with one red star and five white stars.¡¯ For Venion, who has not personally met the secret organization like the Marquis did, the report from the subordinates who saw this outfit will definitely give him a significant headache and anger. ¡°...Are we doing something bad?¡± Choi Han asked once more after seeing Cale not respond. Seeing Cale with the ck mask on as well definitely made him seem like a viin. ¡°Yes. We are doing something bad.¡± Cale started to smile underneath the mask. ¡°We¡¯re doing something bad to Venion.¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Choi Han seemed to finally understand, as he quickly pointed to the other mask in Cale¡¯s hand. ¡°Please give it to me.¡± Even good people will have someone they don¡¯t like and want to screw over. That was no different for this 17 year old, who spent tens of years alone in this world. ¡°Ah, and these kids are from the Cat Tribe. They are beast people.¡± Cale casually introduced On and Hong to Choi Han as if it was nothing, and they just simply exchanged greetings as well. The Cat Tribe children, who were sensitive to a person¡¯s true character, already had a good idea about Choi Han¡¯s strength, and Choi Han had noticed they were not your average cats during their travel. ¡°He¡¯s Choi Han, this is On, that is Hong. End of introductions. Everybody get ready.¡± There was a short time to get ready before Cale ordered Choi Han, who had juste out of the restroom wearing the same ck outfit and ck mask. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± He then added on, as he stood in front of the second story window. ¡°Carry me when you go out the window. I can¡¯t jump so far down without getting hurt.¡± Choi Han let out a sigh for the first time in front of Cale. On and Hong approached Choi Han and patted him with their paws to console him. Cale urged them on once again. ¡°Let¡¯s hurry.¡± The group that safely exited the inn headed for the mountain with the Viscount¡¯s Vi and the Dragon¡¯s prison. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 19: Saw A Dragon (2) Chapter 19: Saw A Dragon (2) 2Chapter 19: Saw A Dragon (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist The location that the kittens, On and Hong, buried the ck orb was out of Cale¡¯s expectations. The Viscount¡¯s vi was 30 meters away from the dragon¡¯s cave. On and Hong had buried the ck orb 50 meters away from that cave, in an area filled with trees and shrubs, making it very difficult for the orb to be located. ¡°You two are kind of amazing.¡± ¡°Something like this is a piece of cake.¡± On was saying it was easy, but Cale could see On¡¯s nose twitching in joy. Cale, Choi Han, On, and Hong crouched around the location that the ck orb, officially known as the Mana Disturbance Tool, was located, and looked toward the cave entrance that was 50 meters away, as well as the Viscount¡¯s vi that was farther away. ¡°You remember the n?¡± Cale had exined the n on their way over. Realistically speaking, there wasn¡¯t much of a n. ¡°There are a total of 6 people on guard at this time.¡± Cale recalled the information he read in, ¡®The Birth of a Hero.¡¯ The ck Dragon was smart, like most dragons. It had been gathering information for the four long years it was held captive, and there was a reason it attempted its escape two dayster at around this time. There were, approximately, a total of 30 people residing in the vi. Originally, there were close to 100 people, but it slowly went down as they realized during thest four years that nobody really came to this area. Of course, among the 30 people, there were 3 high-leveled knights at the Vice Captain¡¯s level, as well as 7 mid-leveled knights. There were also soldiers, the torturer, and randomborers. The number of people here showed just how much attention the Marquis has been putting onto this location. However, Cale had Choi Han. Choi Han was someone who could take down the strongest knight in the Roan Kingdom in 10 moves. Someone like that was on their side. ¡°Let me exin one more time. There is one high-leveled knight and two mid-leveled knights at the cave entrance, as well as two soldiers. Inside the cave, there is just one high-leveled knight, and the torturer is at the end of the cave.¡± Choi Han flinched after hearing the word torturer, but Cale did not care. Cale did not care to know about the things that were going through Choi Han¡¯s mind right now. The important thing was that the ck orb will activate soon, and that they needed to move quickly in response. ¡°The magic recording devices located from the vi to the cave entrance will not work for 40 minutes thanks to the ck orb that On and Hong buried. That is the same for the rms, magic traps, and anything else. Nothing will work for 40 minutes.¡± They needed to domesticate this dragon, the greatest magic using creature in the world, but they could not ask any mages for help. That was why Marquis Stan chose to fill this area with magic items instead. The reason that there were only a few guards around the entrance was also because they trusted their magic items. That was why the dragon had no choice but to cause a mana explosion to escape. ¡®An eye for an eye, and money for money.¡¯ Since the Marquis used money, Cale used money as well. Cale patted the magic bag on his waist. This was a magic bag that allowed you to store a lot of items. Inside this bag were all sorts of magic items, useful tools, and objects. ¡°I just need to take out the guards?¡± Naturally, Choi Han would be doing the battling. Why would Cale even try to fight when such a strong person was next to him? Cale thought paper-cuts hurt a lot, so he didn¡¯t want to even think about getting cut by a sword. ¡°Yes. You are the only one I can rely on to cover my back.¡± ¡®At least for now.¡¯ Cale looked at Choi Han with a serious expression, and Choi Han nodded his head and sincerely responded back. ¡°I will definitely live up to your expectations.¡± ¡°Yes. As I mentioned, make sure they see our outfit and then knock them out. Don¡¯t kill them, and don¡¯t show them your sword art. You remember what to do after that, right?¡± Choi Han¡¯s unique transparent ck aura should be easily camouged by the darkness, if he uses it carefully. Cale believed Choi Han should understand, since he had already told him many times. ¡°Yes, I remember it all.¡± ¡°Good, I¡¯ll leave it to you.¡± Cale patted Choi Han¡¯s shoulders, before handing him the voice changing device. It would be bad if he had to talk during the fight and they recognized his voice. ¡°It¡¯s expensive, so don¡¯t break it.¡± ¡°Got it. You do not need to worry about it.¡± Cale then looked toward the kittens. Cale responded to their wagging tails, that seemed to be asking for something. ¡°I will give you meat once it is over.¡± That did not seem to be the right answer, as they snorted and turned away. Cale didn¡¯t think much about it, instead verifying the time with his watch. ¡®Five minutes left.¡¯ The sky had already gotten dark, and it was night time. Cale then recalled the conversation he had with Billos. ¡®The magic items that have been influenced by the Mana Disturbance Tool will instantly stop working, and most of them will turn off to prevent it from blowing up. However, the highest quality magic items will start beeping to signal that they are broken. It isn¡¯t like rm magic, instead, it is more like a clock rm.¡¯ ¡®It will probably be loud?¡¯ ¡®I don¡¯t know where you n on using it, but it should be loud enough for the enemy to hear.¡¯ Billos started to smirk and continued on. ¡®However, if there are a lot of magic items in the area, it will probably get chaotic with all of the rms going off at the same time.¡¯ Chaotic was enough for Cale. ¡°Get ready.¡± The kittens also covered themselves with charcoal to cover the color of their furs. They then left Cale¡¯s side and disappeared into the darkness, such that Cale could no longer see them. The two of them would not be showing themselves in front of the enemies today. However, Cale knew that they would follow the n and be around him. Choi Han folded up the handkerchief he was using to clean his de, and put it in his pocket. Once all of the preparations were finished, Cale stood up. Brrrrrrrrrrrring. Something started to vibrate right underneath where Cale had been sitting. The ck orb had started to activate. Click. Click. The seconds hand of Cale¡¯s watch slowly approached the set time. And finally, thest click. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± At Cale¡¯s order, Choi Han followed the n and ran ahead quickly, while On started to create fog in the area. Cale was at the center of the fog, making it difficult to see him. At the same time, Brrrrrrrrrrrrrrrring- The ck orb finally activated. ¡°I guess they aren¡¯t all highest quality magic items.¡± Some of the magic items started to ring loudly to sound their status. Cale followed behind Choi Han with the fog surrounding him, and headed toward the cave. Starting now, it was a battle against time. Choi Han was already fighting against the knights in front of the cave. ¡®Scary bastard.¡¯ In that short amount of time, the soldiers already had injuries on their arms and legs, and were knocked out on the floor. ¡°Who are you? How dare youe to this ce!¡± Choi Han easily dodged the attack of the high-leveled knight. He then took a step forward and made a deep cut on the side of the knight. He then avoided the blood spurting out of the cut, and used his elbow to attack the knight¡¯s back, followed by the back of the knight¡¯s neck. The knight fainted instantly. ¡°Shit! What the hell is going on?!¡± The high-leveled knight inside the cave soon showed up as well. ¡°Poison.¡± Cale spoke through the voice changing device. The fog surrounding him started to expand, and Hong started to stealthily move around and spread the poison to paralyze the enemy. The fainted individuals would not be able to move for a while, even if they did wake up. Cale then made eye contact with the high-leveled knight and said one word. ¡°Cover.¡± Choi Han instantly stood in front of Cale and darted toward the cave entrance. Cale followed behind him. ¡°Block them!¡± At the high-leveled knight¡¯s shout, two mid-leveled knights immediately charged toward Choi Han. Their swords started to glow, showing that the knights had inputted their aura into their swords. However, those two swords were instantly cut down. ng. ng. The upper half of both swords fell down to the ground. ¡°W, what the? Is he a swordmaster?¡± Both shock and despair was in the voice of the high-leveled knight. The only thing that could cut through an aura-filled sword was a swordmaster¡¯s aura de. After instantly cutting through the enemy weapons using his aura, which was camouged in the darkness, Choi Han used his sword and scabbard to attack a mid-leveled knight¡¯s neck and stomach at the same time. ¡°Ugh!¡± ¡°Guuh!¡± ¡®...He just needs one hit per person.¡¯ Cale could not hide his amazement as he crouched behind Choi Han and continued to move. At that moment, they could hear some ruckus from far behind them. ¡°Intruders!¡± It wasing from the vi. Cale turned his gaze back forward. The mid-leveled knights staggered before falling down. Cale made eye contact with them. They had been poisoned by Hong¡¯s paralysis poison. ¡°P, poison...!¡± ¡°A, assassin!¡± Choi Han made them faint before quickly rushing toward the charging high-leveled knight and swinging his sword. Cale used that opening to go through the cave entrance. Even while he was doing that, he made sure the mid-leveled knights who called him an assassin saw the six stars on his outfit before fainting. ¡°Ugh! Where did these peoplee from!¡± ¡°So loud.¡± Choi Han easily avoided the mana-filled sword of the high-leveled knight. He was dragging this out on purpose. While Choi Han was acting as the distraction, Cale entered the cave behind the Cat Tribe children, who had stealthily entered earlier on. After verifying that Cale had entered, Choi Han moved to the front of the cave entrance. He then called out to the high-leveled knight. ¡°Come.¡± Of course, his gaze was not looking at the knight, but all of the enemiesing from the vi with torches. ¡°I leave it to you.¡± Choi Han could hear Cale¡¯s changed, yet still calm voice behind him, and started to smile. However, he quickly focused on releasing only some of his strength. Dark Destruction Sword Art. This sword art consisted of twoponents, darkness and destruction. Of the two, the force of destruction started to surround Choi Han. ¡°Nobody can get past this spot.¡± He was someone who always kept his word. While Choi Han was protecting the entrance, there was someone else protecting something in a different manner in the cave. That person was none other than the torturer. He was the one to protect the dragon¡¯s prison. By the time Cale arrived inside, he was already in a state of chaos. ¡°Why, why?! Why is the Magic Crystal Ball not working?!¡± The Magic Crystal Ball that the torturer held onto was one of the emergency backups that Venion had prepared in case something went wrong. ¡°D, don¡¯te here! Do you know what is in here?!¡± The torturer was shaking violently while looking at Cale. He had no choice but to be scared. If the torturer received an attack higher than an average person¡¯s strength, he would instantly blow up. It was one of Venion¡¯s safety measures as well. The strength of the st would make the prison key and the prison itself blow up with the torturer as well. Naturally, the torturer knew about this. ¡°If youe, everyone here will die!¡± Tsk. Cale waved his hand while looking at the shaking torturer. Once he did, fog started to form in the air and headed for the torturer. On, the owner of the fog, was hidden in the shadows of the cave and still hidden. ¡°A, aaaaaah! Go away!¡± The sounds of battle from the cave entrance. The approaching fog. Of course, the inside the fog waspletely filled with poison. The paralyzing fog quickly surrounded the torturer. ¡°Just what, ugh, p, poison...!¡± Ugh. The torturer¡¯s body started to shake as he fell to the ground. The torturer looked so terrible, being unable to speak or move as he forcibly shook on the floor. Cale approached the torturer and rummaged through his clothes. If you could not attack him, you just had to hit him with poison. Either that, or make a deal with him to hand the key over. However, he didn¡¯t want to use thetter method. ¡®Here it is.¡¯ Cale grabbed the key and closed the eyes of the torturer, who was starting to lose consciousness from the poison. Cale wondered if they had used too much of the poison, but didn¡¯t really care. ¡®I don¡¯t think he will die, but if he dies, oh well.¡¯ Cale snapped his fingers. Two little ck bundles fell from the ceiling almost instantly. It was On and Hong. Once they came under the torch that Cale was holding, he could finally see the two of them clearly. Cale verified that On and Hong were safe before heading to the farthest corner of the cave. Once he arrived, he could see a curled up ck existence inside this now-useless magic prison. It was the dragon. The thing that shocked Cale more than the dragon itself was the blood covering the dragon and the scent of blood in the air. Cale quickly approached the prison. The dragon continued to keep its eyes closed, even as Cale approached. The dragon was probably in a state of chaos right now. Cale put the key into the lock and opened the door. Click. It unlocked with a light noise. Cale slowly opened the iron gate, and entered into the prison. It was prettyrge to be called a prison. There were whips and other torture tools, as well as the luxurious couch that Venion sat on to watch. Cale headed to the corner of the prison. A small figure about 1 meter long wasying on a stack of hay in the corner. The inner eyelids of the dragon were shaking as itid there with its eyes closed. There were chains on all of its limbs, and the mana restriction chain was on its neck, making it unable to use any strength. ¡°Hey.¡± Cale crouched in front of the dragon. The dragon did not open its eyes even after Cale called out to it. Cale verified his watch. It was time to leave. He continued to speak to the dragon. ¡°Let¡¯s leave.¡± Cale used the key he had obtained from the torturer to undo the chains. The dragon opened its eyes at that moment. Cale started to smile after looking at the dragon¡¯s eyes. It was still a very strong gaze. It had not lost its will to live just yet. It was not the dying gaze that Choi Han had run into in the novel. It was still a gaze with a strong desire to live. That was why it was filled with energy, anger, and resistance. It was the gaze of a dragon. ¡°What a nice gaze.¡± Cale lifted the dragon into his arms. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 20: Saw A Dragon (3) Chapter 20: Saw A Dragon (3) 3Chapter 20: Saw A Dragon (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Aftering out of the prison, Cale put the dragon down in front of the two kittens. ¡°That looks like it hurts.¡± ¡°So sad.¡± On and Hong circled around the still silent dragon. The dragon started to show its teeth and growl at them. This was probably the first time in its life it ever saw anything other than humans. Cale verified the time on his watch. It looked like they had just enough time to escape. ¡°It looks like it hurts.¡± On approached Cale and tapped his leg. She seemed to be thinking about the potion Cale brought in his magic box. She couldn¡¯t ask him for it, so she could only act this way. ¡°Hold on.¡± Cale had brought that potion to use it. However, he needed to wait until the mana restriction chains were off. The potion would only work properly if the mana, which was practically as important as a dragon¡¯s heart, was no longer restricted. Cale started to head toward the opposite side of the prison, the location the torturer seemed to be guarding. It wasn¡¯t very loud, but he could hear Choi Han fighting in the distance. Cale presumed that Choi Han¡¯s battle would end soon as well. ¡°Let¡¯s see.¡± Cale started to pat the cave wall with his hands. He kicked the torturer with his foot to get him out of the way, and continued to pat every aspect of the wall. The dragon growled after seeing the torturer, but stayed still and continued to focus on Cale. ¡®Venion¡¯sst line of defense should be around here somewhere.¡¯ Like all of the members of Marquis Stan¡¯s family, Venion was extremely worried about someone intruding while he was inside. He had created a secret tunnel to use as an escape route if something like that ever happened. If the torturer knew about it, he probably would have used it to escape earlier, but, sadly, even the torturer did not know about this escape route. ¡®The novel said there was a t area on this bumpy wall-, ah here it is.¡¯ There was a t area about the size of a person¡¯s hand on this bumpy cave wall. Although Venion looked like he had OCD and would never do anything like training, everyone in the Marquis¡¯s family had learned martial arts. ¡®If you use a strong enough force on that location, the wall will open.¡¯ It was not a magic device. Instead, the force of the impact made the device move. Cale turned his head to look toward the person who entered and asked. ¡°All done?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Choi Han lightly swung his sword in the air to get rid of the blood on it and then approached Cale. His gaze soon turned toward the dragon, and started to frown. It was a natural reaction to seeing such a small creature being covered in blood. The re in Choi Han¡¯s eyes as he stared at the torturer was vicious. ¡°Choi Han.¡± That was why Cale had called out to Choi Han. Choi Han was still ring at the torturer as he reported. ¡°As you ordered, I left the escaping workers alone. I also made sure that all of the strong individuals would not be able to fight.¡± ¡°Good job.¡± Cale praised Choi Han before pointing to the t area on the wall. ¡°Punch this spot.¡± ¡°As strong as I can?¡± ¡®Are you nning on destroying the cave?¡¯ ¡°No. Control your strength. Just pretend you are creating a 10cm dent in this wall.¡± ¡°Mm. So, very lightly.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± Very lightly? Cale quickly stepped away from Choi Han after hearing Choi Han call something that was impossible for Cale to do as only using a tiny bit of his strength. Choi Han understood that to be Cale telling him to hurry, and immediately punched the wall with his fist. Boom! ¡°Wow.¡± ¡°Oh.¡± Cale picked the dragon back up while the kitten siblings were admiring what happened. Screeeeeeeech- A chilling screeching noise came out of the wall, and an area the size of an adult male appeared to one side of the cave wall. Choi Han quickly picked up the torch. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± At Cale¡¯smand, the kittens got on Choi Han¡¯s back, as Choi Han stepped into the tunnel first. Cale followed behind him. The dragon remained quiet in Cale¡¯s arms, with only the sound of its breathinging out of it. However, the eyes that were staring at Cale were still extremely vicious. Rather than any gratitude for saving him, it seemed to be filled with thoughts of terror about being tortured by someone else, as well as anger and resentment toward humans. ¡°Stop staring at me like that.¡± Cale casually talked to the dragon in his arms. ¡®Ah, I¡¯m a bit out of breath.¡¯ Cale was out of breath as he tried to keep up with Choi Han, who seemed to have no issues running. ¡®Should I have made Choi Han carry the dragon?¡¯ The 1 meter long dragon was pretty heavy. It would not be this hard if he was able to get his hands on the ancient power called the ¡®Vitality of the Heart.¡¯ Cale held the dragon tightly in his arms, so that he would not throw it away in anger. There was no way he could leave it here after spending all that effort to rescue it. The dragon just continued to watch him. Cale¡¯s ck clothes started to be covered in the dragon¡¯s blood. After running through that dark and narrow tunnel for a few minutes, Choi Han suddenly called out to Cale. ¡°There is a wall in front of us.¡± ¡°Hit the center of the wall with your fist with the same strength as before. Then we will continue to run as discussed.¡± ¡°I understand!¡± The kittens jumped off of Choi Han¡¯s shoulder and started to run. Choi Han put some strength into his fist and hit the center of the wall with the same strength as earlier. Boom! The wall almost instantly copsed, and they could see the night sky. They were outside the cave. This time, Cale took the lead as he looked around. This was the reason they needed the Mana Disturbance Tool to work on the entire mountain. Venion had put a magic recording device on this secret tunnel entrance as well. He was a very thorough person. Cale didn¡¯t know exactly where this entrance was located, necessitating the Mana Disturbance Tool to work on the entire mountain. They did not have much time left. They needed to get out of the range of the magic recording device in the next one or two minutes. But it should not be a problem. Choi Han followed behind Cale and made new traces of their presence, or erased some traces as they passed. After surviving in the Forest of Darkness on his own for so long, he was an expert at creating and following tracks. After running away from the secret tunnel entrance for about two minutes, Cale looked at his watch. ¡°Stop.¡± The rms that were going off in the area suddenly stopped rring. The Mana Disturbance Tool had stopped working. ¡°Huuuu~.¡± Cale took a deep breath, calming his rapidly beating heart. The Indestructible Shield around his heart was gathering strength every time his heart beat like that, just in case an emergency situation happened. ¡®I have no ns to use it right now.¡¯ However, Cale was not nning on using this shield just yet. After freeing this dragon and saying goodbye to Choi Han in the next city, he was nning on gaining the ancient power, ¡®Vitality of the Heart,¡¯ To strengthen this shield. Only then would he use the shield. Now that he had the time to look around, Cale looked down toward the dragon. He then started to smile. The rebellious gaze was gone, and the dragon was looking up at the night sky in admiration. This was the first time the dragon saw anything other than the cave walls in its four years of life. Cale understood what the dragon was feeling, and wanted to give it some more time, but he could not do that. He put the dragon down on the grass and continued to look at it. The dragon looked right back at him. Its eyes were once again filled with anger and resentment, as it curled its body up and looked ready to attack. ¡®No wonder it continued to get tortured for four years. It won¡¯t back down at all.¡¯ That was why Cale personally liked this dragon. It was different from himself. Growing up being abused as an orphan, Cale, well, Kim Rok Soo, had given in. After that, he didn¡¯t want to be the main character of a story, like Choi Han. After giving in at a ce he called home, he didn¡¯t think he had the strength to fight against the world. ¡°Hey.¡± Cale made sure the dragon was looking at him, then took out a pair of gloves and some scissors-shaped cutting tool. There were a lot of magic seals on both of the des for cutting. He then put on the electricity-resistant gloves. This cutter was one of the two items that had to be rented in Billos¡¯s name. This was not something you could borrow with money. ¡®I don¡¯t know why you need this, but, young master, I hope to see you alive in the capital.¡¯ ¡®You think I¡¯m going to die?¡¯ ¡®All I know is that you n to cause amotion.¡¯ ¡®...Shut up.¡¯ Cale was thinking about the conversation he had with Billos, before realizing that his surroundings suddenly became extremely quiet. Choi Han was looking at the cutter with chaotic eyes, while the kitten siblings had moved away from Cale and were hiding behind Choi Han. The dragon was still just staring at him. ¡°Tsk.¡± Cale clicked his tongue at their response and approached the dragon. The mana restriction chain was made with something simr to rubber. If it was made of metal, it would not have fit the growing dragon. That was why it was made of something with some sticity. He then grabbed the dragon¡¯s neck. ¡°Gasp.¡± The kittens took in a deep breath. However, Cale ignored them as he continued onward, since it was better to do this as fast as possible. The cutter headed for the dragon¡¯s neck. The sharp de shone under the moonlight, and the dragon just paid attention to Cale¡¯s eyes. Cale¡¯s eyes were emotionless and peaceful. The dragon closed its eyes. At that moment, they all heard the snapping noise of something getting cut. Sizzle. Sizzle. The mana restriction chain was causing sparks in Cale¡¯s hands. ¡°What are you looking at?¡± Cale scoffed at the dragon that had opened its eyes back to look at him and took off one of the gloves and handed it to Choi Han. Choi Han put the glove on and Cale handed the chain to him before taking the potion out of his pocket. It was a highest grade potion. Even this cost quite a bit to purchase. It made Cale feel bad for asking for an allowance thest few days before he left. Cale clicked his tongue and sharply stared at the dragon. ¡°Do you know how much money I spent on you?¡± The dragon could hear the same words he heard quite often. He had heard it almost every day since he was born. Why do you not listen to me when I spent so much money on you? Guess you need to be beaten some more. Then he was beaten. They said that he needed to stop thinking for himself and listen to them as they continued to beat him. However. ¡°Since I spent so much money on you, you better heal properly, you stupid fool.¡± The dragon did not feel any pain. Cale poured about half of the potion onto the dragon¡¯s back, and poured the rest into its mouth. Thankfully, the dragon did not resist, and swallowed it down. After a few minutes, Cale could only think that it really was a dragon. The mana, which was the equivalent to the dragon¡¯s heart and the source of all of its power, started to move in its body. All of the injuries on the dragon¡¯s body instantly disappeared, and a blue aura that seemed to be the dragon¡¯s mana surrounded its body like the wind. This change that urred in an instant made Cale think about just how scary and powerful of an existence dragons really were in this world. ¡°Hey.¡± The dragon should have no reason to get injured anymore. The smart dragon seemed to understand what had happened to its body, as its eyes camepletely back to life. Cale took a step toward the dragon. The baby dragon curled up while continuing to observe Cale. Cale ignored the dragon and asked. ¡°What do you want to do now?¡± Cale started to smile while looking at the dragon that remaining silent. ¡°I know you can speak the humannguage. You are a dragon. The smartest and strongest existence in the world.¡± Cale asked once more. ¡°What did you want to do once you got free?¡± ¡°...I.¡± The dragon started to speak. The dragon really did know how to speak the humannguage. It was much smarter than humans. There was no way it did not learn the humannguage in thest four years. ¡°I.¡± The dragon could feel it in his heart. With his current strength, he could easily kill the man in front of him. He was scared of the man in the back, but it would be possible for him to escape alive. He had gained the strength he had waited for so long to obtain. That was why the dragon finally said the thing he had thought to himself over and over for thest four years. However, this was the first time he had ever said it out loud. ¡°I will live.¡± He will live, no matter what it took. ¡°I will go away.¡± He was going to go away from here. He revealed his inner thoughts. ¡°I will not be tamed.¡± ¡°Yes. You are right.¡± Cale was saying the dragon was right. ¡°You are a dragon. A DRAGON. You have the right to live freely.¡± Even a four-year-old dragon was stronger than most of the animals in the world. It had enough strength to survive on its own, and, normally, dragons were extremely independent and prideful. They generally wanted to create their ownir once they turned about two years old. It waspletely worlds apart than a human two-year-old. Cale looked into the eyes of the dragon, that still did not trust humans, and sternly started to speak. ¡°I will not take care of you.¡± Cale did not have a reason to look after something that was stronger than him. There were also too many potential headaches to keep him around to pay back for Cale¡¯s help. It was different from the children from the Cat Tribe, On and Hong. A dragon was beyond Cale¡¯s limits. The dragon could not trust Cale. ¡°Liar. Humans are good at lying.¡± There was now anger in the dragon¡¯s eyes. That anger was not directed at Cale, however. Dragons were naturally born with a lot of pride. This anger came from the years that his pride was trampled upon by the humans. ¡°I guess that is true. I do lie quite a bit as well.¡± Cale easily epted the dragon¡¯s words, and continued to speak. ¡°Live however you want to live. What is it you want to do?¡± ¡°I-.¡± The baby dragon lifted its head to look at the night sky. It was different from the darkness inside the cave. It was dark, but there was still light. ¡°I hate humans. I want to be free.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Cale got up from his seat. He then took out some mid-grade potions and a smaller pouch from his magic bag and put the potions in the bag before handing it to the dragon. ¡°Live freely.¡± The dragon¡¯s ck pupils erged and started to shake. However, there was still doubt and resentment in its eyes. Naturally, Cale did not care. ¡®This should be enough.¡¯ He freed the dragon, screwed Venion over, saved the vige, and helped Choi Han understand what freedom means thanks to the dragon. Most importantly, he did not need to take responsibility for the dragon. He could see in its eyes that it did not want to follow him. It was a very good conclusion. Cale spoke to his party members in a satisfied tone. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± He turned his back to the dragon with no regrets, and started to walk. Choi Han silently followed behind Cale and focused on altering their tracks. The kittens, who hesitated for a moment, saw the dragon turn its gaze away from Cale before following behind him. Once even the Cat Tribe sibling turned away from it, the dragon lifted its head and watched them walk away. ¡°...I hate humans...they are evil...¡± For some reason, the dragon was paying more attention to the back of the human, the race that he was annoyingly used to and hated, rather than the night sky that it was seeing for the first time. Hong slowly approached his sister On as they followed behind Cale. ¡°Noona, I think he¡¯s going to follow us.¡± ¡°Uh huh. I think so too.¡± ¡°Am I going to get a younger brother?¡± ¡°It looks like it.¡± The kittens were conversing with themselves, but Cale scoffed at them and retorted back. ¡°No way. Dragons are extremely prideful and will never ept being under a human. Furthermore, this dragon hates humans.¡± On¡¯s expression seemed to disagree. If a cat had a mocking expression, it would probably be the one of On¡¯s face right now. On shook her head and quietly mumbled. ¡°...I don¡¯t think so.¡± ¡°...Uh huh.¡± Hong looked behind him before agreeing with his sister. The ck Dragon was still looking in their direction. Hong was now sure. This dragon will enjoy its freedom for a bit, before sharing some beef with him in the future. Cale ordered the two kittens who were whispering to each other. ¡°Go get the orb back.¡± The two siblings went to get the orb so that they could eat some more beef. Cale did not even look at the siblings, as he patted Choi Han¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Good work.¡± Today should have been the first time Choi Han ever saved anything. There was that battle with the bandits earlier, but that was more protecting than saving. Of course, the actual events changed from saving the vige people from the dragon in the novel to saving the dragon that he actually had killed in the novel, but the important thing here was that he, ¡®saved,¡¯ someone. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What.¡± Choi Han was silent for a while after calling out to Cale¡¯s name, before he finally started to speak once again. ¡°What if the dragon decided that living as it wants was to follow you, Cale-nim?¡± ¡°That will never happen.¡± ¡°What if. Just hypothetically speaking.¡± ¡®Hypothetical?¡¯ Cale thought about it for a while, before lightly responding. ¡°I don¡¯t think about what ifs or the past.¡± But for some reason, Cale suddenly got the chills and looked behind himself for the first time since walking away from the dragon. Thankfully, the ck Dragon was not visible. Cale sighed in relief, before returning to the inn and falling asleep. That was why he did not know that the dragon used magic for the first time to be invisible, and sat at his window for a long time before leaving. The dragon was tightly clutching the bag of potions that Cale had given him. The next day, Cale had to deal with Choi Han¡¯s questions from early in the morning. ¡°Cale-nim. There is a citying up in a few days. Is that the middle point?¡± It was almost time for Choi Han to finish making up his, ¡®payment,¡¯ that Cale had talked about. It also meant that Cale was getting closer to receiving another ancient power for himself. Originally, in the novel, the eldest son of Marquis Stan¡¯s family, the one who was pushed out by Venion, would find this ancient power in about a month. It was hisst glimmer of hope, but, unfortunately, it ended up being a power that he could not use. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 21: Returning the Favor (1) Chapter 21: Returning the Favor (1) 2Chapter 21: Returning the Favor (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale just casually nodded toward Choi Han on this early morning and picked up the ss of cold water that Ron had prepared for him. Cale recalled what Ron had said earlier, as he felt the cold water flow through his body. ¡®Young master, it is not good to take such a long night walk. This Ron was very worried about you.¡¯ It made his mind clear up, even without the cold water for some reason. Cale carefully put the water back down and started to speak to Choi Han. ¡°You took care of everything properly?¡± ¡°Yes, Cale-nim.¡± After Choi Han had brought Cale back to the inn, he immediately went back to erase their tracks and create a new set of fake tracks heading toward the west. Meeeeeow. Cale looked toward the kittens that were eating jerky and yawning, and started to exin to Choi Han about the city that they would soon reach. ¡°The name of the next city is Puzzle City. That is the middle point in our journey.¡± Once you get out of the Henituse territory that is surrounded by mountains, all the roads are well-paved from this small city in the Viscount¡¯s territory to the capital. ¡®That¡¯s the reason that the Henituse territory has been safe until now, even if it is a bit annoying for the merchants.¡¯ Even if you have a lot of goods to sell, it would be difficult for merchants to travel to buy those goods if the roads were rough. However, the merchants pushed through this inconvenience because the roads were paved as soon as they left the Henituse territory. Furthermore, these paved roads allowed for the influential powers in the eastern half of the Roan Kingdom to gather frequently. That was why people in the capital were able to discuss many of the issues in the east, even though there were no nobles with a higher nobility than the rank of Marquis in the east. ¡°It took a while to get this far because our territory has a lot of mountains, but it will not take very long from here.¡± Puzzle City was not the middle point in terms of distance, but in terms of time. ¡°But Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°I went to check the Viscount¡¯s vi on my way back.¡± ¡°And?¡± Looking at Cale¡¯s stoic expression, Choi Han had a slightly bitter expression as he responded. ¡°They all seemed to be in a state of chaos. There were also soldiers and knights leaving the vige.¡± ¡°I¡¯m sure they went to report.¡± After regaining their consciousness, they probably sent people to Venion and investigated the area around the cave. However, that did not seem to be the end of Choi Han¡¯s report. ¡°However.¡± ¡°Just say it.¡± Cale started to frown, and bluntly retorted to Choi Han. Choi Han still seemed to have a bitter expression, and slowly started to speak. ¡°A part of the exit route we took from the cave was blown up. Even the trees, grass, ground, and everything around it was a mess.¡± Plop. The kittens dropped the jerkies that were in their mouths. However, Cale was still rxed. ¡°I¡¯m sure the dragon did it.¡± Choi Han just stood there silently. Cale saw that, and started to smile as he stood up from his seat. Even if it is only 4 years old, the dragon was still extremely smart. It knew someone maye to the escape route, and probably decided to blow it up. Since dragons are also very sensitive to mana, it probably destroyed everything around it to destroy the magic tools in the area as well. ¡°It¡¯s good enough that it didn¡¯t kill all of the fainted people. It¡¯s probably holding back because it is still young and still has some fear.¡± ¡°I see. I did feel a strong amount of mana there.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t look down on the dragon just because it is small. You¡¯ll regret it.¡± Dragons were said to berge animals that were extremely petty. Cale praised himself once again for leaving the dragon instead of bringing it with him, before asking Choi Han a question. ¡°You can get out now. Are you going to be sleeping until we leave?¡± ¡°No. I need to go help Beacrox out.¡± ¡°Who? Beacrox?¡± Cale gasped in shock and quickly asked. ¡°Oh, I guess you are close now?¡± At that moment, Cale saw Choi Han have a stoic expression for the first time. Choi Han answered very sternly. ¡°No. We are not close at all.¡± ¡°... I, I see... okay then.¡± Cale responded back with a simr expression on his face, and Choi Han silently bowed before heading out of the room. Cale gave Choi Han an order as he was opening the door to leave. ¡°Ah. Tell Hans to prepare some drinks on your way out.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Choi Han¡¯s eyes opened widely in shock as he looked back at Cale. He looked back and forth at the rxed Cale and the clock that showed 7:00 am. Cale refreshingly answered Choi Han¡¯s silent question. ¡°Haven¡¯t you ever heard of a hangover drink?¡± Choi Han left without saying anything else, but Cale did not care. Even On and Hong were looking at him and seemed to be asking if he really was going to start drinking this early, but he also ignored them, and looked into the mirror. ¡°What a wonderful expression.¡± His face seemed to be extremely tired, and still slightly drunk. Cale nodded in satisfaction, before heading down to the first floor. ¡®As I expected.¡¯ 7:00 am was early, but the day was not yet over for some people. The Vice Captain was standing there, looking like he had never even drunkst night, and was having a serious conversation with someone. Cale could see a stiff Choi Han nearby. It was because the person speaking with the Vice Captain was one of the knights that Choi Han had defeated yesterday. It was only normal to stiffen up. Cale approached Choi Han, and kicked Choi Han¡¯s foot. ¡°Why are you stiffening up like that?¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Choi Han flinched for a moment at Cale¡¯s stealthy whisper, before smiling awkwardly and quietly responding back. ¡°I thought I had used enough strength to make them unable to fight for about a day, but they are up and moving much earlier than I expected. I guess I thought the human body was much weaker than it actually is. I guess I can use more strength against humans in the future.¡± Cale turned his gaze away from Choi Han. Choi Han really fit the model of a normal main character who would happily destroy anything in his path toward justice. There was also other existences who were outside of Cale¡¯s expectations. On and Hong had followed him downstairs. The kittens had smirks on their face as they wagged their tails and peeked at the knight. Anybody could see that they were enjoying this situation. ¡®...Am I the biggest coward here?¡¯ As Cale was thinking about that and sat down at his table, the inn owner brought a bottle of alcohol to him. ¡°Young master, I prepared the same alcohol you drankst night.¡± ¡°Old man, there is something that keepsing to my mind whenever I see you.¡± ¡°Yes?¡± Cale smiled at the nervous old man and continued to speak. ¡°I think you are a really smart vendor. It¡¯s apliment. This is perfect for a hangover drink.¡± Pong. The alcohol bottle opened with a refreshing sound, and Cale immediately poured a cup and downed it. His face almost instantly started to turn red. Cale purposefully made his eyes only half opened, and looked toward the Vice Captain. The Vice Captain was still talking to the other knight. ¡°Yesterday, we had a party to rx after a long journey until here. Everybody was drinking and rxing. Nobody left the inn. But I still don¡¯t understand why someone from the Viscount¡¯s estate would be curious about that.¡± The knight from the Marquis¡¯s estate seems to have introduced himself as someone from the Viscount¡¯s estate. The knight smiled at the Vice Captain¡¯s suspicious gaze, but the knight still answered back with a serious expression. ¡°There was a thief that broke into the Viscount¡¯s vi yesterday. A couple other knights and I were on guard, but we lost a few items to the thief. After hearing that people from Count Henituse¡¯s estate were here in the vige, we came to see if the thief had stolen from the Count as well.¡± ¡®Thief my ass. Well, I guess a dragon thief is a thief as well.¡¯ Cale took a gulp directly from the bottle while thinking about that. At that moment, he made eye contact with the knight who was at the Viscount¡¯s vi yesterday. ¡°What are you looking at?¡± The knight immediately bowed and turned his gaze away. The Vice Captain looked toward Cale awkwardly, before letting out a fake cough and then confidently and loudly answering. ¡°Ahem. Our young master is drinking because his day turns out better if he drinks in the morning. Furthermore, it is a hangover drink. He is the type of person who drinks to cure his hangover caused from drinking too much the night before.¡± Cale red at the Vice Captain because he could not tell whether the Vice Captain was mocking him oring up with an excuse for him, before taking another drink. ¡°I see. What an interesting young master.¡± The knight responded to the Vice Captain¡¯s words positively, before respectfully bowing toward Cale. ¡®I guess this should lessen their suspicion of us.¡¯ Cale felt like they should no longer have any reason to be suspected by the Marquis¡¯s knight who came to the inn so early in the morning. The dragon happened to disappear while Cale¡¯s envoy was here, and they were leaving the morning after, but there weren¡¯t many reasons to suspect them. Venion¡¯s remaining subordinates here will think about the six starred outfits that the attackers were wearing, the ones that seemed to represent a certain organization, as well as the tracks that were leading to the west. Most importantly, however, is that they would never think that someone like Cale, who was called trash, would be able to do something like that. ¡°Then I wish you a safe journey as you continue on today.¡± In addition, there was no way they could hold the eldest son of a Count from leaving when they didn¡¯t have the Marquis, Venion, or even the Viscount with them. Especially when that noble was heading to the capital under the order of the crown. ¡®Who would think that a noble that is drinking on his way to a summons from the crown would be normal?¡¯ It really was good to be trash. Cale continued to drink with satisfaction. ¡®I¡¯m sure Venion would not suspect us, even after finding out what happened.¡¯ Venion and Marquis Stan were probably the people who knew better than anyone else that there was absolutely no rtionship between Count Henituse and the secret organization. That was especially the case when it came to the dragon. Cale watched the knight leave the inn before drinking the honey lemon tea Ron had put in front of him. ¡°Ron.¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± ¡°Honey tea really seems to be the best to cure a hangover.¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t it?¡± Ron smiled as he looked at Cale, but Cale looked away and tried to calm his stomach. Once Cale no longer felt sick from drinking too much, they started on their way once more. Their next destination was Puzzle City. It was the city that was the center of the transportation of goods in the East, and it was pretty famous for the number of rock towers around the city. Cale needed to find an unfinished rock tower in Puzzle City. ¡°Are we camping out today?¡± On took a bite of the jerky as she asked Cale. Cale nodded his head. ¡°Yes. Starting today, we will be camping outside every so often.¡± Cale had set a pretty filled schedule from here on as well. It was because he wanted to have enough time in Puzzle City. He turned away from the kitten siblings, who were whispering quietly to each other, and looked outside the carriage window. ¡®The Vitality of the Heart.¡¯ That was the name of the ancient power that would strengthen the Indestructible Shield. This was a power that was focused on restoration and vitality. ¡®That was why the eldest son was looking for it.¡¯ Taylor, the eldest son of the Marquis, who had lost his position as heir. He was the only good person in the Marquis¡¯s family, but the lower half of his body had be paralyzed because of Venion¡¯s schemes. Taylor had rummaged through all sorts of texts to find a power that would cure him. He happens to find an ancient text in an old bookstore in the process, and, although it was difficult to decipher the ancient text, he manages to decipher a few words after putting in a lot of hard work. Restoration. Rock Tower. Those two things became clues for Taylor who immediately headed to Puzzle City, which could also be called Rock Tower City. He was probably at Puzzle City right now. In the novel, he would find the ancient power in about a month from now. ¡®But it was useless.¡¯ The, ¡®Vitality of the Heart,¡¯ was unable to restore an already injured body. It only was able to restore any injuries received after earning the power. There was also a limit on how much could be restored, as well as a cost to pay for any restorations. Taylor fell into despair after learning about that fact. He had no time, and that ancient power was hisst hope. It was because Taylor did not know when Venion woulde to kill him. ¡®He dies a month after finding the power.¡¯ Taylor ends up dying by an unknown organization while the capital was in a state of chaos from the terror incident. Of course, Venion was responsible for sending that organization after Taylor. The reason Cale remembered this side character, that seemed to have an even smaller role than the original Cale in the novel, was because of the strong friendship Taylor had with his friend. The crazy priestess. She was Taylor¡¯s friend and the only person who survives Taylor¡¯s assassination. She kills half of the assassins in anger and ends up bing emunicated by the temple. She ends up with arge injury on her back from the incident and confidently tells the temple about what she had done. ¡®I acted as a human rather than following the will of the lord. I believe that is the right thing to do.¡¯ She then continued on after that. ¡®I am now free!¡¯ That is when she starts to be called the crazy priestess by others. Her specialty was using the strength of the God of Death for curses. The temple had emunicated her, but her god did not throw her away. When the war broke out in the novel, she became famous, even though she was not a hero, because of how she helped to heal the injured. ¡®I think it will be different this time.¡¯ There was a good chance that Taylor would not die in a month. Venion was going to be busy dealing with the dragon incident and sucking up to the Marquis. He probably would need to focus on his younger siblings rather than his paralyzed older brother to maintain his status as the heir to the Marquis title. ¡®And since I will be taking Taylor¡¯sst hope away, I will need to give him a new hope.¡¯ Although the Vitality of the Heart was an ancient power that Taylor did not need, Cale was not such a bad guy to take someone¡¯sst hope away. Cale was also curious to know about what thatbination of Taylor and the Crazy Priestess could achieve if they managed to live longer. He thought that the two of them could change the Marquis¡¯s estate. If that could happen, that would be better for Cale in the long run. However, something that he suddenly thought about made Cale stiffen his expression. ¡®Even Beacrox struggled under her curse right?¡¯ Once Cale thought about the struggles the torture expert Beacrox had with the priestess, he stopped thinking about her right away. He decided to stop thinking about the good-natured and citizen-caring noble Taylor as well. ¡®They don¡¯t mesh well with me.¡¯ They were different types of people than Cale. They were good people who were loyal and trusted each other deeply. Cale preferred Ron or Beacrox to those kinds of people. ¡®...No. How could I ever think about such terrible thoughts.¡¯ Cale quickly stopped thinking about Ron and Beacrox as well. At that moment, Cale looked down after feeling something tapping at his leg. He could see the golden pupils of the kittens shining, as the kittens started to speak. ¡°I heard from Hans earlier.¡± ¡°Hans said.¡± Hans still didn¡¯t know that the kittens were Cat Tribe kittens, and continued to say all sorts of things in front of the kittens. The kittens seemed to want to tell him something they had heard Hans say. ¡°What?¡± The siblings seemed to have gotten used to Cale¡¯s rude way of asking, and started to speak. ¡°If you make a wish at a rock tower, it wille true.¡± ¡°He said the rock towers were pretty.¡± ¡°I want to go. But it¡¯s okay if it is too annoying.¡± ¡°I want to go with you, but it¡¯s okay if it is too difficult.¡± Cale nkly stared at the fidgety kittens before casually asking. ¡°What kind of wish do you have?¡± Hong shook his fur, that was now healthier and shinier thanks to getting good treatment from Hans, and shouted out with excitement. ¡°That everybody, including my new little brother-¡± ¡°Dismissed.¡± Cale immediately started to ignore the kittens and turned away from them. The carriage stopped at the same time. They had arrived at the location of their campsite for the evening. ¡°Looks like we are camping out again starting today.¡± ¡°Indeed.¡± Cale answered Hans¡¯s statement, before looking around their campsite. The wind from the forest blew by his head. Cale spent the night with a pretty rxed mind. The next morning. ¡°Young master.¡± ¡°...What is this?¡± Cale stared at the dead deer that was at the border of their campsite. It had been hunted recently. Hans reported to Cale, who just continued to stare at the deer. ¡°Someone left it here on our campsite.¡± Hans pointed next to the deer. Cale was looking at that spot as well. On the ground was a drawing of a fork and a knife. It was as if someone had left the deer there for them to eat. Cale suddenly had an odd thought. He then turned his gaze toward hispanions. The kitten siblings in Choi Han¡¯s arms, as well as Choi Han himself, were all smiling while looking at him. ¡®...I have a bad feeling about this.¡¯ He had a really bad feeling about it. An individual that could speak, but could not write, had left the deer for them. Also, it was an individual that Choi Han, the person on watchst night, clearly knew was there, but pretended not to see. ¡®...I have a bad feeling it was the dragon.¡¯ He turned his head back to look at Choi Han, On, and Hong, who were still looking at him, and seriously warned them. ¡°We are going to pretend like we don¡¯t know.¡± Meeeow. Meeow. The two siblings seemed to be mocking him, but Cale pretended to not know about it. However, a new ingredient was delivered to them every time Cale and crew camped outside. Wild hog, rabbits, and all sorts of fruits. Cale was now sure about the existence of the dragon following behind him. Cale then arrived at Puzzle City with that confirmation in his mind. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 22: Returning the Favor (2) Chapter 22: Returning the Favor (2) 2Chapter 22: Returning the Favor (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist After easily passing through Puzzle City¡¯s gate, the Henituse family¡¯s Golden Turtle carriage followed the lead of deputy butler Hans to the inn. ¡°It is smaller than Western City.¡± ¡°Right. Small.¡± Cale nodded at On and Hong¡¯s words, and looked outside the carriage. ¡®It won¡¯t follow me into the city, right?¡¯ ording to Choi Han, the ck Dragon would follow them from a far distance, beforeing by in the early morning to drop the food off and then running away. ¡°Isn¡¯t it cute? The dragon seems like a little kid that hasn¡¯t lost its innocence, even after living such a terrible life.¡± ¡®...Not really.¡¯ That was what Cale was thinking as Choi Han spoke to him with amusement. If Choi Han had seen the dragon blow a mountain away, he would not be saying things like, ¡®Cute,¡¯ to describe it. Cale didn¡¯t know why the dragon was doing this, even though it said that it hated humans. It was really overwhelming for Cale. This was not the way he was expecting things to go. Since it was still young, Cale thought the dragon would stay away from the Marquis¡¯s territory and create its ownir to develop its strength. Cale was hoping that, after growing stronger, that the dragon would destroy the Marquis¡¯s estate before the war broke out in the continent. That would be helpful in keeping the Henituse territory peaceful for a longer period of time. ¡°Tsk.¡± Cale clicked his tongue, and the kittens, who were excitedly looking out the window, flinched before approaching him. It seemed like they had seen something odd outside, and hade to ask. ¡°Each house has a rock tower in front of it.¡± ¡°Very very weird.¡± Cale just casually answered. ¡°This is the city of rock towers.¡± Puzzle City was famous for the ancient ruins with a lot of rock towers, but it was also famous for the fact that each house had small rock towers in front of them. The people in this city made a small groove outside of their windows to put a small rock tower on top of it. It really shouldn¡¯t be called a rock tower, because it was made with less than ten rocks, but the rock towers were formed in different shapes based on the personality of the home owners. That was why it was only natural that the luxurious inn that Cale arrived at also had a rock tower in front of it. ¡°Will we be staying here?¡± Hans quickly responded to Cale¡¯s question, as they followed behind the inn owner. Hans seemed to be very excited, as he was walking with the kitten siblings in his arms. ¡°Yes sir. We have reserved two days for Choi Han-nim, and have agreed to pay for the rest of the group depending on how long we end up staying here.¡± Ron flinched for a moment at Hans¡¯s words before quickly following behind with the magic box in his hand. Hans continued to speak. ¡°We arrived right before the Rock Tower Festival season, so the room was not that expensive.¡± The Rock Tower Festival. Puzzle City was currently busy preparing for next week¡¯s Rock Tower Festival. Cale just let out what he was thinking without giving it any thought. ¡°It¡¯s not like there are a lot of rocks here, but the rock towers are quite interesting. Very odd.¡± ¡°I know the reason for that.¡± ¡®Huh?¡¯ Cale peeked toward Hans, who had responded to his mumblings. ¡°There is a sad yet thought provoking story that has been passed down through the ages.¡± ¡°Stop right now if it is going to be long.¡± Cale really didn¡¯t care about it. However, Hans continued to speak, as he had probably determined that the story was not very long. The group that had entered Cale¡¯s room watched as the attendant stepped out of the room and then had to listen to Hans¡¯s story. ¡°This story, well, this legend, is about something that happened in ancient times.¡± ¡°Ancient times?¡± Click. The attendant had closed the door behind her and only Cale¡¯s group was left in his room. Cale responded to the words, ¡®Ancient times.¡¯ ¡°Yes. Ancient times.¡± ¡°Go on.¡± The kitten siblings in Hans¡¯s arms were wagging their tails, as if they were interested in the story, and looked up at him. Ron just silently poured a cup of lemonade from the bottle he carried in with the magic box and handed it to Cale. Cale held the cup of lemonade in his hands and sat down on the couch with his legs crossed and motioned to Hans with his chin. He was telling Hans to hurry up and speak. ¡°Ahem. This city supposedly fell out of the grace of a god in the past.¡± ¡®Falling out of grace?¡¯ Cale did not know anything about this story. ¡°This is my first time hearing about it.¡± ¡°That is because young master has not studied history.¡± ¡°...You seem to enjoy talking back to me these days. Are you going to keep talking back like that? Hmm?¡± Hans quickly turned his gaze away from Cale. ¡°It is only natural for a great butler to inform their master about things that the master does not know.¡± Hans started to speak about the ancient times. ¡°I do not know why this city fell out of the grace of a god. However, that is apparently when some of the people in this city started to gather together to build rock towers. It seemed to have been an act of worship to reach out to the god that had abandoned them.¡± ¡°Did it work?¡± Hans sternly responded to Cale¡¯s question. ¡°No.¡± The god did not listen to them. ¡°Apparently, none of the prayers went through. That is why the present day Puzzle City does not have a single temple.¡± ¡°There¡¯s no reason for me to worship a god who has abandoned me. Is that it?¡± ¡°Ding ding ding! Our young master truly is smart and does not need to study at all.¡± ¡°...You want to get punched?¡± Hans turned away from Cale to look at a far away mountain and continued to speak. ¡°Ahem. Anyways, they have rock towers instead of temples. The rock towers represent a promise that the people made after all of that. It was a promise between the people, as well as a promise with themselves.¡± ¡°What kind of promise?¡± Hans started to exin an odd rule that was followed in Puzzle City. ¡°A human who has had their wish granted will destroy their rock tower.¡± Cale started to smile. ¡°What an interesting city.¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t it? Since they were abandoned by their god, they needed to achieve everything with their own strength. The act of destroying their rock tower represents, ¡®oveing the odds.¡¯ Cale liked the act of destroying the rock tower very much. He then recalled the numerous rock towers in front of the houses. ¡°The rock towers are not created to seek help from a god.¡± ¡°Right. It is more of a representation of their own determination.¡± This kind of rock tower held a lot of importance, even if you never got to destroy it. ¡°I guess it wasn¡¯t the god granting their wish in the end.¡± ¡°Yes. You are right. Although it is sad that they were abandoned, this story also gives people a lot of hope.¡± Cale casually gave an ordered to Hans who was responding to him. ¡°Look down.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Seeing Hans looking confused, Cale pointed to Hans¡¯s chest with his finger. ¡°Looks like the kittens are angry.¡± ¡°What?¡± Gasp. Hans looked down and gasped as his eyes opened widely. The kittens were showing their teeth in anger. The golden pupils staring at Hans were vicious. ¡°Aigoo. Why are our kitten-nims so angry? Should I go bring you some more jerky?¡± Hans started to smile as he put the kittens down from his chest. Since he still had no idea that they were beast people, he just assumed they were angry because they were hungry. However, the kittens were not angry because of that. Cale recalled the things that the siblings had told him earlier. ¡®I heard from Hans earlier.¡¯ ¡®Hans said.¡¯ ¡®If you make a wish at a rock tower, it wille true.¡¯ ¡®He said the rock towers were pretty.¡¯ Tap. Tap. On seemed to be angry, as she was tapping on the floor with her paw, while Hong was tapping on the floor with his tail. They were angry that Hans had lied to them about the rock tower, but Hans seemed to have gotten the wrong message. ¡°Aigoo, our precious kitten-nims. I will go get some delicious snacks for you! Young master, may I go get something for them?¡± ¡°You can stay out as well.¡± ¡°I will be back really quickly.¡± Hans said that he would hurry back, but he still made sure the things he brought for Cale were neatly organized, before heading out like the wind as soon as it was done. ¡°Ron, you can go rest as well.¡± Ron was still left in the room. Ron turned toward Cale and started to smile. ¡®I have a bad feeling about this.¡¯ Cale really hated that old man¡¯s smile. His smile made Cale even more ufortable than normal. Ron approached the couch Cale was on, before starting to speak. ¡°Will Choi Han-nim be leaving in two days?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Cale suddenly had a thought and started to smile as he asked. ¡°Why? You don¡¯t want to send him away? Do you want to go with him?¡± Ron¡¯s benign smile became even bigger. ¡°Why would I leave you behind and go somewhere else, young master? I like being next to you.¡± This gave Cale the chills. ¡°It is just that it is disappointing that Choi Han-nim will not be going with us all the way to the capital. I will need to speak with him as much as possible before he leaves. Beacrox will probably be sad to see him go.¡± Cale¡¯s expression became a bit better after hearing the rest of Ron¡¯s words. He didn¡¯t really pay attention to it because it was annoying, but it looks like a level of friendship had developed between Ron, Choi Han, and Beacrox. Choi Han was difficult to read, but if he really hated someone, he would not even speak to them. Cale thought about his n, and started to smile mischievously as he answered. ¡°Well, you can see each other again at the capital, since you¡¯ll be moving together.¡± ¡®The three of you can leave this kingdom and go to Rosalyn¡¯s kingdom. What do you think? Wonderful, right?¡¯ Cale did not say that part out loud, as he started to smirk while Ron started to smile even brighter. ¡°I look forward to when we are all together with Choi Han-nim in the capital. This old man¡¯s wish is that everybody arrives there safely.¡± Cale did not believe anything Ron was saying. ¡®Looking forward to it,¡¯ or, ¡®wishing that everybody arrives there safely.¡¯ Those type of emotions would not fly with this old man. The kittens also snorted while looking at Ron. On and Hong found it annoying that Ron kept trying to teach them assassination skills that they already knew behind Cales back. ¡°...You can leave now.¡± Cale easily got rid of Ron from the room. ¡°Hans is a liar!¡± ¡°I trusted that butler!¡± The kitten siblings finally let out their anger while Cale was ignored them by looking out of the window. Cale was looking in the direction of a cave in the corner of Puzzle City. This cave was the location of the iplete rock tower and the, ¡®Vitality of the Heart.¡¯ There should be a small house in that cave. ¡®Didn¡¯t it say the person lived until they were 150 years old?¡¯ This was a power that an ancient being left after naturally dying from old age. The deceased person thought his power to be a curse. Cale got up from his seat, fixed his clothes a bit, and opened the door. ¡°Aigoo!¡± Hans happened to be right outside the door. Seeing the deputy butler, who had run back with his arms full of jerky, Cale started to speak. ¡°Let¡¯s go see the rock tower.¡± The kittens¡¯ ears started to twitch. Cale smirked internally at the kittens, who ran toward him like they were never angry to start, and picked the people that would go with him. ¡°It will just be us and Choi Han. Oh, bring On and Hong with you too.¡± The human who died at the age of 150 had wanted to finish a rock tower in this Wind-Gathering Cave. ¡®It was woodst time, now it is wind?¡¯ The center of the cave has a hurricane that seemed to have appeared out of nowhere. The old man had spent over 100 years trying to build a rock tower in the eye of that hurricane. However, he failed. Well, the old man always destroyed his rock tower whenever it looked like he was going to finish. He repeated that over and over until he died one day after stacking it back up about half way. Just what wish did that ancient old man have? Cale didn¡¯t really care. He just nned on carefully looking at one thing while they were out looking at rock towers today. ¡®Might as well make it look good if I¡¯m going to build it anyways.¡¯ Since he had to do it anyways, he was going to make it look good. He also had to pay attention to some people, just in case, at the Rock Tower Ruins. A bitter, Cale, the two kittens, Choi Han, and Hans arrived at the entrance of the Rock Tower Ruins. They didn¡¯t bring their carriage that showed the symbol of the Henituse family, and Cale had a hat on as well, using the excuse that he did not like the sunlight. ¡®They really are still here.¡¯ He was able to locate the people that he was looking for as soon as they entered into the ruins. Cale stealthily hid behind Choi Han and Hans. At a bit of a distance was a casually dressed man and woman. The man was in a wheelchair, with the woman pushing the wheelchair and heading out of the entrance of the Ruins, which was also the exit. They didn¡¯t notice Cale¡¯s stealthy gaze and casually left the ruins. The man turned his head slightly toward the woman and asked. ¡°Why did you want toe here today?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t know if it is a message from the lord or justplete bullshit, but I¡¯ve had the same dream for a couple of days that I needed toe here. My dream said that our future benefactor will show up if we came to the ruins. Something about how even the lord didn¡¯t know how that benefactor will act, other than the fact that they will being to the ruins today.¡± ¡°There¡¯s even a person that the lord cannot predict?¡± ¡°Who knows? Half of the things the lord says is bullshit. Complete bullshit.¡± The woman with short brown hair vented with annoyance. ¡°Bullshit? It is the word of the lord. Plus, wasn¡¯t it a secret that you can hear messages from the lord?¡± The responding man was the eldest son of Marquis Stan¡¯s family, Taylor Stan. ¡°It¡¯s not like there are any priests in Puzzle City. And who cares about the word of the lord? Does the lord feed us? How can there be a benefactor for people like us? Absolutely bogus. I¡¯m hungry. Let¡¯s go eat.¡± The woman who looked annoyed was Taylor¡¯s close friend, Cage, the woman who will eventually be called the Crazy Priestess. Taylor responded back to Cage with a serious expression. ¡°Cage, I suddenly feel like drinking beer.¡± ¡°Really? I¡¯m craving smoked pork.¡± They looked at each other with serious expressions. Taylor pointed forward with his finger, and seriously responded to Cage. ¡°What a wonderfulbination. Let¡¯s go. Push! It¡¯ll be my treat!¡± ¡°Aigoo, your treat?! This priestess will do her best to escort you there.¡± The two of them started tough as they started to move. Cale could not hear their conversation because he was far away, but he was doing his best to remember the faces of these two individuals, who were still able tough while in the middle of some terrible situations. ¡®Now that I¡¯ve confirmed what they look like, I just need to make sure to avoid them.¡¯ Since they didn¡¯t know who he was, Cale just had to make sure he avoided them in the future. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 23: Returning the Favor (3) Chapter 23: Returning the Favor (3) 2Chapter 23: Returning the Favor (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Of course, he nned giving them their new hope anonymously. It was something he had learned from the dragon. ¡®Unless their lord has nothing to do and reveals me to them, there is no way that they will recognize me.¡¯ It was impossible for them to learn of his identity. How great was that? He should have done everything anonymously until now. Cale stepped into the ruins feeling like a massive weight had been lifted off his chest. He could see people praying all around the area. At that moment, Hans stealthily approached Cale and whispered to him. ¡°I just saw the eldest son of Marquis Stan¡¯s household.¡± ¡°...How do you know about that person?¡± Cale was truly surprised. Hans smiled before pointing to his eyes. ¡°Pretty much any and all information about the nobles is in my head. I could see a man being pushed on a wheelchair. It was weird that there was only one person with him, but I was able to see that there was a red snake crest on the wheelchair.¡± ¡°Hans.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡± ¡°You¡¯re better than you look.¡± ¡°Thank you?¡± Hans shrugged his shoulders with a satisfied expression as he finished his report. He then asked Cale. ¡°What do you n on doing?¡± Cale could feel the left side of his face heating up, and looked in that direction. Choi Han was looking at him. Cale shook his head and answered both of them. ¡°Ignore them.¡± Both of them nodded their heads without saying anything else. Only then did their tour officially start. After looking around, Cale was shocked at the appearance of the rock towers in the ruins. ¡°They are ...¡± Cale seemed to be in disbelief. ¡°Uglier than I had expected.¡± Cale could not understand the ancient sense of style. He was expecting piles of rocks, but there were rock towers of all kinds shapes in the ruins. They looked interesting. However, they were definitely not beautiful. Cale peeked at the kittens in Hans¡¯s arms. They seemed to be extremely disappointed as well. However, there was someone who seemed to be more serious than Cale expected. Choi Han had his head bowed like the other people who were praying, and seemed to be praying as well. ¡®I¡¯m sure he¡¯s praying to return to Korea.¡¯ Choi Han had grown up in a happy family environment. He was a different kind of person than Cale, Kim Rok Soo. Choi Han had grown up in a happy family with positive influences. That was why he was able to survive in a disastrous situation while still remaining a good person. Cale was staring at Choi Han when Choi Han lifted his head up and made eye contact with him. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°I have a question and something to report.¡± Cale had a bad feeling about this. ¡°Start with your question.¡± Choi Han seemed to be thinking about something, as he looked toward the rock towers standing in this wide in and started to speak. ¡°Cale-nim, are you not going to make a wish?¡± ¡®Is that what he wants to know?¡¯ Cale just casually answered. ¡°I don¡¯t do things like making wishes.¡± ¡°Why not?¡± ¡°It makes you have higher expectations.¡± Choi Han, Hans, and even the kittens all turned to look at Cale. Cale looked at the rock towers like Choi Han had done, and slowly continued to speak. ¡°It¡¯s so much easier to live without high expectations.¡± It feels great if you scratch a lottery ticket hoping for $1 and end up winning $5, but if you scratch it hoping to win the grand prize and only end up with $5, you are bound to get annoyed. Tap. Cale turned his gaze after feeling the tap on his shoulder, only to see deputy butler Hans smiling and starting to speak. ¡°You are right, young master. There is no such thing as dreams or hope in this world.¡± ¡°...Just stop talking.¡± ¡°Yes, sir!¡± Hans responded loudly, but seemed to be a bit disappointed as well, as he took the lead with the kittens. Cale leisurely followed behind Hans, when Choi Han quickly approached him and whispered in a voice that Hans could not here. Choi Han had not given his report yet. ¡°The dragon has entered the city.¡± ¡°Ignore.¡± ¡°I understand.¡± Cale took a look around. The dragon must have made itself invisible, as he could not see it. The only thing he could see was the people praying toward the rock towers. The Rock Tower Festival was still a week away, but there was still arge amount of people here. Cale¡¯s gaze turned to the opposite direction of the rock towers in the ins. The upscale area, the area that the wealthiest citizens in Puzzle City resides. Behind that area was a small mountain, and somewhere on that mountain was the grave of the person who had lived until they were 150 years old. The next day, Cale was ready to head to the grave. Naturally, he had to get rid of the humans and the kittens who wanted to follow him. Thankfully, everybody stopped voicing theirints once he said only a single person was going toe with him. ¡°I will only be taking Choi Han with me.¡± Choi Han was the strongest person there. With Choi Han tagging along, both the Vice Captain and Hans had nothing to say. The Vice Captain just frowned and said he needed to train the knights, before he quickly started to gather them. While Cale was watching the knights who were following behind the Vice Captain with looks of despair on their faces, Hans just said one more thing before disappearing. ¡°I will take care of our kitten-nims.¡± Cale turned away from Hans, who seemed to be very excited about being with the kittens, and headed out of the inn. Choi Han followed behind him. ¡°Are we doing something again today?¡± ¡°Again? Someone might get the wrong idea if they heard you.¡± Choi Han did not respond. Cale did not care however, and just headed toward the mountain behind the upscale area and continued to speak. ¡°I need to go to that mountain over there. You can just wait for me at the mountain entrance.¡± ¡°I understand.¡± Choi Han did not say anything else. Cale preferred someone like this. Choi Han did not ask Cale any questions. He was someone who seemed to follow Cale, but did not have any curiosity about what Cale did. This was probably only possible because Choi Han thought that he could figure it out if he really wanted to, and because he thought that he would not be in danger no matter what Cale ended up doing. Cale arrived at the small mountain after passing through the stereotypical upscale area, before stopping after hearing Choi Han call out to him. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°I¡¯m leaving tomorrow.¡± ¡°I know. I was the one who told you to leave tomorrow.¡± Choi Han made eye contact with Cale, who was standing impatiently at the mountain entrance. Cale was someone who said that he, Choi Han, was enough for protection. Choi Han had been thinking about this act of protecting thest few days. ¡°I¡¯ve been debating this for a while, but there is something I need to tell you.¡± The report about the dragon yesterday was not really what Choi Han had wanted to report. He hesitated for a moment, before looking back toward Cale and starting to speak. Choi Han¡¯s gaze was looking past Cale¡¯s shoulder to a tree near the entrance of the mountain. ¡°Mr. Ron is a dangerous person.¡± Cale flinched for a moment at this straight thatnded on him without any warnings. Should he pretend to know or pretend not to know? He quickly made up his mind. Cale had not expected a question like this, but he calmly responded back. ¡°Is that so?¡± ¡°You are not surprised? There is a dangerous stench of blood on him. He is a strong person who has shed a lot of blood. At first, I thought that Cale-nim knew about it already and still had Mr. Ron by your side.¡± But if Cale had known, he would have taken the strong Ron with him to rescue the dragon. But Cale had not done that. Choi Han thought that to mean that Cale either did not know about Ron¡¯s strength or did not trust Ron, but there was no way Cale wouldn¡¯t trust someone who had been with him for 18 years. That was why Choi Han hade to the conclusion that Cale was not aware of Ron¡¯s strength. ¡°But neither Cale-nim nor anybody else seemed to know about Mr. Ron¡¯s strength.¡± Choi Han had debated about this for a while. Honestly speaking, the fact that Cale had said that he did not have any expectations made him decide not to say anything about Ron. However, the fact that Cale had chosen him to be the guard today made Choi Han feel guilty. ¡°That was why I thought I needed to tell Cale-nim.¡± ¡°Oh really? I didn¡¯t know Ron was strong.¡± Choi Han asked once more after hearing Cale¡¯s calm response. ¡°Will you still keep him around you? He seems like he is an evil person.¡± Cale snorted at Choi Han¡¯s words. Keep Ron around him? Cale was nning on pushing Ron over to Choi Han the moment they arrived at the capital. ¡°Whether it is you or Ron.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± ¡°You say that he has a dangerous strength, but why do you leave Ron alone?¡± ¡°That is because-.¡± Choi Han suddenly could not say anything. ¡°It is probably because he has not done anything to you.¡± Choi Han could not retort Cale¡¯s words. There was the initial misunderstanding had that led to their small battle, but Ron had helped him find a sword after that, and even helped take care of the issue with Harris Vige. Cale silently observed Choi Han. It was not just to Choi Han. Ron did not do anything to anybody. The only thing that Ron did was giving Cale lemonade every so often or making fun of Cale with rabbit meat. But that was nothing. ¡°Ron has been my servant for 18 years.¡± No matter what, Ron was dedicated to his act as a servant. Even the Vice Captain, who cared a lot about hierarchy, did not get angry when Ron, a servant, was walking shoulder to shoulder with him. Even deputy butler Hans did not get angry when Ron did his job for him. It was because Ron was skilled and well-liked throughout the estate. ¡°Do you hate Ron?¡± Choi Han shook his head after debating it for a moment. ¡°No.¡± ¡°Then?¡± ¡°I just thought it would be better for you to know that he was a dangerous person, and thus decided to report.¡± ¡°Whether it is you or Ron.¡± Choi Han looked at Cale after hearing that once more. ¡°You are both the same to me. In that aspect, you are dangerous as well.¡± Cale looked at Choi Han with a stoic expression and continued to speak. ¡°You are strong as well.¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Choi Han let out a gasp. Cale didn¡¯t know the reason behind it, but continued to speak. ¡°It¡¯s all the same to me.¡± He didn¡¯t know the reason, but Ron, who hade over from the Eastern Continent, was living in the Henituse territory while hiding his identity. If someone like that was to touch the son of the Count? That would spread like wildfire in the kingdom. Ron was someone who did not care about anything or anyone else, other than his son and himself. So why would someone like that cause a ruckus? Cale was just scared because he knew that Ron was a dangerous old man. He wanted to get rid of that dangerous old man as soon as possible so that he could live in peace. ¡°As long as he is my servant, he is just my servant. Just like you are Choi Han, who needs to pay me back.¡± Cale checked his watch. The strength of the wind in the cave was different based on the time of day. He needed to hurry. ¡°You have nothing else to say, right? Don¡¯t follow me.¡± Choi Han silently nodded his head in respond. Cale did not even look back as he headed to the small mountain. After seeing that he could no longer see Cale, Choi Han looked back at the tree at the mountain entrance and started to speak. ¡°You heard him, right?¡± Ron smoothly jumped off the tree. He red at Choi Han and started to smile. A blunt voice started to flow out of Ron¡¯s mouth. ¡°I changed his poopy diapers and raised him since he was young.¡± That was the truth. Choi Han stood in front of the path to the mountain and started to speak. ¡°Cale-nim had said that nobody is to follow him from here on.¡± ¡°I know, you little punk.¡± Ron turned his back to the mountain with no regrets. After hearing that Cale was only going with Choi Han, and even leaving the Cat Tribe children behind, Ron had followed, just in case something happened. ¡°I shouldn¡¯t havee.¡± They say that you get more fickle the older you get, and this fickleness was such a pain. Ron walked back to the inn at a much slower pace than when he had left, and Choi Han watched Ron disappear before sitting down on a boulder to wait for Cale to return. Cale was standing in front of a cave just off of the mountain path. The cave entrance was covered with vines, such that it would be difficult to find unless you were looking carefully. ¡°Damn it.¡± Cale started to frown. The cave entrance was pretty small. He looked down at his clothes. He had worn simple clothes, but they were still baggy. ¡°Sigh.¡± Cale let out a long sigh before crawling into the cave. Whether it was the man-eating tree or this cave, everything rted to ancient powers seemed to be crazy. The ground by the cave entrance now had the traces of Cale crawling in. A momentter, there was a small reptile footprint on the same spot. Cale could see the cave bing wider after crawling in for about five minutes. ¡®Taylor must have been really desperate. He crawled all the way in here, even with his disabled lower body.¡¯ Since you had to stack the rock tower with your own strength, the eldest son Taylor had to personallye here. What took Cale five minutes to do probably took Taylor much, much longer. Cale stood back up once it was wide enough and started to walk farther in. The farther he went in, the clearer the noise in his ear became. Swiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiish. Swiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiish. It was the sound of the wind. The sound that appeared when the winds were hitting each other became louder as he walked farther into the cave. Finally, Cale located some cloth and a pir that was probably a hut a long time ago. After taking a single look at it, Cale continued to walk farther inside. Swiiiiiiiiiiiish. The sound of the wind became even stronger. Boom. Boom. He could even hear the wind crashing into the cave walls like a giant fist. Cale started to walk even faster. ¡®The wind. I wonder if it will sound like this when I get the, ¡®Sound of the Wind,¡¯ ancient powerter.¡¯ Shield. Then Recovery. Then quick feet. That was Cale¡¯s n of action. Cale finally had to stop walking after thinking about the next ancient power he would be trying to get. It wasn¡¯t that he stopped walking, it was that he was forced to stop walking. ¡°Wow.¡± This was even worse than Cale had expected. Arge underground area had appeared in front of Cale. At the same time, a vicious wind tornado filled his gaze. Boom, boom! The rocks on the cave walls were slowly crumbling because of the tornado. There were quite a bit of rocks on the ground that let Cale know that this area was consistently gettingrger. Cale looked back and forth between the underground area and the path that he traveled to get here. He felt like he would be pushed back by the wind if he went inside. Well, not just pushed back, but smashed against the wall, which would probably seriously injure him. That was how strong the wind was. ¡°Mm.¡± Of course, the center of that tornado will be calm, as it is the eye of the storm. ¡®I guess it would have been impossible for Taylor without Cage¡¯s help.¡¯ He now understood why the novel said the two of them had struggled for a whole week. However, Cale started to smile. It was now going to be a battle against time. Cale stepped into the underground area, into the vicious tornado, without any hesitation. Cale¡¯s red hair started to flutter along with his clothes. At the same time... ¡°N, no! You will get hurt! You are extremely weak!¡± The dragon appeared at the back of the path and shouted urgently. Also at the same time ... ¡°...Huh?¡± The dragon could see arge shield with silver wings appear and surround Cale. The wings, that were shining so brightly that it could be called holy, surrounded Cale while therge shield blocked the wind. The shield and the wings were keeping Cale safe. Cale turned around. His eyes opened widely as his gazended on the dragon. ¡°What the hell are you doing here?¡± The ck Dragon could not say anything in response. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 24: Returning the Favor (4) Chapter 24: Returning the Favor (4) 3Chapter 24: Returning the Favor (4) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Instead, the ck Dragon just slowly crawled back into the path. While Cale was watching the dragon in disbelief, he could hear a quiet voice piercing through the wind to reach his ear. ¡°...I was ... just passing by.¡± ¡°Tsk.¡± The ck Dragon¡¯s back flinched after hearing Cale click his tongue, but Cale did not have time to pay attention to the dragon. The cave¡¯s wind had a cycle of 3 hours of strong wind and 3 hours of weak wind. This was the moment that the wind started to get weaker. Of course, it would still be stronger the closer he got to the center. Swiiiiiiiiiiiiish. ¡°Quite scary.¡± The wind was still pretty strong to be called the, ¡®weak phase.¡¯ The novel mentioned that the 150 year old man walked through this strong wind to get to the rock tower. Cale turned his gaze back to the center of the cave. Therge underground area. In the middle of the tornado was a half-stacked rock tower. It looked like there were no winds over there. Next to the half-stacked rock tower were numerous other rocks. ¡®I need to stack all of those rocks up.¡¯ The issue was getting to the tower. Stacking the rocks would not be a problem. Cale looked over the shield and the wings surrounding him, before taking a step forward. Tang. Tang. The rough wind shed against the shield. Even though the silver shield was transparent, it sounded like the wind was hitting a real metal shield. That noise made the ck Dragon that was looking away slowly turn around to look at Cale. ¡°...But you are weak...¡± The Cale that the dragon could see was having a difficult time, even though the shield and wings were protecting him. The wind that could not be blocked by the shield and wings was making his clothes flutter. The wind that seeped through the bottom of the shield made him stop moving every so often as well. However, Cale continued to step forward one step at a time. Then the dragon saw it. Cale was smiling. This human, that was nothingpared to that strong tornado, the same human that was weaker than even the kittens he was traveling with, the human that was the weakest out of everybody he was traveling with, was smiling while pushing through this wind. The dragon had never seen such a silver shield before. He had never seen such wings either. The dragon took a look at his own wings. It was very different from his wings. It was extremely beautiful. The dragon was curious as to what that power might be. However, the dragon was focused not on the holy and magnificent shield nor wings. Its full attention was on the smiling Cale. And the target of the gaze, Cale, was continuing to smile. ¡®It¡¯s doable. It¡¯sfortable.¡¯ It was a bit difficult and slow because of the wind, but it was actually a breeze. Compared to how Beacrox was almost killed by Ron while being taught his sword art, this was child¡¯s y. This made Cale once again feel like it really was best to earn something without putting in much effort. There were no physical or mental strain endured when using the Indestructible Shield. There would be a short strain if it was to break, but it was not in any danger of breaking right now. ¡®It just gets pushed back.¡¯ The shield just got pushed back if the wind was strong. Honestly speaking, Cale had expected to be pushed back multiple times. That was why he had originally lowered the strength of the shield and erged it as much as possible. He had been nning on slowly shrinking the size of the shield whenever he got pushed back. However, this shield was working better than Cale had expected. That made Cale a bit smug, but when he had reached about the halfway mark to the center of the tornado, he had to get rid of all side thoughts. The novel had said that you would hear a voice once you got close to the center. It was supposed to be the voice of an old man. Cale was waiting for that voice. The tornado was supposed to get stronger once the voice started to appear. - I regret it. He could hear the voice. But it was a bit odd. - Ahem, I regret it. It was a sad old man. ¡°Tsk tsk.¡± Cale clicked his tongue. None of these ancient powers were normal. Why did Taylor think the old man¡¯s voice was sincere? Cale could not understand Taylor¡¯s train of thought. However, Cale stopped clicking his tongue and stopped moving. - The one that has a power that I am familiar with, I am hoping that you do not get this power. ¡°Hmm?¡± ¡®The one with a power I am familiar with?¡¯ That phrase had caught Cale¡¯s attention. At the same time, the wind started to get stronger and swept through the area. Tang. Tang. Tang. The wind shed even stronger against the transparent wind and made loud noises. However, Cale¡¯s concerned expression was not because of the wind. His hair continued to flutter in the wind. ¡®Is he talking about the Indestructible Shield?¡¯ The only thing that Cale could deduce about this, ¡®familiar power,¡¯ was the Indestructible Shield. It had not said anything like that to Taylor in the novel. Did the owner of this ancient power know the owner of the Indestructible Shield? Multiple thoughts flew across Cale¡¯s mind at once. However, Cale still chose to step forward for now. The wind would only get stronger if he dyed any longer. - I pretty much betrayed myrades! I was a terrible person! Ahem, I stayed alive on my own and got old. How shameful am I?! Cale could only hear the old man¡¯s voice every so often as he was having difficulty stepping forward one step at a time. - I was always hoping for everyone toe back to life. However, my wish was something that could not be achieved. I could onlyment and cry! That was why I could not finish my rock tower. ¡°How annoying.¡± Cale found the old man¡¯smenting voice to be annoying. Screw sincere, it was like he wanted to die. It was the style that Cale hated. Epicureans were so much better. Cale centered his body after being slightly pushed back, and put some strength into his legs. He could hear the voice once again after taking another step. - This restoration strength is useless. It is only capable of protecting myself. It is not helpful in any other way. I am a trash! Cale ignored the cries of the old man that rang through his mind. The power to protect himself was most important to Cale. Who cares if it made him trash. None of it mattered as long as he could live. Just five more steps. The center of the tornado was right in front of him. Boom. Boom. Boom. The sound of the wind that was shing became stronger. It was as if a human was punching the shield. ¡®It might break.¡¯ Cale thought that the wind might now be strong enough for the shield to break. It should be doing more damage than just pushing him back now. The moment Cale thought that the wind might cut him, he realized something else as well. - I did not die even when the wind cut me like a sharp de. It was the fact that the owners of these ancient powers were all extremely chatty. Cale immediately curled up and decreased the size of the shield. Boom Boom. The shield was now smaller, but in return, it was much stronger. It was able to push back an even stronger force of wind. Cale reached out toward the transparent shield and clenched the transparent handle on the inside of the shield as he continued to move forward. One step. - Restoration is a cursed power. Two steps. - My heart was always beating. But I could not move on. Three steps. - It was because I was afraid of death. Four steps. - I was afraid of pain because I had always been injured, and I was even more afraid of death, the end of that pain. And finally. Cale took the final fifth step. Shhhhhhhhhhhhhhh- The inside of the windless area sounded like it was raining all around Cale. The eye of the storm. The winds were swarming the area outside this calm center. He could hear the old man¡¯s voice along with the sound of the wind. - I chose to throw everything else away so that I could continue to live. That was thest thing the old man said. ¡°Tsk.¡± ¡®Who cares about anything else? Livinges first.¡¯ This old man had a lot of useless things to say. Cale clicked his tongue and returned the shield back to his heart. The silver light surrounding him instantly disappeared. He headed toward the halfpleted rock tower and crouched down in front of it. It was a normal rock tower that you could find at the top of a mountain. However, all of these rocks were ck. Just like the man-eating tree, these rocks that have existed since ancient times were different from normal rocks. Just like the wind surrounding this area. ¡°Whatever.¡± Cale, who had been thinking about making it aesthetically pleasing, changed his mind. That would be too annoying. He took out a pair of gloves from his pocket and put them on before picking the rocks up to stack the rest of the rock tower. ck. ck. ck. The rock tower was being built up, one rock at a time. It did not take that long. Even Taylor hadpleted this part pretty easily. However, Cage, who had note into the central area and had instead waited outside the eye of the storm, suffered quite a bit. This central area, like with all ancient powers, was somewhere that a person could only enter on their own. ¡°It¡¯s easy.¡± Cale picked up thest ck rock and gently put it on top of the rock tower. It was at that moment. sh! The ck rocks slowly turned white. At the same time, Cale got up and looked around. The wind was slowly dying down. ¡°...Huh?¡± Cale ignored the confused voice of the dragon and waited until all of the wind died down. He then crossed his arms and listened to the old man¡¯s voice. He had no choice. - I tried to fight with them. However, I did not know that I was so weak against pain. They were not people who served the lord. I only realized that after we all went our separate ways and I ended up alone. The words of the old man caught Cale¡¯s attention. He then recalled the words of the owner of the Indestructible Shield. ¡®The people in the Forest of Darkness who called themselves servants of the lord only gave me terrible food.¡¯ He had a bad feeling that he had learned something he shouldn¡¯t have learned about. He had an odd feeling that the things he just heard were things that he should not tell anybody else about in his entire life. Cale started to frown even more as the old man continued to speak. That voice was something only Cale could hear, thus making the dragon hesitate while looking at the silently standing Cale. - I piled the rocks. I piled them up hoping that I could turn back time, hoping that I could be happy. But then I destroyed it. - I hated my selfish self for thinking about my own happiness after betraying myrades and running away. ¡°Sigh.¡± Cale let out a long sigh. This old man really was frustrating. Cale started to speak in frustration. ¡°It is human nature to be selfish.¡± The old man¡¯s voice disappeared for a moment. ¡®Is it over?¡¯ Cale started to smile thinking that the old man was finally getting to the end. However, the sobbing voice continued once more. - Ahem. My older sister said the same thing. She was a really wonderful older sister. She was more reliable than anybody else. Ah, my older sister. Sob! ...The old man was crying. ¡°I¡¯m going to go crazy.¡± Tap Tap. Tap. Cale was impatiently tapping the ground with his foot. Cale did not want to keep standing here like this. After crying for a while, the old man showed his thanks. - You, the one with the familiar power. That rude personality of yours makes me think of my older brother. I am very envious of how rude you are. And, finally, the old man said the final words that Cale had been waiting for. These were the same final words the old man had said to Taylor. - Break it. Then you will, ¡®ovee,¡¯ your limits. Cale started to smile and instantly kicked the rock tower without any hesitation. Tang. Crumble. Boom! The white rocks flew away to hit the ground and the wall. The dragon that had been watching Cale flinched and stared at Cale as if he was crazy. However, the following scene made the dragon gasp. ¡°Wow.¡± The broken rock tower. A white light floated up from underneath the rock tower. Ooooooooong. The gentle vibration that pulsated throughout the cave could be felt under Cale¡¯s feet. At that moment, the light rushed toward Cale. Cale reached his hand out to grab the light. The moment he grabbed it, the light shot toward Cale¡¯s heart like an arrow. The light arrow pierced through Cale¡¯s heart before shing and disappearing. ¡°Huuuuu.¡± Cale let out a deep breath. He then lowered his head to look under his shirt. The fancy shield tattoo that was over his heart had disappeared and had been reced by a red heart. Cale could immediately feel the new vigor inside of his body. This vigor from the, ¡®Vitality of the Heart,¡¯ would make the shield even stronger. He would also recover at a much faster speed than normal people, even when he got injured. Unlike the shield, which was a superpower, this was more apart of the physical strengths of the human body. This regenerative strength was so strong that it managed tost since the ancient times to be passed down like this. Cale brought forth the shield again. ¡°Just as I expected.¡± Cale started to smile. The pattern on the shield had changed to a heart. The only difference from the tattoo on his chest was that it was silver and not red. He then returned the shield, before immediately starting to walk. ¡°You.¡± Cale had walked toward the dragon, that was pretending like nothing was going on and instead kept staring up at the sky. Cale just continued to stare at the dragon that was crouched down on the ground. He then stoically asked the dragon, as if he was throwing a rock into ake. ¡°You want toe with me?¡± ¡°...You are so weak that you need protection. But I do not like humans.¡± The dragon answered, that way before starting to turn invisible. It had used its invisibility magic again. Cale just snorted at the disappearing dragon. ¡°What a fickle punk.¡± He was also fickle for asking the question after telling the others to ignore the dragon, but this dragon was just as bad. However, he could not just ignore the dragon after it had jumped out earlier to try to save him. Cale looked around the cave, which no longer had any wind storms raging about, before turning around and heading out of the cave. Of course, he had to crawl back out as well. He returned the vines back to their original spots, and covered up the cave entrance properly. He then turned around and started to speak while walking away. His gaze was directed toward a grassy area. ¡°I can see you standing on the grass.¡± He could see four imprints on the grass, each one representing one of the dragon¡¯s four paws. These paw imprints then quickly disappeared. The dragon had flown up into the sky. Cale shook his head. ¡®I guess my family grew in the end.¡¯ Cale could not help but let out a deep sigh. It was obvious that the dragon would continue to follow him in that invisible state. Just why was this dragon such a noob when it knows ancient magic like invisibility? Cale had thought that all dragons were intelligent, but that seemed like it might not be the case. After walking back down the mountain, Cale could see Choi Han¡¯s judging expression. Choi Han looked at Cale silently, before finally asking. ¡°Did you... roll around the mountain?¡± ¡®Shit.¡¯ The wind had made his hair a mess, and his clothes were dirty after crawling across the rocky and sandy cave entrance. Cale sternly responded to Choi Han. ¡°Yes. I rolled around.¡± Choi Han looked toward Cale with concern. Cale just avoided the gaze. That night, Cale told the kittens to deliver a message. It was a letter that was created with magic, which made it impossible to determine the handwriting of the writer. ¡°Make sure they don¡¯t see you.¡± The letter was the new hope for the priestess Cage and the Marquis¡¯s eldest son, Taylor. 1. Something simr to the English proverb of trying to break a boulder with an egg. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 25: Returning the Favor (5) Chapter 25: Returning the Favor (5) 3Chapter 25: Returning the Favor (5) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Late at night in a small two story house in the outskirts of Puzzle City. The only light in the area was the light on the first floor of this small house, shining out through the windows. Marquis Stan¡¯s eldest son, Taylor, the owner of the house, started to frown. ¡°What is going on?¡± ¡°Damn it. Ugh. Hold on. Don¡¯t talk to me right now.¡± Cage, the priestess of the God of Death, was clenching her head in pain. ng. The beer cup in her hand fell to the ground. Taylor and three of his people approached her quickly. ¡°What? Is the lord saying something to you again?¡± Taylor looked toward her with concern. The God of Death spoke to Cage from time to time. This had suddenly happened one day and would sporadically appear like this. Cage had hidden this fact from the church, and only Taylor and his three subordinates knew about it. ¡°Ah, so annoying!¡± After struggling for a while, Cage jumped up and headed to the back door of the house. She was moving pretty quickly. She was still clenching her head and staggering a bit, but her gaze remained focused on the back door. Taylor told his subordinates to stay back as he pushed his wheelchair and followed behind her. ¡®Did someone break in?¡¯ They may be in a small house, but there were magic rms set up everywhere. Taylor was too paranoid about his younger brother to sleep without these rms. After having both of his knees destroyed by a hitman in his own room at the Marquis¡¯s estate, there was nowhere that Taylor considered to be safe anymore. ¡°Cage. What is going on?¡± ¡°Hold on.¡± m! Cage mmed the back door open. Taylor could only see a peaceful backyard. It was calm and tranquil, as always. There were a couple ofmps lighting the garden up, making it the most lit area in the property. Cage started to rush into the backyard and Taylor followed behind her. Cage walked all the way to the fence at the boundary of the property and let out a gasp. ¡°Ha!¡± This was the location right outside of the range of the rm. On top of that fence was a small rock tower made of five small rocks. It was justrge enough for the single knight staying at this house to find when he went on his patrolter. ¡°... Crazy shit. It was real.¡± Some rough words came out of Cage¡¯s mouth. Taylor arrived next to Cage in his wheelchair and started to look at the rock tower on top of the fence with confusion. ¡°What is this?¡± At Taylor¡¯s question, Cage read the message that was written in chalk next to it. ¡°¡®Break this if you want your wish to be granted.¡¯ That¡¯s what it says.¡± Confusion and curiosity both filled Taylor¡¯s face simultaneously. Cage let out a sigh after looking at him and pressed her temples with her finger. ¡°I vote that you break it. No, it sounds crazy, but the lord says to break it.¡± ¡°...What?¡± ¡°This is the first time the lord has not said some bullshit. Why is he talking so much these days? He usually speaks to me maybe once a year.¡± ¡°What does this rock tower have to do with it?¡± Cage turned to make eye contact with Taylor. ¡°The turning point of our lives. That is what he said.¡± The God of Death only came to Cage when she was sleeping. Sleep was simr to death. That was why sleep was a path of sorts for the God of Death. However, this time, she had heard her lord while she was drinking. Cage thought that the God of Death was angry at her for drinking too much beer. That was why she had weed it. She wanted this god to stop paying attention to her. However, the God of Death had a different message for her. ¡°¡®The decision is yours to make. However, don¡¯t break it if you want to live a peaceful life.¡¯ That¡¯s what he said.¡± She looked toward the rock tower. There was something underneath. ¡°There is a letter underneath the rock tower. I think they piled this rock tower up for the letter.¡± She turned back to look at her best friend, Taylor. He had to look up from the wheelchair, so, although he could see the rock tower, he could not see the letter underneath it. ¡°I don¡¯t feel any strange powers surrounding the rock tower.¡± Although she was not as sensitive as real mages, using divine powers allowed Cage to be pretty sensitive and perceptive toward her surroundings. She would be able to feel if there were any curses or negative energy surrounding an item or a ce. She was, after all, a servant of the God of Death. She was waiting for Taylor¡¯s response. Taylor looked up at the night sky, before slowly turning to look at Cage. ¡°Destroy it.¡± Cage immediately punched the rock tower in front of her. Tang. Tang. Tang. The rocks on top of the fence all fell down. Taylor just nkly watched it happen. ¡®Don¡¯t break it if I want to live peacefully?¡¯ Taylor had never lived peacefully. He also had no desire to live peacefully. He was going to find a way to get his legs fixed and continue to push forward. And then- ¡®I will overturn this damned family of mine.¡¯ Taylor reached his hand out and Cage handed him the envelope. Taylor immediately opened the envelope and found that letter was written using magic to prevent people from recognizing the sender¡¯s handwriting. Nobles frequently used this item. Taylor opened the letter without any hesitation. The first two lines of the letter, that were visible through themps in the yard, immediately caught his attention. [The crown prince is in possession of an ancient power. It is called the ¡®Star of Healing,¡¯ and is useless to him. It is a one-time use power that can heal any type of injury.] [He is looking to trade it for a method to hold the second prince and third prince in check.] Taylor¡¯s hands started to shake. ¡°What is going on?¡± Cage stiffened up after seeing Taylor¡¯s expression and his shaking hands. However, she soon rxed. ¡°Ha!¡± It was because Taylor started tough. He then handed her the letter. ¡°it will definitely be a turning point in our lives.¡± ¡°What the hell are you talking about?¡± Cage took the letter from Taylor and started to read. She stopped for a moment after reading about the ancient power and the crown Prince, but then continued to read the rest. She then jerked her head up after reading the bottom part of the letter. [Your legs might not move, but your head, arms, eyes, and mouth can. The rest of you is still very much alive.] [The decision is yours to make, Taylor Stan, eldest son of Marquis Stan.] Taylor looked toward the darkness at the corner of the yard and started to speak. ¡°Cage.¡± ¡°Yeah?¡± ¡°Let''s leave this ce to the butler, and head to the capital for now.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± She decided to go along with the decision of the still alive Taylor. She was someone who had experienced death many more times than anybody else because she was a priestess of the God of Death, thus causing her to be very clear about the value of life. ¡°I¡¯m sure the intelligent Taylor will take care of everything. You¡¯re pretty good at that.¡± Cage was trusting Taylor¡¯s mind and abilities. ¡°You¡¯re right. I used to be pretty good.¡± ¡®Used to be.¡¯ Cage gazed toward Taylor after hearing him use past tense. ¡°I should have known how to take care of myself.¡± Unfortunately, Taylor injured his legs because he did not take good care of himself by letting himself get caught off guard. Taylor lifted his head to look at the small two story house. He had been frustrated enough being here for thest few months following a lead he didn¡¯t even know was real or not. Rather than just continuing this futile effort, it might be better to leave for a bit. At least the God of Death did not lie. Taylor was in need of a turning point. He started to speak. ¡°If it is the Crown Prince, we need to match the timing for the royal event. We need to hurry.¡± ¡°Alright. Let¡¯s hurry.¡± ¡°Will it be okay? We will run into a lot of the people from the temple if we go to the capital.¡± ¡°What can they do? Emunicate me? That¡¯d be great. I¡¯m just worried about you.¡± ¡°Thank you.¡± ¡°No need.¡± They smiled at each other and spoke at the same time, as Cage lifted up the letter. ¡°Benefactor.¡± Well, they couldn¡¯t be sure if this person was their benefactor or not, but they both had a feeling that the writer of this letter was their benefactor. That meant that, eventually, they would need to find this benefactor and return the favor. Two pairs of eyes, that were clear and without any traces of drinking just a few moments ago, quietly looked at the letter. It was the gaze of people who had found their turning point. The red kitten that was watching all of this from the roof of another house whispered to his sister, On. ¡°Noona, we can go home now, right?¡± ¡°Yes. We did our job. Let¡¯s go eat meat.¡± ¡°Woohoo!¡± The two kittens jumped from roof to roof as they returned to the residence. The next day, Cale was standing with his arms crossed and a frown on his face. His gaze was looking up and down at the person in front of him. Cale¡¯s outfit was even more shy and luxurious than usual. ¡®Young master! Even if I, Hans, was not there, how could you go rolling around on the mountain?¡¯ ¡®This Vice Captain should have escorted you!¡¯ ¡®Aigoo, young master. This Ron is very sad.¡¯ Cale had dressed up because he was annoyed at the gazes he got aftering back looking like a mess from crawling through the cave. The fancy outfit he was wearing looked quite good with his bright red hair. Cale was definitely notcking when it came to looks. But there was another reason Cale was looking annoyed right now. ¡°You¡¯re going to go like that?¡± They were standing in front of the inn. Cale was standing there with his arms crossed and looking at Choi Han. Choi Han had a small bag and his sword with him. ¡°Yes.¡± There was no special feast or farewell party for the leaving Choi Han. Neither Cale nor Choi Han wanted something like that. That was why this farewell was pretty small as well. Cale, the kittens, Hans, Ron, Beacrox, and the Vice Captain. That was it. The fact that the Vice Captain was there was a bit odd, but he was standing there with a frown like Cale as he said his goodbye. ¡°Sigh.¡± Cale sighed before taking a small bag out of his pocket and throwing it toward Choi Han. Choi Han easily caught the bag. Choi Han recognized the bag. It was the same size as the bag that Cale had given to the ck Dragon. Choi Han opened the bag to find potions and other types of useful items inside. Choi Han lifted his head from the bag and looked toward Cale. Cale just bluntly spoke when they made eye contact. ¡°What? What do you want? Just chuck it away if you don¡¯t want it.¡± Choi Han did not say anything, but Cale was just saying whatever he wanted to do. He then turned around and headed toward his room. ¡°Goodbye.¡± Cale had a stoic expression as he turned around after saying goodbye. There should not be any more reasons to see Choi Han. Well, that is, after one more time. They will meet again once at the capital, before he sends Choi Han off with Ron and Beacrox, along with a few orders. After that, he nned on having no contact with Choi Han at all. ¡°I will be back soon.¡± Choi Han¡¯s response, that seemed to contain a bit of joy, gave Cale the chills, but he did not look back. Choi Han felt that it was very much like Cale not to look back. His gaze then turned toward the rest of the group. ¡°See you at the capital!¡± ¡°Ahem. I will be training myself so that I will be the young master¡¯s personal guard when we are at the capital.¡± Deputy butler Hans cheerfully said goodbye, while the Vice Captain responded in a very annoyed voice. ¡°I will keep my de sharpened.¡± ¡°See youter.¡± Beacrox and Ron said goodbye as well. Of course, the kittens patted Choi Han¡¯s leg with their paws to say goodbye. Finally, the ck Dragon, that had been using invisibility magic to stay in the yard during the day andy by Cale¡¯s window at night, sent some invisible mana to Choi Han. ¡°I¡¯ve already received so much, but I seem to keep being on the receiving end.¡± Choi Han put the magic bag in his pocket before starting to smile. Cale could not see it because his back was turned, but this was the first time the rest of them saw Choi Han with such a bright smile. ¡°I will see you all at the capital.¡± Choi Han respectfully said goodbye before heading out of the inn. Someone like him, who had spent tens of years in solitude that felt even worse than death, now had somewhere to return to. He also had people he needed to pay back for their grace. ¡®I need to make sure to properlyplete this task.¡¯ Choi Han walked away from Cale and the rest, and headed out of Puzzle City. The next morning, Cale¡¯s group got on the carriage and prepared to leave Puzzle City as well. ¡°Young master, we are ready to go.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Cale nodded his head at Ron¡¯s words, and Ron quickly closed the window and got the carriage to start moving. They were starting back on their journey. ¡°What are you looking at?¡± Cale was staring at the kitten siblings, who were fidgeting while trying to avoid his gaze. The kittens flinched and turned their eyes away. Cale started to smile. ¡°What? Did you meet a dragon or something?¡± Gasp. Cale heard the kittens gasp, but just ignored it. Choi Han may have left, but now a dragon was following them. However, he did not have time to worry about that fact. After a day¡¯s worth of travel, they were now getting ready to make camp. ¡°Excuse me, if it is okay, may we share a part of your campsite?¡± A carriage arrived by Cale¡¯s campsite area, and the person that seemed to be the driver got off and approached the Vice Captain. ¡°May I ask who you are?¡± The Vice Captain asked, even though he already knew the answer after seeing the red snake on the driver¡¯s armor. The driver bowed to the Vice Captain and Cale behind him and introduced himself. ¡°My name is Tom, and I am a part of Marquis Stan¡¯s estate.¡± ¡®Shit.¡¯ Cale almost said that out loud, as he looked at the shabby looking carriage without a crest. The window opened and Cale could see the face of Taylor Stan. ¡°My name is Taylor Stan. I saw Count Henituse¡¯s crest, and am asking for help, even though I¡¯m sure it is not ideal.¡± If it is the strong Count Henituse¡¯s campsite, Taylor thought he would be safe for the night. It was not so good in Cale¡¯s eyes. Cale had now met Marquis Stan¡¯s eldest son Taylor and the crazy priestess Cage. He thought about the dragon that would be hunting a boar or deer for him right now and started to frown. ¡®Damn it.¡¯ One left and three showed up. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 26: You (1) Chapter 26: You (1) 2Chapter 26: You (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist And not just three average beings. One was a dumb dragon, another was a crazy priestess who wants to be emunicated, and the third was a punk from Marquis Stan¡¯s family. ¡°Sigh.¡± Cale could not help but sigh. He dropped his head before lifting it back up again. Once he did, he could see that it had be much quieter. Cale thought the silence was odd, and looked toward Hans. Hans smiled awkwardly, before stealthily gesturing toward the driver, Tom, and Taylor, who was looking out of the carriage window. Taylor had a bitter smile on his face as he started to speak. ¡°If it is inconvenient for your party, we will leave.¡± The eldest son of the Marquis family, and the son who was pushed out of the family. After his legs became paralyzed, Taylor¡¯s life turned 180 degrees overnight, from one of luxury and power, to one where his family gave him just the minimal amount of support needed to survive. Those nobles, who knew that anyone other than the sessor to the Marquis title in the Stan family would die immediately, started to avoid Taylor, finding him to be an annoyance. They even purposefully ignored him in front of Venion or the other siblings to try to curry their favor as well. The current Taylor¡¯s situation was even worse than that of a bastard son of a baron¡¯s family. Taylor knew about Cale, the trash of the Henituse family. A luxurious golden turtle as their symbol, as well as being a handsome young man with red hair. There was no one other than Cale who fit that description. Even someone like Count Henituse, who did not join a faction, could find it ufortable to associate with someone like him. They were all like that after his body became paralyzed. Taylor had remembered the reality of the situation after hearing Cale¡¯s sigh. But at that moment. ¡°Why would you leave?¡± Cale walked toward Taylor¡¯s carriage with a stoic expression on his face. ¡°This isn¡¯t my property. I wouldn¡¯t do something so childish when we are both fellow travelers.¡± Cale and Taylor made eye contact with each other. Cale then quickly peeked inside Taylor¡¯s carriage. ¡®She is there.¡¯ The crazy priestess, Cage, was observing him from inside the carriage. Cale had read about how her curses were really scary. Some people even said her curses were at the level of a necromancer, the cursed profession. Cale turned his gaze away from Cage and reached his hand out. ¡°I am Cale Henituse of the Henituse family.¡± Taylor gazed at the hand reaching out to him from outside the carriage. He then looked back at Cale¡¯s stoic expression. Click. Taylor opened the carriage door. Proper etiquette indicated that he should step out of the carriage to return the greeting. ¡°It is difficult for me to step out because of my legs.¡± ¡°I am aware.¡± Taylor looked once more toward Cale, who did not seem to care about the proper etiquette, and shook his hand. It was just a short handshake. ¡°Nice to meet you, young master Cale.¡± ¡®Not at all.¡¯ Cale was not happy about this meeting at all. He quickly tried to turn around because he did not want to be introduced to Cage. Unfortunately, Taylor was an extremely respectful person. ¡°This is mypanion, priestess Cage-nim. She is a follower of the God of Eternal Rest.¡± Eternal rest. This was a term for death. Cale held back another sigh, and looked toward Cage. Cage gracefully greeted him like a proper priestess. ¡°Nice to meet you, young master Cale. My name is Cage. May the peace of the night always be with you.¡± ¡®Peace of the night.¡¯ That was the general greeting those who served the God of Death gave to the public. ¡®Peace of the night my ass.¡¯ Forget peace of the night, Cale felt like he wouldn''t be able to even sleep properly tonight. He felt like he was drinking lemonade as he looked toward Cage, who was gently smiling. ¡®She¡¯s acting all nice and innocent, even though she finds that to be so annoying. That is the number one reason she wants to be emunicated.¡¯ She really was good at acting. Cale smiled at Cage, who still had a very stereotypical smile of a priestess on her face, and confidently replied. ¡°I do not believe in a god.¡± Cage¡¯s gaze became curious. Her gaze seemed to be asking what kind of crazy thing Cale was saying to a priestess, but Cale weed it. Cale just wanted her to keep thinking that he was a trash. ¡°You are an interesting person.¡± ¡°I guess I am a bit interesting.¡± Cale just casually responded to her statement and looked around the carriage. It was extremely shabby for the eldest son of a Marquis. Just one knight, a subordinate, who also served as the driver, and the two of them, Cage and Taylor. ¡®I¡¯m sure he¡¯s out of money as well.¡¯ Taylor probably spent a lot of money putting magic tools around the Puzzle City residence. Since he was not getting much help from the Marquis, he wouldn¡¯t really have any emergency funds to use. Taylor was probably doing everything he could to reduce his expenses. Taylor closed his eyes to hold back the shame while watching Cale look through his carriage. Cale did not put much meaning behind it, and started to think. ¡®They are probably heading to the capital because of my message.¡¯ It was obvious where they were heading. It was to the capital, to meet the crown prince. ¡°Hans.¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± Cale vaguely gave an order to the approaching Hans. ¡°Help them out.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡± ¡°Set up a separate meal for them and set up a campsite next to our as well.¡± He didn¡¯t want to eat with them, or even share the same campsite. ¡°And don¡¯t look for me. You take care of everything.¡± He didn¡¯t want to create a situation for them toe into contact with one another. Of course, he felt like things would not go as he wanted. ¡°Yes, sir. I will serve them like I am serving you, young master.¡± ¡°Whatever. Go bring me some alcohol.¡± ¡®Why did he suddenly be so passionate?¡¯ Cale just stared at the suddenly passionate Hans, and slightly bowed toward Taylor as he said goodbye. ¡°Then I will be on my way, young master Taylor.¡± ¡°Thank you for your benevolence, young master Cale.¡± ¡°It was nothing.¡± Cale turned away from Taylor, who had a curious look on his face. He then immediately headed back to his carriage without looking anywhere else. Of course, he gave an order to the Vice Captain who was walking by his side. ¡°Looks like they only have one knight. Vice Captain, you take care of their guard duty as well.¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± Cale verified what the Vice Captain had said to Taylor¡¯s knight before getting back on the carriage. It was regarding guard duty at night. Cale verified the knight¡¯s expression turning bright before the knight got back onto the carriage. Click. The door closed with a loud click. This made everyone turn their gaze toward the closed door of the carriage with the golden turtle crest, before returning to do their duties. Only Taylor and Cage, who didn''t really have anything to do right now, just continued to stare at the closed door. The two kittens greeted Cale inside the carriage. ¡°I¡¯ve seen those two people.¡± ¡°Hong. I was there too.¡± The kittens, who had been watching everything through the window, slowly approached Cale and sat down next to him before starting to talk to each other. They weren¡¯t looking at Cale nor even talking to him, but it was clear that the question was toward Cale. Cale answered the witty kittens¡¯ question. ¡°Pretend not to know.¡± ¡°Like the dragon?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The kittens nodded their heads to show their understanding. Cale watched them nod, before crossing his arms and closing his eyes. ¡®The Healing Star.¡¯ That was the name of the ancient power he wrote about in the letter to Cage and Taylor. The reason Cale came to know about this power was because of the za Terror incident. ¡®The Healing Star,¡¯ is a single use power that can heal any injury or illness to the body¡¯s original, healthy state. The crown prince was in possession of such a power. The deceased queen had given it to him. During the za Terror incident, the secret organization makes their move once the royal family arrives. Magic bombs across the capital and in the za go off at that moment at the same time. In the novel, Choi Han was only able to stop about half of it. That in itself was amazing, such that the kingdom considered him a hero, but Choi Han himself thought about the lives of the victims of the bombs, making his hatred for the secret organization be even worse. ¡®At that time, the secret organization installed bombs on some people during the incident.¡¯ Choi Han, along with the genius mage Rosalyn, protected the people from the bombs and helped with their escape. At that time, there was an old man that Choi Han had failed to save. The man had lost his right arm and leg while taking a bomb off and throwing it away from himself, and this incident had made Choi Han extremely upset. Watching the old man¡¯s hurt body, the crown prince thought about, ¡®The Healing Star.¡¯ That was how the power was originally introduced in the novel. Naturally, the crown prince did not use the power on the old man. Instead, he consoled Choi Han, who was feeling responsible for the old man¡¯s death, and raised him up as a hero. ¡®It is only normal.¡¯ Cale did not think the crown prince made the wrong decision. Who can judge him for wanting to use his power for himself? Of course, Choi Han or Rosalyn would have used it for the old man. ¡°By the way, is little brother dragon still following us?¡± Cale nodded his head at Hong¡¯s question. ¡®Since it is like this, I might as well use the dragon for my benefit as well.¡¯ His original n was to save him and then be done with him, but if the dragon was going to follow him around the country like a little puppy, he might as well put it to good use. He had already thought about how to use that dragon thest few nights as well. Cale knew the location of the 5 magic bombs that Choi Han had found in the novel, but he was not sure about the location of the remaining 5 magic bombs that ended up going off. The five bombs that were located were found by using Rosalyn¡¯s genius-level mana detection abilities to find them one by one. But now, Cale had an existence that was worlds better than Rosalyn at detecting mana following him around like a lost duck. ¡°Might as well make it work hard.¡± The kittens flinched at that statement, but Cale did not see it as he was thinking about all of the work he was going to make the dragon do in the capital. The dragon, who had no idea about any of this, delivered a boar to the campsite early in the morning once again. Cale, who slept in after staying upte nning out the things that needed to bepleted at the capital, went out to verify the boar before noticing an odd atmosphere. He had eaten and slept in the carriagest night. He was doing his best to not interact with Taylor and crew. That was why he could not understand this odd, and somewhat, dark atmosphere. ¡°Hans. What is going on?¡± Hans put on an awkward smile and greeted Cale. Hans, as well as the rest of the Cale¡¯s group, were quickly getting past their suspicions about the meat and fruit being delivered to them. Although Cale had no idea what Ron thought about it, since Cale and Choi Han both had said that it was fine, they just went along with it. Beacrox was easy to convince since he was always excited to see ingredients of the highest quality appear every morning. ¡°Haha, young master, did you finally wake up?¡± Hans slowly peeked toward Taylor and Cage, before approaching Cale. ¡°You see, I think young master Taylor has gotten the wrong idea.¡± ¡°Wrong idea?¡± Cale could see the boar, as well as Taylor on the wheelchair, and Cage pushing Taylor¡¯s wheelchair behind him. He approached the dead boar and stood next to the wheelchair as he started to speak. ¡°What is going on?¡± As usual, the boar that the dragon delivered was enormous. It wasrger than a tiger, the type of boar that would excite Beacrox quite a bit. And, as usual, there was a drawing next to the boar. The dragon must have found it annoying to draw the fork, as only the knife was drawn this time. ¡°...Young master Cale. I¡¯m sorry.¡± What kind of utter nonsense was this? Taylor had an apologetic smile on his face as he turned away from the boar. ¡°It seems like my movements have been detected.¡± Movement? Cale could then hear the priestess Cage mumbling behind Taylor. She was angry. ¡°We left in secret, so how is it possible? There is someone who can avoid my detection? This is too much!¡± ¡®How would someone at your level detect a dragon?¡¯ Cale was done figuring out what was going on. Something, or someone, that was able to catch such arge boar so easily and drop it off at their campsite without being detected by the priestess Cage or anyone else. That strength and stealthiness was something only an expert would have. Next to that feat of strength was a drawing of a knife. It was a small knife to Cale, but they seemed to be seeing a veryrge knife. Cale looked back at Taylor, who was looking at him with both despair and sorriness. ¡°...Young master Cale. This incident - ¡° ¡°Beacrox.¡± Cale called out to Beacrox. Marquis Stan¡¯s second son, Venion, was probably extremely busy right now. Why would someone like that pay attention to the disabled eldest son? It wasn¡¯t like Venion knew, ¡®The Healing Star,¡¯ was at the capital. ¡°Yes, young master?¡± Beacrox, who was standing there with his kitchen knife prepared, responded with excitement on his face. ¡°Looks like we¡¯ll be eating steak for breakfast.¡± ¡°Young master, it looks like we will get the highest quality steak once again.¡± Taylor, who was staring at Cale with a nk expression, suddenly started to speak. ¡°... Once again?¡± Cale nodded his head and responded. ¡°We have someone in our party who delivers food for us.¡± ¡°...Who is it?¡± Cale snorted before responding. ¡°He is surprisingly shy so you will not be able to see him.¡± Cale saw the leaves on a tree not far from the campsite moving up and down and shook his head. Cale shaking his head made both Taylor and Cage turn red from embarrassment. ¡°Ahem, I, I see. It seems we had the wrong idea.¡± ¡°It¡¯s not your fault. Beacrox is an excellent cook, so please have some steak before you go.¡± Beacrox stopped caressing the boar and looked up at Cale. Cale could not look at Beacrox because of what Taylor said next. ¡°Young master Cale, I heard that you are heading for the capital. If it is okay with you, may we follow behind you?¡± ¡®I knew it would be like this.¡¯ It was as Cale had expected. ¡°Please feel free to do whatever is best for you.¡± There was no way they would find out that he had written the letter just from them traveling with him. If it was going to be like this anyways, he might as well take care of them until the capital and have them owe him a debt. These two could be very useful in the future if he used them properly. ¡°Thank you. We will be under your care until we get close to the capital.¡± Cale started to smile a bit at Taylor¡¯s words. ¡®At least he¡¯s notpletely unreasonable.¡¯ Close to the capital. Taylor was only asking for help until a location that would not make things difficult for Cale or Count Henituse in dealing with Venion or Marquis Stan for associating with the disabled Taylor. There would be all sorts ofplications if they went into the capital together. ¡°We will determine thatter on.¡± Naturally, Cale had a different opinion. There were still many items in the magic box waiting to be used by Cale. ¡°Of course. Please feel free to let us know whenever is most convenient for you, young master.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± Taylor and Cage looked toward the casually responding Cale with curiosity. However, Cale avoided their gaze and started to speak to Hans. ¡°Bring my meal to the carriage.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡± Cale headed back to the carriage. At that moment, someone called out to him. ¡°Young master Cale.¡± It was Cage. She seemed to have a headache, as she started to frown and walk over toward Cale. Cale had a bitter taste in his mouth while watching Cage approach him. ¡°What can I do for you, priestess-nim?¡± ¡°Do you really not believe in any god?¡± ¡®Now what the heck does she want?¡¯ ¡°Yes, none of them.¡± ¡°... I understand.¡± Cale quickly headed to the carriage after hearing Cage¡¯s response. Taylor approached her as she watched Cale walk away. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± Cage rarely engaged with people other than people from the temple or her close friends. That was why it was really odd for Taylor to see Cage frowning and reaching out to Cale. She shook her head and responded with a very bitter expression. ¡°It¡¯s odd.¡± ¡°What is?¡± ¡°Well, it¡¯s like.¡± Cage touched the back of her head. ¡°I have this bitter feeling that the God of Death is caressing the back of my head with a sympathetic expression.¡± ¡°...What kind of feeling is that? Did you not sleep properly?¡± ¡°Maybe.¡± Cage continued to feel that way every time she looked at Cale. The only time she felt this way in the past was when the temple had forced her to do a lot of manualbor in order to build a new temple. She had felt this same feeling when she plopped down from exhaustion and the God of Death was looking down at her with concern. ¡®There¡¯s no way young master Cale will order us around like that damn temple.¡¯ Cage decided Taylor was right about her not sleeping properly, and tried to shake the feeling away. That was how Cale¡¯s crew grew bigger and they continued toward the capital with no other issues. Every time Cale got tired of sitting down and stepped out of the carriage, Taylor¡¯s group continued to look toward him, but they did not have any conversations. They continued to travel like that until they were at an inn about one day¡¯s worth of travelling away from the capital. ¡°Young master Cale, you like alcohol, right?¡± Taylor and Cage came to look for Cale. ¡°What can I do for you?¡± Cale wanted to know why they came to visit him sote at night, but his expression was not that odd. Taylor smiled at Cale¡¯s demeanor. ¡°Cale Henituse, the trash who cannot go a day without alcohol.¡± When Taylor was still the potential sessor to the Marquis, he had received all of the information about the nobles as well. Cale¡¯s information was so unique that there was no way he could forget it. ¡°But I don¡¯t think that is all.¡± However, Cale was very differentpared to the information. He stayed in the carriage all day so that they would feel at peace, and had the generosity to give them the best treatment possible. His subordinates also trusted and followed him. Most importantly, he treated the two of them like normal people. ¡°You are different from the rumors.¡± They were now right in front of the capital. Taylor and Cage would need to move stealthily starting early the next morning. Of course, they will have to confidently walk in when they walk into the royal pce. But there were many things they were prepared to research before that happened. However, they had made up their mind to move differently than their original n. They had been watching Cale Henituse for over a week. This person was now on Taylor and Cage¡¯s mind. ¡°Young master Cale. It should be okay to share a drink with us before we leave, right?¡± If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 27: You (2) Chapter 27: You (2) 0Chapter 27: You (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist ¡°Come on in.¡± Cale motioned for them toe into the room, and Cage pushed Taylor¡¯s wheelchair inside. Once all three of them sat down at the table, Cale did not even take a look at the alcohol before he asked. ¡°What is it that you want?¡± Cale¡¯s voice was extremely cold and stoic as usual. However, this just confirmed in Taylor¡¯s mind that this person in front of him was not a trash. In fact, he was smarter than most people thought. Taylor had note here just to drink with Cale. Alcohol was only good when you werefortably drinking with people you could trust. Drinking with others was just for easy conversation and observing the other party. ¡°What kind of person do you think I am, young master Cale?¡± Cale quietly observed Taylor after hearing his question, before approaching his bed and picking up a pouch. He brought it back and put it on top of the table. ng. A metallic sound filled the room as the pouch slightly opened. Inside the pouch were plenty of gold, silver, and bronze coins. Cale¡¯s confident voice filled the room. ¡°I don¡¯t know why you are heading to the capital right now, when every noble in the country¡¯s attention is focused on the capital, but I¡¯m sure there is only one thing people like you who are heading into the lion¡¯s den want from me.¡± Cale had expected it from the moment they asked to follow him to the capital, as well as every time he felt their gazes during the trip. ¡°The wealthy Henituse family. You want money, right?¡± Sigh. The priestess Cage let out a sigh that was almost like a gasp of admiration. Taylor was someone who used to y at the top before falling off a cliff, but Cage was someone who had always been at the bottom. To someone like her, Cale was an unique individual. He asked the deputy butler for alcohol whenever he had a free moment. He did not care at all about what his subordinates did, and only ate the highest quality food. He only stayed in the most luxurious inns, and always seemed to be rxed. He also did not care about what he said to others. However, he was definitely not trash. Her friend Taylor understood this even better than she did. ¡°So you already knew.¡± ¡°It was a piece of cake.¡± Cale answered as if it was not difficult to deduce at all. ¡°Based on how you are traveling, you look like you arecking in money. In order to stay at the capital, especially stealthily, you need money more than anything else. I¡¯m sure this was not originally your n, but it was only natural to ask when you have the golden turtle traveling with you.¡± Taylor could not disagree with anything Cale just said. It was the truth. Cale Henituse was someone who did not try to avoid him, the eldest son who was pushed aside by his family. Asking Cale and hopefully getting some money was their best course of action. Even if Cale said no, it didn¡¯t look like Cale would tell Venion about Taylor¡¯s request. Cale seemed to hateplicated things. In Taylor¡¯s eyes, Cale was someone who voluntarily hid from others. ¡°Thank you very much, young master Cale.¡± Cale did not say anything like, ¡®you¡¯re wee.¡¯ Instead, he was ready to put into y his n that he had formted and thought over ever since they started following him. ¡°Will you be leaving early in the morning?¡± ¡°Yes. We were nning on stealthily leaving, but came here to see you before we left. We need to take care of things on our own now.¡± Taylor¡¯s eyes were clear as he sat on the wheelchair. However, Cale could not see any positive feelings in Taylor¡¯s eyes when he made eye contact. ¡°Will you be entering through the temple?¡± The moment Taylor¡¯s expression seemed to show shock at how Cale knew, Cage stepped in. ¡°Yes. We n to enter through the temple.¡± They were nning to disguise Taylor as a member of the temple and sneak him in. However, doing so would alert the Temple of Death of Cage¡¯s location. Cage was willing to put herself in that kind of danger for Taylor. However, even entering like that would not guarantee stealth. Cale poked at that problem. ¡°Even if you enter through the temple, Venion or the Marquis will hear about it within three days. They most likely have informants in the Temple of Death as well.¡± ¡°...You really are very well informed.¡± Cage started to smile. There was something she suddenly realized about Cale. ¡°Young master Cale, I¡¯m sure there is a reason you are so curious about our course of action?¡± Tap. Tap. Cale¡¯s index finger tapped on the table. ¡°Take this money and let the innkeeper know that you and your people will be staying one more day here.¡± Cale then lifted up his finger and pointed toward the two of them. ¡°As for the two of you, you will get on my carriage. The rest of your group will enter the capital one dayter.¡± Screech. Cale pushed the chair back and stood up. He then went over and grabbed another item from the magic box, and put it on top of the table. ¡°This is a magic tool that will make any lifeforms in a selected area turn invisible for five minutes.¡± This was the second item that needed to be rented under Billos¡¯s name. ¡®Young master, are you nning on stealing something?¡¯ ¡®Steal? No, I n to break something.¡¯ ¡®...Break something?¡¯ He was nning on using this item during the za Terror Incident, but he had a reason to use it in advance now. Cale was thankful that it was not a single use item. Silence filled the room once Cale stopped talking. Cage and Taylor looked back and forth between Cale and the item, and their lips opened and closed multiple times, but they could not say anything. They finally managed to ask after a while of silence. ¡°Why-¡± Young master Taylor, who had been silent for a while now, slowly started to ask. ¡°Why are you doing this for us? You have nothing to gain from it.¡± ¡®Why? I have to help you out a bit since I caused it. It¡¯s not like it is going to harm me in any way.¡¯ In addition, if Taylor manages to take over the Marquis position, Cale would not need to worry about Marquis Stan or Venion¡¯s greed once the war with the foreign nations starts. That would help the Henituse territory remain quiet and allow Cale to live peacefully. ¡°Must I answer?¡± ¡°Yes. I want to hear your reason.¡± Taylor wanted to hear Cale¡¯s response. Cale stoically answered Taylor¡¯s question. The response was both brutal and cold. ¡°It¡¯s because you are so pitiful. I want to know just what is making someone like you, a cripple who doesn¡¯t know when he will die, do all of this. For the eldest son of a Marquis to ask the trash of a Count¡¯s family for money, it is just so pitiful.¡± Taylor¡¯s mouth slowly opened and closed, before he started to silentlyugh. Taylor then patted his knees with his hands. He could not feel anything when he did that. However, Taylor''s eyes, nose, mouth, hands, and the rest of him was still alive. Taylor started to smile brightly. ¡°Thank you for your sympathy. I needed that kind of sympathy.¡± ¡°However, there is one condition to all of this.¡± Cale did not pay any attention to Taylor¡¯s words of thanks. ¡°What is it?¡± ¡°Forget about everything.¡± Cale repeated himself once more, as he pushed the bag of money toward Taylor. ¡°Forget about every single thing that has happened.¡± Cale was showing that he was willing to help them, but did not want to be involved with them any further. Cage stepped forward. This was the reason she hade with Taylor. ¡°Young master Taylor and I will make a vow to the God of Death to not reveal anything. I¡¯m sure that you are aware that anyone who breaks a vow made to the God of Death will die?¡± ¡°Yes, I am. Please make your vow.¡± Cale started to smile at her words. A vow made to the God of Death. It was because Cale believed in this famous vow that he was willing to help them out. The priestess Cage could not help butugh after seeing Cale smile about their decision to make a vow to the God of Death. ¡°I presume young master Cale will not be making a vow?¡± ¡°Correct. If things beplicated in the future because of this, I n on revealing everything.¡± ¡°To Venion.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Cale confidently answered the question. Hearing Cale¡¯s answer actually made Taylor feel much more peaceful. Taylor liked the fact that Cale was honest and said that he nned to reveal everything if it inconvenienced Cale in any way in the future. ¡°Cage. Let¡¯s do it.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Taylor and Cage. The two of them were no longer speaking formally in front of Cale. It was their signal to each other that they will reveal almost everything to Cale. ¡°We will start now.¡± Tonight was the night of the new moon. On these nights, when the moon was not visible, was when the strength of the God of Death was at its peak. Cage closed her eyes and gathered her hands together in front of her. It looked different than when people were praying. Her two palms were pointed toward Taylor and herself. Oooooong. A small vibration filled the air. At the same time, a ck smoke started toe out of Cage¡¯s fingertips and surrounded the three of them. ¡®Is this holy power?¡¯ Cale was filled with an odd sensation while feeling the power around him. It was definitely different from ancient powers, but it was still warm, even though it was ck. ¡°I, Cage, a daughter of the eternal night, wishes to borrow the name of the night to make a vow alongside Taylor Stan. A vow is made with our lives, anyone who breaks this vow will descend into eternal darkness.¡± Cage opened her eyes and looked toward Cale and Taylor before continuing to speak. ¡°I, Cage, and Taylor Stan, vow to keep tonight¡¯s discussions a secret only to be shared with the witness, Cale Henituse. We will not discuss this with anyone else.¡± ¡°With anyone else.¡± Taylor repeated the ending words. Cage closed her eyes after hearing Taylor¡¯s voice. The ck smoke surrounded the three of them once again. And then, Ooooong. With another vibration, the smoke disappeared. The vow was finished. ¡°Pretty simple.¡± Cale could feel an odd sensation in his hand while sharing his thoughts. It was simr to ancient powers. He could sense the things rted to the vow. ¡°The sensation you feel right now is the power of the vow. The moment we break the vow, young master Cale will be informed of our deaths as the witness.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Cale easily epted her exnation. He had no choice because of the sensation in his hand. He started to inspect the difference between the divine power and the ancient power inside of him. At that moment, Taylor put the bottle of alcohol he brought at the middle of the table. Tap. The bottle now sat at the middle of the table. ¡°Young master Cale, will you have a drink?¡± ¡°A drink?¡± Cale hid his desire for them to leave, and asked what they meant. Taylor nodded his head at Cale¡¯s question. ¡°Yes. Alcohol. Alcohol is necessary on a good day.¡± Taylor wanted to drink with Cale, someone he could not trust until recently. Cage seemed to have figured something out by his actions, and started to smile before putting her hand into the wide sleeves of her priestess outfit. ¡°Tada!¡± Three shot sses came out of her sleeve. ¡°Ho.¡± Cale looked at the shot sses, the bottle of alcohol, and the priestess with disbelief. He could not believe that she carried shot sses in her sleeves. ¡°Priestess-nim.¡± ¡°Yes?¡± ¡°You are amazing.¡± She was a true alcoholic. Cale took a ss from her, and Taylor filled the ss. Once all three of their sses were full, Cage asked Cale a question. ¡°Young master Cale, is it not weird that a priestess is drinking?¡± Cale tilted his head to one side and asked. ¡°Is that any of my business?¡± Cale did not care whether she drank or not. ¡°Wow. I really like you.¡± Cage shared her admiration while smacking her knee with her other hand. She then coyishly asked Cale. ¡°Young master Cale, do you not have any desire to get to know an older sister with a great personality?¡± ¡°Nope.¡± Cale sternly answered and Taylor quickly added on. ¡°...What about an older brother with a great personality?¡± ¡°Even less.¡± Cage and Taylor both started tough instead of being disappointed at Cale¡¯s answer. Cale could not tell what was funny about his response, but lifted up his ss and started to speak. ¡°Cheers.¡± ng. The three sses nged together. A night of a new moon. There was no moon in the sky, but this alcohol that was deeper than the moon, and created a thread connecting these three individuals. The next morning. ¡°Young master, shall we head out?¡± Cale did not know whether Hans was slow or just found this to be funny. Deputy butler Hans had heard the situation from Cale and pretended to not see the two people in the corner of Cale¡¯s carriage, instead loudly asking Cale whether they should leave. ¡°Yes. Let¡¯s go.¡± Of course, Cale casually gave themand to go. Two hours. They would arrive at the entrance of the capital in two hours. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 28: You (3) Chapter 28: You (3) 1Chapter 28: You (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Clunk. The carriage started to move. Meeeow. On and Hong nced over and Cage and Taylor, who were sitting across from them, and stuck closely to Cale. ¡°Young master Cale, do you know anything about this royal event?¡± Cale looked toward Taylor. Taylor was finepared to the priestess, who was struggling with her hangover. In fact, he was even better off than Cale. This weak-looking noble had the strongest alcohol tolerance out of the three of them. Cale started to respond to Taylor, who was looking at him. ¡°This is my first time going to the pce. I have only been to a Northeastern Nobles Meeting a few years ago.¡± Taylor did not bring this up just to start a conversation. It was because he wanted to share a piece of information with Cale for his generosity. ¡°I see. The event this time is to celebrate the 50th birthday of his royal highness, our current King. It is an entertaining festival for the citizens.¡± Seeing Cale speak as if it did not include himself, Taylor started to get curious. ¡°Sounds like it is not a festival for young master Cale?¡± ¡®How can it be a festival I¡¯d enjoy when my heart is going crazy thinking about the terror incident?¡¯ Cale did not say that out loud. He was probably the only person who knew about the secret organization and the uing terror incident. Knowing about such a fact was bound to bring a heavy sense of responsibility and headache. Of course, there was a rtionship between that sense of responsibility and the headache. ¡®I will prevent it, but I will step aside if it seems like I will get hurt or tired.¡¯ That was Cale¡¯s point of view on the terror incident. Do just enough so that I will not be inconvenienced. However, someone like Cale, no, Kim Rok Soo, who had a fear of death, could not just pretend that he did not know anything. ¡°It¡¯s not a festival for you either, young master Taylor.¡± Taylor, as well as Cage, who had been frowning because of her hangover, started to smile after hearing Cale¡¯s words. ¡°I am considering it to be myst obstacle before I can celebrate.¡± Compared to his gentle appearance, Taylor was a risk-taker. That was how he was able to be in front of Venion, even with his ethical personality, before he was attacked. ¡°Young master Cale.¡± ¡°Yes?¡± ¡°Be careful of his highness, the crown prince.¡± Taylor gazed toward Cale and continued to speak. ¡°Although I may have been pushed aside, I still have ways of getting information in the Marquis¡¯s Estate. Although this 50-year birthday celebration for the king was nned from the beginning, the act of calling all of the nobles together was something that the crown prince suggested.¡± Taylor knew some information about the crown prince. ¡°I¡¯m not sure how I should describe the crown prince to you...¡± Seeing Taylor struggling, Cale casually answered. ¡°He is someone with a glib tongue.¡± ¡°Ah, yes! Err, I mean...¡± Taylor, who agreed with Cale, quickly turned pale and tried to take it back, but, in the end, was forced to admit that it was true. ¡°Yes. You are right. You already know about it.¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t it information anybody who is interested can find out?¡± ¡°Of course. But this is the first time I¡¯ve heard anyone be so blunt about it like you, young master Cale.¡± Seeing Taylor nodding his head, Cale started to think about the crown prince. The glib tongue of the crown prince. The crown prince was very good at givingpliments to people. He was also very good at praising these people in public for their deeds and giving them recognition. After that, he used these people. Of course, the people being used have no idea that they are being used. One of these victims in the novel was none other than Choi Han, the person the crown prince lifts up as his close friend and hero. For amoner like Choi Han, he thought it was good that someone like the crown prince treated him so closely. However, for Cale, or Kim Rok Soo, who was reading the novel, the crown prince was the type of person he hated the most. ¡®The problem is, that the way he uses people for the right reasons.¡¯ He did not use people for his own benefits or for power. He used these people for the kingdom, the citizens, and to make the nation greater. ¡®I guess it is too much to call it ¡®using¡¯ people.¡¯ Rather than using, it was more like asking for their help. The crown prince did not order these people using his superiority, but instead he asked them on an equal level. He used that glib tongue of his to praise them a lot and then give a really sad reason that people could not turn down. Naturally, Choi Han was unable to say no. The cold, yet just as good-natured Rosalyn ended up agreeing to help out in the end as well. Of course, even such a person had a weakness. ¡°Anyways, young master Cale, his highness the crown prince, ahem, as you already know, it is tiring to get involved with such a person.¡± ¡°You do not have to worry. I n on being as quiet as possible before returning home. I do not like being shy.¡± Cale answered back like it was nothing. However, he then realized that silence had filled the room after he responded. The kittens, On and Hong, Cage, who was struggling with her hangover, and even Taylor, who had a gentle smile on his face. They were all staring at Cale. ¡°...Why are you looking at me like that?¡± ¡°Mm. Will it really be possible to, no, nevermind.¡± ¡°Nothing.¡± Both Cage and Taylor said no before looking away. The kittens just shook their heads. Cale started to frown and added on. ¡°Even if I do end up being dragged in, the thing that young master Taylor and priestess-nim are thinking about will not happen.¡± Taylor and Cage could see that Cale was smiling. His smile was so devious that he looked like a viin. Cale smiled at the two of them before continuing on. ¡°I also have a very glib tongue.¡± The crown prince tended to stay away from people simr to himself. It was his wariness of others like him. If the crown prince was the type to praise people and use them for his needs, Cale just needed to act the same way. Seeing Cage look toward him with an expression that seemed to say she was feeling better, he looked right into her eyes. She then started to speak. ¡°I think this look suits you very well, young master Cale. You look very evil.¡± ¡°It is better than looking like a good person.¡± ¡®I knew it.¡¯ Cage nodded her head and seemed to confirm something, but Cale did not care. Instead, he pushed aside the curtain on the window and looked outside. They were pretty close to the gate of the capital now. The gate that Cale¡¯s carriage was heading toward was a different gate than the gate that themoners used. He was heading toward the noble¡¯s entrance, which would allow him to get through it much faster. ¡°The capital really is different.¡± That was what came out of Cale¡¯s mouth based on what Cale saw out through the window. Taylor seemed to understand why Cale felt that way, and nodded his head. ¡°Roan Kingdom is the kingdom of, ¡®Boulders.¡¯¡± Cale could see therge wall surrounding the capital. There were many different sculptures on the wall. The Roan Kingdom was kind of unique. Not only was it the Western Continent¡¯s greatest source of marble, but the Northwest and Western areas of Roan Kingdom contained a lot of granite. That was why it was called the Land of Boulders. If you traveled up north, the majority of the mountain peaks were made of granite. The Roan Kingdom had quite a lot of Rock Mountains. Taylor continued to speak, as if he suddenly remembered something. ¡°If you look through the ancient stories, there are many, ¡®boulder,¡¯ rted stories, even before the Roan Kingdom came into existence. One of them says that thisnd had a boulder-like guardian.¡± The Roan Kingdom was located on the Northeast of the Western Continent. ¡°It was a guardian that could protect everything from any kind of attack. When darkness descended on the continent, this guardian was the one to stand in the front against it.¡± There were many different myths about the end of the ancient times. You would hear tons of different stories as you traveled around the continent. Some say that the end of the ancient times came when darkness descended and some heroes managed to defeat this darkness, others say it ended because people were jealous of each other¡¯s powers and fought for control. Finally, some even say that a god was so angry that it destroyed all living beings. The story that Taylor was discussing right now was one of those many myths. ¡°Taylor, you seem to like that story?¡± Taylor nodded his head at Cage¡¯s question. ¡°Yes. I do.¡± Cale turned to look at Taylor. Taylor had always had a fragile body, even before his legs became paralyzed. Taylor patted his knees and continued to speak. ¡°The guardian is said to have stood firmly in ce, like a boulder, even after everything in his body became broken. That was how he was able to protect the people and thend of this Northeastern area, that is covered in boulders.¡± There were a lot of different contents in the stories regarding the darkness that descended onto the continent. When the darkness appeared at the center of the continent, other myths discussed the tales of those heroes that fought against it. However, the main character in the one Taylor is talking about only focused on protecting. Taylor considered such an individual to be a hero. ¡°Such an existence cannot survive in the present day. That is why I like this myth so much.¡± ¡°But you don¡¯t seem to believe it?¡± Taylor nodded his head at Cage¡¯s question. It is very rare to see someone injure himself so severely to protect something.¡± ¡°I agree.¡± Cale nodded his head to agree with Taylor¡¯s statement. It was one thing to protect yourself, but this guardian protected others and this Northeasternnd? Cale could not understand such logic. ¡°But this is my first time hearing about this specific story.¡± Cale had read about all sorts of legends and myths regarding ancient powers while reading until volume 5 of, ¡®The Birth of a Hero.¡¯ However, this was the first time he heard about the boulder guardian of Roan Kingdom. ¡°It is probably because it is not that popr. I only found it while researching through ancient texts for information about ancient powers. I told Cage about it as well.¡± Cale nodded his head again, and lowered the curtains once more. He then took out a round pendant from his pocket and threw it toward Taylor. ¡°Get ready.¡± Taylor and Cage both nodded their heads and held each other¡¯s hand with the pendant in the middle of both of their hands. The magic device started to operate. Cale let out a sigh and grabbed a bottle from a corner of the carriage. A momentter, the carriage stopped outside the noble¡¯s gate, and Cale could hear the Vice Captain¡¯s voice as well as someone else¡¯s voice. Knock knock knock. ¡°Young master, the capital¡¯s guard wishes to verify the upants.¡± Bang. Cale¡¯s foot kicked the carriage door open. He could see the Vice Captain¡¯s rxed expression, as well as the anxious capital guard. Cale had a bottle in one hand and a ss full of alcohol in the other, and looked toward the capital guard. ¡°Go ahead.¡± The inside of the carriage was full of the smell of alcohol. Cale¡¯s extremely flushed face and this stench made it very clear that he had been drinking sincest night. Although the festival was still a week away, many nobles had already passed through this entrance. Two of the capital guards looked inside the carriage every time to do a cursory look. However, the guard had never seen such a sight before. The Vice Captain smiled gently at the guard, and started to speak. ¡°Our young master cures his hangovers through drinking more alcohol. He is someone who has reached the apex of oveing a hangover.¡± Cale looked at the anxious guard and the Vice Captain who was trying to praise him as best as possible, and started to think. ¡®Ah, this is tiring.¡¯ That was why he said the following. ¡°Can¡¯t you hurry up?¡± The guard called over the other guard to look through the carriage, that was full of empty alcohol bottles, and gave the approval. ¡°Everything looks fine.¡± The Vice Captain slowly closed the door while the guard weed Cale. ¡°Wee to the capital.¡± Creeak. Click. The door closedpletely and the carriage made its way through the gate. Cale pushed forward the full ss in his hand and started to speak. ¡°Apparently, wee to the capital.¡± Taylor, who was no longer invisible, started tough as he handed Cale the pendant and received the ss. ¡°It has been a while since I¡¯ve been weed.¡± Cale¡¯s group had arrived at the capital. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 29: You (4) Chapter 29: You (4) 0Chapter 29: You (4) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale¡¯s carriage leisurely headed to the south of the capital. Huiss, the capital of the Roan Kingdom. People were clearly busy getting ready for the uing birthday celebration. Cale looked out through the slightly lifted curtain and started to think. ¡®Choi Han should arrive in about 3 days.¡¯ Unless he moves like a crazy lunatic, Choi Han should arrive three dayster. He will bring Rosalyn and Lock with him, and they will run into the secret organization while getting Lock, which will dy them even more. In the novel, Choi Han ran into Lock, the only survivor of the Blue Wolf Tribe and someone with the Wolf King¡¯s bloodline, before running into the secret organization once again. After that, Choi Han would run into the secret organization once more at the capital terror incident. Harris Vige, Choi Han¡¯s first residence outside the Forest of Darkness. This secret organization was the one that had murdered everyone in the vige. He had run into the organization twice, but he did not have much information on them. ¡®The assassins don¡¯t have stars on their clothes.¡¯ Since assassination was the goal for both Harris Vige and the Blue Wolf Tribe, the secret organization sent their assassin squad. The assassin squad only wears ck clothes without the stars, just in case something goes wrong. They were people who chose to take their own lives if they were caught. But things will change starting at the capital. ¡®That blood-loving punk will show up.¡¯ While preventing the terror incident with Rosalyn, Choi Hanes in contact with a leader of the secret organization. That leader and their subordinates all have the red star and five white stars on their chest. Cale had alreadye up with an excuse to give Choi Han as well for their uniforms when they rescued the dragon. He just nkly stared outside, before shutting the curtains once again. The happy citizens decorating the streets, and the streets that were bing very beautiful. All of this would turn into a ce of despair in a week. ¡°Young master Taylor.¡± They were now at the southern part of Huiss, at the location of the noble residences. Cale¡¯s carriage stopped in front of a building, and Cale stood up and got ready to exit. ¡°Ron will take care of you once we arrive at the residence. You just need to head out that way.¡± He was looking at the door as he continued. ¡°Forget everything.¡± He could hear Taylor and Cage¡¯s voiceing from behind him. ¡°Thank you very much.¡± ¡°See you in a joyful environment next time.¡± Cale started to smile. Cage and Taylor continued to look at him, but neither Cale, nor the two kittens, paid the two people any attention. Click. The carriage door opened. ¡°Young master, we have arrived.¡± Cale, Hans, and the kittens could all see Taylor and Cage, but did not look at them. They just acted like the two of them weren¡¯t there, and got off the carriage. Cale instantly turned toward the driver¡¯s seat once he got off the carriage. Ron had a benign smile on his face and nodded his head. Ron, who heard the situation from deputy butler Hans, would take care of the rest. Ron headed with the driver to park the carriage. Cale did not pay any more attention to the carriage, and turned around. ¡°Oh.¡± He then let out a gasp of admiration. The kittens, On and Hong, seemed to be surprised as well, as their golden pupils were extremely dted. ¡°...It¡¯s even better than I expected.¡± The Count really was wealthy. Past therge iron gate was a five-story residence. There was even a garden between the gate and the building itself. It was not fancy or shiny, but it definitely looked more expensive than the nearby noble residences. It had the aura and look of a building that definitely took arge amount of money to build. At the center of it was, naturally, a sculpture with the Henituse family¡¯s golden turtle on it. Screeeech. Bang! Therge gate with the golden turtle crest on it slowly opened. The guard opening the gate, as well as the butler of the residence and the servants, all lined up to greet Cale. ¡°Young master Cale Henituse! Wee to the capital!¡± It was an extremely respectful greeting. They were bowing their heads so low that their heads looked like it would reach the ground. The old man who seemed to be in charge was speaking so loudly it looked like he might hurt his vocal chords. ¡°We will do our very best to serve you!¡± ¡®Why is he like this?¡¯ Cale looked toward Hans, who was pretending that he had no idea what was going on. ¡®He definitely knows what is going on.¡¯ Hans definitely knew the reason they were acting this way. Cale found it annoying to ask, and approached the old man in charge and helped him up. He then looked toward the rest of the servants and started to speak. ¡°Everybody, lift your heads up.¡± The servants quickly raised their heads. They had never seen Cale while working at the residence. However, they had definitely heard stories about Cale from the people that visited from the Henituse territory. The trash, Cale. The servants here heard that Cale considered people who worked in the estate as either nobles or useless people. Sometimes, he didn¡¯t even treat them like people. They were anxious about what Cale was going to say next and waited for him to continue. ¡°No need to be this respectful in the future. I do not like to cause any issues to people who do their job well.¡± The servants¡¯ gazes all turned toward Cale. Cale could see that they were all still stiff and started to frown. ¡°I heard that mother picked all of you. She said you all have a lot of pride for your work, so I¡¯m sure you will perform very well.¡± The servants¡¯ expressions all turned odd. ¡°Ask Hans if you have any questions.¡± He had enough to do as is, so it was better to leave everything to Hans. Plus, there was no reason to pay a lot of attention when he was leaving again in just a few days. Cale looked toward the servants, whose expressions were getting slightly better, and started to walk. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± Cale walked in front as they headed to the five-story building. When a homeowner enters their house for the first time, they needed to personally walk from the gate to the door of the residence. This symbolized that this was his territory. When the crown prince became the king, the crown prince, no, the king, walked from the castle gate to the center of the pce, where his throne was located. It was a simr kind of logic. Count Deruth and the Countess had walked into this residence like this before, but Cale was now the owner of thisrge residence. Screeeech- Therge iron gate with the golden turtle closed. At the same time, as it usually is with information in the capital, the nearby nobles all learned of the arrival of the Henituse family¡¯s representative. This happened even faster than the person Cale sent to the pce to inform the crown of his arrival could reach the pce. That was why these three people, who were members of the Northeastern Noble¡¯s gathering, started to worry. They started to frown while drinking tea with each other. ¡°Sigh...it really is not young master Basen but young master Cale. This is going to make thingsplicated.¡± ¡°But we need to carry him with us, since he is one of our own.¡± ¡°That is true. I¡¯m sure even a trash will not act up in front of us, right?¡± The neutral Henituse family and the nice, but not flexible, Basen. Then, there was the trash of the Henituse family, Cale. These three, whose families were close to the Henituse family among all of the Northeastern noble families, decided to make the decision that made sense for their future. ¡°We just need to protect him and prevent him from doing anything stupid. Let¡¯s first meet with him and talk.¡± To them, Cale was like a toddler walking by the water that needed their protection. At the same time, Cale was dangerous and could cause a scene at any point. They immediately sent an invitation letter to Cale¡¯s residence, which was quickly delivered into Cale¡¯s hand by that evening. ¡°Sigh.¡± Cale threw the letter to the table with an extremely annoyed expression. ¡°Will you not go?¡± ¡°Can I not go?¡± ¡°No. It is a Northeastern nobles meeting.¡± ¡°I knew it.¡± Nobles were really fast at getting information. Cale was the same way as well. Hans handed the document he received from the residence manager to Cale. ¡°This is the list of nobles who are currently in the capital.¡± ¡°Good. Did Ron take care of things properly?¡± Hans had a short response to Cale¡¯s question. ¡°Yes.¡± Cale was satisfied with that answer. Cale had prepared a lot for Taylor. A wig, a robe, a wheelchair without the Stan family crest, and even money. He had given everything to Taylor properly. Well, other than the money, Hans handled the delivery process for everything else. ¡°Good work. Get some rest.¡± ¡°Yes sir. I will make sure to get some rest.¡± Hans was not the type to say that he was okay when told to rest. Cale said one more thing, as Hans quickly tried to leave. ¡°Ah, but have them send something up for me to eat.¡± ¡°I will make sure to do so.¡± Hans quickly responded to Cale¡¯s statement, that indicated he would not be going down to the dining room, and soon enough, Cale¡¯s chamber was filled with a feast. Cale looked at the dishes that included meat, desserts, and even wine, and smiled with satisfaction before heading over to the terrace. His chamber was located on the third floor. It was the room that received the most sunlight. He opened therge window heading to the terrace and called out. ¡°Come in.¡± He then left the window open and sat down next to the table. Soon enough, Cale could see a couple leaves floating in the sky and sitting down on the chair across from Cale. The dragon had entered the room with a couple of leaves stuck to him. On and Hong also sat down on chairs to the left and right of the invisible dragon. Cale stared at the three of them, before opening the wine bottle and telling them to eat. ¡°Go ahead and eat.¡± The red wine filled the ss. ¡°You gathered ingredients for us, but you never got to eat any of it.¡± Cale brought the wine ss to his lips as he continued to speak. ¡°I¡¯m sure it wasn¡¯t easy following us.¡± At that moment, the ck Dragon removed its invisibility magic and revealed itself. On helped remove the leaves that were stuck to the dragon, while Hong stuffed a piece of steak that Beacrox had cooked into the dragon¡¯s mouth. The average age of these three animals was 7 years old. Cale just watched the three animals eat, before pushing more food toward them. Seeing Cale being so nice made On and Hong flinch, while the ck Dragon stopped chewing and just started to observe Cale. Cale took another sip as he started to think. ¡®They¡¯re going to be working very hard in the future.¡¯ Since they will need to work on his behalf, the least he could do was feed them well. Maybe it was because they were all so young, but Cale was able to rx for the first time in a long time, even around stronger than average individuals. ¡°It would be great if it could just stay like this.¡± A house about this size, delicious food like this, and time to rx. Cale was thinking about how great it would be to live a life with those three things. His goal was to live like this once Basen became the official sessor. Cale made up his mind once more. He then turned on the magic music box in the corner. A song that he was not familiar with started ying as Cale took another sip of wine. He could see the sky starting to get darker. ¡°This is great.¡± ¡®Now this is living.¡¯ Cale had a rxed smile on his face. At that moment. Knock knock knock. The ck Dragon immediately turned invisible again, while the kittens started to pretend to be normal kittens by washing their faces. Cale got up to head to the door. ¡°Ah.¡± ng! He identally hit the wine bottle while getting up, and it fell down and broke into pieces. The carpet started to get stained with the red wine. ¡®... I have a bad feeling about this.¡¯ Cale suddenly had a bad feeling for no reason. He quickly headed for the door. ¡®Why do I have such an ominous feeling?¡¯ Cale could not figure it out. ¡®Is it Choi Han? No, it can¡¯t be. Unless he travels like a lunatic, there is no way he arrived here already. He won¡¯t be here for another 3 days.¡¯ There was no way someone like Choi Han would force an injured Lock to move faster. Even though Choi Han had potions that Cale had given him, the wolf tribe was disowned by the gods. Since potions were made with divine power, it did not work on them. And there was also no way that Rosalyn, the careful and cautious person who hid her magic abilities at first in the novel, would use advanced magic to transport them all to the capital. But, most importantly, Cale had told Choi Han that he would be staying at a specific hotel in the capital. He was going to go meet Choi Han there once before leaving Ron and Beacrox to take care of the rest. ¡®Right. This ominous feeling is just a side effect of hanging around people like Ron or Choi Han for too long.¡¯ Cale calmed himself down before vigorously opening the door. ¡°...You-.¡± Cale¡¯s heart sunk as soon as he opened the door. An urgent and desperate voice quickly reached Cale¡¯s ear. ¡°Cale-nim. I¡¯m sorry. You were the only person that came to mind.¡± A desperate Choi Han was standing in front of him. He seemed to have rushed here as quickly as possible, as he looked like a total mess. Cale felt like he had seen the scariest thing in his life. Next to Choi Han was the deputy butler Hans, who had a simr expression as Choi Han, but with a bit of confusion mixed into it. However, the moment Cale saw the person who came with Choi Han, as well as the person on Choi Han¡¯s back, he quickly opened the door. ¡°Come in for now.¡± The person on Choi Han¡¯s back was none other than the Wolf Tribe member, Lock. ¡°Bring him with you.¡± Lock of the Blue Wolf Tribe, the sessor of the Wolf King, seemed to be in a dangerous state. Lock was currently going through the pain before transforming into berserk mode for the first time in his life. Cale did not know why this state that happened a yearter in the novel was already happening. However, he looked around at everybody and said just one thing. ¡°Don¡¯t worry.¡± 1. Something like this If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 30: You (5) Chapter 30: You (5) 1Chapter 30: You (5) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Choi Han and Lock. Behind Choi Han was Rosalyn. These three people walked into Cale¡¯s room. ¡°Hans. Go bring something to drink.¡± ¡°Excuse me? Ah, right away!¡± Cale closed the door without letting deputy butler Hans into the room. Cale then pointed to the bed for Choi Han, who was looking at him, to put Lock down. ¡°Lay him down first.¡± ¡°Got it.¡± Choi Han carefully put Lock on the bed. Cale slowly approached Lock. Lock definitely had the purest of pure blood, making him look like a weak human. However, he was pretty tall for being a young boy. ¡°Haaaah, haaaaa, haaaah.¡± Lock was huffing and trying his best to open his eyes. He had a deep frown on his face, and his body was limp, like he could not put any strength into it. It was already toote to prevent the berserk state from arriving. Cale looked at the tall, but still young boy in front of him, who was doing his best to keep his eyes open, and told him to rx. ¡°Just keep your eyes closed. No need to strain yourself.¡± There was no strength in Cale¡¯s stern tone, but it had a way of making people listen. Lock slowly closed his eyes. The voice of this man, whom Lock did not know, flowed into Lock¡¯s ear. ¡°Everything will be okay.¡± Lock was huffing and quietly calling for someone. He was calling for his uncle, the chief of the Blue Wolf Tribe, and the man who died for the tribe, even though he was one step away from bing the Wolf King. His uncle had made sure Lock was hidden before rushing toward the invaders. ¡®Everything will be okay.¡¯ That was what his uncle had said to him. Lock started to frown after thinking about his uncle. Cale just ignored him as he turned away. ¡°Cale-nim, why is Lock like this?¡± Choi Han still looked anxious and desperate. Originally in the novel, Choi Han had only slightly opened his heart to Lock by this point. ¡®Just what could have happened?¡¯ Cale was not an idiot. He knew that Choi Han¡¯s situation had changed a bit because of him. That was why he was trying really hard to cut off their rtionship. He did not ask that question, and let Choi Han continue to speak. ¡°Potions don¡¯t work either. ording to Rosalyn, the wolf tribe is one that cannot use potions. Healing magic does not seem to work either. I¡¯m not sure about what to do. I need to protect him. I¡¯m supposed to protect him.¡± ¡°Calm down.¡± Cale was worried that it would be Choi Han who ended up going berserk if he continued like this. That would be just as scary as that dragon in the corner of the room going berserk. Maybe it was because he lived for tens of years in solitude, actually, even though he lived for tens of years in solitude, Choi Han¡¯s personality remained one where he was a nice guy who cared a lot for things like friendship. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± ¡°If you trust me, just leave him to me.¡± ¡°...I trust you.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Cale confirmed that Choi Han had calmed down, before turning his gaze over to Rosalyn. Rosalyn. She was the first sessor to the throne in the Breck Kingdom. However, this genius mage was ready to throw all of that away. Rosalyn reminded Cale of a red rose. She had red hair that was even brighter than Cale¡¯s, as well as beautiful red lips that currently had their corners lifted up with curiosity. Although she may remind him of a rose, her personality was closer to that of the sun. Rosalyn did not put Lock, Choi Han, or even Cale in her eyes. She was focused at the corner of the room. ¡°... This aura, this strong aura of mana!¡± Rosalyn was urately looking at the chair that the dragon had used earlier, while her hands were shaking and clenched tightly. ¡°Sigh.¡± A sigh came out of Cale¡¯s mouth. It seemed like the dragon was curious about this mage. The ck Dragon had sent some mana over to Rosalyn, and showing off some mana skills that Rosalyn could not even dream about. Throughout history, dragons had a tendency to hate humans, but like mages quite a bit. The dragon was doing that because he was happy. Cale looked toward the table that seemed empty, and quietly started to speak. ¡°Stop it. Stay still.¡± Almost instantly, Rosalyn took a deep breath and quickly returned to normal. The dragon seemed to have removed is mana. Rosalyn could not stop shaking as she looked toward Cale. ¡°Just what-¡° Cale cut her off and pointed to Lock. ¡°This is more important.¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Rosalyn¡¯s expression quickly calmed down. She looked at Lock, who wasying down with his eyes closed, and asked Cale. ¡°What is going on with Lock right now?¡± Cale looked at the small staff in her hand. The reason they were able to arrive at the capital in just three days was probably because Rosalyn used teleportation magic. Contrary to Cale¡¯s expectations, Rosalyn had already revealed the extent of her abilities. ¡°You are a mage, right?¡± ¡°Yes, I am.¡± ¡°Have you heard anything about the berserk mode of Beast tribes?¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Rosalyn let out a small noise. However, her face quickly filled with confusion. ¡°I have read about the Wolf Tribe¡¯s berserk mode in books. However, I have never read anything about heating up like this and being in pain.¡± ¡°It is because it is his first time.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Cale continued to speak to the people in the room who were all looking at him. ¡°Beast people lose their sanity during their first time entering berserk mode because of the physical pain from their bodily transformation. If they can persevere past this first painful transformation, they will be able to use the berserk mode as a weapon.¡± Beast people were at their strongest when they were in berserk mode. Cale observed Lock¡¯s situation before continuing on. ¡°He will go berserk very soon.¡± He then turned to look at Rosalyn. Rosalyn nodded her head at his gaze, and sternly answered. ¡°I don¡¯t know what kind of person you are, but I am able to read the situation.¡± Although her tone was stern, her eyes were still gentle. ¡°He is a young boy.¡± ¡°I know.¡± She was asking Cale for help, and Cale was agreeing to help. Meeeow. At that moment, the two kittens appeared between the two of them and jumped onto the bed. On and Hong were staring at Lock when... ¡°Ugh.¡± Lock revealed his teeth and started to growl at the kittens On and Hong. His instincts were in control over his rationality right now, making him react to other beast people. He looked so vicious that even Choi Han was worried. However... Meeeeeow. Smack. Hong used his front paw to smack Lock¡¯s growling mouth. It was a sharp front paw attack that seemed to be telling Lock to stop it. He then looked toward Cale with eyes that seemed to be asking Cale to hurry up and help Lock. ¡°He is fine.¡± Cale responded to Hong when there was a knock on the door. When Cale opened the door, Hans had brought drinks, as well as wet towels. Cale gave Hans another order. ¡°Hans.¡± ¡°Yes, sir.¡± ¡°Bring something to carry him with.¡± ¡°Ye...excuse me?¡± Cale pointed to Lock on the bed. ¡°Put him on it and take him to the underground training arena. Oh, make sure all of the knights are out of the arena, and that nobody is in there.¡± Hans¡¯s expression seemed to be asking why Cale would move a sick boy to the arena, but Cale just ignored it. ¡°Hurry up.¡± ¡°...Yes, sir.¡± Hans had a ton of questions, and was looking at Cale weirdly, but he still did his job. He quickly left to grab something to carry Lock with, while Cale turned around to look at Choi Han and Rosalyn. ¡°Choi Han. And you.¡± ¡°It¡¯s Rosalyn.¡± ¡°Yes, Rosalyn.¡± The two of them looked away from the bed to look at Cale. ¡°Yes, Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What is it?¡± Concern, worry, despair, and sincerity. With all those emotions on their faces, Choi Han and Rosalyn looked more like simple good people rather than heroes. Cale bluntly started to speak to the two of them. ¡°You two will need to get beat up a bit.¡± ¡°... Excuse me?¡± After a few seconds of silence, Rosalyn seemed shocked, while Choi Han just quietly waited for Cale¡¯s continuing words. ¡°Normally, when beast people with wild beast blood like the Wolf Tribe, Tiger Tribe, and Bear Tribe experience going berserk for the first time, their parents and siblings help take care of it. They take all the attacks of the berserk individual and protect them to make sure they don¡¯t get hurt. That is how they protect their children.¡± Choi Han and Rosalyn¡¯s expressions turned sour almost instantly. Lock did not have any parents or siblings now. Cale peeked over at Lock, before continuing to speak. ¡°I can tell that is not an option for this child.¡± p. Cale pped once, before pointing at Choi Han and Rosalyn. ¡°That is why we will pretend that you are the mother and father, or, if you do not like that scenario, then you shall be the older brother and older sister. You two will need to figure out how to protect him.¡± Cale had his ¡®Indestructible Shield,¡¯ but he did not want to take care of Lock¡¯s berserk state. Why should he step in when there were people stronger than him right here? Rosalyn and Choi Han looked at each other. ¡°He will tire out on his own, and the berserk state will slowly disappear. It is important that his consciousness returns during this first berserk transformation. That is the only way to make him retain his consciousness and rationality the next time he transforms into the berserk mode.¡± That would be when his rationality beats out his natural instinct. It was important for beast people to reach that state. Choi Han debated it for a moment, before asking Cale a question. ¡°Cale-nim, how long will he maintain his berserk mode?¡± ¡°He has the purest of pure blood.¡± ¡°...So you mean it will take a long time.¡± ¡°Yes. Probably about two hours?¡± Cale approached Lock¡¯s bed, and patted Choi Han¡¯s shoulder. ¡°It will be difficult for other people, but Choi Han, it should be easy for you. I trust you.¡± ¡°... I will seed. I am Lock¡¯s hyung.¡± Rosalyn looked toward Choi Han with an odd expression. Choi Han had manically killed the assassins to protect the living. During their journey, he was always alert and observing his surroundings. However, such a person seemed extremely rxed, even though this was a very urgent situation. She then heard Cale¡¯s rxed voice while she was still watching Choi Han. ¡°Yes, yes you are. Let¡¯s eat something delicious after it is done.¡± Cale was thinking about the food and wine he did not get to finish. The door opened at that moment, and Hans entered with Ron and something to carry Lock. ¡°Young master, the arena has been cleared.¡± ¡°That was fast.¡± Cale ordered Choi Han to move the now continuously growling Lock onto the stretcher, before saying the following. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± 1. Hyung is the Korean term for an older brother (not necessarily blood-rted. As stated in an earlier chapter, Noona is the term for an older sister. However, both are true only if the younger person in this context is male. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 31: You (6) Chapter 31: You (6) 3Chapter 31: You (6) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale put some stuff into a magic bag and headed to the arena. The residence¡¯s underground arena. Count Henituse¡¯s territory was famous for its wealth, but that wealth was supported by military strength. How would they be able to survive next to the Forest of Darkness and the dangerous monsters contained within it without a strong military strength? That was why their residences had underground training arenas that wererger and better than most Duke or Marquis¡¯s residences. Cale gave an order as soon as they entered therge underground arena. ¡°The two of you stay out of the arena as well. Secure the area, and make sure nobodyes in from the first floor.¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± ¡°I understand, young master.¡± Cale had a bitter taste in his mouth at the fact that Ron had an extremely wide smile on his face, but Cale chose to let it go. After watching the two people go away, Cale carried the kittens and went to the corner of the arena. Naturally, he did not forget to motion for Choi Han and Rosalyn to go very far away. ¡°The two of you head to the center!¡± Choi Han took Lock to the center of the arena. Rosalyn had a serious look on her face, as she got a bit farther away from Lock. ¡°Growl!¡± Lock was shaking like he was having a seizure. His arms, legs, his entire body was shaking. However, neither Rosalyn nor Choi Han approached him. It was because Lock was growing ws. Very sharp ws that belonged to a wild animal. ¡°Aaaaaaaah!¡± Lock¡¯s body floated up in the air. It stiffened up like an arrow, before slowly starting to change. Cale verified that therge iron gate into the arena was closed tightly, before slowly heading farther into the corner with the kittens, On and Hong, also following him. ¡®This is no joke.¡¯ Cale could see the tall and weak Lock slowly starting to change. ¡°Grooooowl, aaaaaaaah!¡± Lock now grew out some sharp fangs, before screaming in agony. He started to slowly get up and staggered a bit, before starting to frown and opening his eyes. He then looked toward the ceiling and let out a howl. ¡°Ahwoooooooooooo!¡± In that instant, a half-transparent barrier appeared in front of Cale. It was a shield. While On and Hong looked around in shock, Cale just casually started to speak. ¡°Dragon, you really are amazing. Can you make it soundproof as well?¡± Another shield ovepped the existing one. Rosalyn peeked over, and Cale could see her shock in seeing the twoyers of shields in front of Cale. At that moment, the voice of the ck Dragon, that must be somewhere inside of this shield, filled Cale¡¯s ear. ¡°You are very weak. That is why you need protection.¡± On and Hong were excited to realize it was the dragon, but looked at Cale with pity after hearing what the dragon had to say. They seemed to agree with the dragon¡¯s assessment. Cale ignored their gazes, and casually answered back. ¡°Do whatever you want.¡± ¡°I do not know why you are not using that power.¡± ¡°You don¡¯t need to know.¡± The power. The ck Dragon quickly realized that Cale did not want to show that ancient power to other people, and left it vague. Cale shrugged his shoulders and, in the end, a third shield was created for a total of a threeyered shield. ¡®His skill is growing exponentially.¡¯ Dragons learned magic differently than humans. Dragons controlled magic with their will. Cale thought that the ck Dragon¡¯s speed of improvement was surprising, but that it also made it much more useful for him. Cale could now peacefully watch Lock transforming into berserk mode down on the ground. ¡°Growl, aaaaaaah!¡± Lock¡¯s screams filled the arena. If it wasn¡¯t for the soundproof and shockproof magic that was installed around the basement, the knights of the residence would have all quickly rushed down. Lock¡¯s body becamerger every time he let out a shout. Muscles that weren¡¯t there previously started to develop, and his eyes turned red. It was proof that he was losing his consciousness. Why did that little boy from the Blue Wolf Tribe go berserk? In the novel, Lock would experience his first berserk transformation one yearter. The reason for that was the death of an individual. ¡®Healer Pendrick.¡¯ That elf ends up dying in battle. Pendrick was someone who reminded Lock of his dead uncle, the chief of the Blue Wolf Tribe. Seeing Pendrick dying makes Lock go crazy, wanting to kill everything and everyone in sight. ¡°On, Hong.¡± Cale looked down toward the siblings who were huddled together inside the shield. ¡°The two of you haven¡¯t experienced the berserk transformation yet, right?¡± The kittens nodded their heads. ¡°Do you know anything about it?¡± ¡°Not really.¡± ¡°Nobody taught us about it.¡± Cale knew this would be the case. Since On and Hong also seemed to be pure blooded, their berserk transformation would be rough as well. Cale looked forward once again, and started to speak. ¡°The Wolf Tribe, Tiger Tribe, Bear Tribe, and the Whale Tribe, these four tribes lose their rationality the most during the first berserk transformation. That is why we call these four tribes the Beast People closest to monsters.¡± He did not know much about the Cat Tribe. ¡°I do not know how the beserk transformation will be for the Cat Tribe, but if you feel like you are going to go berserk or suddenly feel yourself heating up or hurting, immediatelye to me.¡± ¡®It would be bad if you caused an ident.¡¯ Who would have to clean it up? Cale would have to clean up after them. Cale was someone who took full responsibility for things that happened in his territory, and the people he took in. Cale turned to look at them after not hearing any response. The two pairs of golden pupils of the kittens were turned toward Cale, and they both quickly headed to his leg and started to rub their faces at his leg. ¡®Why are they like this?¡¯ Cale didn¡¯t like how chummy they were being, and moved his leg slightly to the side. As he did that, Cale heard something that gave him the chills. ¡°Do dragons go berserk?¡± ¡°No.¡± It would be crazy for dragons to have berserk transformations. If a dragon went berserk, multiple mountains would disappear in an instant. That was a very scary thought. Cale¡¯s expression stiffened more than ever before, as he continued to look forward. It was his way of saying he did not want to hear anything more about it. ¡°Tsk.¡± He could hear the sound of the dragon clicking its tongue in the air. While Cale was thinking about the fickleness of this dragon, Lock¡¯s berserk transformation was finallypleted. Boom. The werewolf standing on two legs stomped on the ground, making the entire arena shake. The fur of the Blue Wolf Tribe was a dark blue color. The fierce werewolf, that could no longer be called a boy, became covered in that dark blue fur. Lock swung his arm that was now covered in muscles that were iparablyrger than Choi Han¡¯s muscles, to attack with his extremely sharp ws. ¡°Lock!¡± ¡°Lock, snap out of it!¡± Choi Han and Rosalyn tried to call out to him, but to Lock, who had lost his rationality, they were just lifeforms he needed to attack. ¡°Groooowl.¡± A rough growl came out of Lock¡¯s mouth. This wolf, that was at least 1.5 times Choi Han¡¯s height, rushed toward him. ¡°Lock, snap out of it! It¡¯s me! Choi Han!¡± Choi Han could not attack hispanion, and thus only defended as he called out to Lock. But would that do anything to make Lock return to normal? Of course not. Cale shook his head and continued to watch. ¡°Just smacking him on the head and making him faint would be the fastest way.¡± Gasp. The two kittens gasped and crept away from Cale. Although Cale was saying that, he had no intentions of making Choi Han do something like that. A Beast person who faints like that during their first berserk transformation would lose their rationality to the transformation once again in the future. ¡°Wow.¡± The berserk werewolf¡¯s attack was stronger than Cale expected. The fact that he was moving based on instinct made him utilize his muscles very efficiently. ¡°On, Hong.¡± Cale called the kitten siblings over. There was a reason he had the two of theme with him. ¡°Watch that Wolf Tribe kid¡¯s movements.¡± He wanted On and Hong to pay close attention to the werewolf Lock. Lock was relentlessly charging toward Choi Han and Rosalyn. There was no retreating for Lock. That was the Wolf Tribe¡¯s style. Cale spoke as if he was whispering to the kittens. ¡°That is the instinctual movements of a Beast person. The fact that they can move based on instinct, unlike humans, is one of the beauty and gloriousness of the Beast Tribes.¡± Bang! Lock¡¯s fist smashed onto the ground and broke the marble floor. He was showing tremendous strength. ¡°You should not fear or dread going berserk. That is when Beast People are at their strongest.¡± Pat. Cale¡¯s hand patted the two kitten¡¯s heads. ¡°Although the Cat Tribe and Wolf Tribe are different, the two of you are Beast People as well. Watch him to learn the style of a wild animal, the style of relying on your instincts. And then-¡± The two pairs of golden pupils made eye contact with Cale. ¡°Make it your own. Either that, or think of a way to kill those bears, tigers, wolves, the onesbeled as wild beasts.¡± The kittens, the Cat Tribe children, immediately turned away from Cale to observe Lock. The kittens stood up on their hind legs and observed Lock¡¯s every move. Silver and red, the two kitten¡¯s furs stood up as they became extremely nervous. Cats were weakpared to these wild beasts. It was because they were a tribe that relied on stealth that they clearly understood Cale¡¯s intent. Cale watched the kittens for a while, before calling out to the dragon. ¡°Hey.¡± The ck Dragon revealed itself in the air. Rosalyn and Choi Han did not have time to look toward them. They had to put their full attention on Lock. Cale pointed to the two people as he continued to speak to the dragon. ¡°Look at how Rosalyn uses her magic to not hurt the opponent. Also look at how Choi Han is using his aura not to attack, but to protect himself while not harming that wolf child.¡± Tang, tang, tang! Lock¡¯s extremely quick fists were trying to break through Rosalyn¡¯s shield. Rosalyn desperately called out to Lock while watching him attack. ¡°Lock, you remember me right? I said you were part of my family now. Hurry up and snap out of it!¡± Choi Han turned Lock¡¯s gaze over to him. He raised his murderous aura to the maximum to get Lock¡¯s attention. ¡°Lock, attack me. I am the one who will protect you.¡± Lock responded to the murderous aura by swinging his w toward Choi Han. Even though Lock¡¯s attack did not have any aura in it, his full physical strength was behind that attack. Cale was watching that scene from far away while continuing to speak to the dragon. ¡°It is harder to not hurt something than it is to hurt something when you have immense strength. But I know you will be able to quickly pick it up, since you are a dragon.¡± The dragon responded to Cale. ¡°I am a dragon. There is nothing I cannot do.¡± ¡°Correct. So watch them and make your own judgment.¡± The dragon flew down andnded next to the kittens before turning invisible once again. Cale presumed the dragon would take in Rosalyn, Choi Han, and Lock¡¯s movements like the kittens were doing. ¡®Should I have brought some wine with me?¡¯ Calemented the fact that he had no wine, as he continued to watch this boring battle. Two hours. For the duration of a typical movie, these three animal children kept their eyes on the battle, while Choi Han and Rosalyn started to get exhausted. ¡°.. Huff, huff, huff.¡± But the one who was the most exhausted was the werewolf. ¡°Huff, huff. Hyung-.¡± ¡°Lock!¡± Choi Han reacted to the word, ¡®hyung,¡¯ and rushed toward the staggering werewolf. Although he was notpletely out of the berserk mode, Choi Han¡¯s reaction made Cale stand up. ¡°Noo, noona-.¡± Lock was able to recognize Rosalyn as well. ¡°Ah, Lock!¡± Rosalyn rushed over as well to hug Lock. Lock was still covered in the dark blue fur, but his eyes were starting to be focused. Lock was not hurt at all, while Rosalyn and Choi Han had small injuries on their bodies. The two of them protected Lock like he was family. ¡°So, huff huff, sorry.¡± His rationality had returned. It was a perfect first berserk mode transformation, where he was able to ovee all issues. Lock put his head on Rosalyn, who was half his height, and then this 13 year-old boy started to cry. An animalistic noise was mixed in with his crying. ¡°Lock!¡± Lock then slowly turned back into his human form, before starting to fall. The berserk mode transformation was over. Choi Han quickly approached him and prevented him from falling over. Lock was doing his best to not faint, as he was worried that he would return to his berserk state. At that moment, a man carrying two kittens arrived in front of this boy who was trying his best to keep his eyes open. ¡®Uncle.¡¯ It was the man who said the same thing as his uncle. The man started to speak. ¡°You can rest now.¡± The man smiled, and made Lock close his eyes like before. ¡°It is all over now.¡± Lock finally rxed and closed his eyes after hearing the man¡¯s words. Lock leaned on Choi Han and fainted. Choi Han carefullyid Lock back down on the stretcher. Cale, who had been watching this, took a potion out of the bag and threw it toward Rosalyn. Rosalyn caught the potion bottle and asked. ¡°Potions don¡¯t work on Lock?¡± Cale looked at Rosalyn in a way that seemed to be asking why she was saying something that was so obvious, and answered the still confused Rosalyn. ¡°Why would I give a potion to someone from the Wolf Tribe? It¡¯s for you. You struggled quite a bit.¡± Rosalyn stared at Cale. She had seen an amazing sight of a threeyered magic, and had many things she wanted to ask Cale. However, she said something else. ¡°Thank you very much.¡± This had toe first. ¡°No need for thanks.¡± Cale casually responded and turned away. He could see Choi Han who was already looking at him. ¡°Choi Han.¡± Just how did this happen? He needed to figure out what happened. ¡°We need to talk.¡± If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 32: You (7) Chapter 32: You (7) 1Chapter 32: You (7) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale left the arena with Choi Han. ¡°Hans, Ron. Guide the two people still in the Arena.¡± Cale had Hans and Ron, who were waiting outside the first floor entrance, take care of Rosalyn and Lock while Cale was returning to his room with Choi Han. The table which held the now cold food from earlier was between the two of them, as Cale started to speak. ¡°Tell me.¡± ¡°Yes.¡± The two of them got right to the point without beating around the bush. Choi Han straightened up, as he started to speak. ¡°Everything was fine until I met Rosalyn.¡± ¡°Continue.¡± ¡°I arrived at the city Cale-nim mentioned. Once I got there, I found the merchant guild heading for the capital as you described. Well, it was just a small brigade of five people rather than a guild.¡± That small group was better described as a merchant group rather than a merchant guild. ¡°They happened to be looking for two mercenaries to guard them. Their usual guard was injured.¡± Choi Han and Rosalyn became the two mercenaries. That was how it went in the novel. ¡°That was where I met Rosalyn, who looked just like you described.¡± Breck Kingdom was across the Northwest border of the Roan Kingdom. Rosalyn was originally heading from Breck Kingdom to the Magic Tower in the Whipper Kingdom, located beneath the Roan Kingdom, when someone tries to assassinate her as she crossed into the Roan Kingdom. She had been hiding about half of her magic skills until that point and is able to escape from the danger by using all of her skills. She thought it would be smarter to go to the capital of the Roan Kingdom and get some information from the Information Guild rather than going straight back to the Breck Kingdom, since she did not know anything about the people who attacked her. ¡®She then causes quite the scene when she gets back to Breck Kingdom.¡¯ Choi Han, who just mentioned that he had met Rosalyn as a mercenary for the merchant group, continued on. ¡°She was also heading to the capital. Since we were heading to the same ce, we were quite friendly with each other.¡± ¡®Huh?¡¯ ¡°Hmm? Friendly?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Choi Han was speaking as if he was embarrassed. ¡°I¡¯m generally not one to talk to people if they don¡¯t talk to me, but I thought we might as well be friendly.¡± ¡°Not really. You just have to act like your usual self.¡± Cale had a concerned expression on his face. In the novel, Rosalyn and Choi Han did not get close to each other until they met Lock. Rosalyn, who became wary of people after the assassination attempt, did not reach out to be friendly with anybody. Simrly, after the incidents in Harris Vige, Choi Han was not the type to approach people to be friends. Choi Han nodded his head at Cale¡¯s words, before smiling and adding on. ¡°It definitely was not something I would normally do, but I wanted to do things properly since this was my way to pay you back.¡± Ha. Cale let out a sigh and shook his head. Choi Han seemed to have expected it, as he brushed it aside and continued to speak with a stiff expression. ¡°That group was nning on staying at the vige that Cale-nim mentioned I would find Lock residing in for a few days before continuing onward on their journey.¡± That was indeed the case. That small merchant group of five people was made by someone who had been helped by the Blue Wolf Tribe. The injured guard was actually a warrior from the Blue Wolf Tribe. The merchants deliberately chose to take the long way from Puzzle City to the capital to deliver daily necessities to the Blue Wolf Tribe and receive medicinal herbs in return. Of course, it was extremely difficult, as well as a waste of even more time to go deep into the mountains to the Blue Wolf Vige. That was why they met at a tiny vige underneath the mountains. That merchant, who was now 60 years old, had continued this partnership for thest thirty years. ¡°But something happened once we arrived at that small vige.¡± Cale became alert. The story was important from here. ¡°Right around when we arrived at the vige, I learned that the guard was a Beast Person. I also learned that the vige they were nning to meet the Blue Wolf Tribe member to trade was the vige that Cale-nim had mentioned as well.¡± Cale nodded his head at Choi Han¡¯s words. He knew Choi Han would easily recognize that much. ¡°That was why I believed that I just needed to follow the tribe member that was going to show up at the vige to find Lock.¡± ¡®But that tribe member probably never showed up.¡¯ ¡°But nobody showed up to make the trade. When that happened, the merchant asked us for some extra help.¡± Cale thought about what that request would have been. ¡®Go to the Blue Wolf Vige with the injured Blue Wolf Tribe guard.¡¯ ¡°It was if we could go visit the Blue Wolf Vige with the injured guard.¡± ¡°And you agreed?¡± ¡°Yes. I agreed. Rosalyn agreed as well.¡± It followed the original story until this point. Just what could have changed? In, ¡®The Birth of a Hero,¡¯ Choi Han and Rosalyn arrive at the Blue Wolf Vige with the guard warrior, only to find the vige destroyed and the secret organization¡¯s assassins trying to leave. Choi Han recalls what happened to Harris Vige, and immediately starts to attack them. The guard warrior also goes crazy and starts to kill the assassins. He is injured even more in the process, and ends up dying. ¡®That is when Rosalyn learns of Choi Han¡¯s strength.¡¯ Rosalyn, who had been hiding her strength and masquerading as a beginner mage, learns of Choi Han¡¯s strength and officially asks him to escort her back to Breck Kingdom. Of course, thepensation she offered him was huge. ¡®They then find Lock hiding in that destroyed vige.¡¯ The coward wolf boy, Lock. Until Choi Han found him, Lock had been hiding as the chief had told him. The Lock at that point is very much a coward, a weakling, and kind of slow. In simple terms, Lock easily took the position of the character that readers found to be extremely frustrating. However, his natural abilities and physical strength rise to the top five in the novel after his first berserk mode transformation. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± ¡°Yeah?¡± ¡®But why would the timing of the transformation be pulled forward by a year?¡¯ ¡°I saw something I was familiar with there.¡± ¡°What did you see?¡± Choi Han nodded his head at Cale¡¯s question. The cold food was between the two of them, but it could probably be heated up by the nervousness that filled the air between them. Choi Han started to speak. ¡°A red star and five white stars.¡± Cale¡¯s expression stiffened. He could feel his heart sink. Choi Han was saying that, instead of the assassination team, official members of the secret organization showed up at the Blue Wolf Tribe. Cale could not understand why. In the novel, the Blue Wolf Tribe was the target of assassination. Choi Han looked at Cale¡¯s cold expression and recalled the past for a moment. He subconsciously started to clench his fists. His fists were shaking with anger. The houses in the vige deep in the mountains were simple and small. But all of them were destroyed. Most importantly, the corpses of the Wolf Tribe werepletely ck, as if they were burnt to a crisp on the floor. The ck corpses, what smelled like burnt flesh, and the blood that was still pouring out of their open wounds. Most of the Wolf Tribe members died with their eyes still open. ¡°The mountain vige was already destroyed when we got there. Many of the Wolf Tribe members were dead as well.¡± The Blue Wolf Tribe was known for their strength, so how did the secret organization kill them? Wolves put their family, herd, and friends before themselves. Weak members who had not experienced their first berserk mode transformation. The secret organization used those weak members as hostages, before using divine items to weaken the adult wolves. After killing the adults, they then killed the young hostages. There were a few adult wolves that tried to attack them in frenzy, but the secret organization had Holy Water to use against those few wolves. The secret organization was a very strong organization, that even had ess to divine items. They used the fact that the Wolf Tribe was disowned by the gods to their advantage. These cruel bastards had no issues using young children as hostages to kill their mothers, fathers, and the rest of the tribe members, while the poor young children watched in horror. ¡®The novel didn¡¯t say which of the divine items they brought.¡¯ If Cale knew what the divine item was, he would be able to get one step closer to the identity of the secret organization. Unfortunately, the novel only described how the Wolf Tribe became weak because of the divine item. He had no way to determine the identity of the secret organization. Cale slowly asked. ¡°Were they all dead?¡± Choi Han shook his head. Cale¡¯s expression stiffened again. Choi Han observed Cale¡¯s stiff expression, as he continued. ¡°They were trying to capture the young children.¡± ¡®Capture? Originally, they killed them all. Why would they want the young Wolf Tribe children?¡¯ Cale¡¯s mind started to beplicated. Choi Han made eye contact with the Cale who was thinking deeply. ¡°The chief was dying when we arrived at the entrance of the Blue Wolf Tribe¡¯s vige.¡± There were less than 100 members of the Blue Wolf Tribe. ¡°And they were trying to take 10 children with them.¡± ¡®...This is bing too different from the novel.¡¯ ¡°And the moment the chief was about to fall, a young boy got in the way of the people trying to take the children.¡± ¡°...Lock?¡± ¡°Yes. It was Lock.¡± ¡®Why would Lock show up this time? In the novel, he had stayed hidden, even when the children were killed. Did he think killing and kidnapping were different? Was it his instinctual need to protect his family members and his younger siblings, who were weaker than him? What would have made Lock¡¯s natural wolf instincts re up?¡¯ ¡°I stopped the assassin. No, I tried to kill them.¡± Choi Han said that as he looked back at Cale. Cale did not show any emotions as he urged Choi Han to continue speaking. ¡°Keep going.¡± ¡°...I realized that the people who did not have stars on their clothes used the same ck power as the assassins I killed at Harris Vige.¡± Cale asked back with a shocked expression. ¡°It was the same power as the people who destroyed Harris Vige?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°...This.¡± Cale grabbed his head with one hand and let out a sigh. He was acting like it was his first time hearing about this. Of course, all of this was just an act. ¡°Among them, there was just one person who had the red star with five white stars on their chest. That person was the one who killed the guard.¡± Choi Han started to tear up. ¡°And that trash of a human was drinking the Wolf Tribe¡¯s blood.¡± Cale closed his eyes. The blood drinking mage. He was the crazy lunatic who would lead the terror incident at the capital. He kept his eyes closed as he heard the rest of Choi Han¡¯s report. ¡°In the end, I could not capture or kill them. The ones I capturedmitted suicide, while the rest disappeared when the person with the stars used teleportation magic.¡± ¡®Why would the blood drinking mage, who is a highest tier mage and crazy for blood, try to kidnap the Blue Wolf Tribe children instead of killing all of them like in the novel?¡¯ Cale could not figure it out. ¡®Did something change drastically because I saved the dragon?¡¯ The only thing Cale could think about was the changes he has made so far to the original story. ¡°This is what the mage said.¡± Choi Han continued in an angry and bitter voice. ¡°How disappointing. They were perfect as seeds. These young ones probably have even tastier blood.¡± Seed. Cale didn¡¯t know what the mage meant by seed, but he kept the word on the back of his mind as he opened his eyes and asked. ¡°And the children?¡± The guard, chief, and the rest of the Wolf Tribe adults were dead. The only ones left were the 10 children and Lock. Choi Han avoided Cale¡¯s gaze. This was the first time he did that since they sat down at this table. Cale instantly figured out what must have happened, as Choi Han reported in a quiet voice. ¡°They are at the inn.¡± ¡®I knew it.¡¯ Choi Han opened and closed his mouth a few more times before finally adding on. ¡°We came together with Rosalyn¡¯s magic.¡± ¡®...It¡¯s going to be a real problem.¡¯ Cale could feel a headache brewing. Choi Han should have just left the children with that merchant that they were travelling with. Although that merchant was far away from power right now, he was a great merchant. ¡°Cale-nim. That merchant is also at the inn.¡± ¡®Is this how the story will go?¡¯ That was what Cale was thinking right now. Cale observed Choi Han, who seemed to be finished with his report, and leaned back on the chair to sigh. Seeing Choi Han like that, Cale asked a question. ¡°You must be curious.¡± Choi Han looked toward the cold food and answered. ¡°Yes. I am curious.¡± He did not even need to say what he was curious about. Who they were. Why they were doing such terrible things. And why Cale knew about them. Choi Han was curious about all of those things. Cale observed Choi Han¡¯s pupils, that were looking down at the cold food on the table, and started to think. ¡®This punk is really angry right now.¡¯ The anger was not directed toward Cale. Choi Han was sharpening his anger toward the secret organization over and over again, like a sharp de. Harris Vige, the tortured dragon, and the incident with the Blue Wolf Tribe. Choi Han¡¯s personally was one where he would sh with them instead of avoiding them. Cale picked up a cold, but still delicious bread, and ripped off a piece to put into his mouth. ¡°I n on telling you two things.¡± ¡°...But not everything?¡± ¡°Correct.¡± Cale did not care that Choi Han was staring at him. He stood up with the bread still in his hand. The chair was pushed back without making a noise on the carpet. ¡°Stand up.¡± ¡°...Are we going somewhere?¡± Cale checked his watch after watching Choi Han get up after him. It was long past evening and heading toward night. That ce was one to shine even brighter as the night got deeper. Cale walked toward the door and responded to Choi Han¡¯s question. ¡°The Temple of the God of Death.¡± Cale was nning on going with Choi Han to the brightest ce at night, the Temple of the God of Death. There was a special type of priest at the Temples of the God of Death that could not be found anywhere else on the continent. The deaf official. They could not hear anything you said to each other. That was why the believers of the God of Death looked for them. Although Cale was not a believer, he was nning on visiting them, like most nobles. Cale turned around once he got to the door. Choi Han was still standing by the table. Cale started to smile. ¡°I n on telling you two truths.¡± Although he was smiling, the next thing out of his mouth was not light at all. ¡°With my life on the line.¡± Choi Han¡¯s pupils lightly shook. However, Cale still had a smile on his face as he turned back around. ¡°Follow me.¡± Choi Han slowly moved away from the table and headed toward the door. His eyes had calmed back down, but his face was still stiff. Cale was turning the doorknob as he repeated himself once again. ¡°I will tell you the truth with my life on the line.¡± Cale headed toward the Temple of the God of Death with Choi Han. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 33: You (8) Chapter 33: You (8) 2Chapter 33: You (8) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Nobody seemed to find it odd that Cale suddenly wanted to head out. Ron seemed to have gone somewhere as well, as he was nowhere to be found. The only question Hans had for Cale was about where Cale was going. ¡®Young master, where are you going?¡¯ ¡®Don¡¯t worry about it.¡¯ ¡®Yes, sir! But since this is your first day in the capital, can you please return without breaking any alcohol bottles today?¡¯ ¡®...Are you really going to keep getting out of line like this?¡¯ ¡®Not at all. Please be safe, young master.¡¯ Cale got on the carriage and started to think about how to deal with Hans, who kept stepping out of line. The carriage arrived at the temple while he was thinking. ¡°Let¡¯s get off.¡± ¡°Got it.¡± Cale got up to step out of the carriage. Choi Han had been quiet ever since they got on the carriage, no, since they stepped out of Cale¡¯s room. He seemed to have a lot ofplicated emotions storming through his head right now. Cale only knew about Choi Han¡¯s personality until the fifth volume of, ¡®The Birth of a Hero.¡¯ However, there was one thing that Cale was sure about. Although Choi Han was a good person, he was not gullible. He was very smart. ¡®If I tried to give an unbelievable excuse, he may believe me at first, but will definitely doubt meter.¡¯ Choi Han may have been very lonely after living in solitude for tens of years, but that experience taught him how to survive on his own, and how to stubbornly persevere. Choi Han may look at him favorably right now and follow him, but, as seen around volume 5 of, ¡®The Birth of a Hero,¡¯ he is someone who eventually wishes to be the leader. Choi Han is someone who will live to make his personal view of justice a reality. ¡°...It is too white.¡± The Temple of the God of Death that Cale saw once he alighted waspletely white, without a speck of dirt to be seen. The believers of the God of Death considered white to be the color of death, and cleaned everything over and over again every single day to make sure there was not a speck of dust anywhere on the building. ¡®What an interesting ce.¡¯ The Temple of the God of Death looked like it wanted to show that people had nothing to fear about the night with their actions. They opened the temple to both believers and non-believers once the sun started to set. ¡®Apparently, the priests are all sleeping if youe during the day.¡¯ It really was an interesting ce in Cale¡¯s opinion. They were greeted by two priests at the temple entrance. ¡°May you be blessed with a peaceful rest!¡± ¡°May you be blessed with a peaceful rest!¡± The priests of the God of Death were generally extremely bubbly. Although people may consider death to be the end, the philosophy of the Church of the God of Death believed that it was important to enjoy life as they headed toward the peaceful rest. ¡°Priest-nim.¡± Cale slowly approached the priest. The priest inspected Cale with a curious expression. Cale looked like he was either an extremely affluent noble or a wealthy merchant based on his outfit. But the man behind him looked like a beggar, although the sword on his waist made him look somewhat strong. ¡°What can I do for you?¡± ¡°Is there an open Room of Death?¡± The two priests¡¯ expressions stiffened. The priest who asked the question looked back and forth between Cale and Choi Han before asking. ¡°Whose death will you be putting on the line?¡± The priest peeked toward Choi Han as he said that. Choi Han currently looked like he had been rolling on a mountain and been suffering for a while. He also looked like he had not eaten anything for about two days, and seemed to be the type that would be easily scammed. The priest had a bitter feeling about this. The priest turned his gaze over to the affluent noble. Beautiful red hair and a handsome face. He was not very handsome, but it was enough to catch attention wherever he went. In addition, this man was currently smiling. Cale smiled as he slightly raised his hand. ¡°Mine.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Cale smiled once more at the confused priest. ¡°I will be putting my life on the line.¡± Choi Han put his hand on Cale¡¯s shoulder at that time. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What?¡± Cale turned around to see Choi Han with a stiff, yet anxious expression. ¡°I will believe you even if you don¡¯t do this.¡± Cale started to smirk and slowly responded. ¡°I don¡¯t think you will.¡± Choi Han will have no choice but to not believe him. How could he believe Cale when Cale was not nning to tell him anything? That was why they were at the temple. ¡®Why would I tell him everything? That¡¯ll just make me get involved in the mess.¡¯ There was no reason for him to get involved with Choi Han that much. Cale wouldn¡¯t be able to live a peaceful life if Choi Han was around. It¡¯s already visible. Didn¡¯t Choi Han bring him more trouble to him by bringing all of the wolf children? ¡®He rides on the whales with the Whale Tribe to fight against mermaids in the future.¡¯ In this human-centric world, Choi Han¡¯s position to embrace both humans and non-humans makes him start to change. The start of that is the Whale Tribe. The Whale Tribe that appeared at the beginning of volume 5 was, to be honest, quite scary. ¡®They were the deadliest predators.¡¯ The Whale Tribe was the strongest of the Beast people. They were also the most beautiful Beast people. The Whale Tribe had different colors of ck, grey, or pink, but they were all extremely beautiful. Inparison, the mermaids of this world had two legs and fins, looking like a human covered in scales. ¡®But they are so stubborn that they won¡¯t even be humble in front of a dragon.¡¯ The Whale Tribe was extremely scary. Although they were small in number, their casual punch could easily blow up a human¡¯s head. Even Lock could not lift a finger to the Whale Tribe. ¡®Their temper is ruthless.¡¯ Choi Han gets involved with all sorts of people and trouble as well. Cale had no desire to continue being involved with him. ¡°Priest-nim. The room?¡± ¡°Yes, we have one. I will prepare it for you right away. Please head to the basement.¡± ¡°Thank you.¡± Cale started to walk behind the priest. Choi Han followed behind Cale with an iffy expression. Cale noticed Choi Han¡¯s movement, and leisurely walked toward the innermost area of the temple. After walking for a long time, they could see numerous doors on one side of the wall. The priest opened one of those doors to reveal a staircase leading down into the basement. ¡°Death awaits you at the bottom.¡± ¡°Great. Let¡¯s go.¡± The priest watched Cale walking down the stairs without any hesitation with interest. The, ¡®death,¡¯ that is mentioned in the Temple of Death also meant, ¡®vow.¡¯ Death was something that was guaranteed to visit you at some point. It was not something you could avoid, and your responsibility was to ept your role in the world while you are here. That was why the officials of the Temple of the God of Death brought the end known as death for those who go against their vow. Because of this, people who headed to this Room of Death, or sometimes called the Room of Vows, tended to be humble and serious. In contrast, this rxed and confident person was really unique in the priest¡¯s eyes. ¡®It makes me think about priestess Cage.¡¯ She was someone who cursed the temple extremely frequently, but she was still loved by the lord. Cage. The priest suddenly thought about her, but quickly erased it from her thoughts. At the same time, Cage was bing frustrated while hearing the lord¡¯s voice again. After getting rid of the thoughts about Cage, the priest headed down the stairs behind Cale. Once they got to the bottom, the priest opened the door and informed Cale and Choi Han. ¡°Please wait a moment. I will get it ready.¡± The priest then entered into the room alone. Cale looked toward the closed door and started to speak. ¡°If you really don¡¯t think we need to do this, I will let you know one of the truths in advance. What do you think?¡± Choi Han immediately responded. ¡°Yes, please tell me. I trust you.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Cale rubbed his chin with one hand before casually spitting the truth out. ¡°The first of the two truths.¡± His gaze turned toward Choi Han. ¡°I do not know the secret organization¡¯s identity nor their goal.¡± ¡°...What the-¡± Choi Han¡¯s pupils started to shake. At that moment, they heard a click and the priest came back out of the room. ¡°You can enter now. The person putting their life on the line just needs to raise their hand once inside the room for the priest-nim.¡± ¡°Thank you. We understand.¡± Compared to the rxed Cale, Choi Han seemed extremely confused and anxious. The priest tilted his head in confusion at this, but quietly left the area. It was none of his business. Cale grabbed the doorknob as he turned to look back at Choi Han. ¡°Hard to believe?¡± ¡°That, you see.¡± Cale could see Choi Han struggling to answer. Choi Han had said he trusted Cale, but he could not trust Cale¡¯s words. How could Cale not know? Did that make any sense? Choi Han then heard Cale¡¯s voice in his ear. ¡°I understand.¡± Choi Han looked toward Cale. Cale¡¯s rxed expression made him seem very mature. Cale then started to speak. ¡°Let¡¯s go in.¡± Choi Han followed Cale into the Room of Death that was behind the white door. As expected, the room waspletely white, with a white table, white chair, and white walls. The only non-white thing in the room was the priest who was standing there with his mouth and ears covered. The deaf priest. Cale did not really look favorably upon that title, but these priests were pretty well respected in this world. Nobles and royalty, anybody who needed to have a secret conversation or stealthily sign a contract came to see these priests. Cale silently bowed his head to greet the priest before raising his hand. The priest nodded at Cale¡¯s action and pointed to the two chairs by the table. Cale sat down on the right side while Choi Han sat across from him on the left. The priest moved to the head of the table before pushing a piece of paper toward them. [For the person who is putting their life on the line. The hand of the God of Death will touch the one who came with you. Once that happens, you can say your vow. Should you break your vow, death awaits you.] What a vicious set of directions. Cale pushed the paper back to the priest after verifying that Choi Han had finished reading. The priest then lifted both of his hands up like Cage had done before. At that moment. Ooooooooong- oooooooong- The white room started to shake. Maybe it was because this was a ce that served the lord, but a ck smoke started to form around the priest once the room started to shake. The ck smoke then surrounded both Choi Han and Cale before creating a connection between the two of them. ¡°...Is this the power of the God of Death?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Cale responded to Choi Han¡¯s question before trying to feel the ck smoke thread surrounding him. It happened when Cage made the vow as well, but the power of the God of Death reminded him of the stakes of this vow. ¡®I will die if I break this vow.¡¯ Cale was sure Choi Han felt it as well. That must be why his face stiffened up. Cale could feel the touch of the God of Death and started his vow. ¡°The priest in front of me guarantees that he cannot hear, and, if that is not the truth, he will pay the price with his life.¡± This was the general phrase stated first whenever a vow was made with a deaf priest. ¡°Furthermore, I, Cale Henituse, vow to speak the truth to Choi Han in front of the God of Eternal Rest, and, if what I say is even slightly a lie, I will immediately die in this spot to pay the price.¡± Immediately. That word made Choi Han¡¯s face stiffen up even more. He was nervous. At first, Cale debated whether to tell Choi Han everything. I was transported into the novel I was reading. I am also Korean. That is why I know what happens until volume 5. This secret organization goes on to cause issues throughout the continent. The continent soon falls into a state of chaos because of a war. Should Cale say all of that? Or, should he say something like this? I was transported into the novel I was reading and ended up as the son of a wealthy noble. That was why I was trying to just live a peaceful life, but I remembered what happened in the novel so I changed it around a bit. I wanted to allow myself to live peacefully, even if the continent was in a state of war. Cale didn¡¯t like either of them. The first one might get him involved in the continent¡¯s war and make him die out on the battlefield, while the second one might lead to Choi Han¡¯s contempt killing him. Cale did not want either of those to happen. ¡°First.¡± First of the two truths. ¡°I, Cale Henituse, do not know the identity of that organization.¡± Sigh. Choi Han let out a deep sigh before covering his face with both hands. He slowly moved his hands away after a bit to see that Cale was still alive. ¡°I am being honest when I say that I do not know their identity.¡± It was the truth. Cale, the original Kim Rok Soo, had read, ¡®The Birth of a Hero¡¯ until volume 5, but it did not mention anything about the secret organization¡¯s goals or identity. All it discussed was the actions of the organization. ¡°And one more thing. I am beingpletely honest when I say this.¡± The second of the two truths. ¡°I despise the organization and wish for it to disappear.¡± Naturally, Cale was still alive. He did not like these people that caused such incidents. They probably take part in the continent¡¯s war as well. Cale wished for them to disappear so that he could live calmly on a peaceful continent. Choi Han seemed like he was at a loss for words. He looked at the ck thread connecting himself, the priest, and Cale, before repeatedly clenching and unclenching his fist. Cale flinched at Choi Han¡¯s scary expression when Choi Han started to speak. ¡°How can you hate them if you don¡¯t know them?¡± ¡°Because I know about a couple of the terrible things they n on doing. The ck Dragon and Lock are two of them. Choi Han.¡± Cale pointed to himself with his index finger. ¡°I have lived my life as trash. That is my dream.¡± Choi Han¡¯s expression changed after hearing Cale say that his dream was to be trash. ¡°I have no desire to be my family¡¯s sessor. Basen Henituse, my blood-rted younger brother. I am hoping for him to be the sessor.¡± This was also the truth. That was why Cale asked Choi Han a question. ¡°So then why would I havee to the capital as the representative of the Henituse family? Especially when I am hoping Basen bes the sessor? My father, the head of the household, told me to go, but I could have said no.¡± Choi Han answered after a duration of silence. ¡°...I am not sure.¡± ¡°It is because I know what the secret organization is nning to do in the capital.¡± Choi Han¡¯s pupils dted once more. ¡°I cannot answer how I know. But they are nning to kill a lot of people at the capital. I couldn¡¯t send Basen to such a ce. I want to prevent that incident from happening.¡± Of course, Cale was not nning to do anything and everything to put his own life on the line for others. ¡°After taking care of all of these issues as quietly as possible, I n on returning to the Henituse territory.¡± ¡°...You cannot tell me how you know?¡± ¡°Correct. I cannot tell anybody, no matter who it is, about it.¡± Choi Han¡¯s eyes were full of questions, but his mouth stayed shut. Cale didn¡¯t know the identity of the secret organization but he knew about a couple things they would end up doing. He also despised them and wanted them gone. Choi Han¡¯s head fell even more as he started to think things over. His head was a mess right now. Even still, the power of the God of Deathing through the ck thread gave him serenity. He knew that Cale would die right here if he had lied. ¡°However, I will tell you one more thing.¡± One more. That made Choi Han quickly lift his head to look at Cale. ¡°Thest truth.¡± This was the third truth Cale told Choi Han. ¡°I have no desire to harm you.¡± Cale was confident as he said that. He remained alive, which meant this was the truth. Choi Han started to frown. Tap. Tap. Choi Han started to tap his thigh with his clenched fist. Although he was not tapping very hard, veins were popping out of his tightly clenched fist. He slowly raised his head. Cale was still alive. ¡°...I trust you.¡± Listening to that response that took so long toe out, Cale repeated the words he had said to Choi Han before they entered this room. ¡°I understand.¡± He then started to smile. Sigh. Choi Han sighed while still sitting at the table. He lifted his head to look at Cale. Cale¡¯s eyes were pure as usual, while stubborn. ¡°Cale-nim. Please promise one more thing. Then I willpletely trust you.¡± ¡®...I didn¡¯t think something like this would happen.¡¯ Cale was feeling iffy about Choi Han¡¯s response. It shouldn¡¯t be a big deal because he would be able to find a way to twist anything to suit himself, but it was the phrase, pletely trust you,¡¯ that was not sitting well with Cale. But it wasn¡¯t like he could say no right now. ¡°Sure. What is it?¡± ¡°Cale-nim.¡± ¡°Yes?¡± ¡°I must get revenge on that organization. I think this is the first time in my life I¡¯ve ever hated a person or an organization so much.¡± Anger filled Choi Han¡¯s pure eyes. A sense of nostalgia could be seen behind the anger as well. Choi Han was probably thinking about Harris Vige. ¡®Mm.¡¯ Cale held back from letting that noise escape from his mouth. This was why he did not want Choi Han with him, even if Choi Han chose to follow him. Choi Han was a good person, but he would always finish something he made up his mind to do. That was why Cale waited for Choi Han¡¯s final request with nervousness. Choi Han finally started to speak. ¡°Please tell me no matter what if you find out their identity.¡± ¡°Ah-, well, sure.¡± ¡®I thought he was going to ask something difficult.¡¯ Cale had a shocked expression as he made the vow. ¡°I, Cale Henituse, will inform Choi Han once I learn of their identity. I will pay with my life should I go against this vow. Good enough?¡± ¡°Yes, thank you very much.¡± Choi Han finally started to smile. He seemed to be relieved. Cale started to think while observing this Choi Han. ¡®How would I ever learn of their identity?¡¯ In order to find out their identity, actually, in order to even find the smallest clue about their identity, he would need to go down the same route Choi Han took in the novel. He would have to be crazy to do that. Once Choi Han gets out of the capital and the Roan Kingdom, he would run into all sorts of heroes; humans and non-humans alike. Just thinking about it made Cale feel terrible. ¡°Then are we done?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Bang! Cale lifted his hand and mmed down on the table. His smash made the table slightly shake, and the priest opened his eyes and nodded his head. The area vibrated once more. Ooooooong- With that, the smoke disappeared into each of their bodies. It was slightly different from when Cale had experienced this with the crazy priestess Cage. Cale felt the two vows bing ingrained into his body as he took a piece of paper out of his pocket. It was the cheque for 10 million gallons. Cale put that money in front of the calmly seated priest and got up. He then said goodbye to the priest before heading out of the room. Choi Han looked back and forth between the money and Cale, before following Cale out of the room and closing the door. He then looked toward Cale with confusion. Cale casually responded to Choi Han¡¯s gaze. ¡°Nothing in life is free.¡± ¡°I see.¡± Cale walked back up the stairs to find the priest from earlier standing at the entrance on the first floor. The priest greeted the still alive Cale. ¡°May your life continue until its destined time.¡± It was their way of telling you not to break your vow so that you could continue to live. It waspletely merciless. ¡°Thank you very much, priest-nim.¡± Cale thanked the priest with a smile in response. The priest still found Cale¡¯s smile and rxed voice to be odd, but Cale just walked past him to leave the temple. He then got on the carriage and and started to speak once the carriage started to move. ¡°For your reference, that crazy mage, that person is the leader of the incident that will happen at the capital.¡± ¡°......Am I allowed to kill them if I see them?¡± ¡°Why are you asking me such an obvious question? Do as you want.¡± ¡®Doesn¡¯t matter to me.¡¯ However, that crazy mage was a highest level mage and a teleportation specialist, so Choi Han was never able to do a he wished in the novel. ¡°Yes. I will make sure to kill them.¡± Cale turned away from the angry face of Choi Han. It was too vicious for Cale to handle. Once they got back to their residence, there was another individual Cale found difficult to handle. ¡°Young master.¡± ¡°Ron.¡± The assassin Ron, who had a benign smile on his face, came to look for Cale, who was trying to rest in his chamber. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 34: Being Still (1) Chapter 34: Being Still (1) 1Chapter 34: Being Still (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale nkly stared at the teacup that Ron was offering him. ¡°...Lemon tea before bed?¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± Cale was not used to drinking lemon tea before bed. He didn¡¯t feel like drinking it, but he lifted the teacup up without saying anything else. He felt Ron¡¯s gaze on him as he took a sip of the lemon tea. It was then that Ron started to speak. ¡°Young master, may I make a request?¡± ¡°Kek, what? A request?¡± Cale¡¯s eyes opened wide at Ron saying the word, ¡®request,¡¯ and turned to look at Ron quickly. Ron still had a gentle smile on his face. Cale¡¯s eyes started to fog up, as he quickly started to think. ¡®This devious old man has a request for someone like me, who he thinks is useless?¡¯ Cale had an indescribable sense of ominousness. He felt like the man who tried to get rid of a lump on his face and ended uping back with two. Either that, or the woodcutter who was greedy and imed that both the golden axe and the silver axe were his and ended up leaving empty handed without even his own axe. Cale calmed himself before asking in a rxed manner. ¡°Alright, what is it?¡± Ron immediately shared his request with Cale. ¡°May I have two days off?¡± ¡°Oh.¡± Cale subconsciously let out a gasp. He felt like he had his lump removed and received the set of golden and silver axes as a gift at the same time. Cale put the teacup down and grabbed Ron¡¯s hand, before starting to rapidly speak, unlike his usual style. ¡°Yes. Good idea. Ron, you''ve worked so hard for tens of years. You had to take care of this trash of a young master. If you want a break, you can take off as long as you want. You are more than wee to do that.¡± Yes, Cale would like it if Ron took a very long break. However, Ron needed to return before the capital terror incident in order to get connected to Choi Han, so two days was perfect. Cale was looking forward to enjoying the next two days without looking at this assassin¡¯s face. Ron looked toward Cale, who was holding his hand vigorously, with curiosity. However, Cale quickly turned his gaze away from Ron and opened a dresser next to the bed. Cale removed a money pouch out of the dresser and held it up. Cheques andrge amounts of money were in the residence¡¯s safe, but there was still a lot of money in this bag as well. Cale took the whole bag and put it in Ron¡¯s hand. He was the son of a wealthy family and really did not have anything else to give other than money. ¡°Here. This isn¡¯t much, but buy yourself some delicious food and enjoy your break.¡± Ron just nkly stared at the money pouch Cale had put in his hand. ¡®Buy myself delicious food and enjoy my break.¡¯ This made Ron think about how long he had been living in hiding. He had spent that whole time taking care of this trash, this puppy young master. He was now trying to step back out of hiding and restart his life. But there was a good chance that his future would be chaotic. If those people really had crossed over to the Western Continent, it would actually be worse than just chaotic. ¡®Then I should leave my son here.¡¯ Ron looked toward the rxed young master in front of him. ¡°Young master, will it really be okay?¡± Cale excitedly answered Ron¡¯s question. He wanted Ron to enjoy himself so much that he would desire to leave Cale for good. ¡°Of course. Ron, you are qualified to enjoy a break.¡± Qualification. Ron¡¯s original n was to quietly leave in a few days either alone, or with Beacrox. However, this damn affection was the problem. That was why he mentioned a two-day break. He wanted to see what this little punk would say. He was curious to know. This puppy young master of his now knew what kind of person he was because of Choi Han. Ron still had a gentle expression on his face, but his gaze started it turn cold. ¡°Young master, this is too much money. What will you do if I take this and run away?¡± ¡®Or is it that you want me to run away since you heard that I am a strong individual?¡¯ Although the years of forcing himself to smile had created a lot of wrinkles on his face, his sharp gaze was directed to Cale. Ron could see Cale¡¯s reaction. Cale had snorted. ¡°You think I don¡¯t know your personality, Ron? If you were going to run, you would have either left without saying anything or just t out said that you were leaving. Am I wrong?¡± That was how Ron had left in the novel. He didn¡¯t say anything to the Count, and whenever he needed to separate from Choi Han¡¯s party for a bit, he would discuss their contract before leaving. ¡°... You are right. That is indeed correct.¡± Ron nodded his head with a smile on his face. Now that he thought about it, this puppy young master in front of him had seen him more than his own son, Beacrox, had for thest tens of years. In fact, Cale might be the person who knows the current Ron the best. ¡®I am very old now too.¡¯ The old man epted that he was getting older. Just like how tree rings don¡¯t grow all at once, the effects of time did not avoid him as well. He then started to speak. ¡°I will be back to serve you when you head to the royal pce.¡± ¡°If you really want to.¡± Ron looked toward the uninterested Cale and put the money pouch away. He couldn¡¯t allow Cale to go into the pce looking worse than the royal family or the other nobles. Ron did not want to see the puppy young master that he raised being looked down upon by others. That would be hisst duty before he left. ¡°Then I will head out now.¡± ¡°Sure, sure.¡± Cale waved Ron out while sitting on his bed and had a wonderful night of sleep for the first time in a long time. By the time Cale woke up around lunch time the next day, Ron had already left early in the morning on his break. Thanks to that, deputy butler Hans became responsible for serving Cale. ¡°Mr. Ron said he wasn¡¯tfortable unless it was me. Haha, I guess I am kind of amazing?¡± ¡°Can you just be quiet?¡± Cale ignored Hans and looked outside the open chamber door. Choi Han had been standing outside the door since early this morning. Cale was staring at Choi Han while wondering what was going on, and Choi Han answered without even needing to be asked. ¡°Mr. Ron asked me to protect you.¡± ¡®What was Ron thinking?¡¯ Cale had a serious expression on his face as he received a cup from Hans. He then started to frown. ¡°Hans. Why did you bring me lemonade?¡± ¡°Excuse me? Young master, don¡¯t you like lemonade?¡± Sigh. Cale let out a deep sigh and drank the lemonade. It was better than cold water to wake him up and settle his stomach. Choi Han watched Hans and Cale from outside the chamber door as he recalled his conversation with Ron the night before. ¡®You¡¯re going somewhere?¡¯ ¡®Yes.¡¯ ¡®Where?¡¯ ¡®Nothing a kid like you needs to know about.¡¯ ¡®Did youe to talk to me for Cale-nim?¡¯ ¡®You figure it out.¡¯ That was what Ron said before leaving early this morning. Choi Han saw the assassin Ron instead of the servant Ron when Ron walked out of the residence. ¡°Choi Han.¡± Choi Han snapped out of it as Cale called out to him. Cale had gotten up from the bed and was heading to the bathroom. Cale asked Choi Han, who was looking at him. ¡°Is Lock awake?¡¯ ¡°Yes sir.¡± The Wolf Tribe really did have fast regenerative abilities. Cale looked at the time. The piggy bank Billos, the bastard son of the Flynn Merchant Guild¡¯s leader, would soon arrive at the capital. Cale had promised to drink with him, and had already decided where they would meet. It was the same inn he had told Choi Han to stay in once he got to the capital. That inn also had a bar, which was famous for its alcohol. ¡®And something that will connect Choi Han and Billos is there.¡¯ Cale thought about the merchant who would be with the 10 wolf children right now and asked. ¡°What about the children and the merchant at the inn?¡± ¡°I was thinking you could stop by on your way back from the meeting.¡± ¡°...Meeting?¡± Hans approached the confused Cale and started to speak. ¡°Young master, the invitation from the Northeastern nobles.¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Cale had forgotten about that because he did not consider those nobles to be very important. He started to frown a bit as he debated what to do. What kind of trash actions would he need to do at the meeting? Cale, Kim Rok Soo, had never met these people before, but it didn¡¯t matter. He was known as trash for a reason. ¡°And the guest wishes to speak with you as well.¡± ¡°Are You talking about Miss Rosalyn?¡± ¡°Yes. She said any time will work based on your schedule.¡± Rosalyn was a smart girl. She probably already suspects that the feeling of mana from yesterday is from a dragon. She has probably never seen a dragon before, but such powerful mana could note from anything other than a dragon. Cale opened the door to the bathroom and gave an order to Hans as he went in. ¡°I will eat breakfast in my room, so get it ready. After that, ask Miss Rosalyn if she would like to have breakfast together.¡± ¡°Yes, young master. I understand. However, it is the middle of the day, so it would be lunch.¡± ¡°...Hans.¡± ¡°I will get it ready right away!¡± Cale red at Hans, who vigorously answered, and gave onestmand before closing the bathroom door. ¡°Ah, and leave the terrace door open.¡± ¡®The ck Dragon needs to be able toe in.¡¯ It was very odd that it could only sleep well if it slept outside on a tree by the window. * * * ¡°Then I will go bring Rosalyn-nim over now.¡± ¡°Okay.¡± Cale sat on a chair by the food, that was breakfast for some and lunch for others and sent Hans out. Beacrox seemed to have put in quite the effort, as the food on the table looked fabulous. The table was full of food, probably because he asked for it all at once instead of in courses. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± Choi Han approached him. ¡°I will go stay with Lock while you are eating.¡± ¡°I guess the two of you are taking turns nursing him.¡± Choi Han started to smile in embarrassment at Cale¡¯s promation. Although Lock was quickly recovering, he was stillying on the bed with Rosalyn and Choi Han taking turns nursing him. Of course, Rosalyn was doing the majority of the nursing. ¡°On and Hong are helping to take care of him as well.¡± ¡°Like hell they are.¡± Choi Han could only remain silent at Cale¡¯s words. On and Hong were staying in Lock¡¯s room. But this was what the two kittens told Cale in secret before heading over. ¡®I think we are too weak to kill a Wolf Tribe. We will probably lose, even if we enter berserk mode. We need to figure out a way to squash people like him.¡¯ ¡®Right, we need to figure out a way. That is why we will go study a bit.¡¯ On and Hong were not there to nurse Lock but to determine how to kill such enemies in the future. ¡°But Lock still seems rxed having two cute kittens with him.¡± ¡°...I guess that¡¯s great.¡± Cale had no desire to tell Choi Han and Lock the truth. Choi Han inspected the area to verify that the ck Dragon was not in the room before quietly speaking. ¡°I did not tell Lock or Rosalyn that I brought them with me because you told me to do so.¡± ¡°Good job.¡± ¡°I told you I would keep it a secret.¡± Choi Han was showing a reliable side to Cale. Maybe it was because of yesterday¡¯s vow, but Choi Han did not know how devious words could be. He didn¡¯t know how words could be used to favor one party more than the other. The God of Death would only follow Cale¡¯s words and his interpretation of it because he was the one to put his life on the line. ¡®That is why nobles spent at least a week preparing what to say when they are going to make a Vow of Death. They usually average at least ten pages of texts to say.¡¯ Cale thought about how he would use Choi Han in the future before starting to speak to Choi Han, who seemed to really trust him. ¡°Choi Han, did you say you were going to kill that blood drinking mage if you saw them again?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Cale nodded his head at the answer that came without any hesitation and continued to speak. ¡°I will tell you how to find that person.¡± Choi Han¡¯s gaze started to change. But Cale was not done just yet. ¡°Of course, we have to prevent the terror incident first.¡± Choi Han¡¯s expression seemed to be asking Cale to tell him right away, but the moment he opened his mouth, there was a knock on the door followed by Hans¡¯s voice. "Young master, I have brought Rosalyn-nim.¡± Cale nodded at Choi Han and got up from the chair. Choi Han silently got up as well and opened the door. Hans and Rosalyn entered through the open door. Hans did not enter any farther than the door frame and calmly added on to what he stated previously. ¡°Young master, Rosalyn-nim, please let me know if you need anything.¡± Hans then bowed and stepped out of the room. Choi Han followed behind him. ¡°Rosalyn, I will be with Lock.¡± ¡°Okay.¡±¡¯ Once the two of them left, only Rosalyn and Cale were left in the room. Rosalyn looked to be calm, yet cold. ¡°Thank you for the invitation, young master Cale.¡± ¡°It was nothing, Miss Rosalyn.¡± Cale pointed to the chair across from him and started to speak. ¡°There are a lot of things we need to discuss.¡± ¡°Young master, I guess you don¡¯t like to beat around the bush?¡± Rosalyn started to smile as she asked, and Cale looked toward the open terrace window and started to speak. ¡°Come on in.¡± In that instant, Rosalyn quickly turned around. She could see some leaves floating into the room. She could not help but tremble. However, she was able to logically think things throughst night. She had thought about it all night while nursing Lock. Threeyered magic and the ability to do such a thing. There was really just one answer. She moved her gaze from the leaves floating their way and looked toward Cale and asked. ¡°Dragon. Is it a dragon-nim?¡± Mages really did respect dragons. Her demeanor clearly showed that was the case. Cale started to smirk, as he started to speak toward the floating leaves. ¡°You introduce yourself.¡± In that instant, the leaves that were floating on top of the table, or over the steaks if you want to be really specific, turned into a ck Dragon. It had removed its invisibility magic. ¡°Mm.¡± Rosalyn could not even gasp, as she waspletely shocked. Even though she knew it was going to be a dragon, it still was shocking. There were less than 20 dragons in existence in both the Western and Eastern continentsbined, but such an existence was in front of her right now. They were known for never leaving their territory andir, and enjoying life as the most amazing existence in the world. Furthermore, dragons were the king of both mana and nature. They were also an existence that preferred solitude. Although it was confirmed that there were 20 dragons in the world, they were all different colors and varied drastically in personality, habits, and traits. The Magic Tower found this to be quite interesting. Why were they different in color and personality, even after growing up under their parents? There was only one exnation they could fathom. ¡®Dragons are prideful creatures that want to be different from any other.¡¯ They want to be unique while they are alive. That was the case, even amongst their own tribe of dragons. Such an existence was in front of Rosalyn¡¯s eyes right now. It was a young dragon, but the mana she could feel and the unique gaze of a dragon told her it really was just like any other dragon. The ck Dragon quietly observed Rosalyn for a bit before turning its head away. Rosalyn did not know what to say about the dragon¡¯s action. After doing that, the dragon moved in front of the steak and started to speak. ¡°I am hungry.¡± ¡°...Go ahead, you can eat it.¡± Cale shook his head as he answered, and also offered Rosalyn a seat. ¡°We should eat as well.¡± ¡°Ah ... yes.¡± Rosalyn had a nk expression on her face as she sat down. She could see the young ck Dragon eating the steak in front of her, while Cale, who was dressed fancier than usual because he needed to attend the Northeastern Nobles meeting, was elegantly eating a soup. Nobody at the Magic Tower would believe her if she told them about this. However, Rosalyn believed in what she was seeing in front of her eyes, as well as the rest of her five senses. Everything in nature could be felt by the five senses. ¡°...It is so amazing that a mage like myself can see such a sight. A dragon is with a human.¡± Rosalyn believed in the sight in front of her and revealed her honest observation. Cale did not care to respond, but the ck Dragon stopped eating the steak to look at Rosalyn. He then turned his head to look at Cale. It was the face of a reptile, but its expression was clearly visible. The ck Dragon started to frown while looking at Cale, who was still eating his soup, and started to speak. ¡°Very weak. He is no better than an ant. That is the reason.¡± ¡°Indeed.¡± Both Cale and the dragon agreed. Rosalyn watched this with curiosity, before eventually nodding her head. ¡°A meal with young master Cale and Dragon-nim. It is an honor.¡± Rosalyn was calm as she elegantly lifted up her fork. Cale observed her expression, as he continued to eat his soup. ¡®She really is a courageous person.¡¯ Any other mage would be shaking non-stop and praising the dragon right now. They would then ask the dragon to teach them even a little bit about mana or magic. A dragon¡¯s magic was something that would make any mage on the continent go crazy. Cale started to speak to Rosalyn, who was starting off with a sd. ¡°Please feel free to stay here as long as you like.¡± ¡°Young master Cale.¡± ¡°Yes?¡± ¡°I have three things I am curious about. But one of them has already been resolved, so I have two more. May I ask about them?¡± ¡°Please do.¡± The first was probably about the dragon. Cale had decided to reveal the dragon¡¯s existence to Rosalyn after contemting it for a long time. He felt like it would be more beneficial to him that way. He felt like he could anticipate the other two questions as well. ¡°Here is the second thing I am curious about.¡± Rosalyn asked her question calmly and sincerely. ¡°Is it okay to allow someone who was not invited to stay in your residence like this? Even if I am a mage, as a noble, you must be sensitive about associating with strangers.¡± Cale easily answered that question. ¡°It is fine because you are someone Choi Han brought.¡± Cale peeked at the ck Dragon, that was eating the steak, before looking back toward Rosalyn and continuing to speak. ¡°I also have this guy.¡± The ck Dragon did not respond to that statement. However, he flicked his wing once before stuffing his face into the steak te and starting to devour the steak even faster than before. Rosalyn watched the dragon for a long time before her red pupils moved back to Cale, who was eating a salmon steak. ¡°... I see. Then here is my third question.¡± Cale stopped eating the salmon steak and looked up at Rosalyn. Their eyes met, and Cale could see her red pupils. Originally, Rosalyn changed her pupils from red to ck with magic when they entered the capital. She did the same thing with her hair color. However, that was not the case right now. Rosalyn asked her question. ¡°Why do you speak so respectfully to me, despite your status as a noble?¡± Cale lifted up the wine ss next to the salmon steak and took a sip of the white wine. He then started to speak. ¡°Red hair, red pupils, and a mage. Then there is your self-revealed name of Rosalyn.¡± It was weird to pretend not to know when someone was being so clear about it. Cale started to smile as he asked. ¡°Princess-nim, aren¡¯t you the one who should stop speaking so respectfully to me?¡± 1. Korean folk tale 2. Another Korean folk tale If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 35: Being Still (2) Chapter 35: Being Still (2) 0Chapter 35: Being Still (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Rosalyn started to smile. ¡°I heard you were trash, but I guess that was a lie.¡± Rosalyn stopped with the respectful tone almost immediately, as Cale had expected. Although the majority of the people may not know what the princess of another kingdom may look like, it was different for nobles. Low-level nobles may have found it difficult to gather information, but at the Count level, like the Henituse family, having information about the neighboring kingdoms¡¯ nobles and royalty was basic knowledge. It was not just fun and games to be a noble. Cale responded to Rosalyn¡¯s statement. ¡°It is true that I am famous for being trash. However, a mage should make their judgments based on their five senses.¡± ¡°You are right, young master Cale. We only believe the things we experience ourselves.¡± Cale thought Rosalyn¡¯s way of speaking was quite odd. She was speaking informally to him as a princess, but when she was referring to herself as part of the society of mages by using the term, ¡®we,¡¯ she spoke formally. Her identity as a mage seemed to be very important to her. ¡°But princess-nim.¡± ¡°Rosalyn.¡± She really didn¡¯t seem to like being treated like a princess. ¡°Okay then. Miss Rosalyn, are you done with your questions?¡± ¡°Yes. I am finished.¡± She smiled as she answered. ¡°Young master Cale, it seems like you do not want to be involved with me?¡± Even though he knew she was a princess, he just told her to enjoy her stay and then leave. It wasn¡¯t that she found that to be disrespectful or anything. In fact, she preferred it that way. If she wanted special treatment, she would have revealed her full name and her identity immediately. She did not want to be treated that way however. In addition, she was thankful to Cale for telling them about Lock¡¯s condition. ¡°Really? I just acted that way since princess-nim seemed to prefer it this way.¡± ¡®Liar.¡¯ Rosalyn treated Cale¡¯s words as just a good excuse. A human who travels with a dragon. He was known to be trash by society, but was not actually like that in reality. He could have easily revealed her existence if he really wanted to do so. She thanked Cale, who was smiling as if he knew nothing. ¡°It seems like you have not informed the Roan royalty. Thank you very much.¡± ¡°No problem. Something like that should be based on the involved individual¡¯s own wishes.¡± Cale thought that the crown prince would barge into this residence if Cale had reported it to the pce. ¡°You are correct, young master Cale. I do not wish to reveal myself. If thisnds you into trouble in the future, please let them know that I asked you not to do so. I will send a messenger to back up your story.¡± ¡°Got it.¡± ¡°Thank you for letting me stay here. I will take care of my business and not cause you any trouble.¡± ¡®Not cause me any trouble.¡¯ Cale thanked Rosalyn, who was giving him the answer he wanted to hear the most. ¡°Thank you very much.¡± ¡°No worries, it is how it should be.¡± Rosalyn brushed Cale¡¯s thanks off before continuing to eat. Cale and Rosalyn, the two of them did not need to speak anymore. Rosalyn just peeked at the dragon every so often. She couldn¡¯t help it. As a mage, her gaze continued to head to the dragon. The dragon stopped eating the sausage that originally was for Cale before turning to look at Rosalyn. After ignoring Rosalyn¡¯s continued peeking for a while, he finally spoke up. ¡°Eat your own food. This is mine.¡± The ck Dragon pulled the te with the sausage closer to him. Cale was casually piling more food onto that te for the dragon. The ck Dragon was getting addicted to the taste of steak, which was different from eating raw meat, as well as the other types of various foods that were on the table. Rosalyn peeked toward Cale, and Cale stealthily put up four fingers without the dragon noticing. Four years old. Rosalyn smiled at the meaning of Cale¡¯s message, and responded to the dragon. ¡°Yes, dragon-nim. I would not dare eye your food.¡± The ck Dragon started to eat again and Rosalyn and Cale continued their meals as well. It was a rxing and peaceful meal. After it was over, Cale got on the carriage to go meet the Northeastern nobles. The Northeastern nobles consisted of just 10 noble families. There were more if you considered the barons and below, but the pir of the Northeast was based on these 10 families. Of those 10 families, the three people Cale was meeting today came from three families that had been friendly with the Henituse family for a long time. ¡°What a dilemma.¡± That was why Cale was worried. Choi Han, who had been following him as a guard, cautiously asked. ¡°What is? If I can do anything to help, please let me know.¡± ¡°Nothing. You don¡¯t need to know.¡± Cale just curtly answered before starting to think again. Choi Han observed Cale and started to worry as well. It was the first time Choi Han had seen Cale worrying like this. Cale did not know what to do. Just what kind of chaos would he need to cause to really look like trash? Cale hade to a realization after being stuck withrge baggage like Choi Han and the ck Dragon. He was having a dilemma about how to live a trash life. The Northeastern nobles would have seen Cale¡¯s trash behavior in the past. They would have also received news about all of Cale¡¯s trashy actions in the Henituse territory. That was why he had to be even more careful, no, he had to be even more chaotic. ¡°Hmm.¡± Cale looked down at his two hands. Act like a total bastard? That would be a way to seem like the trash of all trash. While Cale was thinking about what he could do to act terribly, the carriage stopped in front of a residence. Since the Northeastern nobles all had residences in the same area of the capital, it was not very far. ¡°Wee, young master Cale-nim.¡± Cale noticed the old butler greeting him at the gate, and looked to the building behind the butler. This was Count Wheelsman¡¯s residence. Count Wheelsman¡¯s territory was located in the beginning parts of the Northeast, and he was neither very strong nor very wealthy. That was why he was able to build a close rtionship with Count Henituse in the Northeast, where they did not have any dukes or marquis. Count Henituse liked this friendship because, for someone like him, whose territory was far in the corner of the Northeast, knowing someone who was the close to the capital was beneficial. Cale thought about Count Wheelsman¡¯s sessor. ¡®Eric Wheelsman.¡¯ Deputy butler Hans had cautiously advised Cale before he left for this meeting. ¡®Young master, it is great that you have a good rtionship with young master Eric, but I bring this up to you to ask whether you think it would be smarter to not act so close to each other in front of the other nobles in the meeting.¡¯ That let Cale know that Eric and the original owner of this body were very close. However, the information about Eric in the nobles information report described Eric as a good person who was a bit uptight. ¡°Young master Cale, may I escort you inside?¡± ¡°Sure.¡± Cale followed the old butler into the Wheelsman residence. Eric Wheelsman, Gilbert Chetter, and Amiru Ubarr. The three of them were inside the residence. Cale was still thinking about how he should act in front of them as he entered inside. In the end, he didn¡¯t need to worry about such a thing. ¡°Cale. You at least still listened to this hyung. Right?¡± Cale had a confused look on his face. Eric Wheelsman pushed up his sses after seeing Cale¡¯s expression. Right now, Cale was seated at the table with the three nobles surrounding him like he was in an interview. ¡®This is odd.¡¯ But the atmosphere was more of them consoling him rather than interviewing him. Eric Wheelsman started to speak. ¡°Won¡¯t it be annoying for you as well?¡± Viscount Ubarr¡¯s daughter Amiru and Baron Chetter¡¯s son Gilbert chimed in. ¡°He¡¯s right. Young master Cale, I heard you don¡¯t like annoying formalities.¡± ¡°Young master Cale, it is not wrong to find something to be annoying.¡± It felt like they were trying to console a child. Cale first responded to their statements. ¡°Yes, it is annoying.¡± ¡°See! That is why!¡± Tap. Eric lightly tapped the table. It did not seem like it was because he was angry, but more like a subconscious movement. He looked toward Cale, who used to be a cute little kid until he grew up to be trash, and quietly continued. ¡°That is why you don¡¯t need to say anything or do anything. Just be still! Be still and we will take care of everything for you. You hate annoying things and formalities anyway.¡± Cale responded back with an intrigued expression. ¡°I am very good at staying still.¡± ¡°Huh? You are? Ah, yes. You are like that. You are very good at that.¡± Eric was known for being uptight, but he was also the type to worry about everything. But that was only because he liked to think about everything before they actually happened. He started to speak to Cale, who became the biggest concern of his since yesterday, when he found out that Cale really was the one toe to the capital. The other two looked toward Eric as if they were cheering him on. ¡°Some of the other Northeastern nobles may try to annoy you. The ones who aligned themselves with Marquis Stan or some other duke will definitely try. But all you have to do is be still and we will take care of everything for you. What do you think?¡± This was what Eric was most worried about. Of the 10 pir families, only these 4 families have not aligned themselves elsewhere. The other nobles who aligned with higher ranking nobles from outside the area would want to offer the entire Northeastern group of nobles to their upline. They needed to be cautious, cautious, and even more cautious. This group of four families had to be in the center. That was their way of being the strongest faction in the Northeast, and, in order to do that, the wealthy Henituse family could not cause an ident at the capital. Eric, as well as the other two, quietly waited for Cale¡¯s response. ¡°That would be great.¡± Cale had a gentle smile on his face to go with his response. Eric was thinking that Cale still looked like the good kid from the past, as long as he was not drinking, and started to speak. ¡°I n on showing our respect to the crown prince together as well. I¡¯m sure you find this to be annoying and want to get right to drinking, but that will be difficult. As long as you do that initial greeting, we will take care of EVERYTHING ELSE!¡± ¡®Oh?¡¯ Cale started to smirk. He found this atmosphere quite interesting. He picked up the winess in front of him. Cale could see Gilbert flinch as he did that. Cale thought this was odd as well. He may be a troublesome trash, but since they were on the same side, their only possible course of action was to protect him. He wet his mouth with the wine, before starting to speak. ¡°It¡¯s great.¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t it?¡± Eric had a bright smile on his face as his sses reflected the light from the chandelier. Cale decided to take the three nobles¡¯ offer of doing nothing and getting their protection. He liked this n very much. ¡°All you have to do is show up, sit there, and rx.¡± ¡°Great. It sounds perfect.¡± It was a very good offer, just the type Cale liked. He calmly ate the meal in front of him, as he started to think that it was a good idea toe here today. However, Eric, Gilbert, and Amiru did not let their guards down. Cale Henituse was someone who had even thrown a bottle at the Northeastern nobles meeting when everything seemed to be going great. They were especially cautious because they were here to convince the crown prince to invest in the Northeastern coastline, where Gilbert and Amiru¡¯s families were positioned. ¡°Wine from the Henituse territory really is great.¡± Of course, Cale knew about the two family¡¯s desire for the crown prince¡¯s investment from the information Hans had given to him. The four families shared information with each other without any secrets. However, Cale knew that the investment from the crown prince would not be possible. ¡®How would he be able to invest when a war will soon start from the south of the Western Continent? It might be different if it was a navy though.¡¯ The four nobles chatted every so often as they continued their meal. The three nobles rxed a bit after seeing Cale make it through the whole meal without causing an ident. They were all decently satisfied with this meeting. * * * Cale rested for a bit after returning to his residence, before hearing that Choi Han was back, causing Cale to call him to his room. ¡°Cale-nim, you called for me?¡± ¡°The inn?¡± ¡°Fine. Thankfully, the children are energetic.¡± Cale turned pale after thinking about 10 energetic Wolf Tribe children. On the other hand, Choi Han seemed to be more rxed and happier. ¡°Then there is nothing else to do?¡± ¡°Yes?¡± Cale nodded his head before standing up. It was only then that Choi Han realized that Cale was not wearing his pajamas nor his usual outfit. He was wearing very casual clothes. Cale walked over to his bed as he started to speak. ¡°I will beying in bed, so go tell Hans he can stop standing outside the door and can go sleep. He will go without even looking back.¡± Choi Han looked out the open terrace window. It was a bright night. He then asked Cale. ¡°Will you be heading out?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Cale smiled as he answered. ¡°I left the terrace open like before, soe to my room.¡± ¡°I understand.¡± Choi Han¡¯s gaze changed. He remembered what Cale had told him the other day. Cale mentioned that he would tell Choi Han how to find that blood drinking mage. ¡°Will it just be the two of us, without either On or Hong?¡± Choi Han asked with a serious expression, but an answer came from somewhere else. ¡°I will be going as well.¡± The ck Dragon removed its invisibility magic and entered through the terrace window. Choi Han looked toward the ck Dragon before turning back to look at Cale. Cale answered even more rxed than ever before. ¡°The three of us will go.¡± If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 36: Being Still (3) Chapter 36: Being Still (3) 0Chapter 36: Being Still (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Choi Han looked at the ck Dragon before looking back toward Cale and asking. ¡°Are we going to destroy everything?¡± ¡°No. Absolutely not.¡± ¡®Why are his thoughts always so extreme?¡¯ Caleid down on the bed and waved Choi Han away. ¡°Hurry up ande back soon. Oh, and wear a hat.¡± ¡°I understand.¡± Choi Han left only the night stand¡¯s light on and turned the rest of the lights off before heading out of the room and saying something to Hans. Cale kept his eyes closed and pretended to be asleep. The door soon closed and Hans did not enter. The ck Dragon, who had been invisible while the door was open, removed its invisibility andnded on the bed. One side of the bed started to sink while the dragon started to speak in a worried voice. ¡°You cannot really fall asleep.¡± Cale started to think after hearing the dragon¡¯s words. ¡®Do I look like a four-year-old to this dragon?¡¯ Cale let out a sigh and got up from the bed. A few momentster, Choi Han reentered the room through the window while wearing a robe. ¡°You¡¯re here. I guess a robe is definitely better than a hat.¡± Choi Han nodded and started to speak toward the dragon as Cale packed a hat. ¡°Will you be following us like that?¡± ¡°I will be invisible.¡± ¡°... I heard that dragons could polymorph. Can¡¯t you turn into a human? I think that would be easier.¡± A dragon¡¯s magic was an expression of their will. That was why Choi Han thought that the dragon could easily polymorph if it had the will to do so. The ck Dragon snorted at Choi Han¡¯s words. ¡°I hate humans. I do not want to be like the humans. He said that dragons were cool and awesome.¡± ¡°Who said that?¡± The ck Dragon peeked toward Cale at Choi Han¡¯s question, before quickly looking away. It then turned invisible and flew up into the sky. The sunken part of the bed returned back to normal. Cale leisurely started to speak to Choi Han, who was looking at him with an odd expression. ¡°Dragons indeed are cool.¡± ¡°They really are.¡± Choi Han nodded his head and followed behind Cale, who was heading toward the terrace. He then looked out the third-floor terrace window and stopped suddenly. ¡°Um, Cale-nim.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°...Do I have to carry you again?¡± Cale snorted at Choi Han¡¯s hesitant question, and pointed to the ceiling with his index finger. At that moment, Cale¡¯s body slowly lifted off the floor and started to turn invisible. Cale watched his entire body turn invisible before looking up to the ceiling and starting to speak. ¡°Dragons are great and mighty.¡± ¡°You are right. I am great and mighty.¡± The invisible ck Dragon responded to Cale. Choi Han could see Cale¡¯s evil smirk quickly appear before disappearing. Choi Han realized how Cale was controlling the dragon and he started to speak as well. ¡°Wow, dragons are great and mighty.¡± Once Choi Han said that, he turned invisible as well, and they could leave the residence without any worries. Of course, there were magic detection tools around the residence fence, but they were for preventing intruders. They did not have any reaction to people leaving from the residence. Choi Han stood at a small alley a bit away from the residence, and started to speak. ¡°It is fine from here.¡± As soon as he said that, the invisibility magic on Cale and Choi Han was removed. Cale, whose levitation magic was removed as well,nded gently from the 10 centimeters he was floating in the air. Cale was shocked at this chain of events. ¡®The ck Dragon¡¯s magic skills are much stronger than I thought. I wonder if it is rted to its special characteristics.¡¯ This level of magic was already a bit higher than the level of the highest tier mages. It was no wonder that they said that an adult dragon could easily destroy an entire kingdom if it was willing to do so. ¡®But I won¡¯t need his help like this once I get the Sound of the Wind. I can then move around without the ck Dragon or Choi Haning with me.¡¯ The Sound of the Wind was the third ancient power Cale was nning on taking. However, he needed to head to the Roan Kingdom¡¯s Northeastern shores to find that power. ¡®I¡¯ll need to go to youngdy Amiru¡¯s territory.¡¯ Cale was nning on heading there to get the Sound of the Wind on his way back from the capital. His excuse to others would be that he wanted to go sightseeing, since he was already out. The fact that it was an ancient power by the sea made him a bit concerned, but Cale decided to not think much about it because it was a power that he could quietly take. ¡®By then, Choi Han¡¯s crew won¡¯t be with me anyways.¡¯ Cale was certain that the Whale Tribe and the mermaids appeared at the Northeastern shores around the end of volume 4. The war in the ocean between the Eastern and Western continents. All he had to do was avoid the shores at that time. More than the whales, he needed to avoid those crazy mermaids. Cale covered his red hair with his hat, before taking a map out of his pocket. He then took the lead. ¡°Follow me.¡± The still invisible ck Dragon and Choi Han walked on either side of Cale, following Cale out of the southern district of the nobles and into the center of Huiss. The night became as bright as the day as they got closer to the center of Huiss. There were many bright lights on the streets with shops selling stuff, and bars were the most lively at this time. ¡°The nightlife at the capital is really different from other ces.¡± ¡°It sure is.¡± Cale nodded his head at Choi Han¡¯s words before heading toward the za of Glory at the center of Huiss. They could see a round za in front of them with fountains in all four directions. Each fountain had groups of citizens gathered around it. The three of them could see the citizens rxing with their families or friends after a long day of work. Since it was 9 pm right now, they would continue to enjoy themselves at the za until the guards came to patrol at 11 pm. Cale looked to the left. Choi Han was nkly watching some familiesughing together at the fountain to the east. Cale, who had been leisurely watching Choi Han and the scene in front of them, started to speak. ¡°Make it so nobody can hear us.¡± Once he said that, an invisible dome appeared around them. It was something that only Cale, Choi Han, and the ck Dragon, who were inside the dome, could see. Choi Han finally turned to look at Cale. ¡°There is this thing called a magic bomb.¡± ¡°A bomb?¡± ¡°Yes. A bomb. Magic bombs cane in many shapes and sizes. With this Western continent having a long history of war that was led by magic, it has developed quite a bit.¡± Choi Han quietly listened to Cale¡¯s story. ¡°However, there are a lot of restrictions. The location of the magic bomb, controlling the mana flowing through it, and many other factors cause these bombs to be reallyplicated to use.¡± That was why they preferred to have a mage use their magic during war rather than using magic bombs. But the magic bombs this time are different from those used previously.¡± ¡°Of those bombs, newly developed magic bombs will go off here, as well as multiple ces around here, in six days.¡± Cale did not think that the five bombs Choi Han and Rosalyn had found in the novel would still be the same. The story had already changed. That meant that this situation could easily change as well. That was why Cale came up with a new n. However, he was still certain that the magic bomb terror incident would still proceed as described. ¡®Since I was able to confirm that the crazy mage was in this kingdom.¡¯ The crazy mage was the one who created this new magic bomb. The secret organization would eventually distribute this bomb to different territories in the Roan Kingdom after the incident at the capital. Of course, they will be hiding their identity as the secret organization. ¡°Are you saying a bomb will go off here?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Choi Han looked around at the fountains and the people in the za. A cold voice filled his ear at that time. ¡°It could be buried somewhere or even installed on a person. Of course, that person will not know it is a bomb and think it is something else, like a bracelet or a purse and have it on them.¡± On a person. That phrase made Choi Han turn his head to look at Cale. Cale responded coldly to Choi Han. ¡°That is why we need to prevent it.¡± Of course, Cale would not do it. Choi Han, Rosalyn, and the ck Dragon will be the ones to take care of it. Cale nned to be still. Cale nned to be very still at the capital. ¡°How can we prevent it?¡± ¡°Simple.¡± Cale crossed his arms as he leaned on a tree in the za and continued to speak. ¡°Magic bombs, are in essence, chunks of mana. That is why all you need to do is have someone with high mana sensitivity inspect the area and search any locations that seem to have an abundance of mana.¡± Choi Han flinched at Cale¡¯s calm demeanor before cautiously asking. ¡°Is it so much higher that it will be that easily detected?¡± ¡°No. It is just slightly higher, making it difficult for any average mage to notice it. But that small chunk of mana can instantly pull in the mana in the surrounding area to create arge explosion.¡± Choi Han looked concerned. As a sword user and an aura user, he was slightly sensitive to mana as well. However, he was not as sensitive to it as mages, and could not be of help. ¡°Cale-nim, I do not think it will be easy.¡± ¡°It is very easy.¡± Cale answered that way as he asked. ¡°Right?¡± At that moment, an answer came from above. ¡°It is doable. Just annoying.¡± Next to Cale was the ck Dragon, an existence that was said to be the most sensitive to mana. Choi Han quickly understood and nodded his head. He had forgotten that this dragon was a great and mighty existence. Cale handed the map in his hand to Choi Han. ¡°I don¡¯t know about the people, but the bombs installed in locations will be installed at least two days before the incident.¡± The day of the incident would be when the king arrives. That meant that the security would be multiple times the normal level starting from the day before. That''s why they needed to install the bombs at least two days before. ¡°I don¡¯t know about the other locations, but I am certain that at least one bomb will be near this za. This is the ce with the most people.¡± ¡°Right. I agree.¡± ¡°That is why, with this za as the center point.¡± Cale pointed toward Choi Han and then up to the sky. ¡°Choi Han, you and the dragon will roam around the capital every night to look for the magic bombs.¡± ¡°The two of us?¡± Cale patted Choi Han¡¯s shoulder and answered as Choi Han asked. The way to handle the ck Dragon and Choi Han was pretty simr. ¡°Yes. Choi Han, if it is you, I know that you can stealthily move around without being noticed. You are very talented.¡± Choi Han quietly nodded his head with a serious expression. He then asked. ¡°What should we do once we find it?¡± ¡°Leave it there for now.¡± ¡°...Not get rid of it?¡± ¡°We will get rid of it on the day of the incident.¡± ¡°May I ask why?¡± Cale started to smirk. ¡°Don¡¯t you want to find that mage?¡± It was not the answer to Choi Han¡¯s question, but Choi Han first nodded his head. Cale looked around the za. Everybody looked happy, but members of the secret organization may be mixed in with them. Cale did not know where that blood-drinking mage was located. The mage may be hiding somewhere or roaming around under a disguise. ¡°A mage needs to be present in order to make a magic bomb go off. The mage who made the bomb needs to remove the restriction to set it off.¡± ¡°...Then-¡± Choi Han started to speak as a thought came to him before stopping himself and looking back toward Cale. Cale continued on in an uninterested voice. ¡°First, find the bombs. If you happen to get lucky and find the people installing the bombs, follow them without getting noticed.¡± Since the ck Dragon will be with him, Choi Han would stop right before he would be detected by magic. But Cale thought it would be difficult for them to find those people in the process. It will take a lot of work to look for the locations with a slightly elevated mana fluctuation to find the bombs. It will be very difficult and tiring. That was why Cale left this task to the two of them. He would not be able to help, but, more importantly, he didn¡¯t want to do it. ¡°Then do we just have to roam around until two days before the event?¡± ¡°No. The two of you will need toe the day before as well.¡± ¡°The day before?¡± ¡®Wouldn¡¯t it be difficult because there will be a lot more guards?¡¯ Choi Han did not ask his question. It would be difficult, but still manageable for him. He would just need to spend a little more effort and be a little more cautious. At that moment, Choi Han could see Cale with his viinous smirk once again. Cale took a ck orb out of his pocket and showed it to Choi Han. ¡°Ah.¡± Choi Han let out a gasp. He was familiar with this ck orb. It was the Mana Disturbance Tool. It had been used by Cale once before. It was strong enough to have a range of an entire mountain. Cale leisurely smiled as he started to speak. He knew when the bomb would go off. ¡°A lot of mages will be there that day, so it probably won¡¯t evenst 10 minutes, but it will help. It will make everything rted to magic not work for that duration.¡± 10 minutes was enough. They just needed to save the people with bombs on them in those 10 minutes. They will be very visible. And, by that point, there will be a lot of humans and beast people to put to work, in addition to Choi Han and the dragon as well. Choi Han looked back and forth between the ck orb and Cale, before taking a gulp and starting to speak. ¡°...Cale-nim, you were nning to do all of this on your own-¡± ¡°That is why.¡± Cale knew what Choi Han was going to say. That was why he cut him off and started to speak to Choi Han and the dragon. ¡°Go and work.¡± Choi Han nkly stared at Cale. Cale pointed to the beer bar that was famous for its beer and continued on. ¡°I will be waiting for you here. Just look around until about 11 beforeing back for today.¡± Choi Han thought for a moment, before letting out a sigh-likeughter and nodding his head. ¡°Got it. Today, the dragon and I will just look around the interior of the za before returning.¡± Choi Han had originally thought about asking why Cale was not going with them. However, he quickly realized it. Cale would only be baggage to Choi Han and the ck Dragon as they worked. Cale was weak. There was not even a trace of manaing from Cale¡¯s body, nor did he look like he practiced any type of martial arts. He was in, yet not in at the same time. ¡°I will work hard, so please buy me a beer when Ie back.¡± ¡°Sure. Dragon, thanks for your help too.¡± The ck Dragon got rid of the soundproof dome, as if to respond to Cale¡¯s words. Choi Han just slightly bowed his head before moving away from Cale. Two hourster, Cale returned to the residence with Choi Han and the ck Dragon, who did not manage to find anything. They did not manage to find anything the next night either. Cale, who could not sleep at night, finally woke up in the middle of the day. He was not tired though, because the Vitality of the Heart made it difficult for Cale to feel tired. ¡°Young master, are you up?¡± ¡°... Ron.¡± Cale¡¯s honey-like slumber disappeared like a dream, as he came back to reality. ¡°I have returned.¡± Ron was back. He then handed a letter to Cale. Cale gave an order to Ron for the first time in a while after seeing the letter. ¡°Ron, go wrap up a bottle of the best wine.¡± It was a letter with the crest of the Flynn Merchant Guild. Cale opened the letter to find a single sentence. [Young master Cale, will you be treating me to alcohol soon?] The bastard son of the Flynn Merchant Guild¡¯s leader, Billos, would soon arrive at the capital. The letter helped Cale realize that it would not be long before he met the crown prince inside the pce. Since there were a lot of viins in there, it was time for him to be very, very still. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 37: Being Still (4) Chapter 37: Being Still (4) 2Chapter 37: Being Still (4) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Ron nodded his head at Cale¡¯s words, but added one more thing before he left. ¡°I understand. By the way, young master, you do remember that you have to visit the pce the day after tomorrow, right?¡± Before the king announces the start of the festival in the za, the nobles were scheduled to meet with the crown prince. It was neither a serious meeting nor a feast, but something in between. It was set to take ce in a wing of the pce where important meetings usually took ce. Cale thought about the crown prince and the pce before his mind drifted elsewhere. ¡®I wonder if Taylor and Cage are well.¡¯ The fallen eldest son and the crazy priestess. Cale thought that the two of them were probably doing very well. ¡°Mm.¡± But suddenly, his back felt chilly and he caressed the back of his head. That coldness made Cale make up his mind. ¡®Let¡¯s not think about the two of them.¡¯ Cale will be very still at the pce. Even if someone curses him from the side, he will just sit there silently before returning here. Cale peeked at the table in front of them. There was a letter from Eric sitting there. [Cale. You don¡¯t have to do anything, anything at all. This hyung-nim will take care of it all for you. Got it? ...] Eric Wheelsman, one of the Northeastern nobles, sent him a letter a day. It was very clear that Eric was worried about what might happen. Cale grabbed the letter on the table and chucked it to a corner. ¡°Then I will make sure to have them wrap up a bottle of our best alcohol.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Cale was watching Ron leave, when he saw some faces he had not seen for a while enter through the open door. Ron peeked at the two of them before closing the door. The two that entered approached Cale and started to speak. ¡°I think I can kill them if they let their guard down!¡± ¡°I see a way we can kill them!¡± It was the kittens On and Hong. These two kittens, who Cale had not seen for a while, were excited, as they seemed to have found a way to kill the Beast people who were as strong as the Wolf Tribe. ¡°Good job.¡± The two kittens came and rubbed their faces on Cale¡¯s leg after hearing hispliment toward them. Cale pushed the two of them away because he found it annoying. Ron soon entered the room once again. ¡°Young master.¡± ¡°What?¡± Ron looked at Cale, who answered like he didn¡¯t care, before asking his question. ¡°May I go as your personal servant to the pce?¡± ¡°Why are you asking such an obvious question? Who would go if it wasn¡¯t you?¡± That answer made Ron make up his mind to leave. The people who called themselves, ¡®Arm,¡¯ and ruled the Eastern continent¡¯s underworld had started to expand their reach to the Western continent. ¡®Arm,¡¯ was just one limb of the organization, and nobody knew their true identity. The Mn family was a fifth generation assassin household that sought to rule the night in the Eastern Continent, and Ron Mn, the sessor to the Mn family, hated and feared this, ¡®Arm.¡¯ ¡°Young master.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°You will be very cool in the pce.¡± ¡°Ron.¡± Cale looked toward Ron, who, after returning from his time off, was ttering him unlike his usual self, and casually asked. ¡°I do have a handsome face and figure don¡¯t I?¡± Meeeeeow. The kittens snorted at Cale, but they couldn¡¯t disagree. Cale was a handsome man with a slick figure. Kim Rok Soo¡¯s favorite thing about Cale was his money, but right after that was Cale¡¯s body and face. Cale¡¯s lips looked like they wanted to form a smile. ¡°Of course. Our young master is the full package.¡± But that smile quickly disappeared. ¡®What did I just hear right now?¡¯ It was a very gentle, warm, and caring voice. It even sounded like Ron was ying along with him. Cale felt chills all over his body, and turned his head around to see Ron standing there with a satisfied smile on his face. It looked different from when he was pretending to be satisfied. Cale really felt chills all over his body now. But Ron did not care and continued to go on with his duties. ¡°Then I will head out for now. I need to go report to deputy butler Hans.¡± ¡°Oh? Oh. Go ahead, quickly.¡± Ron soon left, and Cale started to ponder while looking at the closed door. ¡®Why is he acting like this?¡¯ But Cale did not want to find out the reason. What good woulde from being interested in Ron¡¯s life? Cale stared at that closed door for a long time, before a confused expression filled his face. Knock knock knock. Someone was knocking on the door. The red kitten Hong started to speak. ¡°Smells like a wolf.¡± Cale looked toward the door and started to speak. ¡°Come in.¡± The door clicked and slowly started to open. Cale could see the wolf boy, Lock, awkwardly standing there. Lock hesitated for a bit, before starting to speak. ¡°Hello, I, I came to thank you. I didn¡¯t know when would be a good time to stop by, so, if it is okay with you, may Ie in for a bit?¡± ¡°Come in.¡± Cale didn¡¯t want to hear this awkward voice any longer, so he waved Lock inside. Lock carefully closed the door with a nervous expression, and approached Cale. Cale pointed to the couch across from him. ¡°Take a seat.¡± ¡°Thank you.¡± Lock sat down on the couch and peeked at Cale. Unlike his earlier words that made Lock think of his uncle, this person, named Cale Henituse, had an aura about him that made it difficult to approach him. Rather than it being difficult because he was strong like his uncle, it just felt like it would be difficult to talk to Cale. ¡°Say what is on your mind.¡± ¡°You see.¡± Lock seemed to be thinking about what to say, before jumping up from the seat and bowing toward Cale. ¡°Thank you very much!¡± Lock seemed very naive, scared, and, in some aspects, stupid. He definitely fit the profile described in the novel. ¡®His personality changed in the novel after going berserk for the first time, but it looks like it is still the same now.¡¯ Cale responded to Lock¡¯s thank you. ¡°Sure. It is definitely something to be thankful for.¡± ¡°Excuse me? Ah, yes.¡± Lock had an odd expression on his face as he sat back down. Cale watched Lock sit and started to speak. ¡°No need to thank me anymore, you can go.¡± ¡°Ah, well, actually.¡± Lock could not stand back up, and just moved his lips without saying anything. He had heard stories from Rosalyn, the two Cat tribe kittens, Choi Han, and even Hans, which made him think things through over and over. He was still not done thinking things through. Cale just quietly watched Lock. It was because he knew how Lock would act that he was trying to quickly kick Lock out of here. ¡°Well, young master, you see.¡± Lock didn¡¯t know how to start. He continued to peek at Cale every so often while staring at his feet. Lock lightly bit down on his lips a couple of times. He didn¡¯t like this personality of his very much. At that moment, Lock heard a cold voice. ¡°Spit it out.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Lock lifted his head up to see Cale. This was the first time Lock made eye contact with Cale sinceing into the room. Cale kept eye contact with Lock, as he continued to speak. ¡°Good. When you are talking to someone, you should make eye contact like this.¡± He continued on. ¡°Spit out everything you want to say.¡± Cale looked at the clock before looking back at Lock, who was looking at him with a nk expression on his face. ¡°I will at least listen to what you have to say.¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Lock let out a gasp. He clenched his fidgeting hands and finally started to speak. ¡°I, I am the older brother.¡± His voice was weak. His body wasrge, but he was still a young boy. ¡°I need to take care of my younger siblings.¡± Lock knew that he was stillcking a lot to be called a member of the Wolf Tribe. However, he had 10 younger siblings that he needed to protect and care for right now. In addition. ¡°I was also a nephew and a younger brother.¡± The Blue Wolf Tribe loved and cherished the cowardly and stupid Lock. He could not forget about his family, friends, and neighbors who cared for him so much. ¡°That is why I need to get my revenge.¡± That was why he needed to pay them back for everything they took from him. Lock pressed down on his shaking hands and said whatever came to mind. Once he did that, he felt his head clearing up a bit. He then bowed his head and could see his feet and the carpet. He then heard a voice. ¡°Young wolf boy.¡± Lock lifted his head up. Cale Henituse. This owner of arge residence that Lock couldn¡¯t even dream of when he lived in his vige, was someone that Choi Han hyung had said was worth betting at least ? of his life on. Such a man was bluntly speaking to him. ¡°You are a wolf.¡± Lock started to recall many past memories. He could see his life in the Blue Wolf Tribe. ¡°Wolves protect their families and put them first, before even themselves. I consider them to be a tribe to be proud of.¡± Lock could see a smiling face in front of him. ¡°I have heard what you wanted to say.¡± At that moment, Lock could clearly see this man and everything in this room. On either side of Cale were the cute Cat Tribe kittens, and the sunlighting into the room made it seem very peaceful. Lock finally remembered the words that he needed to say, and the words he wanted to say. ¡°Thank you very much for your help. And...please help me.¡± The owner of this peaceful atmosphere started to speak. ¡°Once was enough for the thanks.¡± The reason Cale was thinking so much about how to act like a trash these days was because of Choi Han and the ck Dragon. The ck Dragon itself was a concern, while Choi Han was a concern because of the things he brought back with him. ¡°I do not wish to help you.¡± Cale did not want to help Lock. However, he knew the pain the 10 wolf children were feeling after losing their parents and their support. He had experienced it himself. Furthermore, he already had a foot inside this situation. He did not want to be responsible for everything. He nned to do just the bare minimum, so that he would break even. Cale continued to speak toward Lock, who was lowering his head after hearing Cale say that he did not want to help him ¡°However, I do have ns to make a deal with you.¡± ¡°... A deal?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Cale continued to speak. ¡°What do you need help with? And what can you do for me in return?¡± Cale had no desire to teach this wolf boy, who was not experienced with anything. That was for Choi Han or Rosalyn to deal with. Cale stood up, as he still had a couple things to take care of before heading to the pce, before speaking once more to the wolf boy. ¡°Come back when you have the answers.¡± Lock thought for a moment, before getting up from the seat and bowing his head. ¡°I understand. I wille back to see you when I have figured things out.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± Cale lightly patted Lock¡¯s head once. The gaze in Lock¡¯s eyes as he looked up was quite satisfactory. * * * Cale grabbed the crown prince¡¯s invitation and got off the carriage. The gathering was to start at 5 pm. Cale looked at the pce, that was iparable to both the Henituse estate and their residence in the capitalbined. The Pce of Joy. The name of the location of the gathering was called the Pce of Joy, and it was built by the king to share his joy of the birth of the crown prince. Of course, the king now favored the third prince. Cale was nning to meet up with Eric, Gilbert, and Amiru outside the pce and enter together. He looked toward the pce and started to think. ¡®Is this a cliche too?¡¯ It just so happened that someone else arrived at the pce right when Cale arrived. ¡°Wow, who is this? Isn¡¯t this our famous young master Cale?¡± ¡®Sigh.¡¯ Cale held back his sigh. He could feel the distaste from the person before him just from their tone. The person approaching him was Neo, the sessor to Viscount Tolz. ¡®Why do I have to run into one of Venion¡¯s minions now?¡¯ Neo Tolz was one of the stereotypical viins. He went around doing Venion¡¯s biddings. The vige that the ck Dragon was tortured in belonged to Viscount Tolz. And Viscount Tolz¡¯s people never liked the Henituse family. It was because, although they were separated only by a single mountain, the difference in wealth was drastic. However, in the past, they were once friendly with the Henituse family. That all changed once they went under Marquis Stan¡¯s faction 5 years ago. Of course, they wouldn¡¯t say it out loud, but they would stealthily try to take control of the Northeastern nobles meeting. Neo Tolz smiled brightly as he stood in front of Cale. ¡°You are alone?¡± They were still a bit away from the pce entrance, and the Vice Captain and Ron were speaking with the guard to get permission to enter. Cale, who brought only the minimal amount of people with him, looked down to Neo. Neo saw that Cale was alone, and thus pushed his subordinates back. ¡°I am going to chat with young master Cale for a bit. Go get permission for us to enter.¡± Neo sent his subordinates to the guard, and took one step closer to Cale. Once the two of them were standing very close, Neo started to speak. ¡°Young master Cale.¡± Neo had a warm and friendly smile on his face, as he spoke in a quiet voice that only Cale could hear. ¡°What is a terrible trash like you doinging to the pce?¡± ¡®Sigh, so childish. Is it like this because it is a world inside a book? Or is it because it is a fantasy world? Is it possible that punks like this exist in the real world too? They must exist since he¡¯s provoking me like this.¡¯ The son of a viscount dares to speak like this to the son of a count? Cale thought it was only happening because it was a novel, but actually dealing with this made Cale extremely frustrated. ¡®I¡¯m not even the MC. Can I not deal with cliches like this?¡¯ Cale wanted to just tell Ron to kill these stupid viins who didn¡¯t know their ce. Cale just continued to look down at Neo. Neo¡¯s expression brightened even more. To Neo, Cale was a trash who just looked fine on the outside. For someone like Neo, who had to suck up to Venion the entire time he was at the capital, Cale was a good prey to bother. ¡°What? Do you want to throw a bottle at me? Or do you want to hit me? Go ahead and try.¡± ¡®He¡¯s just provoking me. He¡¯s doing it on purpose. He can¡¯t take any magic items into the pce, so he won¡¯t be able to take a magic recording device inside. That is why he¡¯s trying to rile me up out here.¡¯ If Cale caused a ruckus here, it would be seen as a fight between a trash and a dignified noble. It would only be to Neo¡¯s advantage, that was why he was trying to provoke Cale to bring down the Henituse family name. Cale just sat there. He then heard a voice inside his head. It was the dragon speaking through magic. - What a bastard. It reminds me of that bastard Venion. ¡®He is Venion¡¯s minion.¡¯ Although Cale could not say that out loud, the dragon continued to speak in Cale¡¯s mind. - Should I kill him? ¡®I don¡¯t think there¡¯s a need to do that.¡¯ Cale shook his head to the dragon who was following him while remaining invisible. Seeing Cale shake his head made Neo provoke Cale once again, as it did not look like Cale was going to bite. At that moment, Cale¡¯s gaze turned to a new carriage that just arrived. Bang! The carriage door burst open as soon as the carriage stopped, and Eric Wheelsman got out of the carriage. Gilbert and Amiru were inside the carriage as well. Cale signaled Eric, who was rushing over with his eyes wide open, with his eyes while pointing to Neo with his index finger. ¡°Hyung-nim.¡± Cale¡¯s sincere voice that called out to him, as well as the cold gaze in Cale¡¯s eyes, told Eric everything he needed to know. ¡®Get rid of him.¡¯ The eyes of the calmly standing Cale were giving that message to Eric. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 38: Being Still (5) Chapter 38: Being Still (5) 0Chapter 38: Being Still (5) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist ¡°Ahem. Mm! Young master Neo, it has been a while.¡± Eric immediately moved in between Cale and Neo. Neo¡¯s eyes seemed to be defeated. He thought he had found a good prey, but it was now difficult to hunt this prey with Eric Wheelsman present. ¡°Yes, young master Eric. I hope you have been well.¡± Neo greeted Eric that way before also greeting youngdy Amiru and young master Gilbert. He then saw them all standing in front of Cale, and clicked his tongue. ¡®I guess they are protecting him. Even if he is trash, he is still on their side after all.¡¯ Neo decided not to do anything after seeing the three of them protecting Cale. Eric noticed Neo¡¯s intent, and slowly turned around to look at Cale. Neo¡¯s gaze turned to Cale as well. ¡°Mm.¡± Neo then subconsciously let out a groan. Cale was quietly looking down at Neo with his arms crossed. Cale¡¯s eyes were extremely scornful. He had not said anything to Neo since earlier on, but his gaze and his bodynguage said everything that needed to be said. ¡®ssless fool.¡¯ It made Neo think about the gaze Venion used to look at him. Even though Neo was angry when Venion looked at him with such a gaze, he consoled himself by saying it was the look of a higher ranking noble and let it go. Cale turned away after watching Neo¡¯s shaking pupils for a while, and looked behind him. He heard the ck Dragon¡¯s report in his ear. There was a reason he brought the ck Dragon with him today. - The voice recording magic is ready. Cale had asked the ck Dragon to record everything that happened today. Video recording required a lot of mana usage and was difficult to maintain for a long period of time, so Cale had to be satisfied with just voice recording. Cale was originally not going to do this because the pce would have a lot of mages who were sensitive to mana, but the ck Dragon assured him that it would be undetected as long as the range of the voice recording was small. Cale made up his mind to use this in the future to make Neo cry tears of blood, before heading toward the pce entrance. Cale was the type of person to always pay back his debts. Eric Wheelsman watched Cale walk away like a proud brother. He was thinking that the letters he sent every day must have worked. On the other hand, Gilbert and Amiru watched Cale with curious expressions. Cale Henituse, the man who used to only wear shy clothes, chose to wear a simple ck outfit without any essories. Even his red hair was clean and shining from the sun. They wondered if it was because Cale was not drunk. Each of Cale¡¯s steps looked rxed and calm. Amiru and Gilbert watched Cale turn around once he got to the pce entrance. Cale¡¯s gaze, that seemed to be beckoning them over, was the most curious thing for them. ¡°Young master Neo, I will see you inside. Youngdy Amiru and young master Gilbert, let us go.¡± Eric was watching Cale proudly, but Amiru and Gilbert had an even stranger sensation when the three of them stood in front of Cale. Cale looked at the two confused people, as well as the proud Eric, and started to speak. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± The three of them followed Cale into the pce. Gilbert and Amiru¡¯s odd sensation continued to grow the farther they followed Cale. Cale did not care however, and decided he would use these three people as much as he could today. ¡°Young master Cale-nim of Count Henituse¡¯s household is entering the hall!¡± Cale could hear the servant shout out Eric, Gilbert, and Amiru¡¯s names as well as he walked into the hall. ¡°Not bad.¡± He looked around therge hall before walking behind Eric. Youngdy Amiru peeked toward Cale, before walking next to him and starting to speak. ¡°Young master Cale. At the front of the banquet hall is the crown prince¡¯s seat, and the tables are split based by region. The reason for that-.¡± Amiru, who was about to exin the reason for why the tables are split based on region, looked at Cale¡¯s expression, before changing what she was going to say. ¡°I probably don¡¯t need to exin the reason, right?¡± ¡°Thank you very much, youngdy Amiru, but I know the reason.¡± Cale watched Amiru nod her head with a curious expression on her face, and then headed toward the tables to the Northeast section of the room. There were five tables inside the hall. Northeast, Northwest, Southwest, Southeast, and the center. They were all divided based on each of the noble factions. ¡®The crown prince is good at things like this.¡¯ He controlled things in the background to make the factionspete with each other while also forcing them toe together every so often. It was the crown prince¡¯s specialty. But the crown prince was very thorough about his own treatment as well. The crown prince¡¯s table was located to the front of all five of these tables, at a location that was about two steps higher than the rest. ¡®The second and third prince¡¯s seats are one step lower than his.¡¯ One step lower than the crown prince¡¯s table was the table for the second and third princes. Even if this event was being hosted by the crown prince, it would be weird for the second and third princes to not attend a gathering of nobles. Since the crown prince was the one to host it, he made sure to show a gap between their status. ¡®He really pays attention to these tiny, useless details.¡¯ The crown prince, actually, all of the people in those positions of power, were really not Cale¡¯s type of people. ¡°Our table is closest to the entrance, as expected.¡± Cale did not respond to Eric¡¯s bitter voice. The Pce of Joy had opened the eastern entrance as the designated entrance, and the Northeastern region nobles¡¯ table was the closest to the door. Although the Northeastern region had a voice, they did not have a household that was strong enough to have a loud voice. Cale raised his hand to pat Eric¡¯s shoulder. ¡°It¡¯s great that our seat is close to the door. In addition, it is great that we don¡¯t have anyone we have to lower our head to at our seat.¡± Other regions had strong people in charge, like Marquis Stan, whom the rest had to be respectful to and subservient. The other three people walking with Cale stopped walking. Cale also stopped walking after seeing them halt. Eric turned around to look at Cale for a while, before finally starting to speak. ¡°Young master Cale.¡± Since they were in thepany of others, Eric did not call Cale casually by name. ¡°I¡¯m d that my efforts seem to have paid off.¡± ¡®Efforts? What efforts?¡¯ Cale looked toward Eric with shock and confusion, but Eric turned back around and proudly walked to the table that was closest to the entrance. Eric did not know that Cale never read his letters and just shoved them to a corner of the room. ¡°Why is he like this?¡± Youngdy Amiru shook her head at Cale¡¯s question. Gilbert showed a simr reaction. Cale then shrugged his shoulders and headed toward the table. But an announcement made him stop moving. ¡°Young master Venion Stan of Marquis Stan¡¯s household has arrived!¡± Cale understood why Neo Tolz did not follow them inside the Pce of Joy. Venion. Neo Tolz was standing right behind Marquis Stan¡¯s sessor, Venion. But Cale did not care for chumps like Neo or Venion. ¡°Cale!¡± Eric called out to Cale, who suddenly started quickly walking to his seat, but Cale just waved him off and sat down. ¡°Mm.¡± ¡°Ah, wee young master Cale.¡± ¡°Hello, young master Cale.¡± Cale gave a short response to all of those respectful greetings. ¡°Hello. Good to see all of you.¡± Silence suddenly filled the table, and Cale put his hand underneath the tablecloth without others noticing. ¡®I knew it.¡¯ He could feel the invisible ck Dragon¡¯s body shaking. - ¡°I¡¯m okay. I told you that I am okay.¡± Cale listened to the ck Dragon¡¯s voice in his head, and patted its shaking body. Anger and fear. The ck Dragon¡¯s mind was full of both right now. That was why trauma when you are young is so scary. The ck Dragon did not know how to respond because the physical trauma that its body remembered was not aligned with the rationality in its head. - ¡°I am okay. I am a great and mighty dragon.¡± Cale had told the ck Dragon when it said it wanted to follow him that Venion Stan would be here as well. He also got the ck Dragon to promise that it would not kill Venion Stan today. He also promised something else to the dragon. - ¡°Later. I will definitely kill that bastard and the restter.¡± The ck Dragon was nning on ripping them into shreds so that they turned into fine particles of dust. Cale calmed the ck Dragon down while listening to its extremely angry voice. Thankfully, it didn¡¯t seem to be causing its mana to go wild because of this anger. Cale thought that dragons really were very rational creatures. Cale thought about the hell that awaited Venion and the idiots who were aligned with Marquis Stan in the future, and stopped patting the dragon. Thankfully, it did not seem like the dragon was going to run wild. If it did, this pce would easily be destroyed, and Cale would probably be dead as well. Cale let out a sigh of relief, before looking around. He could see Eric¡¯s group and Venion¡¯s group both heading this way. It made sense, since Venion¡¯s table was the Northwest table next to them. Tap. Tap. The ck Dragon rubbed his head on Cale¡¯s leg. ¡°Mm.¡± The ck Dragon¡¯s action made Cale worry for a moment. He made eye contact with Eric at that time, who was fervently signaling Cale with his eyes. ¡®Stay quiet! Be still!¡¯ Cale just ignored the signals. He then debated how he could pretend not to know Venion. However, all of his contemtions were for naught, as Venion greeted him first. ¡°Long time no see, young master Cale.¡± Venion Stan. He seemed to have gotten many more wrinkles since thest time they met, but he was still showing a gentle smile, fitting for a noble. However, Neo Tolz was behind him looking extremely anxious. Cale smiled brightly and started to speak. ¡°Hello, young master Venion. This is our first meeting since we met in Viscount Tolz¡¯s territoryst time.¡± Venion¡¯s gentle smile became thicker, while Neo¡¯s face becamepletely pale. Marquis Stan was one of the four leaders in the kingdom¡¯s politics. The sessor of such a person visited the Northeast region. Not only that, it was to a low ranking noble territory like Viscount Tolz¡¯s territory. It was obviously showing that Viscount Tolz was under the Marquis¡¯s faction. Naturally, the Northeastern nobles all started to frown, and the other nobles in the hall started to pay attention as well. The Northeast was a region without a leader right now. ¡°Correct. I went to visit my friend, young master Neo, and was heading back home.¡± Venion Stan did not care about the gazes that were heading his way. There was no problem for him to go to the Northeast region. Venion was looking at Cale, as if he was observing him, but his voice was still gentle. ¡°Yes. We said we would share a drink at the capital.¡± ¡°We did indeed.¡± Both Cale and Venion seemed very calm while chatting with each other. However, the people watching them could not be as calm. Cale looked toward Neo Tolz, who was peeking at him and started to smile. Neo flinched while looking at Cale¡¯s smile. ¡°Ah, right. The day after I met you, young master Venion, one of the Viscount Tolz¡¯s knights came to find me.¡± Cale started to speak to Neo with a very concerned expression. ¡°I heard the vi was ransackedpletely clean. Is everything okay?¡± Neo¡¯s shoulders flinched, and Cale could see the corner of Venion¡¯s lips starting to twitch. ¡°Did you hear about it young master Venion? I¡¯m sure you have since you said the two of you are good friends.¡± Venion finally responded after a bit of time. He was speaking very naturally, but Cale could feel the anger inside Venion¡¯s words. ¡°...Yes. It was very sad to hear.¡± ¡°Yes. You don¡¯t know how shocked I was to hear about it while I was having my hangover drink. How could they ransack the ce clean and not leave anything behind! They said you lost something very important, young master Neo?¡± The most annoying people in the world were the ones with loose lips, the ones with no tact, and the righteous. Cale was acting like all three right now. He was having so much fun. Cale warmly spoke to Neo. ¡°Young master Neo, cheer up. We¡¯re bound to face such unbelievable situations at least once in our lives.¡± ¡°Ah, yes. I suppose so.¡± Neo could not even look at Venion, as he just haphazardly responded to Cale. ¡°You need to drink to forget about everything when something terrible like that happens. Young master Neo, let¡¯s get wasted tonight. Young master Venion, would you like to join us as well?¡± Venion calmly observed Cale. He had lost the Marquis¡¯s trust since losing the ck Dragon. Venion was suspecting the organization that gave him the ck Dragon based on the knights¡¯ testimony and the evidence left behind, but he could not get rid of the suspicion he had for Cale¡¯s group, who happened to spend a night there at the same time. But he didn¡¯t have any good reasons to suspect Cale. That was why he had spoken to Cale to confirm one more time. ¡°If you drink and then wake up to have a hangover drink, all your bad memories will disappear.¡± But seeing Cale Henituse continue to spew nonsense like before made Venion realize he did not need to confirm anything. ¡°Thank you for the offer, young master Cale. Maybe next time.¡± ¡°Ah, it¡¯s disappointing, but I guess next time it is.¡± Venion walked past Cale. As he did, he could hear Cale speaking to Neo. ¡°Your knight was extremely pale young master Neo. You should have prepared in advance for such a situation. How could you lose all those valuable things at once? Cheer up. You may not recover what you lost, but what can you do about it? You have to just live on.¡± ¡®Sigh. That trash.¡¯ Venion smiled at the nobles who were observing him after hearing that he went to the Northeast, and held back his anger. ¡®That stupid dragon and that paralyzed son of a bitch. Where did all of them go?¡¯ Venion only looked forward as he walked. After taking a peek at Venion walking away, Cale turned away from the extremely pale Neo without any hesitation. Of course, he gave Neo a final remark before doing so. ¡°Cheer up.¡± Cale knew that Neo would be ripped a new one by Venion. ¡°Young master Cale-¡± Cale watched Eric, who looked like he had a lot to say but could not figure out how to say it, before sitting back down. - ¡°It is my turn next.¡± Cale nodded his head after hearing the ck Dragon¡¯s voice, and looked around the table. The Northeastern nobles were all looking at him. This was probably the first time they¡¯ve ever seen such a normal version of Cale. That was why Cale picked up the bottle of alcohol in front of him to meet their expectations. They all looked away almost instantly. This was the strength of a trash. However, the people at other tables were still watching Cale with curiosity. Cale ignored those gazes, as he handed the bottle to Eric. ¡°I¡¯ll drink itter.¡± ¡°... Sure.¡± Cale looked away from Eric, who was speaking informally for the first time sinceing into the pce, and looked at the clock at the hall entrance. It would soon be time for the feast to start. That was why the nobles all took their seats. The reason was obvious. With Venion Stan¡¯s entrance, the remaining three powerful families entered as well. Young master Antonio Gyerre of Duke Gyerre¡¯s household has arrived!¡± Antonio Gyerre of Duke Gyerre¡¯s family, youngdy Karin Orsena of Duke Orsena¡¯s family, and Marquis An, the other Marquis of the kingdom. They all entered into the hall with their subordinates behind them. The door closed after all of them entered, but there was nobody who got up to chat with them. Cale leanedfortably in his chair and looked toward the banquet hall entrance. The clock was getting close to 5 pm. Click. Click. The clock reached exactly 5 pm. Screeeeech- Therge door opened and the main characters for this gathering showed up with their entourage. The servant was ready to shout louder than he had shouted all night, but the person in front lifted his hand up to stop the servant. Roan Kingdom¡¯s crown prince, the eldest prince of the kingdom, Alberu Crossman. He seemed to enjoy the attention on him, as he headed to his elevated seat without any introduction. All of the nobles got up to greet him, and crown prince Alberu left the second and third princes behind as he headed to the highest spot in the hall. Bang. As soon as he stood in front of his seat, the door closed. It meant that everyone was present. Crown Prince Alberu looked down at the second and third princes, as well as everyone else and started to speak. ¡°Wee. Thank you for responding to my invitation.¡± This was somewhere where he did not need an introduction. Alberu looked down from the top. Cale nkly looked up at him, before looking back at the clock. ¡®It¡¯s about time they got here.¡¯ The person who would be the gossip of all of the nobles here for a while had not arrived just yet. Cale could hear the Crown prince starting to speak. ¡°Precious individuals who will make this kingdom shine, the future leaders of our kingdom, this prince is very happy that all of you havee to this gathering.¡± The crown prince was slowly turning on the engines of his glib tongue. It was at that moment. ¡°Hmm?¡± The crown prince turned his gaze to the entrance. The closed door was being pushed, as if it was being reopened. He could hear some chattering through the gap that was created. Cale started to secretly smile. At that moment, a servant urgently rushed to the crown prince from a different entrance. ¡®They¡¯re here.¡¯ Cale was certain. At that moment, the crown prince seemed to be deep in thought for a moment, before he waved at the knight who peeked inside. Screeeech- Therge door opened once again. Since it was after the crown prince, the servant did not dare call out the person¡¯s name. But there was no need to do so. ¡®Right on time.¡¯ A wheelchair entered into the banquet hall. Taylor Stan, the paralyzed eldest son of Marquis Stan. He had arrived at the banquet hall with the crazy priestess Cage. At that moment, Taylor and Cage¡¯s gazes quickly moved past Cale without anybody noticing. But that was enough for the three of them. 0 1. Cale sounds like a Lannister. (PR: Game of Thrones nerd.) 2. (PR: I love this little bastard.) If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 39: Being Still (6) Chapter 39: Being Still (6) 2Chapter 39: Being Still (6) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Bang! The banquet hall¡¯s door closed tightly once more. Taylor Stan was wearing luxurious and formal clothes, even though he was on a wheelchair, and there was a rxed smile on his face. Priestess Cage was wearing the God of Death priestess robe. ¡®I guess they decided to t out reveal their identities.¡¯ Cale thought it was a wise decision. The Temple of the God of Death may get a headache over it, but why would Cage care about that? ¡°What is this ...!¡± A shocked and angry voice came from the Northwest table. When Cale turned to look, Venion jumped out of his seat in anger, as he red at Taylor. This was a reaction you would normally never see out of Venion, and a reaction that went against the noble etiquette, but Venion was not in a state to care about etiquette right now. Cale looked up to the top of the tform. Crown prince Alberu opened his arms and started to speak. ¡°I did not expect to see Marquis Stan¡¯s eldest son, Taylor Stan, and a priestess of the God of Death here.¡± The crown prince seemed happy. Taylor showed his respects while still sitting on his wheelchair. ¡°I heard that there was an opportunity for the kingdom¡¯s nobles to meet with and discuss with your majesty. I do apologize foring without an invitation.¡± The crown prince Alberu had a smirk on his face. Cale could tell from that smirk that Alberu properly understood what Taylor meant by being able to have a discussion with the crown prince. ¡°I did ask for each household¡¯s representative, but if the household does not have a representative, there is no issue with who shows up. I guess you were probably upset that I only sent one invitation to the Marquis¡¯s household, Mister Taylor?¡± ¡°Just a bit, your majesty.¡± Cale peeked toward Venion. A household without a representative. Although it wasn¡¯t official, everybody knew that Venion was going to be the sessor to the Marquis. The crown prince¡¯s words were said to subtly take a dig at Venion. It was probably because Marquis Stan was close to the third prince. ¡®That is the weird part.¡¯ Cale found that fact to be weird. Although Cale didn¡¯t care about it and didn¡¯t look into it, but, even if the king cherished the third prince, it should not be easy to rece the crown prince. Even still, the crown prince was ufortable and wary of the second and third princes in the novel, and Marquis Stan was close to the third prince. The other factions all had a prince they supported as well. ¡®I guess there is something there.¡¯ Naturally, that, ¡®something,¡¯ was something that Cale did not want to know about. ¡°I do feel bad for making you upset. But, I am d that you look very healthy, Mister Taylor. It has been a while since west met.¡± Taylor smiled and responded to the crown prince. ¡°Your majesty, my legs may not move, but my hands, head, eyes, ears, mouth, and everything else are still very much alive. No, in fact, they have gotten even stronger.¡± ¡°I see. Indeed, you are still alive. I have forgotten the fact that the strongest is the one who manages to live until the end.¡± Cale could see that the crown prince waspletely hooked. He then turned to see that Venion once again had a noble-like expression on his face, but he was still ring at Taylor with a piercing re. Cale found this situation to be quite entertaining. ¡®It will be fun to watch.¡¯ The crown prince, Taylor, Venion, and the nobles of the different factions. It was fun looking at the expressions on all of their faces. It made Cale long for some popcorn. This was a tense situation that could burst at any moment. Cale liked it very much that he was just going to be still. ¡°Then is thedy a priestess of the God of Death?¡± ¡°This servant of eternal rest named Cage greets your majesty.¡± Cage seemed like a saint, as she said the traditional greeting of the priestesses of the God of Death. However, there was an enormous amount of knowledge regarding curses in her mind. The crown prince received Cage¡¯s greeting, before speaking to Taylor. ¡°Let us talkter. It is time for this gathering to start. I am not sure where to sit the two of you.¡± The crown prince confirmed that he would make some time to chat with Taylorter. Cale peeked over to the Northwest table. All of them were full of concern and anxiety. Neo Tolz was especially bad, as he seemed to be extremely anxious and fidgety. Cale started to smile after seeing Neo Tolz acting that way. Neo frowned and turned his way, thinking about how there could be such a stupid idiot who could not tell what was going on right now. Cale watched Neo¡¯s actions with a smile, before lifting his head up and turning to look in Taylor¡¯s direction. It was at that moment. ¡®Hmm?¡¯ Cale made eye contact with the crown prince. It was a coincidence. The crown prince Alberu was looking around to see where a good spot for Taylor and Cage may be, and Cale was turning to look at Taylor. But in the process, the two of them made eye contact. Cale had a bad feeling right away. ¡®Right here.¡¯ ¡°I guess there is a good spot for you.¡± The crown prince made up his mind, and Cale quickly realized where it would be. ¡®I guess this is the only possible spot.¡¯ This was the only table without a high-ranking noble. Although there were families who chose to be subservient to the different factions, there was still a bnce of power on this table. Furthermore, there was a household on this table that was the strong and wealthy enough that even the high-ranking nobles did not dare to poke at it. ¡°Mister Taylor can sit at the Northeast nobles¡¯ table. There just happens to be some extra seats there.¡± Gasp. Cale heard Neo¡¯s gasp and saw Eric¡¯s concerned expression as he turned his gaze to Taylor and Cage. ¡°Thank you for providing seats for us, your majesty.¡± ¡°Thank you very much, your majesty.¡± ¡°It was nothing. We should work together with people who will make great contributions to the kingdom in the future.¡± The crown prince said that as he looked toward the Northeast nobles¡¯ table. Servants quickly rushed over to the table, as Alberu started to speak. ¡°Can we fix up the seats a bit?¡± Who could say no to the crown prince? Eric stood up and responded to Alberu. ¡°Of course, your majesty.¡± Eric was able to act this way because he needed to talk to Alberu about investing in the Northeastern shoreline and because he has refused to be subservient to another high-ranking noble. His actions made the other nobles on the table stand up as well, and the servants quickly worked to set up the table to include Taylor and Cage. It progressed without any problems. But Cale, who had been watching this from the side, started to notice something odd. Eric noticed Cale¡¯s expression, and quickly came over with a concerned expression to whisper to Cale. ¡°Cale, remember. Be still. Just be still.¡± Cale ignored Eric¡¯s words and looked at his seat. The new guests were going to be seated next to Cale. This was probably decided by the crown prince as well. ¡®It¡¯s not like he can put them next to someone else¡¯s dog. Our family is the strongest of the remaining four households.¡¯ The servants bowed after they finished fixing up the table, before departing. ¡°Please sit.¡± Alberu gestured to the group, and Cale quickly walked over to sit back down. There was no chair to his side, however, a wheelchair soon came to fill that spot. ¡°Nice to meet you.¡± Taylor greeted the Northeastern nobles as he joined them. Cage naturally sat down next to Taylor. The two of them, no, all three of them, including Cale, pretended like this was their first meeting with each other. - This is entertaining. Cale agreed with the ck Dragon¡¯s voice that was transmitted in his mind and looked toward the crown prince. ¡°Then, although it was slightly dyed, let us resume.¡± The crown prince announced the start of the gathering. ¡°I wanted to gather together the individuals who will bring forth the future of our kingdom and share a meal together. Thank you all for showing up, and I hope we have a wonderful meal.¡± As soon as the crown prince finished speaking, the servants entered with tes of food for each table. An orchestra started to y background music from the back of the hall as well. This was the difference with a real feast. It was a mix of a feast and discussion, with moving between tables being natural. ¡°Young master Cale, we n to go greet the crown prince in a bit.¡± Cale nodded his head at Amiru¡¯s statement, and focused on the food on his te. But his mind became a bitplicated. ¡®What is his intention?¡¯ There was no way the crown prince just called the nobles together for no reason. He definitely had a reason. Cale had a few different ideas about what it may be. ¡®It might be because of the war in the Western Continent¡¯s southern region, or because he caught wind about the civil war that will happen in the Whipper Kingdom.¡¯ The Whipper Kingdom was where princess Rosalyn was headed to, the kingdom with the Magic Tower. A civil war will soon break out in the Whipper Kingdom. A war would break out between the mages and the non-mages. There were a lot of thoughts in his head, but Cale decided to stop thinking about it. ¡®No need for me to care, since I will just be very still.¡¯ It was none of Cale¡¯s business. He just started to enjoy the food in front of him. - Looks yummy. Looks so yummy. The weak humans are very good at cooking. Cale enjoyed the food while listening to the ck Dragon¡¯s envious ranting. The food in the pce really was delicious. His hand subconsciously headed for the wine ss that the servant had left for him, but it quickly disappeared. ¡°Cale, just five minutes.¡± Cale nodded his head at Eric¡¯s sincere plea, and turned back to the food. The rest of the Northeastern nobles quietly watched him. The Northeast was already in an awkward situation with the 10 families broken apart into different factions, but now, this magic bomb-like character, Taylor Stan, was a part of that table as well. People watched Cale, who could eat in such a tense situation, with curiosity. Cale could hear the ck Dragon¡¯s voice in his head. - By the way, there are magic video recording tools all around this hall. ¡°Oh.¡± Cale let out a gasp and started to smile. Anybody watching him would think he acted this way because he ate something especially delicious. ¡®I know at least one thing.¡¯ Cale then felt like he figured out one of the crown prince¡¯s goals. First of all, the crown prince was watching the nobles. The second and third prince naturally know about this as well. Which means, this was something the entire royal family wanted. The corner of Cale¡¯s lips moved up just a bit. Eric, who became ufortable looking at that smile, jumped up from his seat. Amiru and Gilbert followed him up as well. There were already many nobles who went up to greet the crown prince. Cale slowly got up after seeing the three of them get up, and lightly brushed his hair back as he started to speak. ¡°Shall we go?¡± Cale stood behind the three nobles, and headed up the tform to meet with the crown prince. ¡°Oh, our Northeastern nobles!¡± The crown prince weed the four of them with a bright smile. The crown prince had been shaking hands with everybody who came up to greet him. Alberu Crossman. His blonde hair and blue eyes made him look like a live version of a fairytale prince. The beautiful blonde hair was something that was unique to the Crossman family, the royal family of the Roan Kingdom. They called it the symbol of receiving the Sun God¡¯s blessing. ¡°Your majesty, it is great to see you. Eric Wheelsman greets his majesty for the first time in a while.¡± ¡°Yes, yes, Mister Eric. Don¡¯t we have something to talk about?¡± Eric responded back to the crown prince, who brought up the Northeastern shoreline investment issue with a bright expression. ¡°Yes! I have been waiting for a good moment to discuss it with you!¡± ¡°I am also waiting for that moment. You are the intelligent young master of Count Wheelsman¡¯s family. The Wheelsman family is responsible for the entrance to the Northeast region, and has been doing a very good job. How could I push that off?¡± ¡®He¡¯s slowly getting into it.¡¯ Cale quietly stood there while watching Eric, who was smiling at the crown prince who was slowly activating his glib tongue. The crown prince was praising Gilbert and Amiru as well. ¡®Interesting.¡¯ Cale quietly watched it all until it was his turn. The crown prince reached his hand out to Cale who slightly bowed his head. ¡°Mr. Cale of the Henituse family, that is responsible for the edge of our Northeastern region. It may be my first time meeting you, but, thanks to Count Deruth¡¯s good work, we are no longer afraid of the Forest of Darkness. You don¡¯t know how reassuring that is for me and everyone else.¡± Cale had one goal whileing here today. ¡°I heard that Mister Cale is a very free spirit. I¡¯m sure this is because the artistic souls of the sculptures in the Henituse territory have given you an epiphany? I feel like your free spirit makes your soul very pure.¡± It was probably difficult to find praise for someone who was famous for being a trash like this. In that aspect, the crown prince was amazing. However, he had no choice but to talk good about Cale, as long as Cale does not do anything trashy in this gathering. The royal family wanted the Northeast under their control as well. Furthermore, there were no members of royalty who would despise someone like Count Henituse, who ruled over his territory very well. ¡®That is why this preference for certain people will not impact the families.¡¯ Cale sincerely grabbed the crown prince¡¯s hand, as he started to use his own glib tongue. It was his turn now. The crown prince had blonde hair and was wearing a formal outfit. Cale had his red hair and a formal outfit as well. Both of them looked rxed. Cale¡¯s calm voice filled the air. ¡°I also felt something after meeting your majesty today. I realized that in addition to our current sun, his highness, we also have you, the one who will shine over the night to watch over the citizens at night. It was a wonderful image for my eyes.¡± Cale¡¯s voice was very calm and rxed, and he looked very confident. ¡°... Is that so?¡± But the crown prince seemed confused for a moment, before his expression returned to normal. Cale did not miss this change. Cale continued on in a sincere voice. ¡°Indeed, your majesty. I may not be able to sleep at night now that I have personally met you, the star in the mind of our citizens.¡± Eric¡¯s jaws dropped, while Gilbert and Amiru could not help look at Cale in disbelief. Cale could see the crown prince starting to think. He felt like he had taken another step toward his goal of, ¡®getting away from the crown prince.¡¯ At that moment, the ck Dragon muttered something odd. - Why did this weakling called the crown prince dye his hair with magic? It is at a level that only a great and mighty dragon like me would notice it. Did another dragon dye his hair? No, is it some other type of power? ¡®Shit.¡¯ At this moment, Cale realized that he had learned another useless secret that he could not even reveal the tiniest bit to anyone else. ¡®Is it a secret of a birth this time?¡¯ Cale did not care to know about such things. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 40: Don’t know, I don’t know (1) Chapter 40: Don¡¯t know, I don¡¯t know (1) 2Chapter 40: Don¡¯t know, I don¡¯t know (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale gently smiled at the prince, and started to think. ''Don¡¯t know. I don¡¯t know.'' The ck Dragon kept on dragging on about asking why a dragon would ever use its magic for such an useless man and how he would never do such a thing, but Cale tried his best to not listen. - Hmm? His pupils are also dyed. This weakling is definitely plotting something. Weak human, be careful. ¡®If you stop talking, I think I''ll be fine.¡¯ - Hmm? This person is not weak. Weak human, be extra careful. You will die. ¡®Shit.¡¯ Cale was frightened of this ck Dragon, that was exining useless things, for the first time. At the same time, Cale''s mind began to think quickly. The prince''s mother was not the queen. She was a concubine, and she originally was a servant, one of the citizens who worked in the royal family. The third prince''s mother was the current queen. The crown prince¡¯s mother is said to have had a questionable death when the crown prince was young. Cale started to naturally think about the true identity of the crown prince¡¯s mother. The prince was known to be average, but the dragon was saying that he is not it weak. In the novel, even Choi Han judged the crown prince to be normal, so what was he hiding? And how did the dragon find out? ''... No. Whether he hides it or not, it is not my business. '' Cale did not listen to the murmuring ck dragon. Something must have been really interesting, as the ck Dragon continued to talk about the crown prince. "... Mister Cale seems to be a bit like me." The crown prince was saying something, but Cale was too busy thinking about things, so he just casually responded. ¡°Your majesty, such statement is the biggest honor of my life.¡± The crown prince let go of Cale¡¯s hand, as if he was nervous. Cale did not notice the nervousness, and stepped back without a word, moving behind Eric. It was easy to use Eric as a shield when things gotplicated. The crown prince observed Cale with curiosity, before turning his gaze over to Eric. Eric started to speak with the crown prince once again. Cale watched him and started to think. ¡®There is a reason.¡¯ There was a reason the crown prince was wary of the second and third princes. There was also a reason as to why the king¡¯s favor suddenly went to the third prince. He was able to guess it all. ¡®Is he not really his son? Or is there a different secret to his birth?¡¯ Cale¡¯s mind went to a drama that Kim Rok Soo saw while working at a restaurant after graduating high school. The crown prince, Alberu Crossman, was naturally the main character. Cale reaffirmed himself once more. ¡®Be still.¡¯ He would be still from here on. He made the decision to not find out about anything else. Cale thoroughly kept that promise. He did not drink any alcohol today, and that led to the nobles from other regions, who had never met him previously, approaching him to talk. Cale looked to Eric every time, and Eric got to work. After this happened a couple of times, Cale quietly mumbled to himself. ¡°Oh. This is pretty nice.¡± Gilbert and Amiru flinched after hearing that quiet murmuring, and started to talk to each other using their eyes. ¡®Isn¡¯t this weird?¡¯ ¡®Right?¡¯ The two of them slightly moved away from Eric and Cale. However, Cale looked toward youngdy Amiru, and Amiru stopped moving backward after making eye contact with Cale. ¡°By the way, youngdy Amiru.¡± ¡°Yes?¡± ¡°I heard the shoreline of your territory is extremely beautiful. Is it true?¡± ¡°Of course. The cliffs overlooking the coast are very beautiful.¡± ¡®Beautiful my ass.¡¯ Cale thought about the cliff and about how it would be extremely difficult to earn the, ¡®Sound of the Wind.¡¯ In the novel, the, ¡®Sound of the Wind,¡¯ was an ancient power that a member of the non-mage faction in Whipper Kingdom ended up finding. Although it might be strange that a person from the Whipper Kingdom ended up with an ancient power in the Roan Kingdom, there was a long story behind that as well. Anyways, that power originally went to a mage yer, an extremely brutal fool who appears near the second half of the civil war. He was already strong enough that he didn¡¯t really put it to much use. ¡®The magic tower will fall soon.¡¯ After the civil war, a new magic tower would be built on the site of the fallen magic tower, and Rosalyn will end up being in charge of that new magic tower. ¡®Choi Han, the mage yer, and the Empire¡¯s crown prince.¡¯ These three people are the ones who appear as the heroes for all of the incidents in the middle of the Western continent. The novel also discussed how the Queen of the Western continent¡¯s Southern Jungle ended up getting involved with the matter of unifying the South as well. Putting the secret organization that Choi Han constantly runs into aside, this continent will break its 200-year long peace to start fighting for power. Cale looked toward Eric, who was dealing with everything for him, and looked at the clock. The feast would be over soon. Of course, the nobles were waiting for the conversation time that would happen after the meal. ¡®None of my business.¡¯ It was none of Cale¡¯s business. ¡°Young master Gilbert, I should be able to leave after the meal is over, right?¡± Gilbert looked toward Cale, who was leisurely eating fruit like he was out on a pic, and nodded his head. ¡°Yes. We n to meet with the crown prince after the meal, but you probably don¡¯t n to go with us, right?¡± ¡°Right. What good will I do there? The three of you are more informed about the investment information.¡± Gilbert¡¯s expression changed at Cale¡¯s words. He seemed to be a bit surprised. ¡°...You read the document.¡± ¡°A bit.¡± Cale casually responded, before looking back at the crown prince, who stood up from his seat. He was about to announce the end of the meal. Cale did not find out the real reason behind today¡¯s gathering, but he was not disappointed about it. Not knowing meant there was no chance of him getting caught up in it. But Cale started to frown after hearing the crown prince¡¯s words. ¡°It was a pleasure to share this dinner with all of you tonight. I have prepared a simple wine party for those who may be interested, so please enjoy yourselves. Ah, I have also prepared a spot for all of you at the birthday celebration that ising up.¡± The crown prince Alberu said all of this with a rather pleasant expression. ¡°I hope that you will all be there to share in the joys of the day.¡± ¡®Sigh.¡¯ Cale held back his sigh. Although Alberu was saying he hoped they would all be there, it was pretty much forcing them to be there. ¡®...I guess I¡¯ll be in the za when the bombs go off.¡¯ Although it was to be expected, Cale did not like it very much. ¡°Then let us conclude this dinner.¡± Cale stood up from his seat. The majority wanted to go to the wine party with the crown prince and the second and third princes, but those who were not approved to meet with the crown prince could not go, even if they wanted to do so. Cale peeked toward the wheelchair that was moving past him. Taylor passed by him and Cage, who was pushing Taylor¡¯s wheelchair, followed directly afterward and whispered in a quiet voice that only Cale could hear. ¡°See youter, our little brother.¡± ¡®I said I didn¡¯t want to be their little brother.¡¯ Cale¡¯s gaze clearly showed his feelings, but Cage just pretended to not understand and headed toward the crown prince, while pretending to be a good and pure priestess. ¡°Young master Cale, let me walk you out.¡± ¡°Youngdy Amiru.¡± Amiru approached Cale and offered to walk with him. Cale looked toward Amiru¡¯s green hair and calm yet sophisticated expression, and casually asked. ¡°Are you worried I will cause trouble on my way out?¡± ¡°Unfortunately, young master Neo was heading back early as well.¡± ¡°Ah.¡± She was saying she was going with him in case Neo tried to start something again. Cale headed toward the banquet hall door without any other questions, with Amiru next to him. The two of them arrived at Cale¡¯s carriage without saying much, and found Ron waiting by the carriage. ¡°Young master Cale, good job today.¡± Cale nodded his head at Amiru¡¯s words. ¡°It was hard. But you have to go back and work some more, youngdy Amiru.¡± Amiru smiled and started to speak. ¡°It is because we need to get some good news.¡± However, Cale could sense the despair in her voice. The Northeastern coast was really a useless piece ofnd. It was a ce filled with cliffs, with nothing else being interesting. Furthermore, the whirlpools around the cliffs were also a problem. The experienced people living in the territory knew how to avoid them, but it was a dangerous ce for others. ¡®The, ¡®Sound of the Wind,¡¯ is responsible for the whirlpools.¡¯ Amiru and Gilbert would want to get some investment in this useless sea, no matter what. Cale looked toward Amiru, who spoke with a strange expression on her face. ¡°I believe we are capable of getting such results.¡± ¡°Youngdy Amiru.¡± ¡°Yes, young master Cale.¡± Cale thought it wouldn¡¯t be bad to give some help to Eric, Gilbert, and Amiru, whom he worked today like the beast people under hismand. They still needed a bnce of power in the Northeast nobles¡¯ meeting, and Amiru seemed like someone who would keep secrets pretty well. ¡°I believe his highness will be pretty interested in this investment.¡± ¡°I think so too.¡± Amiru agreed with Cale¡¯s statement. It was because the crown prince remembered the issue, even without Eric bringing it up first. ¡°You discussed an investment for tourism right?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Investing in tourism using the coastal cliffs. In Cale¡¯s opinion, it waspletely useless. He approached Amiru and whispered in her ears. ¡°If you are in desperate need of investment, I think it would be good for you to think about the value of the location of your shoreline in rtion to the Whipper Kingdom and the other northern Kingdoms.¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Cale shrugged his shoulders at the confused Amiru and added on. ¡°Of course, it would be best if you kept what I just said to yourself.¡± ¡°...I will remember your words for now.¡± Cale was satisfied with Amiru, who seemed confused, but kept her mouth shut. He got on the carriage and waved to Amiru. Amiru lightly moved her head to respond to his wave. Cale started to speak to Ron, who was closing the carriage door. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± ¡°Yes, young master.¡± The carriage soon started to move. Cale looked out at Amiru, who was seriously contemting what Cale had said without heading back in, and started to think about the Northeastern shoreline. The Northwestern shoreline was made up of sandy beaches. Inparison, Amiru and Gilbert¡¯s territory¡¯s shoreline wasplicated, with many small inds. Furthermore, they were also surrounded by sharp cliffs. Finally, there were only a few ces where ships could safely be anchored. Of course, the fishermen there were veterans who would be able to avoid the whirlpool to safely fish without any issues. ¡®They only thought about tours and sightseeing because the peace hadsted so long.¡¯ But the crown prince will know that the end of the peace was quickly approaching. ¡®Anyways, all I have to do is go get the ancient power before that mage yer takes it for himself.¡¯ Cale decided not to think about it anymore. That night, two reports were delivered to Cale, as he headed back from the feast. ¡°We found four of the magic bombs.¡± In the novel, there were five located in different ces, and five located on people. ¡°All of them were around the za.¡± ¡°Show me the map.¡± Cale reached his hand out to Choi Han. Choi Han had left the ck Dragon at the site of the magic bombs and had returned by himself. He seemed to have rushed back, as there was sweat on his face. ¡°We found one, and then I ran around with the dragon in my arms to thoroughly look everywhere. We ended up finding three more in the process, but nothing more. I¡¯m sure we need to look somewhere other than the za, but there were none in the ces we¡¯ve looked so far.¡± ¡°No need to rush, since it will be safe until the day of the celebration in two days.¡± ¡°But it is better to get rid of dangerous things earlier!¡± ¡°Let¡¯s steal them in early morning of the celebration day.¡± ¡°... Excuse me?¡± The magic bombs Cale knew about required the developer to send a signal to blow them up. However, for anyone at the ck Dragon or even Rosalyn¡¯s level of magic, it was pretty easy to cut the connection between the developer and the bombs even if it took some time to do so. That was how Rosalyn was able to destroy the bombs on the people in the novel. ¡®That needs to be done the day of the celebration.¡¯ That was the only way to make that bloodthirsty mage think everything is fine. ¡°Steal them? We are not going to destroy them?¡± Cale handed the map back to the confused Choi Han, and started to speak. ¡°Why would we destroy such useful things?¡± Even if the bombs cannot be used, the densely packed mana inside was a pretty useful ingredient. ¡°I will use it for myself.¡± Choi Han thought Cale¡¯s smile was pretty sneaky. Cale continued to speak to Choi Han, who epted the map with a confused expression. ¡°Keep looking since there may be more. Check back multiple times to see if the location of the bomb changes as well.¡± Choi Han and the ck Dragon will now need to stay hidden around the za and continue to investigate. It will be hard, boring, and extremely taxing on their minds, but it was not something Cale was going to do himself. Cale looked toward On and Hong, who just woke up from their nap and started to sleep. ¡°Time to pay up.¡± Cale also spoke to Choi Han. ¡°Go work.¡± The two kittens, who were rubbing their eyes tiredly, and Choi Han went to work as Cale had instructed. Cale leisurely watched them jump off the terrace window, before drinking the wine he did not get the chance to drink at the banquet, before falling asleep. A piece of information was delivered to Cale while he was sleeping. Cale was able to hear the news after waking up. Billos was going to arrive at the capital today, the day before the birthday celebration. Cale immediately headed to the inn where he was going to meet Billos. It was the ce the 10 wolf children were staying. Of course, On, Hong, and Lock were with Cale as he headed to the inn. He thought about what Lock just said, and asked. ¡°You want me to take care of your siblings?¡± ¡°Yes. That is the condition for my deal.¡± ¡°And what can you do for me?¡± ¡°It is not just me that will do it.¡± Lock answered without any hesitation. ¡°If it is not just you, who else?¡± Lock quickly answered. ¡°My siblings will do it with me. We are stronger as a group.¡± Cale felt the back of his head turning chilly. ¡®No way.¡¯ Lock ruthlessly hit Cale with another mental blow. ¡°The Blue Wolf Tribe has a famed history of being strong knights. That history-¡± ¡°Is not something I need to know about.¡± Cale turned away from Lock, who was sitting across from him in the carriage. 1. (PR: OMG I LOVE THIS GUY.) If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 41: Don’t know, I don’t know (2) Chapter 41: Don¡¯t know, I don¡¯t know (2) 3Chapter 41: Don¡¯t know, I don¡¯t know (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist But Lock just nodded his head at Cale¡¯s response, and started to speak. ¡°If you do not know, may I exin it to you?¡± He asked it in the form of a question, but it looked like he wanted to say what was on his mind. Cale shook his head to say, ¡®no.¡¯ ¡°No need.¡± ¡°But.¡± Cale stared at Lock. ¡®You want me to take the ten Blue Wolf Tribe children and you to create a Knights Brigade?¡¯ Lock was someone who was afraid of the Whale Tribe but was willing to attack the Chief of the Whale Tribe for his friends. ¡®You want me to take someone who is crazier than some religious fanatics and make him my subordinate?¡¯ ¡°No need to continue speaking about nonsense.¡± Cale¡¯s cold voice made Lock¡¯s shoulders sink. Cale did not care about Lock¡¯s reaction at all and started to speak. ¡°You want young children to be knights? You asked me to protect the children, but your suggestion seems to go against your request.¡± If Cale trained them into knights from such a young age, they would be a group of warriors who would be even crazier than religious fanatics. That was a terrible thought. But most importantly. ¡°What about their opinions? Why are you deciding for them?¡± Cale asked the question to Lock, who had made the decision for all of his siblings. Lock had a nk expression for a moment, before lowering his head and apologizing. ¡°I¡¯m sorry.¡± ¡°No need to be sorry.¡± Cale just casually responded to Lock who slightly raised his head. ¡°But since I know what it is you want from me, I will think about what I want in return.¡± Of course, he had already thought about what he wanted. He didn¡¯t need it now, but in about 3 months, an ancient power that could be used to make Cale money would appear in a dangerous mountain. It would exist for only 6 months, and someone like Lock in his berserk mode transformation would be best to climb that mountain. ¡®If I sell that ancient power to the Queen of the Jungle, even if our territory goes broke, I will have enough money to indulge for the rest of my life.¡¯ He would naturally raise the price before selling it, but he didn¡¯t think there was anything wrong with raising the price for someone who should have a lot of money. ¡°Will there be something you need from me?¡± Cale let out a sigh at the worried tone in Lock¡¯s voice. Cale asked once more, as Lock seemed even more concerned. ¡°Don¡¯t ask such obvious question. Of course, I will need your help.¡± Ah. Lock let out a gasp, and then nodded his head. ¡°Yes. I will do whatever it is you ask of me. Please let me know once youe to a decision.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± Cale said that before taking a small money pouch out of his pocket and throwing it to Lock. Lock caught the pouch as Cale exined the reason for the money. ¡°You¡¯re seeing your siblings for the first time in a while, so go take them on a tour of the capital.¡± ¡°...A tour?¡± ¡°Yes. Isn¡¯t this your first time in a city like the capital? Go treat them to some delicious food too.¡± ¡®I can only have a rxed discussion with Billos if none of you are there.¡¯ ¡°On and Hong will go with you, so you will not get lost.¡± Meeeeeow. Meow. On and Hong, who were quietly sitting in the carriage, announced their presence after hearing Cale¡¯s statement and approached Lock. They then patted Lock¡¯s leg with their front paws. ¡°Stop it, On, Hong. It tickles.¡± Lock caressed their heads like it was cute, but, in Cale¡¯s eyes, the kittens were seriously trying to attack Lock. Cale watched this and started to think. ¡®I should leave the wolf children to Hanster. Otherwise, I will need to find a babysitter for them.¡¯ Cale thought it would be great if it was someone who could cook well and kept things clean. Cale was thinking about people who could babysit the wolf children other than Hans when he thought about Beacrox, Ron¡¯s son and the second chef. Thinking about Beacrox made Cale¡¯s expression stiffen. Beacrox was definitely someone who was good at cooking, kept things clean, and had a positive reputation within the Henituse family as someone who was respectful and normal. However, none of that mattered to Cale, since he knew that Beacrox was a lunatic who loved torture. He could not let such a person taint the pure wolf children¡¯s minds. ¡®I also need to send him off with Choi Han.¡¯ He wasn¡¯t necessary, but, in the novel, Beacrox went with Choi Han and Rosalyn to Breck Kingdom to torture the Grand Admiral. Cale was debating about who would be good to take care of the wolf children, when the carriage arrived at the inn Billos and the wolf children were located. Cale got off the carriage before speaking to Lock. ¡°Follow me.¡± Cale patted the nervous Lock¡¯s shoulder, and Lock walked into the inn with On and Hong in his arms. ¡°Wee to the Scent of Grapes! How may I help you?¡± Cale responded to the young attendant¡¯s greeting, and immediately headed for the back door. The people Choi Han brought with him were all residing in the vi at the back area of the inn. The attendant tried to follow him, but Cale stopped him and walked to the vi door before motioning to Lock. ¡°You open the door since it is your younger siblings.¡± ¡°Huh? Yes!¡± Lock put the kittens down and grabbed the handle. This was his first time seeing his younger siblings since he had his berserk transformation. Cale slowly moved back, because he had a bad feeling that he probably should not see what was beyond the door. Click. Lock turned the doorknob and opened the door. They could see the inside of the vi as soon as the door was opened. It was afortable looking space. ¡°Sigh.¡± However, Cale took two more steps backward immediately. It was an instinctive movement. ¡°Hyung!¡± ¡°Hyung!¡± ¡°Oppa!¡± ¡°Lock oppa!¡± 10 children rushed toward Lock, and Lock ran toward them as well. An emotional reunion was happening in front of Cale¡¯s eyes, but Cale was overwhelmed at the sight of ten wolf children in front of him. At the same time, there was someone that Cale was happy to see. ¡°...Young master.¡± ¡°Long time no see, Billos.¡± Cale had told Billos to go to this vi. Cale could see that Billos was nervous underneath his smile and looked to the person approaching them from behind Billos. ¡°Nice to meet you, young master Cale.¡± ¡°Are you the merchant who came with Choi Han?¡± A man in his sixties with a gentle expression and good physique. This person was the one who asked Choi Han to help with the Blue Wolf tribe issue. ¡°Yes. I heard a lot of things about you from Mr. Choi Han. It is an honor to meet you, young master.¡± ¡°An honor? It is nothing much to see the face of a trash like me.¡± Cale reached his hand out to the man, and the man shook Cale¡¯s hand as he introduced himself. ¡°My name is Odeus Flynn.¡± Cale started to smile. Odeus Flynn. He was someone who was a strong contender for the Flynn Merchant Guild¡¯s leader position but gave up on it to start his own small guild. He was Billos¡¯s uncle. He was the person who connected Billos and Choi Han to each other, as well as the person who brought out Billos¡¯s hidden greed. ¡®He is even more devious than Ron.¡¯ He acted like he owned a small merchant guild, but, in reality, he was wearing a mask to rule the underworld. He was nice to some, but cruel and vicious to others. That was the type of person Odeus Flynn was. Right now, the only person to know about both sides of Odeus¡¯s character was Cale. Cale pretended not to know anything as he greeted Odeus. ¡°Flynn? You must be rted to Billos. Nice to meet you.¡± ¡°I was shocked as well. I didn¡¯t know Billos was the person young master Cale knew. I have not seen Billos since he was a little boy, so I was very happy to see him again. I feel like I¡¯ve had a lot of good encounterstely.¡± Billos could not hide hisplicated feelings while looking at Odeus. Odeus was someone who threw aside the Flynn Merchant Guild and went to live a simpler life. Furthermore, Odeus was Billos¡¯s uncle, and the only person Billos had good memories about from his childhood. ¡®Well, he is a good person to Billos.¡¯ Cale let go of Odeus¡¯s hand and started to speak to Billos. ¡°Let¡¯s go upstairs and drink.¡± The vi was two stories, with a small bar upstairs. Of course, Cale addressed Odeus as well. ¡°Choi Han and Rosalyn will soon arrive, so the three of you can catch up.¡± ¡°I understand. I hope that I have an opportunity to drink with you in the future as well, young master Cale.¡± Cale smiled and responded back. ¡°Let¡¯s drink together sometime soon.¡± Cale patted Billos¡¯s shoulder as Billos stood there with aplicated expression and tried to head upstairs. However, there were 10 children blocking his way. ¡°Thank you very much, young master Cale.¡± ¡°Thank you very much.¡± Cale looked toward the 10 children thanking him and started to think. ¡®What a headache.¡¯ There were 10 children who all gave off an aura that made Cale believe they would be very strong in the future. Although they watched their parents, cousins, and other family members all be killed right in front of their eyes, their strong and firm pupils let Cale know that they still had their purity and a sense of gratitude. There were also none that were very young. All of them seemed to be between 10 - 13 years old. ¡®I guess they can have a training instructor rather than a babysitter.¡¯ However, Cale decided he would not be the person providing them with a training instructor and waved at Lock to head out. He then turned back around and headed upstairs. Although he did not respond and ignored them, Cale could still hear the wolf children thanking him from behind. That made Cale have the chills once again. Billos came up to the second floor and immediately asked Cale a question. ¡°Young master Cale, just what have you been doing?¡± Cale responded to that question without any hesitation. ¡°Doing what I can for a peaceful future?¡± Billos had an expression of disbelief on his face, as he brought out some alcohol and sses from the cab. He then sat across from Cale and filled his own cup. ¡°...Do you not see me in front of you?¡± ¡°...I¡¯m sorry young master. I have a lot on my mind.¡± Billos drank about half the bottle, before looking toward Cale. No, he was observing Cale. This person, who said that he could not live as trash any longer. However, Billos had never expected in his wildest dreams that he would meet his uncle whileing to meet Cale. Cale stopped Billos as he tried to pour another drink and took the bottle from Billos before filling Billos¡¯s cup. ¡°I don¡¯t know what¡¯s bugging you, but you can¡¯t just keep drinking by yourself like that.¡± ¡°...Young master Cale.¡± Cale filled Billos¡¯s cup, before responding. ¡°What?¡± ¡°Odeus-nim is my uncle by blood.¡± Odeus-nim. For Billos, who was not allowed to use the Flynnst name, he could not even call his uncle his uncle. However, Odeus was the only adult who was warm to Billos during his childhood. In the novel, this was what Odeus had said to Billos. ¡®I consider you as my nephew and my family. You have the qualifications for that.¡¯ That sentence became a starting point and a turning point for Billos. After being introduced to Choi Han in the novel through Odeus, Billos was in awe of Choi Han¡¯s strength, and decided to follow Choi Han. He also decided to put himself in contention for the Flynn Merchant Guild¡¯s leader position. ¡°Young master Cale, aren¡¯t you curious as to why Odeus-nim runs a small merchant guild, even though he has the Flynnst name?¡± ¡®Not curious? I already know about it.¡¯ Odeus was someone who was in full control of the Northwest and Central underworlds. Cale filled his ss, and casually responded. ¡°Am I supposed to be curious about the Flynn name?¡± He then drank the alcohol in his cup and saw that Billos was smiling. ¡°I see. I guess the Flynn name is not that grand of a name.¡± ¡°Indeed. Whether it is you or Odeus, it is the same. You are a Flynn as well.¡± ¡°... I am just a bastard son.¡± Cale snorted and responded to Billos. ¡°The fact that you are a bastard does not mean that you are not a Flynn. Everybody else just considers you a Flynn.¡± Although the family may not have given Billos the Flynn family name, everybody else considered Billos to be a Flynn. That was why there was nobody who ignored Billos, even though he was a bastard. The Flynn name, as one of the 3 greatest merchant guilds in this world, was a pretty big name. That was the truth. Billos observed Cale, before taking the bottle back from Cale and filling Cale¡¯s cup. ¡°Young master.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°I feel like you are very good at saying the right things.¡± ¡°I am a bit talented in that.¡± ¡°That is why.¡± ¡°Yeah?¡± ¡°Just what did you steal with the things you borrowed from me?¡± Billos could see the smile on Cale¡¯s face as he said that. Cale picked up the full ss and leisurely answered. ¡°I already stole one and will steal the rest soon.¡± He had already rescued the dragon, and the others would happen tomorrow. The corner of Billos¡¯s lips started to twitch. There were probably no nobles who would say that they were going to steal something, but such a person was in front of his eyes right now. ¡°Can¡¯t I help as well?¡± Cale shook his head at Billos¡¯s question. ¡°Unfortunately.¡± ck. Cale put the ss down on the table and continued. ¡°All the spots are full already.¡± The list of humans and beast people to use was already in Cale¡¯s head. ¡°Ha, haha.¡± Billosughed for a bit, before picking up the full ss, drinking it the whole ss in one breath and putting the ss back down on the table. ¡°I guess I should steal something else then.¡± Billos had already decided what he was going to steal. The position of the sessor of the Flynn Merchant Guild. He was going to make that position his. It only made sense, since his greed wasrger and deeper than anybody else. Cale started to speak as Billos was thinking. ¡°Do whatever you want.¡± Billosughed once more after hearing Cale¡¯s statement. Cale did not care whether Billosughed or not. The fact that Billos met Odeus today meant that his goal for today has been aplished, letting Cale drink in peace. Of course, Cale only enjoyed himself for a bit and returned to the residence on his own to prepare for tomorrow. He needed to start moving in the middle of the night, making him want to go to sleep early in the evening. Unfortunately, he was not able to do so. ¡°Ron?¡± Ron bowed to Cale and greeted him. ¡°Young master, this Ron would like to make a request if possible.¡± ¡°A request?¡± Ron lifted his head up and started to speak. ¡°Please take care of my son.¡± ¡°Son? You mean Beacrox?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°Why?¡± Cale could see the benign smile disappear from Ron¡¯s face. This was the first time Cale had ever seen Ron wear a rude expression on his face. Ron started to speak with the assassin¡¯s expression on his face. ¡°I need to go hunt some foxes.¡± Although he was old, Ron was still an assassin. Ron fixed his expression once more and started to speak. His expression was stoic, with only the corners of his lips being slightly elevated. ¡°Our young master knows that I am someone who kills people, right?¡± Cale could feel the buzz from the alcohol instantly disappearing. He was getting the chills once again. 1. Beacrox is the S to our PR¡¯s M. 2. It is probably simr to GoT, where bastards cannot take the family name and are given names like Snow. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 42: Don’t know, I don’t know (3) Chapter 42: Don¡¯t know, I don¡¯t know (3) 0Chapter 42: Don¡¯t know, I don¡¯t know (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale hid the chilly feeling and trembling, and asked. "So?" Ron was about to resume the benign smile on his face after hearing his little puppy young master speak in his usual annoying and rude tone, but suppressed it and started to speak. "So, I''m going to kill people." "Leaving your son behind?" "Yes sir." "Is the fox a person?" Cale knew how the assassin Ron smiled. It was a very faint smile, with just the corners of his lips raised a tiny bit. It was one that made the person looking at Ron think that it would be better if he did not smile at all. Ron replied quite pleased. "That''s right. I have to go kill a group of foxes." But his voice was cold. "Rip them into pieces." It would either be Ron¡¯s body being ripped into pieces or his targets¡¯ bodies being ripped into pieces. It could only be one of those two scenarios. Cale got goosebumps at the phrase, ¡®rip them into pieces.¡¯ He then started to contemte. Ron could see that Cale stood there without saying anything for a while. His puppy young master finally started to speak after sighing numerous times. "... Go ande back." The smile disappeared from Ron¡¯s face. Cale, who was already in his pajamas,id down on the bed and continued to speak. "I''ll tell Hans that you are taking a leave of absence. Report to me every so often. You can receive money from the Flynn Merchant Guild with your ID que. And why would you leave Beacrox to a trash like me? He is an adult. He will figure out what to do with his own life.¡± Cale decided to think easily. There was no need for Ron to be with Choi Han right now. Now that Lock was able to transform into a controlled berserk state, Choi Han would be fine without Ron or Beacrox¡¯s strength. But, for Choi Han, and more importantly, for a peaceful Northeastern region of the Roan Kingdom, Ron was needed one yearter. ¡°However, the duration of your break is only 1 year.¡± Cale leaned against his pillow and continued. ¡°Enjoy your break.¡± ¡®Since I have work for you to do in a year.¡¯ "Don¡¯t get hurt while you are out there." Cale stretched out his two legs, thinking he had reserved wonderful dreams for the next year. He then looked toward Ron and flinched. The old man, who had been quiet, was actually quietlyughing. That vicious sight made Cale cower underneath the nket. ¡®What is going on?¡¯ Cale''s expression stiffened. Ron continued to silentlyugh without watching Cale. ¡®I thought this little punk was a son of a bitch, but I, Ron Mn, is the one who is a son of a bitch.¡¯ Like a dog that looks at his master. Ron thought that he was like a dog, and responded. ¡°Young master, is reporting to you once a month enough?¡± ¡°Yes. Do as you please.¡± Like an assassin, Ron opened the door and left the room without making a single noise. He then said onest thing before closing the door. "I will see you in a year, young master.¡± Without waiting Cale''s answer, Ron closed the door. Cale quickly fell asleep, relieved that he was free from Ron for a year. Dawn arrived, and six people were standing in front of Cale. There were some that he had personally called, and some that he gathered through Choi Han. Cale looked toward Rosalyn, and started to speak. ¡°Miss Rosalyn, the brown hair looks good on you.¡± Rosalyn was not aware of exactly what will happen today, but understood the severity after hearing the words, ¡®magic bomb,¡¯ and decided to help. Cale had also promised her something in return for her help. ¡°Right? I thought it will make it easier for me to run wild.¡± Rosalyn had dyed her hair and pupils brown with magic. On and Hong were standing next to her. ¡°Lock, you should be able to use the physical strength of a wolf without transforming right?¡± ¡°Yes sir. It is possible.¡± Lock was standing there nervously as well. Next to him were the ck Dragon and Choi Han. Cale divided them into two teams. The ck Orb was already positioned by Choi Han yesterday, so the two teams each needed to locate and take care of the four bombs. ¡°Miss Rosalyn and Lock will be one team. Choi Han, Dragon, On, and Hong will be the other team.¡± Rosalyn had a confused expression on her face after hearing how Cale divided up the teams. Lock had the same expression on his face as well. ¡°What about you, young master Cale?¡± Choi Han, the ck Dragon, On, and Hong all responded to the question. ¡°Cale-nim is, a bit, uhm, his physical strength is...¡± ¡°Weak.¡± ¡°We don¡¯t need him.¡± ¡°He is useless.¡± Ah. Rosalyn let out a gasp and looked toward Cale. Lock seemed to be quite surprised as well. However, Cale handed the items he borrowed from Billos to Choi Han, and confidently answered. ¡°I am weak and will only be baggage. I also need to prepare for the celebration as soon as the sunes up, so it will be difficult for me to go with you.¡± They were going to use the short opening when the guards for the night shift switched with the day shift to enter the areas where the bombs were located and start to dismantle them. After that, while the ck Orb activates and causes a mana disturbance, they will all need to wait at their determined stations to observe the secret organizations members and the situation at the za. The birthday celebration was set to start at 9 am. Cale looked at his watch before speaking to the six of them again. ¡°Alright then, please head to work.¡± He then added on. ¡°Don¡¯t forget to bring back the dismantled magic bombs.¡± Rosalyn smiled and responded to Cale¡¯s statement. ¡°You promised to give me one of them.¡± ¡°Of course.¡± ¡°Should be enough to pay for my services.¡± It was definitely enough. Cale looked toward the terrace, that was now being used more as a door than as a terrace, and opened the window. A cool night breeze filled the room as the six individuals quickly rushed out of Cale¡¯s room through the terrace. Some left with invisibility magic while others left with very fast speed. Cale watched them leave and thought to himself that they were all very strong. He was now left alone in the room. Ooooooooong- Cale slowly stroked therge shield and silver wings that appeared in front of him. Even if something unexpected happens, he would not die as long as he had this shield. ¡°...I¡¯ll use a tiny bit of its strength if I need to do so.¡± Cale patted the shield, that looked even more holy after having the heart crest engraved in it, and decided to use it without being noticed if there came the need to do so. Cale sat down on the couch and practiced using just a small amount of the shield¡¯s power, before noticing his reflection in the mirror. ¡®It should be fine.¡¯ The blood-crazed mage. It was said that this person went into a frenzy by the color red. That was why, in the novel, the mage went crazy after seeing Rosalyn for the first time, saying that they needed to cut Rosalyn¡¯s head off to take her red hair and pupils. Cale brushed back his hair, that was an even brighter red than Rosalyn¡¯s hair, and started to think. ¡®What are the chances that I¡¯ll be in close proximity to that lunatic?¡¯ Even if something like that happened, he just had to tell Choi Han to kill. Cale was not worried that his own head would get cut off. Cale rxed and waited until Ron came to wake him up. Once Ron came at the usual time, Cale started to speak. ¡°Today will be yourst day to serve me.¡± ¡°I can do it again in a year.¡± That sounded terrible to Cale. He was nning on sending Ron to Choi Han immediately upon his return in a year. Cale was excited that he was getting rid of two baggages today, and started to speak with a light heart. "Let''s get ready." Cale made all the preparations and headed for the pce. All the participating nobles were scheduled to move together. The ck Dragon was going toe to the pce to report on the progress. After all of the preparations werepleted, Cale got on a carriage in front of the residence¡¯s main gate. It was not the Henituse carriage, instead, he was going to be riding with someone else today. ¡°Why did you want to go together?¡± Amiru responded with a calm smile, as Cale asked the question while getting onto the carriage. Amiru had reached out and asked Cale to go with her today. She got right to the point, since Cale did the same without even greeting her first. ¡°Young master Cale, what do you think about our territory building a naval base?¡± Cale started to smile. He had already received a letter from Eric letting him know that the tourism investment discussion did not go well. Eric said both Gilbert and Amiru were very disappointed. However, Amiru did not seem to be very disappointed. In fact, she seemed to have made up her mind about something else, something big. He looked toward her and started to speak. ¡°Didn¡¯t you already make up your mind, youngdy Amiru?¡± Amiru lightly nodded her head. ¡°Yes. I didn¡¯t think it was a decision I could make on my own, so I contacted my mother. I n to discuss it with young master Gilbert today as well.¡± The creation of a new military base. Something like that was not easy to aplish. The money wasn¡¯t the issue, it was more about the rtionship between powers within the territory thatplicated things. Especially in times of peace, like right now. That was why the crown would have their eyes on the Northeast. The east was the only side with ess to the ocean, but, most importantly, there was a bnce of power in the East. It would also be difficult for the high-ranking nobles in the other regions to influence such a base as well. ¡°Then youngdy Amiru¡¯s concern is that the crown¡¯s influence in your territory will get stronger because of this?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± Amiru gave a short answer, before continuing on. ¡°That is why I asked for this time with you today.¡± It meant that she had something to discuss with him. Cale leaned on the back of the seat, and asked while in afortable position, as if he was in his own carriage. ¡°I am curious to know what your question is, but I think I need to tell you something first.¡± He knew why Amiru was here. ¡°Any decision regarding the funds of the Henituse family is made solely by my father. A trash like me has no decision-making powers.¡± The royal family would grant permission to build a naval base and invest huge sums of money. Naturally, the ownership of that naval base would then be passed on to the royal family. When building a military base in a territory that is outside the capital, there are a lot of different contracts between the crown and the nobility for ownership and other logistics involving the military base. There was a significant difference in manpower and funds between using the location as a military base than using the cliffs and the ocean for just tourism. Amiru and Gilbert¡¯s families were, honestly speaking, just average in wealth,cking both the funds and the manpower toplete such a project. That was what Amiru wanted to prevent. That meant that there was only one method. Borrowing money from someone with a lot of money. ¡°Is that really the case?¡± Amiru¡¯s smile seemed very intelligent. She had entered the crown prince¡¯s room during the wine party with Eric and Gilbert once Cale had left. It was then that she learned that the crown prince was interested in the shoreline, even though he was not interested in tourism. When she returned to her residence that night, she thought about Cale¡¯s words, and figured out his intentions. ¡°His Highness the crown prince was wary of the Whipper Kingdom and the kingdoms to the north. I could tell based on our conversation with him, so I sought out some information from the information guild.¡± ¡®I knew it.¡¯ Cale could tell from Amiru¡¯s words that the crown prince and the royal family were aware of the fact that the Whipper Kingdom would soon face a civil war, and that the North was gathering their forces. ¡®But this was unexpected.¡¯ Amiru¡¯s decision-making was on point. Amiru¡¯s family was not doing very well right now, relying a lot on Eric Wheelsman¡¯s family for help. It would have cost a lot to get information on foreign kingdoms through the information guild, but her willingness to spend that money to verify a single piece of information showed her personality. Amiru looked toward Cale, who was quietly listening, before continuing. ¡°I heard the Henituse territory is currently fortifying its walls. I believe the Henituse family will be interested in the military, since it is a territory that does not allow any kind of invasions.¡± Cale nodded his head at her statement and responded. ¡°I will speak to my father about it.¡± ¡°We will also send an official request as well.¡± Cale and Amiru looked at each other and smiled. If this naval base was to be created, the bnce of power in the Northeast will shift to Cale, Eric, Amiru, and Gilbert¡¯s four families. If the Henituse family provided the funds to have a steady influence in the base, the Henituse family would receive multiple facets of support from the base. Amiru hesitated for a while, before continuing to speak. ¡°I am a bit worried because of the whirlpools, but there are paths that have been used for ages, and the whirlpool will actually serve as a defense to prevent foreign nations from invading. That is why I want to give it a go.¡± Whirlpools. Cale prevented himself from smiling as soon as she mentioned the whirlpools. That whirlpools will soon be Cale¡¯s to utilize as he wishes. ¡®Wouldn¡¯t it be great to build a house on one of those cliffs and enjoy the sunset in the future?¡¯ It would be difficult for him to stay in the Henituse estate once he hands control to Basen. Cale¡¯s n was to hide in some remote corner during the war, and then head to Amiru or Gilbert¡¯s territory after the war was over to build a house on a cliff to rx while looking out at the sea. It would be a good location, since it was pretty close to the Henituse territory as well. ¡°Thank you for your help, young master Cale.¡± ¡°Hahaha, to ask a trash for support. I have no power whatsoever, I am just delivering your message to my father.¡± Cale waved it off, and started tough. However, Amiru did not believe his words at all anymore. ¡®Amiru, you need to be cautious when you don¡¯t have power. However, you need to be bold if you want to earn power.¡¯ That was what her mother, the head of the Ubarr territory, had said as she agreed on the naval base. Amiru was simr to her mother. That was why she worked to be bold, even while remaining cautious. This was her philosophy for dealing with people as well. ¡°It is enough for you to deliver our message for us.¡± Amiru reached her hand out to Cale, and Cale shook it. She then let go, before adding on. ¡°Pleasee visit the Ubarr territory next time. There are actually a lot of interesting ces to see.¡± ¡°I will go if I have the chance to do so.¡± The Sound of the Wind. It will be Cale¡¯s fast feet, and, at the same time, give him control over a whirlwind that can be used for both offense and defense. Cale thought about the Ubarr coast, where that ancient power was located. ¡°I hope that the opportunityes soon.¡± The carriage arrived at the pce as soon as he said that. Cale got off the carriage and looked around. The current time was 8 am. The staff would already be at the za of Glory to prepare for the celebration. The Royal Knights will allow people to enter at 8:30 am, filling the za full of people. It will be a situation where it will be difficult for anyone to go in or out. The celebration will start thirty minutes after that, and Cale¡¯s group will start looking for the hidden picture starting at 8:30 am. Nes, bags, pendants. The magic bombs will be hiding in all sorts of shapes. Cale¡¯s group would find the people who have the bombs located on them. Well, it didn¡¯t matter if they didn¡¯t find them, since the answer will reveal itself. ¡°Oh, you¡¯re here?¡± Cale received Eric and Gilbert¡¯s greeting, before standing next to them with Amiru. "Everyone came early." "Of course. We will start moving at 8:05 am.¡± Eric said that to Cale, while his eyes were sending Cale another message. Be still today as well. Cale nodded his head while looking into Eric¡¯s eyes, and reminded himself internally. ¡®I do not know anything.¡¯ As soon as he thought that, the crown prince appeared in front of Cale. The nobles would follow behind the crown prince today. He then saw the person who arrived next to the crown prince, and covered his mouth with his hand. It was because he could not help but smirk. ¡°Oh my lord.¡± ¡°How is this possible?¡± Eric¡¯s shocked gasp and the murmuring of the nobles filled the area. However, Cale did not care about any of that. Instead, he lowered his hand while looking forward. Cale made eye contact with the person next to the crown prince. The eldest son that had been pushed aside, Taylor Stan. He was standing on his own two legs next to the crown prince. Taylor stealthily motioned with his eyes once he made eye contact with Cale. At the same time, Cale could hear the ck Dragon¡¯s voice in his head. The ck Dragon had entered the pce to give the current report of the situation. - I am here. Cale slightly nodded his head, and the voice continued. - We are dismantling all of the bombs that are currently stationed in the locations we found. We will dismantle thempletely at 8:55 am, as nned. Everything seemed to be going as nned. - I will be heading back now since we are busy, weak human. Use your shield if it seems like it¡¯ll hurt. Cale could not hear the ck Dragon¡¯s voice after that. It seemed to have quickly returned to help the others. This ck Dragon surprisingly put all of his effort into his assignments whenever Cale gave him a task toplete. It made Cale want to keep ordering the ck Dragon around. ¡®There shouldn¡¯t be any reason for me to use the shield.¡¯ Cale was thinking that he would not need to use the shield if things continued like this. ¡°All preparations have beenpleted.¡± One of the knights shouted out loud, and the crown prince got on the Royal Parade Carriage and spoke to the nobles getting on the royal carriages behind him. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± Cale also got onto a royal carriage. The carriage soon started to move, and Cale sat there with his arms crossed while having a stiff expression on his face. ¡°Nice to meet you all again.¡± The wheelchair-less Taylor greeted them. ¡°Nice to meet you. I am Amiru Ubarr.¡± ¡°...Nice to meet you.¡± Taylor Stan, Youngdy Amiru, and Venion¡¯sckey Neo Tolz ended up in the same carriage as them. Cale was wondering whether the crown prince purposely put them together in the same carriage. It was Cale¡¯s turn to introduce himself, but Cale just quietly sat there and looked out the carriage window. A trash was allowed to be this rude. He sat there with his arms crossed and looked toward the za of Glory. The chaos was not far away. 1. This doesn¡¯t trante as well in English, but in Korean, son of a bitch and dog are homophones. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 43: Somehow (1) Chapter 43: Somehow (1) 3Chapter 43: Somehow (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist However, the inside of the carriage was already chaotic. Cale looked toward Neo, whose legs were shaking, and internally clicked his tongue. Neo seemed to be frantic and full of concern. The majority of the nobles looked chaotic. ¡®Venion¡¯s face was a mess too.¡¯ Cale recalled Venion Stan¡¯s face that he peeked at before getting on the carriage. Venion was full of rage. Who would have ever expected this? Taylor Stan, the eldest son of the Stan family that was pushed aside, was walking on his own two feet without a wheelchair. Furthermore, a person from the Stan family was standing next to the crown prince, Alberu. Nobody could have expected such development. ¡®He managed to trade for the Healing Star.¡¯ Cale was curious about what Taylor and Cage traded with the crown prince for the Healing Star, but he did not look toward Taylor. Neo Tolz was sitting there shaking his leg, without even looking at Taylor. At that moment, Amiru started to speak. ¡°Young master Taylor, have your legspletely healed?¡± The cautiously stated question directly asked the question that everyone was thinking about. Taylor started to smile as he responded. ¡°It was a blessing from heaven. It ispletely healed.¡± ¡°Congrattions.¡± ¡°Thank you very much.¡± Ahem, mm. Neo Tolz let out some fake coughs before looking back and forth between Taylor¡¯s face and Taylor¡¯s legs. He then cautiously started to speak. ¡°Young master Taylor, will you be returning to the Marquis¡¯s estate now that your legs have healed?¡± The biggest reason Taylor was pushed aside was because his legs became paralyzed. Neo and the other nobles were probably curious as to whether or not Taylor would return to the estate to fight for the sessor position once again. Especially since Neo was one of Venion¡¯sckeys. Taylor looked toward Neo, and started to speak. ¡°Return?¡± It was a gentle voice, but there was firmness and coldness toward Neo hidden within Taylor¡¯s voice. ¡°That has always been my home. Isn¡¯t it obvious that I belong there?¡± Neo shriveled up even more at the coldness in Taylor¡¯s voice. However, Cale chose not to even look at them. Cale could see Taylor¡¯s reflection through the window every so often. Of course, Taylor didn¡¯t make it obvious to the others, making it look like he was just looking out the window like Cale as well. Cale could read the message Taylor was trying to send him when their eyes met. ¡®Young master Cale! I want to tell you everything! It is a very interesting story.¡¯ Cale was still stoic after seeing Taylor¡¯s sparkling gaze. Cale just hoped for Taylor to take over the Marquis position and prevent any harm from happening within his territory. That was why he did not want to talk to Taylor. However, an opportunity soon appeared for Taylor and Cale to chat. ¡°Ahem, then I will step out now.¡± As soon as the carriage arrived outside the za of Glory, Neo Tolz rushed out of the carriage to get away from them. Since he made it very obvious that he worked for Venion, this was a really awkward ce for him to be. He probably also wanted to report Taylor¡¯s current situation to Venion right away. ¡°Young master Cale, I wille back with young master Eric.¡± Amiru was worried that Cale might start something if he ran into the other Northeastern nobles, who happened to be in a carriage with Eric and Gilbert, and left alone to bring Eric and Gilbert over. ¡®Nothing should happen since young master Taylor and Young master Cale don¡¯t have any rtionship.¡¯ ¡®Based on young master Cale¡¯s personality, he will not start a conversation with anyone.¡¯ That was what Amiru was thinking as she quickly moved to find Eric and Gilbert. That resulted in Cale having to receive Taylor¡¯s bright smile. ¡°Finally, only the two of us are left.¡± It was something Cale did not like to hear. He made that feelingpletely visible on his face, but Taylor seemed to find that to be funny. Taylor quietlyughed, before throwing a straight at Cale. ¡°I got my leg fixed by promising to be the head of the Marquis¡¯s estate.¡± ¡°Did you promise your loyalty?¡± ¡°No. I made a deal.¡± Cale nodded his head. ¡°That¡¯s good. Congrattions on your healed legs.¡± Cale then turned away from Taylor, as if he had nothing else to say. Taylor found that reaction to be very fitting of Cale¡¯s personality, and took a small envelope out of his pocket and handed it to Cale. ¡°This is the contents of our deal.¡± ¡°...There is no need to give this to me.¡± Cale had a stoic expression, and Taylor responded. ¡°It¡¯ll be good for you to know, young master Cale.¡± He then threw another straight at Cale. ¡°Cage will be emunicated.¡± ¡°Is it because she does whatever she wants?¡± ¡°It is. She is very happy about it.¡± Cage was finally starting on the path of the crazy priestess. She will now progress like the emunicated priestess who is seen as a brave priestess by others, like in the novel. ¡°That¡¯s good.¡± Cale could see Taylor happily nodding his head at his words. Taylor then started to frown, like all of his emotions were crashing against him all at once like a whirlpool, and started to speak. ¡°This is just the beginning. We will be victorious. Right, young master Cale?¡± ¡®Why is he including me in their victory?¡¯ Cale was curious about that, but decided to answer his question for now. ¡°You will be victorious.¡± ¡°Thank you very much. Then I will get off first.¡± Taylor got up and looked down at his legs, before saying goodbye to Cale and getting off. ¡°The three of us should drink together after our victory.¡± ¡°The Henituse wine is delicious.¡± Taylor finally opened the carriage door at Cale¡¯s words and left. Cale immediately opened the envelope once he was alone. He then ripped it up. ¡°Tsk.¡± He lightly clicked his tongue and shoved the note deep inside his inner pocket. There really was a secret to the crown prince¡¯s birth. Cale shook his head and stepped out of the carriage. ¡°Cale.¡± Cale turned his head at Eric¡¯s calling. He could see the full za of Glory behind their shoulders. ¡°Young master Cale, let us go. It is our turn to enter the za.¡± In the novel, Choi Han was curious about these people, who had a spot higher than the normal citizens of the kingdom. Today, Cale was going to that same spot. However, he was still at the bottompared to the royal family and the holy priests. Cale looked toward the bell tower at the entrance of the za. The bell tower had a giant clock on it. The current time was 8:25 am. It was time for the nobles and priests to enter. The knights started to prevent any more citizens from entering to create room for the nobility. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± Cale pushed Eric and the others in front of him and started to walk. He could see all of the people in the za as he got closer. There were so many people that he couldn¡¯t even tell how many people were there. However, they were notpletely stuffed like sardines. That was howrge the za of Glory was, and the fact that the crown was limiting the number of people helped out as well. In response, some people were in shops near the za and roofs of buildings nearby to try to get a glimpse of the king¡¯s celebration. ¡°Young master Cale, is this your first time at the za of Glory?¡± Cale leisurely nodded his head at Gilbert¡¯s question. ¡°Yes. I briefly passed through on my carriage, but it is my first time seeing all of it.¡± Cale looked around the za as he said that. The tea shop to the South. The inn to the West. A flower shop to the East. The top of the Ceramist Association building to the North. These were the four ces Cale focused on as he looked around. ¡°The za is prettyrge.¡± Cale verified the locations the magic bombs were positioned. At the same time, he looked toward the fountain to the south. A young boy was waving a g, like he was trying to wee the king. That young boy was Lock. ¡®Things are going as nned.¡¯ Cale knew that Choi Han and the ck Dragon would be watching him right now, and looked toward the Bell Tower. The current time was 8:30 am. ¡°We are opening up a path now.¡± The knights closed up all entrances to allow the nobles to enter. At the same time, Cale snapped his fingers. Snap. It was a simple gesture that nobody would question. Lock disappeared as soon as it happened. It was time to find the hidden items. Of course, it wasn¡¯t necessary at all. ¡®The answer will appear at 9:01 am.¡¯ However, it was easier if they knew the answer in advance. Furthermore, since Cale didn¡¯t need to move, it was fine to look for these hidden items. ¡°Everybody please take a seat over here.¡± The seats were arranged with everyone¡¯s names posted in specific seats. The king and the royal family was not at the za just yet. Even the crown prince, who came with the nobles, was not out yet. Cale arrived at his seat, and started to frown. ¡°We seem to run into each other a lot, young master Cale.¡± ¡°That does seem to be the case, young master Taylor.¡± It was the same as during the feast. Cale sat down next to Taylor, and looked down at the people below the tform. He then looked toward the Bell Tower. He recalled the story in the novel. The single location that Choi Han managed to find a bomb in the novel was not one of the locations this time. There were already many changes to the story. However, at least there should not be anyone who dies by the crumbling of the buildings, unlike in the novel. The Mana Disturbance Tool was buried underneath the Bell Tower. The current time was 8:40 am. Cale turned to his left after hearing Eric¡¯s voice. ¡°Cale. Be still. Okay?¡± ¡°Hyung-nim.¡± Eric became nervous after hearing the tone Cale used to call out to him. Cale, who used to enjoy wearing fancy clothes and showing off until just two years ago, was suddenly only wearing dark clothes, and had apletely different demeanor about him. ¡°I will be very still today. I n to do nothing at all.¡± Eric was captivated by Cale¡¯s voice, and subconsciously nodded his head. Cale seemed to be satisfied with this reaction, as heughed and looked at the clock again. 8:45 am. He could hear the ck Dragon¡¯s voice. The dragon was looking at him as Cale expected. - 15 minutes left. Dragons were really capable of everything. There was nothing their magic could not aplish. Cale praised the ck Dragon internally as he got up from his seat. ¡°The stars of the Crossman family, our royal family, are now entering!¡± Only one entrance to the za was open at this time. The crown prince was in the lead, the second and third prince nked his sides, and the other princes and princesses walked in behind them. A group of individuals with beautiful blonde hair entered the za. This was the royal family that was blessed by the Sun God, the pride of the Roan Kingdom. Wooooooooooooooooooooooooooo- The cheering of the citizens filled the za. It was so loud that it felt like the ground was shaking. Cale remembered the words of the ck Dragon. ¡®The crown prince¡¯s hair and eyes are brown.¡¯ Brown was known as the most average color hair and eyes. Cale looked toward the royal family, and lightly pped. And then, it was finally 8:50 am. ¡°His Highness, King Zed Crossman, the sun of the Roan Kingdom, is now entering!¡± Wooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo- The healthy 50-year-old king appeared in the za in his parade carriage. Cale was watching the king, before moving his gaze away to another spot in the za. He could see a flower pot on top of the Ceramist Association building to the north. The current time was 8:55 am. ¡®They dismantled it.¡¯ Cale started to smile. Rosalyn, The ck Dragon, On, and Hong will now hide within the crowd in the za. King Zed was slowly heading toward the za from far off in the distance. Zed Crossman had risen to the position of king at the age of 20 after the former king¡¯s sudden death. He utilized this time of peace to his advantage, killing off all of his siblings to solidify his position of power. Waaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa- The fanfare for the king was still very loud. King Zed passed through the za entrance and headed to the highest tform. Cale just calmly watched this all happen. There was a special tform for the king in front of the Bell Tower. The king and the queen waved to the crowd, before walking up to the tform. The queen stood in front of her seat as King Zed went up to the magic vocal amplifier. Cale looked at the clock again. Current time was 8:58 am. The King lifted up his hand, and the cheers slowly died down. Finally, once the za waspletely quiet, the king started to speak. ¡°It has already been 30 years since this king has received the blessing of the sun to rule over this kingdom.¡± The king seemed very happy. Unfortunately, it was now 9 am. ¡°Huh?¡± Cale could hear Eric¡¯s confused voice. ¡°What is that?¡± Cale then heard Taylor¡¯s anxious voice. Cale leisurely raised his head to look at the top of the Bell Tower. ¡°What?¡± ¡°Who is that?¡± ¡°What is going on?¡± The mumblings of the crowd started to get louder. King Zed looked behind him, and then moved his gaze up the Bell Tower. Cale looked at the top of the Bell Tower and started to smile. King Zed started to shout. ¡°Who are you?!¡± The knights and mages headed to the Bell Tower. The citizens started to get nervous about what was going on. They had no choice. A person appeared on top of the Bell Tower, and then more people in ck attires started to appear on top of the buildings nearby as well. ¡°Get down this instant!¡± ¡°Everybody, head up to the top of the buildings now!¡± Cale heard the voices of the knights nearby, and looked toward the man standing on top of the Bell Tower with ck attire and a mask. It was the blood-crazy mage, Redika. ¡®I was worried this would be different than the novel as well.¡¯ If Redika did not show up, he would have needed the ck Dragon to reverse the flow of manaing to the mana bombs in order to locate the hidden Redika, and allow Choi Han to kill him. Cale was relieved that he would not need to do that, and remembered the description in the novel. Redika¡¯s hand became covered in a red-colored mana. This punk was unique, in that people could see the color of his mana, even though he was a mage. He then swung his hand and announced as he had in the novel. <¡±Should be fun.¡±> ¡°Should be fun.¡± A chilling voice that sounded like metal screeching against one another, filled the za. Then, the red mana shot out to different spots in the za. That moment was exactly 9:01 am. Oooooooooong- A vibration started from underneath the Bell Tower. Beeeeeeep- Beeeeeeeep- Magic devices started to go off in multiple locations. The red mana that was flying toward the detonation devices inside the magic bombs suddenly lost strength and started to spin aimlessly in position. It was the result of the mana disturbance. Then, it happened inside the za as well. Beeeeeeeep- Four spots started to ring in the za. ¡°Found it.¡± Cale¡¯s quiet voice was drowned out by the rm of the magic devices. Someone within the area of those four rms would have the magic bomb on them. As Cale expected, the magic bombs had an rm to sound that there was an error. Cale could see Choi Han, Rosalyn, and Lock heading toward the four locations. 10 minutes. Even if they could not manage to dismantle the bombs in 10 minutes, they had plenty of time to move the bombs to the mountain in the rear to make it go off without hurting anyone. It was possible because of Rosalyn and the ck Dragon. - Found one human. Cale started to smile after hearing the invisible ck Dragon¡¯s report. The 10 minutes had just started. 1. Quite a lot of content to get out of a single gaze... 2. Apparently, it is a guy. Chapter 32 updated to show HE instead of SHE If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 44: Somehow (2) Chapter 44: Somehow (2) 0Chapter 44: Somehow (2) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale could see Choi Han grabbing someone as the ck Dragon made his report. It was the person the ck Dragon determined to be in possession of the magic bomb. Cale could see the ne on the person¡¯s neck. ¡®That must be it.¡¯ Cale could see Choi Han ripping off the person¡¯s ne. At the same time, Cale¡¯s body was jerked. Someone had pulled Cale¡¯s arm. ¡°Cale!¡± It was Eric Wheelsman. Cale slowly looked around him, starting with the top of the Bell Tower. ¡°Hahahaha-¡° The blood crazy mage Redika wasughing. Wiiiiiiiiing. A loud noise appeared alongside the noise of scratching metal,bining to create a terrifying screech. ¡°Your Highness! Please get to a safe spot!¡± The Royal Knights and some mages were next to the royal family and the king in order to help them escape. Cale first looked toward the crown prince. His hair was still blonde. ¡®Was it not magic using mana?¡¯ ((Did another dragon dye his hair? Or is it a different type of strength?)) [This originally had <<>> but that doesn''t seem to make it show] Cale remembered what the ck Dragon had said in the past. Cale decided to stop thinking about it, and continued to look around. Half of the remaining Royal Knights and mages were working to calm the crowd and find the Mana Disturbance Tool, while the other half was rushing toward the secret organization. Redika, who had beenughing for a while now, started to speak. ¡°This is annoying¡± With that, all of the secret organization members other than Redika started tounch long-range attacks. Spears, daggers, and throwing knives; all sorts of attacks started to pour down upon the knights. Boom! Wiiiiiiiiiiiing- Beeeeeeeep. Cale found it very loud. At the same time, the ck Dragon continued its report. - One more human. - And another. 9:04 am. This was the third person so far. ¡°Cale! We should go as well! We should go!¡± ¡°Young master Cale, hurry up!¡± Cale looked toward Eric, Amiru, Gilbert, and Taylor. They had all quickly gathered around him. Eric was looking around with a chaotic expression on his face. Cale followed his lead and looked around as well. ¡°What are you doing? Hurry up and let us go!¡± ¡°Let us out right now!¡± The nobles were fighting to get out of the za as quickly as possible. Of course, there were a couple calm ones as well. However, It was different underneath the tform. ¡°Why are you blocking the exit!¡± ¡°Open up a path!¡± The citizens were screaming for the knights to open the door and rushing toward the exit. The knights and soldiers shouted back at the citizens. ¡°Please calm down!¡± ¡°Please wait just a moment!¡± ¡°You expect us to wait in a situation like this? Get out of our way!¡± ¡°Are you crazy?! The nobles are trying to leave right now! Let us leave as well!¡± Cale looked for hands being raised in the air in the midst of that chaos. ¡°W, what are you doing?!¡± Choi Han pulled a bag off of an old man¡¯s shoulder and thrust his arm into the air. This was the third person. Cale turned his head to look around at the people around him. The door for the nobles and priests was already open, with many nobles and priests quickly heading out as fast as they could. It looked more peaceful because there were fewer people than the gate for the citizens down below, but it was still chaotic with each person trying to get out faster than the other. That was why. ¡°What a mess.¡± It was aplete mess. Eric was frantically pacing around, so Cale put his hand on Eric¡¯s shoulder to calm him down. He then held onto Eric¡¯s shoulder tightly. ¡°Hyung-nim.¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Cale continued to speak once the pain snapped Eric out of his chaotic state. ¡°Calm down.¡± Eric calmed down after seeing Cale¡¯s calm demeanor. He then looked around. The knights were fighting against these unknown assants while the royal family was in the process of escaping. The citizens looked to be in a state of chaos. As Eric absorbed all of the events going on around him and turned back to look at Cale, Cale started to speak. ¡°That is more like you.¡± ¡°...Thank you. I feel like my head has cleared.¡± Cale shrugged his shoulders and turned away. Gilbert and Amiru hade back to their senses after hearing what Cale had said to Eric, and were looking at Cale as well. Even if they tried to head for the noble¡¯s exit gate right now, they would just be swept up in the chaos. The head families of the other regions were busy gathering their people and calming them down while trying to figure out a path of escape. Gilbert watched some of the other nobles before looking around. The other nobles from the Northeast region were headed toward them. They were all looking at Eric, but Eric and Gilbert were looking at Cale. ¡°...What the...¡± Cale looked toward Taylor. Taylor was different from the others. Taylor¡¯s concern right now was that the citizens¡¯ gate was still not fully open. The gate was opening very slowly, most likely so that they could control the flow of people running out. Taylor was a very altruistic and good person. That was why he was more worried about the citizens than himself. Cale looked toward Eric and started to speak. Eric had the qualifications to be the leader of this group, after all. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± After hearing Cale¡¯s words, Eric nodded his head and led the Northeast nobles to the gate. Cale looked at the clock. 9:08 am. The mages were busy getting rid of the mana disturbance. The Mana Disturbance Tool was going to run out in a few minutes. It onlysted this long because there were a lot of people in the za adding to the chaos. - One more removed. Now it was four. There were just two more remaining. Two minutes. Cale thought that they should have enough time. Redika¡¯s red mana balls were still spinning around in the air. The moment the Mana Disturbance Tool stops working, those mana balls will immediately head for the magic bombs and detonate them. Cale looked at the clock on the Bell Tower before starting to walk. The ck Dragon made another report at this time. - That is all. ¡°... What?¡± ¡°Young master Cale, what is wrong?¡± Taylor, who had been walking next to Cale, looked at Cale with confusion, but Cale did not have time to focus on him. ¡®There are only four?¡¯ Cale remembered that there were a total of 10 bombs in the novel. Had it changed? Cale stopped walking and looked around. The Mana Disturbance Tool had a range of arge mountain. If the magic bombs were buried elsewhere, the rm would have gone off at that location. But the rms for the high-grade devices only went off inside the za. Did the number of bombs change because the story has changed? 9:09 am came and went, and only a few seconds were left until 9:10 am. One of the mage¡¯s amplified voice rang out in the za. ¡°Activate Mana Stability Magic!¡± As soon as he said that, mages from eight different directions chanted a spell at the same time. Eight magic balls of light shot up into the sky. Boom- They blew up in the air and started to spread like a thin tent. And then, finally. Wiiiiiiiiing- The noise started to quiet down. Mana was starting to be stable once again. 9:09 am and 55 seconds. Cale could see four items being shot up into the sky at that time. It was Rosalyn and the ck Dragon using their magic. Those four items followed the stabilized flow of mana and flew toward the mountains to the south of the capital. For these two, who were extremely sensitive to mana, something like this was a breeze. The citizens nkly watched as these four items flew like shooting stars toward the mountain with harsh terrain that prevented people from traversing through. ¡°Mana Stability Complete!¡± 9:10 am and 5 seconds. The mage shouted out loud, and Redika¡¯s red mana balls started to chase behind the items flying toward the mountain. As the red mana balls finally came into contact with the four items... Booooooom-! Arge explosion urred in the sky. It was so bright that it temporarily blinded everyone who was looking at it. Arge pir of ck smoke soon followed and rushed up into the sky. Even though the mountain was far to the south of the za, arge gust of wind rushed toward the crowd in the za. The za instantly became silent. The mages¡¯ expressions turnedpletely pale. It was because they realized the identity and purpose of the red mana balls that started to fly as soon as they stabilized the mana. ¡°...Those were magic bombs.¡± Taylor Stan muttered those words in shock. Any noble who had the slightest knowledge of magic would know that only one item was capable of having such a destructive force. A magic bomb. Even the king and some of the princes, who were retreating, stopped moving. Everybody could not help but think about how those items had shot up from within the crowd before starting to fly toward the mountain. Cale brushed his hair that was a mess from the gust of wind. ¡®I guess there were only four bombs.¡¯ Nobody had died. - We saved them all. Cale could hear the ck Dragon¡¯s voice in his head. Cale just quietly listened to the dragon. The once chaotic za was now very calm. No, it was almost depressing now. The people were probably thinking about the terrible scene that could have happened in the za. They were probably swept up in their emotions of both relief and fear. - I saved them! The ck Dragon sounded very happy and excited. This was the first time that this young ck Dragon, who had been wishing for its own death after living a life of despair, had saved something with its own strength. Cale thought about the ck Dragon¡¯s emotions as he moved his gaze to the location the magic bombs had shot up into the air. The knights and mages were heading to that location. However, Cale¡¯s group had already left the scene. They then used the invisibility magic device Cale had borrowed from Billos to hide in the farthest corner of the za. ¡®Then Choi Han will chase after the mage to kill him.¡¯ Cale looked toward the top of the Bell Tower. Eric and the rest had already stopped moving. They were able to figure out from what the mages were saying that the magic bombs were supposed to explode in the za, but ended up exploding in the mountain far away to the south. How could they not? Redika said it himself from the top of the Bell Tower. ¡®Unfortunately, nobody died. Why did they go off over there?¡¯ Redika continued to speak in that metal screeching voice. ¡°Guess this one was a failure.¡± The King started to shout toward Redika. ¡°What are you doing? Who are you? Do you think you will be fine after attempting tomit such a deed?!¡± King Zed¡¯s response changed after realizing that it was not just an attack that was nned. The fact that they were trying to detonate magic bombs directly next to the royal family and nobles was no different than dering war against this kingdom. But Cale had a different thought regarding Redika¡¯s statement. ¡®..., ¡®This one,¡¯ was a failure?¡¯ Cale¡¯s expression stiffened, worried that there was something else as well. His changed expression made Taylor, who was approaching Cale to speak thinking that things were now okay, stop moving. He then looked toward the top of the Bell Tower like Cale was doing. ¡°Oh well then.¡± The metal screeching voice rang throughout the za. Redika shouted toward the king and the knights without caring about the fact that the mages used levitation magic to approach him. Snap. He snapped his fingers and two people appeared next to him. These two were just wearing ck attires without the red star and white star symbol on their chest. They were each wearing a backpack. Cale started to frown. ¡®Those are the remaining bombs.¡¯ Those two people were most likely members of the assassin team of the secret organization. They were people whose lives did not matter. Cale now understood the location of the remaining two bombs. The two of them each took out three scrolls and ripped them at the same time. Shield, eleration, andbustion. ¡°Go.¡± Redika gave the order and the two people, whose bodies were now burning, rushed toward the citizens below the Bell Tower. Redika shot out two balls of red mana toward the two people. ¡°S, stop them!¡± Magic bombs were guaranteed to go off if they were not dismantled. Unfortunately, Redika was closer to these two people than anybody else. The red mana reached the backpacks of the two suicide bombers. The bombs were going to detonate soon. The two people, who had used eleration magic, were rushing toward the za at a fast speed. One of the two rushed toward the royal family while the other... ¡®He¡¯sing this way.¡¯ Rushed toward the nobles. All of this happened in less than 10 seconds. - I¡¯ming! Cale raised his hand as he heard the dragon¡¯s voice. ¡°Aaaaaaah!¡± ¡°R, run away!¡± ¡°Dodge!¡± It was toote to dodge. You were not going to get out of the bomb¡¯s range simply by running for a few seconds. ¡°C, Cale, let¡¯s go!¡± ¡°Young master Cale, hurry!¡± Eric, Taylor, Gilbert, and Amiru did not run away right away like the others. They were trying to save Cale as well. However, it was all toote. Cale was extremely annoyed. If he started to run and the bomb went off, he would probably lose an arm. However, the Vitality of the Heart would help him recover his arm. However, the people who were trying to protect him would lose at least a limb no matter how fast they ran. They would also not be able to recover from their injuries as he could. Rather than allowing something like that to happen... ¡°...Sigh.¡± Cale let out a deep sigh and opened his palm up into the air. It was time to change ns. At that moment, Rosalyn, who was teleported through the ck Dragon¡¯s magic, created a twoyer shield around herself and Cale. At the same time... ¡°Explode!¡± Redika shouted out with joy. ¡°Huh?¡± Rosalyn had a nk expression as she stared at what was going on in front of her. The suicide bomber who was headed their way was surrounded byrge wings. A silver shield shot up to the sky as if it was protecting the people in the za, and the wings of the shield surrounded the bomber. It looked like the shield and the wings werepletely swallowing up the bomber. And a strong shield that was not very visible because of the silver light surrounded the silver shield. - I will block it as well. The ck Dragon announced in Cale¡¯s head. A holy looking person with a silver shield was standing underneath the sun. A strand of silver light connected the red-haired man with the shield in the sky. Cale started to curse as his hair fluttered from the gust of wind. ¡°...Fuck!¡± And then the bomb went off. 1. (PR: OUR YOUNG MASTER CAUSED PAIN TO SOMEONE?!?!?! I¡¯m so proud.) If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 45: Somehow (3) Chapter 45: Somehow (3) 1Chapter 45: Somehow (3) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Boom- Boooooom- Two explosions that could not bepared to the one from earlier simultaneously went off in the za. Everybody crouched down and covered their heads with their hands. ¡°Ahhhhhhh!¡± ¡°Ugh. My, my arm!¡± ¡°Ugggggh!¡± The screams of people getting injured or killed filled the za. And then... Swiiiiiiish- A gust that sounded like rain brushed by over the heads of the people. The people at the center of the za got covered by the dust from the ground, while the people by the fountains got drenched by the fountain water before they all slowly raised their heads. The first thing they saw was something going toward the North. None of the royal family was hurt because a shield was created to protect them, but the people around them were hurt. These were the people who arrived at the za earlier than anybody else to wait for the king. In addition, there were the servants, the lower ranking officials, the lower tiered knights, and the mages who did not have enough time tounch their shields. Some of them were injured while others were dead. The ck smoke made it impossible to see the royal family¡¯s blonde hair. The people still alive all raised their heads up. They then looked toward where the nobles and the citizens had been standing. aang- The silver shield started to slowly break like pieces of ss. The silver wings crumbled down as well. As they started to crumble, ck smoke started toe out of the encirclement. There definitely was a person inside, however, nothing, not even a piece of flesh or even a drop of blood, could be seen. Everybody looking felt chills going down their body. This helped them understand the strength of the explosion. Their gazes naturally turned toward a single location. It was the end of that silver strand of light. ¡°Young master Cale!¡± Rosalyn quickly started to support Cale back up, as one of Cale¡¯s knees gave out and he was starting to fall. Rosalyn looked back and forth between Cale and the silver shield that was slowly dissipating. She then looked toward the royal family. These were two very strong explosions. Of course, Rosalyn knew that the ck Dragon¡¯s shield had absorbed the majority of the explosion, but it was still true that Cale¡¯s silver shield had done something amazing. That meant that the recoil from it would be severe as well. Rosalyn grabbed onto Cale¡¯s arm to keep him up and called out to him. Cale was standing there with his head down. ¡°Young master Cale, are you okay? Young master Cale!¡± He then started to think. ¡®Damn, it hurts.¡¯ Cale had lowered the strength of the silver shield after seeing the ck Dragonunch a shield of its own right before the explosion. Thanks to that, the recoil was not as severe. However, his palm was still throbbing. Cale, well, Kim Rok Soo, tended to exaggerate when it came to pain. Even a small amount of pain was still painful. He tried to raise his head back up. ¡°Cale-nim!¡± ¡°Young master!¡± Cale could hear the voices calling out to him getting closer. He then raised his head. ¡°Cale, are you okay?¡± ¡°I¡¯m ok...cough!¡± ¡°B, blood......!¡± Eric¡¯s face turned pale, and he almost fell backward. However, Cale started to feel better after coughing up that small amount of blood. ¡®The Vitality of the Heart really is good.¡¯ The pain in his body disappeared, and his body started to settle back to normal at a very fast rate. In fact, Cale¡¯s body became healthier than ever as the, ¡®Vitality of the Heart,¡¯ started to go to work. A refreshing feeling that was simr to the feeling he had when he was able to sleep peacefully because Ron had gone on vacation surrounded Cale. He then slowly closed his eyes and started to feel his body. ¡®Arms and legs are still attached. My palm was throbbing a bit earlier, but even a paper cut hurt more than that. My body is healthier than ever after that single cough.¡¯ Cale felt like he understood why the heroes never threw the ancient powers away, even if they were not very useful. There were benefits to using these ancient powers. Using it hurt less than he expected, and now he was feeling great. Cale started to smile in satisfaction. As he did that, the people surrounding him became a mess. ¡°You think this is funny right now? Stopughing!¡± Cale opened his eyes after hearing Taylor¡¯s shocked and sorrowful voice. He had opened his eyes after checking his body and realizing that everything felt great. However, the sun was shining too brightly that he had to squint. ¡°Stop trying to open your eyes either!¡± ¡®What¡¯s going on with him?¡¯ Cale looked toward Taylor in confusion as he sat down with Rosalyn¡¯s support. A noble should not do something like this, but he felt like it would be okay given the situation. Cale pretty much just plopped down on the ground without caring about what people thought of him. The ck Dragon continued to yap away in his ear. - Weak human, you cannot die! You are too weak! If you die, I will destroy everything! I will kill everyone, destroy everything, and once everything is gone, including your corpse, I will kill myself as well! The ck Dragon seemed to be concerned, but the wordsing out of its mouth were pretty vicious. Cale started to frown from the content of the ck Dragon¡¯s words. ¡°Young master Cale, we will call a priest over!¡± ¡°I will go with you!¡± Amiru and Gilbert said that before rushing toward the priest who was entering through the gate. They did not care about their messed up dress and suit. Seeing them rushing forward like that, Cale did not have the courage to say that nothing was hurting. ¡®Doesn¡¯t hurt to be checked out. I also need to pretend to be hurt.¡¯ It was great for Cale if the priest showed up. Eric Wheelsman was standing next to Cale and ring at the other Northeastern nobles nearby, as well, as the other nobles from other factions, to prevent them from approaching. Cale was not looking at this, as he was looking at a discussion that may create some more chaos. ¡°...Please get out of my way.¡± ¡°No way. Civilians are not allowed inside.¡± ¡°...Civilian? Who came up with crap like that?¡± Choi Han was talking to the knight in charge of the nobles with a cold gaze in his eyes. Cale had told Choi Han not toe forward, no matter what. Cale started to frown and waved away Choi Han, who had gone against his order. Choi Han saw Cale¡¯s reaction, so he bit down on his lips before bowing his head. ¡°I apologize.¡± ¡®I told him not toe forward, but it¡¯s not something to apologize about.¡¯ Cale then saw Lock, as well as On and Hong on Lock¡¯s shoulders, behind Choi Han. Cale smiled to signal to them that he was fine, and turned away from them as they all seemedpletely lost. ¡°...Young master Cale, are you okay?¡± Cale nodded his head at Rosalyn¡¯s question and wiped away the blood at the corner of his lips. ¡°Yes. I am absolutely fine.¡± Cale¡¯s movement seemed normal as he wiped away the blood that was as red as his hair. However, Rosalyn had just seen what Cale had done. Could a princess like her take the same action? She quietly started to mumble to herself. ¡°...I really can¡¯t figure you out.¡± However, she just silently stared at Cale once he turned to look back at her. Cale¡¯s expression became serious. It was because he realized that she was not looking at him, but past him. He then followed her gaze and turned around. ¡°Ah.¡± The blood drinking mage. He was now floating in the air as he looked down on them. ¡°I never expected something like this to happen. But this is pretty fun as well.¡± The blood crazy mage Redika said that as he looked toward the royal family. The mages once again used levitation magic, and even the capital¡¯s guard rushed over to aim their arrows toward Redika. Redika then turned his gaze toward the nobles. He made eye contact with Cale, and then noticed Rosalyn next to Cale as well. Although her hair was dyed brown right now, Redika should recognize Rosalyn, whom he saw at the Blue Wolf Vige. The metal screeching voice rang through the za once again. ¡°Wow, so many different colors of blood that I like!¡± Many of the magesunched attack magics toward Redika. ¡°Attack!¡± It was not visible because of the mask, but Redika¡¯s eyes curled up like a crescent moon underneath. ¡°I want to put them in my disy case.¡± Cale¡¯s expression stiffened, and he identally let out his thoughts. ¡°Is he crazy?¡± Usually, crazy characters like this end up dying quickly. Cale thought about that, and looked toward Choi Han. Choi Han nodded his head and disappeared. Naturally, Choi Han was moving to capture and kill that mage. However, Choi Han was not moving toward Redika. Redika looked toward the king as the magic attacks were about to hit him, and started to speak. ¡°Then see you next time!¡± He then disappeared. Not only that, he took everyone who came with him as well. This bastard¡¯s specialty was teleportation magic. There was no way for the people attacking him to know where they went. However, the novel mentioned where Redika teleported to after disappearing from the za. Choi Han, On, Hong, and Lock all headed there earlier. If that really is where Redika and the secret organization members teleported to, they will most likely die by Choi Han¡¯s hands. ¡®I¡¯m just worried that Choi Han will go berserk.¡¯ That was why Cale had sent On, Hong, and Lock with Choi Han. The three of them would be able to help Choi Han remain rational. Choi Han was weak against young and weak existences. Cale stood up from the seat. The king was heading back up to the podium, and the people in the za started to chatter once again. The viins had disappeared, but they left behind a cruel sight. The king was heading to the podium to try to calm the crowd. ¡°I will do my best to get revenge for this cruel and terrible incident. That is why I want all of you to follow the orders of the crown and focus on calming yourselves and getting rest. We will push this celebration back.¡± Cale turned away from the king to look at Rosalyn. Originally, she was supposed to hide her presence today, but she had revealed herself for Cale. ¡®She probably stepped in because the ck Dragon cannot reveal himself.¡¯ Rosalyn started to smile after making eye contact with Cale. She then mouthed a word to respond to Cale¡¯s gaze. ¡®Secret.¡¯ Cale started to smile as well. She really was someone who was on the same wavelength as him. Cale had given the six people in his crew some instructions before the day began. First, the dragon and the beast tribe trio would not have their identities revealed, no matter what. That was the most important task. Second, even if Choi Han and Rosalyn end up being recognized, they will just say that they happened to be here by coincidence. This was only possible because the crown had no way to know about the magic bombs hidden in different locations in the za, and because there was no way to prove the identities of who got rid of the bombs that were shot up into the air. Third, they will not cause each other harm. Cale and Rosalyn knew what they both had to do from that single moment of eye contact. That was why Cale brushed the dirt off of his clothes and fixed it up. He then started to smile toward the person walking toward him. ¡°Young master Cale, are you okay?¡± The priest was huffing, as if he was dragged over here by Amiru and Gilbert. Rosalyn stepped back, and Cale pushed his hand out to the priest and started to speak. ¡°It hurts a lot. Please take a look.¡± Cale then noticed that the crown prince was heading toward him. The crown prince would definitely recognize Rosalyn and probably already saw her twoyered magic. He would then question the rtionship between Cale and Rosalyn. In a situation like this, it was better to suck out everything he could from this situation. That was why he started to speak in a voice that was loud enough for the priest and the nobles around him to hear. ¡°It really is hard to protect something.¡± ¡®If I had to reveal my card and use my ancient power, I should take anything and everything I can from this situation.¡¯ It was not Cale¡¯s style to sacrifice himself just for fame and no material gain. Cale found money to be better than fame, and believed it would be better to be rich than to be a hero. ¡°Ah, yes, yes indeed. I saw your silver shield, Young master Cale. You did something marvelous.¡± The priest took a gulp and grabbed Cale¡¯s hand to inspect him. The priest¡¯s words made the nobles around Cale look at him with curiosity and doubt. Cale Henituse, the man who was known as trash, had revealed such strength. This fact was a very big shock to everyone. Then there were his actions just a few moment ago, where he protected people against the explosion before falling down while spitting out blood. But now, he was standing there as if nothing was wrong. The nobles were observing Cale, and, because the king had left, many of the citizens were looking toward Cale as well. They could not forget about that silver light. Cale briefly looked around at the faces of the curious nobles. Each time he made eye contact with one of them, they all showed different reactions. Some continued to show their curiosity, others avoided his gaze, and some just smiled at him. Cale looked back at the priest after looking around at all the nobles, and responded to his statement. Cale¡¯s voice was still nonchnt and calm. ¡°I guess this is your first time looking at an ancient power.¡± Ah. The priest let out a gasp. Ancient power, a relic of the past you could only gain from fortuitous encounters. Each of them were said to have unique skills and strength. ¡°I see.¡± A familiar voice started to speak from behind Cale and put a hand on Cale¡¯s shoulder. Cale knew that he had arrived. ¡°Your highness.¡± Cale turned around and made eye contact with the crown prince, Alberu Crossman. He then realized that this moment was simr to what he had read in the novel. The hero of the za terror incident. In order to deal with theints from the citizens about their safety and the fact that the royal family and nobles were trying to run away, the crown prince had turned Choi Han into a beacon of hope. The person who created the hero Choi Han in the novel was crown prince Alberu, the man in front of Cale right now. Cale realized that the moment he was expecting was here as soon as he saw the look in prince Alberu¡¯s eyes. He had expected this to happen from the moment he used the ancient power, and had quickly formted a n in his mind. Cale was nning to use this situation to his benefit from this moment onward. The crown prince also realized that Cale was very simr to him. ¡°...Mister Cale.¡± Prince Alberu hugged Cale with half shock and half admiration on his face. ¡°Thank you. We are so proud of what you did.¡± Anybody could see that the crown prince was so full of admiration that he showed a reaction that he should not have shown as a prince. In that moment, Cale heard crown prince Alberu whisper in his ear in a voice that only Cale could hear. ¡°Mister Cale, you and I share the same style right?¡± ¡®Of course.¡¯ Alberu¡¯s voice was a bit tense at finding someone like him. ¡°I will make sure there is nothing annoying and reward you handsomely. What do you think?¡± ¡®In that case.¡¯ Cale lifted up his hands and smiled as he hugged prince Alberu back. He then started to speak. ¡°Your highness, it was nothing. I only did what any citizen of the kingdom would do.¡± The young dragon¡¯s voice echoed in Cale¡¯s mind. - ...Something is very odd here. The dragon who saw all of this happen was young, but pretty sharp. Cale finished his fraudulent hug of admiration, before heading to the pce. Although healing and investigation was the purpose of heading to the pce, since it was like this anyways, Cale was thinking about taking at least a pir of the pce for himself as he walked with the crown prince. Naturally, the crown prince¡¯s face was stiff. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 46: Somehow (4) Chapter 46: Somehow (4) 1Chapter 46: Somehow (4) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Cale was about to get in a carriage with the crown prince. The crown prince was asking Cale for a performance until the end. Naturally, the carriage Cale was on was the crown prince¡¯s carriage that was urgently brought over to the za. ¡°Mister Cale, please get on first. For today, you deserve this honor.¡± The crown prince had a smile on his face that waspletely different from his stiff expression from earlier. The crown prince knew that other people were now watching, and needed to keep up the act. ¡°How could I do that? I cannot get on the carriage before you, your highness. You are the star that shines down on citizens like myself.¡± - ...Human, is your head okay? Cale just ignored the ck Dragon¡¯s question. The crown prince patted Cale¡¯s shoulder and started to speak. Pat. Pat. The crown prince was patting his shoulder quite hard. ¡°It is an expression of my respect for you. Go ahead.¡± ¡°If that is the case, thiscking citizen will get on first.¡± Crown prince Alberu was the only one from the royal family who was still at the site of the terror incident. He stayed at the za even after the rest of the royal family had gone back in order tomand the knights to take care of everything and to show care for Cale. Next to him was Cale Henituse, the man of the hour and the one who will remain etched in the people¡¯s minds about this incident. The sight of the two of them standing together was like a beautiful painting, and it made people think highly of both of them. Cale got onto the crown prince¡¯s carriage and peeked to the side. The nobles were near the carriage, with the citizens being right behind them. Cale lightly gestured with his eyes to say goodbye to Eric, Gilbert, Amiru, and Taylor before smiling to Neo Tolz, who was nkly staring at him. Neo Tolz flinched after seeing Cale¡¯s smile while Venion, who was standing next to Neo, stiffened up. It was not just him. All of the high-ranking nobles were observing Cale. ¡®How could that trash gain such a power? No, how could that trash act in such a way?¡¯ They were all sending him gazes that seemed to imply those statements, but Cale ignored them and continued to stare at Neo until Neo flinched and turned away. ¡®I guess I can get rid of one of his evil minions.¡¯ That was what Cale was thinking as he got on the carriage. His smile then disappeared as soon as he was inside. Crown prince Alberu entered behind him and then ordered his servant. ¡°Treat thedy over there as a VIP.¡± Alberu was, of course, talking about Rosalyn. The carriage door started to slowly close and Cale made eye contact with Rosalyn before the door closedpletely. Rosalyn¡¯s smile seemed reliable. Click. The carriage door finished closing and Cale leaned back on the chair. ¡®The royal carriage really is a different quality. Where do they get such leather for their seats?¡¯ Cale felt thefort of the seat before turning to look at Alberu, who had also gotten rid of that fake smile from earlier and now had a stoic expression, just like Cale. ¡°Do you need any healing?¡± Cale bluntly responded back. ¡°My body is healthy, but shouldn¡¯t I get the best doctors and priests to take a look? I want to justy around for about three or four days.¡± ¡°Ha.¡± The crown prince¡¯sugh sounded like a sigh. However, he then nodded his head. ¡°You¡¯re right. That will be good. The noble who saved everyone is hurt, and the crown is giving him the best treatment possible to nurse him back to health. Very nice.¡± The crown prince did not keep up his act now that he knew he and Cale were of the same type of people. That was why he got right to the point. ¡°Mr. Cale, are you involved with them?¡± Them. Alberu was talking about the people who appeared at the za today. Cale made eye contact with Alberu as he thought about how the ck Dragon was probably following him right now in his invisible state. This was what the ck Dragon had said as Cale got into the carriage earlier. - Why did the crown prince not do anything when the other humans were dying? He is strong. The crown prince was hiding his strength. He did not do anything, even when one of his servants died and a young knight lost his arms and legs. He just pretended to be weak and hid. ¡®I thought he was a good person, even if he had a tendency to use people.¡¯ But that was not the case. That was why Calefortably responded. He had a bright smile on his face. ¡°Your highness, why would I do something so annoying?¡± ¡°Indeed.¡± The crown prince immediately agreed. There was no way someone who was hiding as a trash would do such a thing. Furthermore, Alberu could tell that Cale only stepped in because there really were no other alternatives. ¡°The crown may try to uselessly investigate you.¡± ¡°You will protect me, right, your highness?¡± ¡°Why are you asking such an obvious question?¡± Alberu was going to protect him. Alberu opened the curtains in order to see the crowd of citizens outside. He put his smile back on and continued to speak. ¡°Let¡¯s finish our conversation when I visit youter to check on how you are doing.¡± The crown prince was going to go visit a healing noble and wanted to talk. There was quite a lot to talk about. Cale thought about Rosalyn, the ancient power, and his reward, as he started to speak. ¡°Your highness.¡± ¡°Yes?¡± ¡°If it is for a conversation with the star of our nation, this Cale is always avable.¡± The corner of Alberu¡¯s smile started to turn into a frown. ¡°I don¡¯t want my actions to be exaggerated when you package it up for the public.¡± ¡°I will only package it up a bit. I just need enough for people to notin about the crown.¡± The crown prince continued to speak while casually saying the next part. It sounded a bit glib, but it was the truth. ¡°Anyways, thank you. The number of people injured was lower thanks to your help.¡± It was difficult to tell whether crown prince Alberu was a good person or bad person. No, Cale didn¡¯t even know if he was human. However, Cale did not care about any of that, and just said what he needed to say. ¡°I look forward to my reward.¡± ¡°Ha.¡± The crown prince shook his head, but did not say anything like, ¡®don¡¯t look forward to a reward.¡¯ It meant that he will make sure Cale was rewarded handsomely for his efforts. That was how Cale entered the pce once again while receiving a much different treatment than previously. The fanciest and most luxurious room in the pce, that was reserved for foreign royal visitors, was provided for Cale. ¡®Choi Han¡¯s group stayed here in the novel too.¡¯ Caleid down on the extremely luxurious bed that was worlds softer than his own bed, and started to eat grapes one by one. Another person who was staying in the pce came to visit at this time. ¡°Young master Cale.¡± It was Rosalyn, and, as expected, she was not alone. ¡°Cale-nim.¡± Choi Han was with her. On, Hong, and Lock were standing behind Choi Han with pale expressions on their faces. However, Cale started to frown after looking at thest person behind all of them. ¡°Y, young masteeeeeeeeer!¡± It was deputy butler Hans. Hans looked like he wanted to cry. Hans, Choi Han, and Lock were able to enter the pce as Cale¡¯s servant and guards. Cale put his hand up toward Hans, who looked like he was going to rush toward him. ¡°Stop.¡± That made Hans stop moving, which gave Cale time to get up from the bed and start to speak to the others. ¡°Come on in.¡± He was very rxed, as if he was the owner of this pce. Cale had a conversation with Hans first. Hans checked Cale¡¯s condition before reporting like normal, as if the teary face from moments before had never existed in the first ce. ¡°I have contacted master-nim back home. I thought it would be better if we contacted them before the crown did, so I hired a mage to open amunication port. In doing so, I ended up spending a lot of money.¡± ¡°Good job.¡± ¡°And.¡± Hans peeked toward Rosalyn. ¡®Of course he knows.¡¯ The corner of Cale¡¯s lips went up just slightly. Hans was a great butler candidate and knew more about the nobles than Cale did. There was no way such a person would not have other information as well. ¡°Continue.¡± Hans reported after getting Cale¡¯s permission. ¡°I told everyone in the residence to remain quiet about Rosalyn-nim for now.¡± ¡°Thank you very much.¡± ¡°You did well.¡± Rosalyn and Cale praised Hans. Since they have not had any time to discuss, it was better for Rosalyn and Cale that they remained quiet about her for now. ¡°Excuse me, young master.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°I did give a report, but I think you should contact home via amunication port in the near future. If you don¡¯t, I believe master-nim will personally travel up here.¡± His father, Count Deruth, would definitely do that. Cale was busy thinking about how he could take care of this situation without jeopardizing Basen¡¯s position as the sessor, so he just nodded his head. Hans got up after seeing Cale nod. He was a sharp one. He knew that he needed to leave for Cale to speak with Rosalyn, Choi Han, and Lock. ¡°Then I will go look for the caretaker of this pce to discuss a few things.¡± ¡°Sure.¡± Hans had left the room, so the ck Dragon finally revealed himself. He then headed to Cale¡¯s bed and started to eat the fruits located there as he started his report. ¡°There are no video or audio recording devices in here.¡± He really did a good job with whatever Cale told him to do, even if he did not look like he would do so. That was what Cale was thinking as he looked around this room that he was staying in. It was a room for foreign royalty. Doing something like cing recording devices in such a room would easily be a cause for war. That was why the royalty in all of the different nations worked to hide video and audio recording devices in hidden locations aroundmon areas, like the dining room. This meant that they could say anything they wanted to in this room. However, Rosalyn still cast a noise cancetion spell. ¡°It¡¯s better to be safe.¡± ¡°Miss Rosalyn, that side of you is wonderful.¡± Cale agreed with Rosalyn¡¯s decision and then looked toward Choi Han. Choi Han has had his head down since he entered the room. Cale had a pretty good idea about what happened after seeing Choi Han like this. He did not manage to kill Redika. ¡°Tell me.¡± Choi Han lifted his head up. That mage appeared in the location you told me. I tried to kill him, but his subordinates rushed toward me. ¡°I¡¯m sure they were ready to die.¡± ¡°...Yes.¡± The secret organization valued Redika quite a bit for some reason. ¡°So they escaped?¡± ¡°...Yes.¡± Choi Han lowered his head again as he continued to speak. ¡°I only managed to cut off his left arm.¡± ¡®Hmm?¡¯ ¡°I then burned the arm up in case he came back for his arm to put it back together. Ah, his left eye should be injured as well.¡± ¡®Isn¡¯t that a death sentence for a mage? Mages needed to cast magic with both hands for their mana to be bnced. Losing an arm would end up affecting that quite a bit. Cale looked toward Choi Han with a stiff expression. Choi Han was standing there with his head down and fists clenched. ¡°I was supposed to kill him. I¡¯m sorry.¡± ¡°No need to be sorry. You did well.¡± Cale looked toward Lock, On and Hong who were sitting next to Choi Han. On and Hong did not move toward the ck Dragon like usual. They were stiff in Lock¡¯s arms. Lock was looking at Cale with a desperate gaze. ¡®Did he go berserk?¡¯ Cale looked toward Choi Han and asked. ¡°His subordinates?¡± ¡°I thought it was better to kill them so I took care of them.¡± That made the red kitten Hong rub his face on his sister On¡¯s body. Choi Han had used his ck aura topletely get rid of them without any traces. This was the first time Hong realized that you could melt a person with aura. ¡°It¡¯s best to be thorough to prevent any future issues. You didn¡¯t break any buildings or anything like that, right?¡± Cale was worried that Choi Han went berserk and destroyed some other things. Harris Vige and the Blue Wolf Tribe incident were both traumas for Choi Han. Cale was worried that he would go crazy when seeing the people who caused those traumas standing right in front of his eyes. ¡®If he goes berserk, I may end up having to clean up the mess.¡¯ Since Choi Han was staying with him, Cale would need to clean up the mess. However, Cale did not want to do such a thing. ¡°Yes, of course. As Cale-nim mentioned, I made sure not to damage anything around the area.¡± The kittens remembered what Choi Han said to the subordinates as he killed them. ¡®All of the important people in my life were killed or almost killed by you. Including today!¡¯ The buildings were not damaged, but the look on Choi Han¡¯s face as he melted the secret organization members alive was quite scary. He did not go berserk, however, that made it scarier. On and Hong finally moved toward the ck Dragon to get a sense of relief by the dragon¡¯s side. The strongest, cutest, and nicest individual in this room was this ck Dragon. Cale observed the kittens heading to the bed before speaking to Choi Han. ¡°I see, you worked hard.¡± Cale¡¯s words made Choi Han look up at him. Cale looked at Choi Han and everyone else as he continued to speak. ¡°All of you did something amazing today. It is thanks to you that all those people lived. Miss Rosalyn, you worked hard as well.¡± Choi Han¡¯s tightly clenched fists loosened up a bit. Rosalyn looked at Lock, Choi Han, and the kittens that were wagging their tails, before finallynding her gaze on Cale. An odd sense of cohesion surrounded her. The ck Dragon started to speak at that point. ¡°You worked hard too.¡± This made Cale start to smile as he nodded his head. ¡°Indeed. I worked very hard. That is why I will be rewarded.¡± And the time to have their first discussion about his reward soon arrived. ¡°You can head out now.¡± ¡°Yes, your highness.¡± Crown prince Alberu sent out the priest who just sat there filling the time without doing any actual treatment on Cale before turning to make eye contact with Cale. Cale had an expression of awe that the crown prince came to visit, until the door closed and Alberu started to speak. ¡°That expression of yours is giving me the chills.¡± ¡°Thank you very much.¡± Cale returned to his usual rxed expression. Alberu seemed to find that more bearable as he sat on a chair next to the bed Cale wasying on looking like a patient. ¡°I have said that you are currently resting. I said that you got up at the za even though it was difficult so that you could help calm things down like a proper noble.¡± Alberu started to smile before adding on. ¡°Since you revealed that you possess an ancient power at the za, I yed along and said you have a defensive ancient power that is not very strong. That is what you wanted, right?¡± ¡°Mm.¡± Cale pretended to contemte as he responded back. ¡°A young noble who is weak but stepped forward for the kingdom. It¡¯s nice.¡± ¡°Indeed.¡± Cale preferred it this way that people thought he was ¡®not very strong.¡¯ It wasn¡¯t a lie, he really was weak. ¡°By tomorrow, any information about rumors about you and the current situation will be delivered to you through your butler. Make sure to take a look.¡± Prince Alberu was definitely treating Cale differently than he had treated Choi Han in the novel. He didn¡¯t have even an ounce of a warm smile and just had a stoic expression. It was as if he was dealing with someone he didn¡¯t want to deal with because he needed to do so. That was how Cale wanted it to be. Cale made eye contact with the crown prince who was staring at him. Prince Alberu started to frown after seeing Cale¡¯s rxed demeanor and started to think for a bit before he finally said what was on his mind. ¡°...By the way.¡± This extremely hesitant attitude made it seem like he was expecting something. Cale just waited patiently as this was rare to see from the crown prince. While Cale was waiting, the ck Dragon who had woken up from his nap underneath the bed started to talk to Cale in his mind. - Now I am certain. He is not human. The crown prince asked his question at the same time. ¡°...You are human, right?¡± What was going on? A straight and a hooknded on him at the same time. Cale suddenly wished he really was hurt. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 47: Somehow (5) Chapter 47: Somehow (5) 3Chapter 47: Somehow (5) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Prince Alberu could see that Cale Henituse suddenly had an expression of disbelief as Cale answered back. ¡°...I am human?¡± It was an expression that seemed to be asking why the prince was asking such a stupid question. Alberu subconsciously let out a sigh. ¡°Sigh. Right, of course you are human.¡± Cale could see Alberu point at both of them before continuing to speak. ¡°You and I are both human.¡± The ck Dragon spoke into Cale¡¯s mind at that moment. - That is a lie. He is notpletely human. ¡®Little Dragon, can you please stop?¡¯ Cale was having a difficult time maintaining hisposure. However, a critical weakness existed between Cale and the ck Dragon. The ck Dragon could talk to Cale whenever he wanted to do so, but Cale was unable to talk back to the dragon. It was a one-waymunication. It was his fault forcking any magic skills. - This is my first time seeing a race with such an atmosphere around them in this great Dragon¡¯s four years of life. The dragon¡¯s four years of life. The ck Dragon had only seen himself, humans, and the Cat Tribe and Wolf Tribe members he recently met. The crown prince was not any of those species. Cale started to speak toward the crown prince who was looking at him. ¡°Of course. Is there much to being human? We¡¯re all human if we live amongst each other.¡± Cale made up his mind to forget about what the ck Dragon had said. Prince Alberu quietly looked toward Cale before starting to speak. ¡°You are right. There really isn¡¯t much to being human. However.¡± However. But. Cale was wondering if he could stop hearing these words. Prince Alberu started to speak to Cale as he was contemting. ¡°I thought I was mistaken at the banquet hall, but there are some weird smells around you.¡± ¡°...Smell?¡± Cale responded with shock. ¡°I just showered.¡± The crown prince opened and closed his mouth a couple times without saying anything after hearing Cale¡¯s retort. Cale could see the wrinkles on Alberu¡¯s forehead from frowning. He looked like he was contemting something. However, he erased any traces of it from his face and got to the point of the matter. ¡°I don¡¯t think there¡¯s a need for two people who are simr like us to try to sugar coat things. So, what do you want as your reward?¡± Alberu crossed his arms as he asked Cale. The reason Alberu hade here sote had to do with dealing with the aftermath of the incident, but it was also because he had to look at the files regarding Cale Henituse. However, there was nothing on Cale. Well, there was something, but it was useless. < Famous in the Northeast for being trash. > < Completely pushed out of the sessor position two years ago but shows noints about the decision. > < No signs of trying to cause issues in the home. > It just said Cale Henituse was trash who liked to fool around and drink. That was worse than having no information. The Cale in front of Alberu was not trash. For example, take the way he responded to the prince¡¯s question. ¡°Your highness, can you please exin what I will need to do for you first?¡± There was no way a trash would ask something like this. Alberu answered honestly. ¡°I want you to not say anything to the nobles.¡± That was the hardest thing. That was why this was the crown¡¯s request to Cale and why they were willing to wager Cale¡¯s reward with it. Today¡¯s events were embarrassing for the crown and they could not let this affect their position of power. That was why he was asking Cale for this, and he was able to ask Cale this because Cale was part of the Henituse family that was not part of any faction. ¡°I also want you to praise the crown every so often if you are asked.¡± ¡°Including speaking about your very understanding nature, your highness?¡± ¡°Of course.¡± One corner of both Alberu and Cale¡¯s lips started to go up as they started to smile. Their smiles were pretty simr. ¡°Since it is an ancient power, isn¡¯t what you revealed today the extent of your power?¡± ¡°Of course. It is useless for anything else.¡± Cale shrugged his shoulders at Alberu¡¯s inspecting gaze even though he was the one to answer. Based on what Cale read in the novel, Crown prince Alberu knew more about ancient powers than most people. ¡®Now that I think about it, the Healing Star was given to him by his mother.¡¯ Cale recalled this memory that suddenly popped into his mind. The crown prince had asked what he wanted as a reward. The tone of Alberu¡¯s voice made it sound like he would probably agree to anything, yet Alberu seemedfortable. ¡°What is it that you want? Something for your family? My agreement to invest in the Northeastern Shoreline? Or settling the battle for power in the Northeast?¡± That was why Cale responded backfortably as well. ¡°None of those belong to me, your highness.¡± ¡°...It doesn¡¯t belong to you?¡± Cale pointed to himself as Alberu stared at him. ¡°Please give it to me.¡± What Cale wanted was something he needed for himself. Alberu, who was silent for a moment, let out a snort. He had figured out what this trash wanted from him. Although Cale had lived as trash, humans, no, all living existences, wished to aim for greater heights and take control of everything. In the end, Cale was the most important to himself, more than his family or the people around him. ¡°Then what is it you want? A higher title? A medal? Do you want to have your own faction in the capital?¡± Alberu¡¯s expression turned odd as he asked. Contrary to Alberu¡¯s expectations, Cale shook his head no at Alberu¡¯s suggestions. It meant that none of them were correct. He then said a single word. ¡°Money.¡± ¡°...What?¡± Cale uratelyid it out for Alberu. For someone like Cale whose greatest desire was to live a peaceful life, this was what mattered most to him. ¡°Please give me money. I don¡¯t want a medal or a higher title.¡± Cold hard cash was always the best. What would a title or medal do for him when a war was about to break out? It was much smarter to take cash and use it to buy food,nd, or other material things. The final ancient power Cale was aiming to get after the ¡®Sound of the Wind¡¯ was one that became stronger the more money he used. Cale could see Alberu put his hand to his forehead. He then lowered his hand as he asked Cale a question. ¡°To buy alcohol?¡± Cale responded right back. ¡°How did you know?¡± Alberu smiled and epted Cale¡¯s request. He then got up and informed Cale about the details. ¡°Once you receive the report tomorrow, take a look and then let me know how much you want.¡± ¡°Will youe visit me again?¡± ¡°Why? You don¡¯t like it?¡± Cale responded with an extremely fake expression on his face. ¡°It would be the highest honor to see you again, your highness.¡± Alberu felt chills on the back of his neck from Cale¡¯s response and told Cale to rest before immediately heading out of the room and disappearing. Cale just quietly observed the door the crown prince closed behind him. - But what kind of power allows him to dye his hair other than mana? Human, answer me. I am curious. Cale ignored the ck Dragon¡¯s question and immediately went to bed. He was a patient from this moment on. However, he was not a patient who could rest peacefully. Hans handed Cale a letter from Ron first thing in the morning. ¡°Mr. Ron has left as scheduled.¡± Cale nodded his head and opened the letter. < Young master. I will report to you once a month. I didn¡¯t know that you were hiding such a power, young master. Choi Han told me about how that mage looks like. I will remember it. I have also informed Beacrox about it as well. > Sounded like Redika would die if Ron saw him as well. That was what Cale was thinking as he looked toward the people who came to visit him after Hans. ¡°...I heard you were seriously injured.¡± Eric Wheelsman. Cale had never seen Eric looking so worried. However, Cale did not say he was okay. He needed to be loyal and y his part. ¡°I have no strength in my body.¡± ¡°...Cale.¡± But Cale had no strength in his body because he had slept all day. ¡°My stomach feels weird as well.¡± This was because Cale justid around eating when he wasn¡¯t sleeping. He was so full that there was no room for anything else. Eric looked concerned, Gilbert had a stiff expression on his face, and Amiru looked like she had made up her mind about something. The kittens who had been looking back and forth at the three visitors and Cale started to shake their heads. ¡°Let me know if you need anything.¡± ¡°Yes, please do. We will get you whatever it is.¡± Cale just nodded his head and asked. ¡°Sounds like you are not just here to check in on me?¡± Eric, Amiru and Gilbert exchanged nces after hearing Cale¡¯s question. After seeing Amiru and Gilbert nod their heads, Eric took a document out of his pocket and handed it to Cale. ¡°This is the updated request for the Northeastern shoreline tourism investment. We brought it with us since we were heading to the pce to see you.¡± Cale turned the first page of the document. The first word on the next page was Navy. Gilbert also seemed to have made up his mind. Cale peeked toward Amiru who smiled at him. Based on Eric¡¯s actions, it looked like Amiru kept it a secret like Cale had asked. ¡°The news will soon reach the Henituse territory along with our proposal.¡± ¡°I see. Then will you be meeting with the crown prince?¡± ¡°Yes. We are scheduled to meet him tonight. We can only start moving if he shows any interest in it.¡± Cale looked toward Amiru and Gilbert and casually started to speak. ¡°I¡¯m sure it will work out.¡± His voice was full of confidence. It was because he was sure. Eric and the others felt a sense of relief after hearing Cale¡¯s statement. Cale waved the document in front of the three of them and started to speak. ¡°You can send such documents like this via a servant in the future. I know it is difficult for you toe visit, so you do not need toe.¡± ¡°No, we will continue toe. You need to know about it as well.¡± Cale just casually nodded his head at Eric, Gilbert and Amiru and then sent them out. It was difficult to greet people while leaning on his bed wearing a patient robe. That was why Cale kicked the nket away andfortably weed the next group. He started to speak to Choi Han who was standing there like a sinner. ¡°Go.¡± Rosalyn bit down on her lips. She had removed her magic and was standing there with her original red eyes and red hair. She also got rid of her robe and was in formal attire. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, young master Cale. But I need Choi Han and Lock.¡± Now that Rosalyn revealed herself in the pce, she needed to return to the Breck Kingdom as fast as possible. Since it was revealed that she was still alive, the people who attempted to kill her may start to hide the evidence. But she could not go back on her own. This incident revealed that she was a very skilled mage, which meant that the enemy will make sure to have stronger forces when attacking her. That was why she needed strong allies. Lock was standing by the door just fidgeting without approaching Cale. Cale looked at Choi Han and Lock before speaking as if it was only natural. ¡°What are you sorry about? Miss Rosalyn, you helped us out with a very difficult situation. Then we should help you out as well.¡± Rosalyn could see that Cale was smiling. ¡°Miss Rosalyn is Lock¡¯s noona and Choi Han¡¯s friend.¡± ¡°...Thank you for putting it that way.¡± Rosalyn may have been close to death because of the assassination attempt, but she was certain that this was going to be her turning point. Cale took a step forward and looked at Choi Han. ¡°Cale-nim, I have to protect you.¡± ¡°Choi Han.¡± Choi Han needed to go in order for Cale to rest in peace and prepare to hide during the war. Choi Han could see Cale¡¯s uniquely rxed smile. ¡°I will not die.¡± ¡®I n on making a ton of money and getting just strong enough to run away as needed to live peacefully. I¡¯m going to do everything I can to live as long as possible.¡¯ Cale was also thinking that with the ck Dragon by his side, there was no reason for Choi Han to protect him. In fact, in front of the ck Dragon, Choi Han himself was just baggage. ¡°I see. I worried for no reason.¡± Cale turned away from Choi Han who looked a bit better and looked toward Lock. He then flicked his finger to call Lock over to him. Lock flinched at Cale¡¯s motion before slowly approaching. Why was this coward so scared? However, Cale had no n to give any thought to such reaction. ¡°Lock, I will take care of your younger siblings. Go ande back to the Henituse territory in 3 months.¡± ¡°...Excuse me?¡± ¡°What is the excuse me for? Did you forget about our deal?¡± ¡°Ah.¡± Cale thought about how he was going to use Lock as Lock nkly stared at him. He then handed Lock a map. It was a map of the Northeast territory that he got from Hans. ¡°Henituse. Come to the one that¡¯s marked like that. I will be there with your younger siblings, so you muste back.¡± ¡°...Somewhere to return to-¡± Cale didn¡¯t care for the mumbling Lock and clenched Lock¡¯s shoulder as he started to speak. Lock needed toe back for Cale¡¯s life to be easier. ¡°Yes, somewhere to return to. Remember. You must return within 3 months.¡± ¡°Yes- yes sir! I will definitelye back within 3 months.¡± After taking care of Lock¡¯s issue to the point that Lock vigorously nodded his head, Cale felt a sense of relief. The story from the novel was twisted quite a bit already, but at least the major point was flowing as it was supposed to. This was good because he would know more about the future the more the story followed the novel. Cale was disappointed that he could not send Beacrox with the mas well, but he could always send Beacrox with Ron after Ron came back from his time off. Caleid down on the bed with a more rxed heart than ever before as he proceeded to look at the people around his room. He then turned to look at Hans who had opened the door and entered. Hans looked at Choi Han who was protecting the door like a knight, then at Lock who was ying with the kittens, then at Rosalyn who was leisurely reading a book about magic, and finally Cale who was rxing on the bed. He then quietly approached Cale and whispered. ¡°There is a rumor going around that his majesty wants to bestow a medal to you, young master.¡± Everybody in the room stopped moving after hearing what Hans had to say. Hans then quietly handed Cale a document. It was a document that contained the rumors going on about the za Terror Incident. Cale had just one reaction after reading the first line. < Cale Henituse, the noble who showed the pride of the Henituse family that protects the Kingdom from the Forest of Darkness > ¡°Haaaaaa.¡± It was a deep sigh. He had expected it, but it was still so very annoying. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 48: Somehow (6) Chapter 48: Somehow (6) 1Chapter 48: Somehow (6) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist A weekter, Cale got off the carriage. The carriage that he got off from had the Henituse Golden Turtle on it. - It has been a while. Cale agreed with what the ck Dragon said inside his head. Cale was currently at the za of Glory. Arge fence was around the northern part of the za that was destroyed from the explosion. Cale just walked forward, only looking toward his seat. The Henituse family¡¯s knight brigade, led by their Vice Captain, walked with Cale in the center of their formation in order to protect him. As Cale was walking, he heard someone say something that gave him the chills. ¡°Oh, young master Silver Light!¡± Cale immediately started to frown. ¡°Ahem, hem.¡± Cale could see the smirk on the Vice Captain¡¯s face as he let out some fake coughs and started to frown some more. The Vice Captain lowered his body a bit to whisper in Cale¡¯s ear. ¡°Young master, I guess they call you, ¡®young master Silver Light,¡¯ now. Ahem, cool people like you are bound to get awesome nicknames.¡± ¡®Shit.¡¯ Cale held back the rough words in his mind. Young master Silver Light, young master Shield, he didn¡¯t want to hear such cheesy and embarrassing things. However, Cale knew that it would have been much worse if it wasn¡¯t for the crown prince subduing the rumors, and so he could not say anything about it. All he could do was stoically speak to the Vice Captain, who was shrugging his shoulder. ¡°I¡¯m sure they¡¯ll stop if I drink and act like I usually do, right?¡± ¡°Ahem, hem!¡± The Vice Captain could not say anything and just turned away. That made Cale start to smile, but that smile immediately disappeared. It was because of what the Vice Captain said next. ¡°I think it would be best if you avoided alcohol, since you are still recovering.¡± Cale was still officially recovering and not 100 percent. The official story was that he was injured because he used his ancient power past its intended limits so that he could protect the crowd, causing a miracle to happen that prevented the explosion. That miraculous story naturally originated from the crown prince. That was why the staff at the Henituse residence was busy protecting the injured Cale. It was not just the staff at the capital. Cale thought about his father, Count Deruth, who was nning oning up to the capital a few days ago. This was what Deruth had said through the videomunication. - Cale, did you see the faces of those bastards? Your dad will kill them all for you. How dare they do such a thing to a person who cannot even swing a sword! Even though Deruth knew Cale had earned an ancient power, the fact that even Cale¡¯s younger sister was better than Cale at swinging a sword made Deruth consider Cale to be weak. - The reason the Henituse family does not take action is not because we are weak. Remember this Cale. We have not taken any actions until now because we are strong. Nobody shall take any actions against you like this in the future. That was what Countess Vin had said while calming Count Deruth down. But that must have been the truth, as no nobles sent any messages or came to look for Cale once Cale left the pce and returned to his own residence. Even Eric andpany did not show up. ¡®That made it easy.¡¯ Cale had used that free time very efficiently. Cale, who had been looking forward as he walked, could see the knight and soldier guarding the entrance. ¡°Ah, young master Cale.¡± ¡°Do you need to verify my identity?¡± The knight shook his head at Cale¡¯s question and respectfully opened the entrance. Cale had to enter alone from here on. The people who were allowed to enter this time was significantly less than during the birthday celebration, but Cale was the exception. ¡°Young master Cale-nim, please enter.¡± ¡°Great, thanks. Keep up the good work.¡± ¡°...Yes sir!¡± Cale thought that the knight was probably overworked, so he patted the knight on the shoulder as the knight bowed and vigorously responded to him. He then walked in, not knowing that the knight was watching him walk in for a very long time. Cale continued to walk at a leisure pace. The za of Glory. The king nned to respect the fallen and give medals to certain people for their actions during the za terror incident today. The recipients were given the qualifications to stand at the second highest tform, right underneath the king, in the za today. Cale was wearing a more luxurious ck outfit than usual as he arrived at his spot. ¡°Cale.¡± ¡°Hyung-nim, you got here early.¡± Cale smiled at Eric Wheelsman, who had called out to him, before standing at his spot. This was the spot for the nobles. Cale was standing here. But why? Eric Wheelsman, Amiru, Gilbert, and all of the other nobles could only watch Cale in silence. It was because they had all heard some news regarding Cale. Cale Henituse has declined to ept the medal of honor and has yielded the medal to someone else. In addition, he dragged his still injured body to participate in the ceremony. Amiru Ubarr looked toward Cale, who was looking up at the sky. ¡°It is a beautiful day today. Probably because we are here to respect the fallen.¡± Cale¡¯s red hair fluttered in the wind and created a starkparison to his ck outfit. Amiru had a curious smile after seeing Cale as his usual confident self. ¡°It is probably because of you, young master Cale.¡± ¡°Me?¡± Cale looked toward Amiru with confusion. Amiru responded back with a calm and warm smile. Cale found that reaction to be odd, but still said what he needed to say. ¡°You are leaving today, youngdy Amiru?¡± ¡°Yes. I believe you are heading out tomorrow? I will see you at our Ubarr territory.¡± Cale was going to visit the Ubarr territory after this ceremony. ¡°Yes. I want to see the ocean.¡± ¡°I heard. It is for your recovery?¡± ¡°Yes. It will be nice to get some fresh air.¡± ¡®Recovery my ass. I ampletely healthy and will be going there to get even stronger.¡¯ However, Cale agreed with Amiru and nodded his head before adding on. ¡°Of course, that is not the only reason.¡± ¡°Ah, of course.¡± Amiru, as well as Gilbert and Eric who were listening, all started to smile. It was a simr smile to Cale¡¯s. After today, the nobles will all hear about what is going on. The development and investment for a military base at the Northeastern coastline. That was why Amiru and Gilbert were hurrying out of the capital tonight. It was to prevent any false information from leaking out, as well as because the crown wanted things to progress as quickly as possible. Of course, this was only possible because the Henituse family agreed to loan a significant amount of money to Amiru and Gilbert¡¯s territories. That was the other reason why Cale needed to visit Amiru and Gilbert¡¯s territories. ¡®Cale, we are nning to send someone as well, but if you are going to go there anyways, take a look while you are there.¡¯ ¡®Father, wouldn¡¯t it better for an expert to go?¡¯ ¡®Having more pairs of eyes is always better.¡¯ Cale agreed to do as Count Deruth asked. ¡°We are in your care.¡± ¡°We are in your care, young master Cale.¡± Cale waved at Amiru and Gilbert to say not to worry about it, as he looked back to the front. King Zed had arrived. The memorial and medal ceremony then started. King Zed spoke in a loud voice that was stronger than ever. There still was arge number of people in the za, but the atmosphere waspletely different. It was very quiet. ¡°We are gathered back here today to show that we will not cower under fear.¡± King Zed called out to the crowd once again. It was a warning to the enemies, as well as something to rally the crowd. King Zed looked down to the za from the highest tform as he continued to speak. ¡°Many people showed heroic deeds during that incident. We were able to protect thisnd like the past thanks to their bravery.¡± It looked like King Zed had made eye contact with Cale at that time, but Cale hoped that it was not the case. Cale stealthily turned away in order to look past the King toward the sky behind him. He then thought about what the ck Dragon had said. ¡®Blessing of the Sun God? I do not feel the power of any god from those weak humans. The only special one is the crown prince.¡¯ There was no truth to the belief that the Crossman family was blessed by the Sun God. Cale, who had learned another useless truth, decided to pretend that he did not know anything, as usual. The ck Dragon seemed to get excited at the fact that Cale told him to keep that a secret between the two of them, and happily agreed. ¡°In that regard, we will now hand out the medals to those heroic individuals!¡± King Zed started the medal ceremony and everyone went up one by one to receive their medal. Waaaaaaaaaaa- Cheering filled the za, as if it had never been silent from the start. The ck Dragon¡¯s voice filled Cale¡¯s head once again. - Humans are interesting. Whaaaaaaa- Cale could hear the ck Dragon¡¯s voice, as well as the cheering of the crowd for a knight who had just received a medal. Cale felt like he could guess what the ck Dragon found to be interesting. However, because Cale was human, he understood the feelings of the people who were still alive better than the ck Dragon. There were times to be sad and times to be excited. p, p, p. That was why he pped for the medal recipients as well. The atmosphere was much better now. People all enjoyed the medal ceremony as if it was a festival. This jovial environment made it possible for anybody to approach Cale right now. ¡°Young master Cale.¡± Cale turned toward the quiet voice calling out to him. There were quite a lot of nobles who headed back home, thinking that the capital was a dangerous ce because of the terror incident. That was why the number of nobles here was less than before, but one of those nobles approached Cale and called out to him. ¡°What is it, young master Venion?¡± Venion Stan was still here. In addition, the heads of each region were still here as well. ¡°I heard that you declined a medal. Will you not regret it?¡± The gazes of the nobles who had been looking up at the tform all turned toward Venion and Cale. Cale did not know why Venion was smiling so gently and asking him that question. - I want to kill him. Cale was just worried that Venion¡¯s body would blow up right here. Cale hoped that the ck Dragon would calm down as he thought about the medal. Cale had rejected a medal. The reason for it was simple. He did not want to get, ¡®recorded.¡¯ There is a record of all of the past kings of the kingdom in the highest floor of the royal library. The floor underneath that holds the record of all of the, ¡®heroes,¡¯ who have received different medals of honor throughout the history of the kingdom. The crown used the fact that they needed to continue to provide these heroes with their reward money to locate and keep track of these heroes. ¡®That might sound like fame and honor to others, but it just sounds like chains to me.¡¯ Cale did not want to be recorded anywhere. It was easier to forget someone who was not recorded. Who would remember the incidents at this za in the future when war was going to break out soon? Even if they recalled this incident, they would remember other things first. The fact that he knew this was part of the reason Cale had decided to step forward during the terror incident, as well as the reason he wanted to avoid getting recorded. Cale started to smile as he looked toward Venion and started to speak. ¡°What would I regret?¡± Cale had nothing to regret. He had received a handsome reward, and most importantly. ¡°It is enough that we managed to survive.¡± He was able to live without getting seriously injured. That was the absolutely most important truth for Cale, no, for Kim Rok Soo. The area around Cale became silent. Venion spoke after a while so as to break that silence. ¡°... I see.¡± ¡°Yes. I am also very shy. I¡¯m too shy to go up there to receive a medal.¡± Venion¡¯s expression turned odd. However, Cale just shrugged his shoulder and turned around to p for another person who was receiving a medal. The ck Dragon was debating how to kill Venion quickly and simply, before he looking at Cale and the people around Cale and shook his head. There were too many people looking at Cale right now. Both the nobles and the people down below were looking at Cale. The ck Dragon thought things would get veryplicated and annoying for Cale if he killed Venion right now, so he decided to act like Cale and be still, very still, as he watched the ceremony. ¡°This concludes today¡¯s ceremony. However, this king will not forget this moment. I will remember it day after day in order to not forget the valiant heroes!¡± The ceremony ended with the king¡¯s final remarks. Swiiiiiish- A rough wind that sounded like rain brushed through the za. Cale brushed back his messed up hair. The crown prince had said that Cale did not need toe to the memorial today. However, Cale still showed up. It was because he knew the weight of someone¡¯s death. He finished his own memorial of sort and put his right hand to his heart. This alerted Eric, who started to speak. ¡°Cale! Did you over do it? Does your heart hurt?¡± Cale looked toward Eric in disbelief and Cale¡¯s confident gaze made Eric awkwardly smile as he slowly backed away. Eric seemed to be very embarrassed. Cale smiled at Eric¡¯s reaction and patted his chest two times. He could feel the golden que in his inner pocket as he did that. It was the reward he had received from the crown prince. ¡®The crown prince is more generous than I expected.¡¯ The golden que gave Cale two opportunities to purchase anything, regardless of the cost. It didn¡¯t matter whether he bought two slices of bread or two mountains. All that mattered was that he could only use it twice. Cale was going to use these two opportunities very effectively in the future. ¡®I¡¯m sure that the crown prince was thinking, ¡®how much can you really spend,¡¯ as he gave this to me.¡¯ Either that, or he gave it to Cale to see just what Cale could manage to buy with it. ¡®Too bad he was wrong.¡¯ Cale started to smile. There were a lot of unique things you could buy in the world, as long as you knew how to buy them. - What are you nning now, weak human? Just be careful. Cale ignored the concernedment of the ck Dragon, who had seen the smirk on Cale¡¯s face. Cale looked around where he was standing and made eye contact with a lot of people. However, he trusted that these gazes would disappear once he left the capital. That was why Cale, who had finished preparing to leave early the next morning after returning to his residence, handed the ck Dragon a piece of steak along with three other items. The ck Dragon clutched the te with the steak on it, as he asked. ¡°What is this for?¡± The three items were all the magic bombs with the detonation devices removed. Thepressed mana still existed in these bombs. For now, Cale was nning on using just one of these three bombs. A mischievous smirk appeared on Cale¡¯s face. ¡°Destroy a whirlpool.¡± Cale was nning on overturning Roan Kingdom¡¯s Northeastern sea without anybody knowing about it. It was possible because neither the mermaids nor the Whale Tribe should be at the Northeastern sea right now. If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 49: Somehow (7) Chapter 49: Somehow (7) 2Chapter 49: Somehow (7) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Originally, Cale did not n to destroy the whirlpool. He was nning on taking care of it using the Indestructible Shield and the Vitality of the Heart. ¡®But that was when I didn¡¯t have the ck Dragon.¡¯ There was no reason for him to work hard when he had the ck Dragon. Cale stuffed the ck Dragon, On, and Hong with a ton of food before sending out these Beasts that averaged 7 years of age and greeting his first guest. ¡°I do not know what you stole, but you did something big.¡± It was Billos. ¡°I guess I am a bit famous these days.¡± Billos shook his head at Cale, who did not seem to be injured at all. He could see Cale starting to drink while iming to still be injured. ¡°You indeed are famous, young master Cale. But is it okay for you to drink?¡± ¡°There¡¯s no reason for me to lie in front of you.¡± Billos smiled as he filled Cale¡¯s empty cup. He then handed a magic box over to Cale. ¡°Here are your requested items. Thank you for returning the items fromst time.¡± Cale had returned the other items to Billos through Choi Han. Cale caressed this new box of items as he looked toward Billos. Cale had already decided how to use the first of the two opportunities to use the golden que. He decided to buy some time. Cale decided to buy some time for the moment when the Northern Knights, a dangerous existence for not just Roan Kingdom but also the Breck Kingdom and the other mid-northern kingdoms, started to head south. To be more specific, other than the Northern Knights, there were also the Empire at the center of the Western Continent, the mage yer, and the Queen of the Southern Jungle. Cale decided to buy some time to get away from all of them. It would be one thing if he was on his own, but now there were others he needed to care for. ¡°Billos.¡± ¡°Do you deal properties too?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t, but I do know about what is going ontely.¡± Billos really was a merchant. He received information very quickly. ¡°The Western continent is on the verge of blowing up, and that is a great time for merchants like myself to make money.¡± ¡°Merchants will run toward anything that will give them a profit.¡± Billos liked Cale, who understood merchants a lot. He also liked that Cale didn''t beat around the bush and got right to the point. ¡°The Whipper Kingdom will be a mess soon. I¡¯m sure you are already expecting it?¡± Billos nodded his head. The non-mages and mages could no longer coexist in the Whipper Kingdom. ¡°That is why I am trying to figure out what I can use to make money in that chaos. Young master Cale, what do you think will be the most profitable investment there?¡± Cale easily answered Billos¡¯s question. ¡°People.¡± The mages will lose the civil war and the Magic Tower will be destroyed. Then what would happen to the remaining mages? All of the mages were not going to die at the end of the civil war. The Whipper Kingdom was the Western continent¡¯s greatest supply of magic devices. There were many mages who stayed far away from power and politics, but there will be nowhere for those types of mages in the Whipper Kingdom after the civil war. In the novel, Crown prince Alberu Crossman was going to target this issue. As for the destroyed Magic Tower, Rosalyn was the highest-tier mage who decides to create a new Magic Tower in a different location. Billos was a very sharp person. ¡°You¡¯re thinking that the mages will look for a new home.¡± Cale did not give Billos a direct answer. The mages needed to lose in the Whipper Kingdom. That was the only way for the Whipper Kingdom to move to a better future. However, Cale did not put much weight onto those things. What he wanted was something else. The Western Continent¡¯s greatest supplier of the highest-grade magic devices. Cale needed the things that will remain after the civil war. ¡°Immediately let me know once the Magic Tower is destroyed.¡± ¡°...May I ask why?¡± Cale shrugged his shoulders and lightly responded. ¡°You¡¯ll find out when it happens.¡± The Magic Tower. Cale was nning on purchasing it. The Magic Tower will be filled with irreparable broken magic devices after the civil war. Cale also knew the method to purchase this Magic Tower. Alberu also will not be able to do anything about Cale¡¯s actions. ¡°I¡¯m looking forward to it.¡± e nodded his head in agreement. He was looking forward to it as well. Buying the Magic Tower will buy him some time. It will give him time to protect himself from danger. It will be very expensive, but ... ¡®Not like it is my money.¡¯ Billos saw the evil smirk on Cale¡¯s face and his expectations went up. ¡°Then I will contact you when it happens.¡± ¡°Okay. I look forward to it.¡± Cale said goodbye to Billos, his first guest. He then greeted his second andst guest. Well, the second guest more so rushed into the room. Cale looked toward the terrace window that was open, before flinching at the existence that rushed in through the window. ¡°What is this?¡± A y doll the size of his palm climbed in through the window. On and Hong jumped into Cale¡¯s arms in fear. It was because the expression on the y doll was terrifying. It looked more like a zombie than a doll. The ck Dragon spoke into Cale¡¯s head with magic as usual at that time. - I feel the power of a God. ¡°Ah.¡± Cale blurted out someone¡¯s name. The crazy priestess. ¡°Cage.¡± Once he did that, the y doll that did not have any eyes or ears but only a mouth started to speak. ¡°I knew you would recognize me, young master Cale. This doll is connected to me. It is a single-use item that can only listen and talk.¡± She really was skilled enough to be called a necromancer. Cale looked toward the ck Dragon. The ck Dragon was talking into Cale¡¯s mind, but did not turn invisible. It seemed to have figured out right away that it could listen and speak, but could not see. ¡®Just how strong is this dragon?¡¯ Cale suddenly questioned the ck Dragon¡¯s strength. However, the y doll started to speak and prevented him from thinking about it for a long time. ¡°We are leaving the capital today. I¡¯m sure Young master Cale does not like us contacting you like this.¡± ¡®Correct. Absolutely correct.¡¯ ¡°However, Taylor said he had something he wanted to tell you.¡± ¡°¡®Young master Cale when I go take back my position, no, when I am one level higher than my original position, I will return to pay you back for your help.¡¯ is what he wanted me to tell you.¡± ¡°There was no need to tell me.¡± ¡°I know.¡± Cale looked into the empty eye sockets of the ugly y doll. ¡°Even still, Taylor and I both need somewhere to share the news when we get what we desire.¡± ¡°Do whatever you want.¡± The y doll started to smile at Cale¡¯s words before it started to melt. On and Hong dug even further into Cale¡¯s clothes in order to hide after seeing the doll melt away. ¡°Then please be healthy, young master Cale.¡± The y doll disappeared without leaving any traces behind. The ck Dragon stared at the empty spot where the y doll stood for a bit before looking toward Cale. ¡°Then is that when I can get my revenge?¡± Once Taylor Stan returned to power and became the master of Marquis Stan¡¯s estate, the current Marquis and Venion will both need to face the wrath of this ck Dragon. ¡°Yes. You can do as you want at that time.¡± ¡°Great.¡± The ck Dragon made up his mind about when to get his revenge after hearing about Marquis Stan¡¯s estate¡¯s current situation from Cale. The ck Dragon was going to strike Venion and the Marquis when they were at their lowest point. He was going to show them despair and make them suffer. The ck Dragon pped its wings happily. It really was a vicious creature. Cale heard the ck Dragon mutter its revenge n in his head and treated it as a creepy luby as he went to bed. Naturally, those viciousments did not make it easy to sleep. The next morning, Cale was standing in front of the carriage early in the morning. Rosalyn, Choi Han, and Lock saw them off. Cale looked at the three of them with a stoic expression. ¡°Cale-nim, if you think you see that mage bastard, please tell the dragon to kill him right away. All you have to tell him is to blow his head up so that he is not useless like me, who was only able to cut off an arm.¡± Choi Han was spewing vicious things from early in the morning. ¡°I will definitely get stronger ande back! So make sure you listen to the young master while I am gone. Think seriously about the thing I told all of youst time. It is for your future. We all need to get stronger now.¡± Lock was surrounded by his 10 younger siblings and telling them what was on his mind. Rosalyn was whispering with the ck Dragon inside of the carriage, and it was so quiet that even Cale could not hear. ¡°Dragon-nim, this is the textbook on Roan Kingdom¡¯s alphabet, and this is the one for the continent¡¯smonnguage.¡± ¡°Thank you, human. I am great and mighty, so I will learn it quickly.¡± ¡°Absolutely. Dragon-nim is great and mighty. I pray that youe up with a cool name for yourself.¡± ¡°I will ask for him toe up with a name for me.¡± ¡°...I¡¯m sure Cale-nim will know what you mean by asking him.¡± ¡°Hmph.¡± Cale didn¡¯t know what they were talking about, but he stared at Rosalyn, who was watching the ck Dragon with a satisfied smile on her face, and started to frown. He then turned toward Choi Han and started to speak. Choi Han was still going on about what Cale should do in order to stay alive without him. ¡°Cale-nim, your rate of survival goes up if you st anything away in one hit and then run away. Also-.¡± ¡°Enough with the nonsense.¡± Cale stoically continued speaking to Choi Han, who immediately shut up. ¡°Just make sure you don¡¯t get hurt.¡± ¡°...Yes. I will make sure to do that.¡± Cale didn¡¯t want to see Choi Han¡¯s innocent smile anymore, so he got onto the carriage. Rosalyn got off as soon as Cale got on. Cale felt the weight of the invisible ck Dragon, as well as On and Hong, on hisp as he looked out the window toward Hans. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± The staff, who were all outside the residence to see them off, bade Cale goodbye. Cale did not understand why these staff members would dy their work ande out to see him off. He told them it was fine, but they all still wanted toe and see him off. ¡°Young master-nim, please return home safely!¡± ¡°It was our joy to serve you, young master-nim!¡± ¡°We look forward to seeing you again in the future!¡± ¡®What terrible nonsense.¡¯ Cale had no ns to evere back to the capital. He just casually waved at them and then closed the carriage curtains. That action was the signal to go. Cale¡¯s group had two more carriages than when they arrived, as they left the capital and headed to the Northeast. Ubarr. Cale was headed to the sea that was filled with whirlpools for hundreds of years. *** ¡°Sniff! It smells salty! Is this the sea?¡± The red kitten Hong looked out the open carriage window and sniffed the air. Cale nodded his head as he received a small round item that the ck Dragon handed to him. ¡°This is the condensed mana from the bomb?¡± The ck Dragon nodded his head at Cale¡¯s question and responded. ¡°Yes. We can make a new magic bomb now.¡± Cale became jovial at this confirmation and opened the carriage window wide. The cool sea breeze entered the carriage as he looked out toward the Northeastern sea. There were many inds visible in the ocean. The Northeastern sea had quite a number of these small inds. The silver kitten On was also quite excited. ¡°Oh! Look at that sharp cliff!¡± The sharp cliff brought forth both awe and fear as they were riding across a path created on top of that cliff. Cale looked toward the, ¡®Cliff of Winds,¡¯ the most beautiful sight in the Ubarr territory. There were many small inds next to that cliff. Between the cliff and the inds were multiple raging whirlpools. Those whirlpools were the culprit behind why the seas of the Ubarr territory were so dangerous. ¡®The mage yer ends upnding on one of those inds after being shipwrecked by the whirlpools, and ends up finding the, ¡®Sound of the Wind.¡¯ The mage yer was known for being an intelligent barbarian. He was even stronger than Lock, the Blue Wolf Tribe member and the future Wolf King, and held the title of the strongest individual in the Western Continent. The mage yer¡¯s name was Toonka, known as Toonka the Tyrant. ¡®I just need to get it before he does.¡¯ If things went as it did in the novel, it was still too early for Toonka toe here. Cale was thinking that there was no chance he would run into Toonka as he looked out to the sea with satisfaction. This journey would be smooth, as long as he avoided Toonka. Cale, who had been looking out the window with satisfaction, could see something far in the horizon. ¡°Hmm?¡± Cale rubbed his eyes a bit, but it was still the same. ¡°...Isn¡¯t that a whale?¡± A pod ofrge whales were shooting water into the air as they crossed through the Northeastern Sea to head north. Cale suddenly had an ominous feeling, and clenched the magic bomb ingredients in his hand. The whales tended to live in the Northern sea. This was true for the Whale Tribe as well. It was only during the war with the mermaids that the Whale Tribe came down south. ¡®I¡¯m sure that¡¯s just a group of whales passing by. Tons of whales head north. Absolutely no way, right?¡¯ The ck Dragon¡¯s voice echoed inside Cale¡¯s ear. ¡°I feel a strong presence.¡± That echo stabbed right into Cale¡¯s brain. That was why Cale was frowning when they arrived at a small vige just outside the Cliff of Winds. ¡°Young master, did you get sick on the way?¡± Cale shook his head at Hans¡¯s question. ¡°No, I just have a bad feeling.¡± ¡°Ah, it is scary because of the cliffs. However, our driver is a veteran, so you have nothing to worry about.¡± Cale ignored the uselessments from Hans and reached his hand out to the person approaching him. ¡°Long time no see, youngdy Amiru.¡± ¡°Hello, young master Cale.¡± Amiru had her uniquely calm smile on her face as she weed Cale and crew. This was a small seaside vige in the Ubarr territory. This small vige, that had nothing special and allowed the residents to live in peace and quiet until now, was suddenly busy with visitors. The vige was quickly changing every day. However, they would soon face an opportunity that will allow their vige to change iparably in the near future. Tomorrow night would be that moment. Tomorrow night, Cale was nning on blowing up a magic bomb deep inside the ocean. However, something that, in Cale¡¯s point of view, should have never happened had happened. This terrible situation began when one of Amiru¡¯s knights came to report to Amiru. The knight urgently approached Amiru and quietly reported. ¡°Mydy, the person we rescued has regained consciousness.¡± ¡°Oh, is that so?¡± ¡®Rescue?¡¯ That word made Cale think of a single person. As Cale started to frown with doubt on his mind, Amiru noticed Cale¡¯s expression and started to exin. ¡°We were inspecting the shoreline and nearby inds for the new naval base when we rescued a shipwrecked person. It seems that he has regained consciousness.¡± ¡®I have a bad feeling about this.¡¯ ¡°We were debating what to do when we saw him unconscious and being dragged into the whirlpool, but I remembered what you did at the za and decided we needed to save him.¡± Amiru continued to speak to Cale. ¡°Because a person¡¯s life is precious, right, young master Cale?¡± Cale answered that question after a long moment of silence. ¡°...Of course.¡± ¡°I knew young master Cale would answer like that.¡± Cale could not even think about Amiru¡¯s smiling face right now. All that was on his mind right now were the details regarding how the novel described Toonka¡¯s situation. 1. Quotation for the ck Dragon when he is talking out loud, bullet/hyphen for when he is talking into Cale¡¯s mind. Maso wanted me to rify so you don¡¯t grill him about it ;) If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible. Chapter 50: Into the Whirlpool (1) Chapter 50: Into the Whirlpool (1) 3Chapter 50: Into the Whirlpool (1) Trantor: miraclerifle Editor: Borderline Masochist Amiru, who had no way of knowing what Cale was thinking about, thought the serious expression on Cale¡¯s face was because of how caring of a person he was. She then continued to speak. ¡°Based on his outfit and physique, he seemed to be someone from the Whipper Kingdom.¡± It was definitely Toonka. Cale¡¯s face turned paler as Amiru continued to speak. The non-mage faction that was fighting against the mages in the Whipper Kingdom were ignored as barbarians by the mages. However, there were no barbarians in this world. All humans had the same brain. It was just that, as time went on and history was created, they all grew and developed in the way that was most suitable for them. The non-mages of the Whipper Kingdom were all strong individuals who managed to take control of the Whipper Kingdom¡¯s harsh mountains and shores without using any magic. They were people who focused on strengthening the human body rather than relying on other factors, such as magic. They were rebelling because they wanted to destroy the current Whipper Kingdom that was made only for mages to have easy lives and return it to its original form. The citizens of the Whipper Kingdom were on the side of these non-mages. Foreigners may think that the barbarians were trying to take over the kingdom, but they were not barbarians to the Whipper Kingdom¡¯s citizens. They were just free people. They used instinct to take down this kingdom of logic. ¡®The problem is that Toonka is extremely stupid.¡¯ An intelligent barbarian? There were some who said that, but, in Cale¡¯s opinion, Toonka was just a simple and stupid person who just happened to be very strong. And stupid people were the scariest type of people. This was because you could not talk to them. ¡°Young master Cale, you do not have to worry about that person. He seemed to recover very quickly.¡± Caleughed it off after hearing Amiru¡¯s words. ¡°I¡¯m not worried at all. In fact, I¡¯d prefer it if he continued to get treatment for a long time.¡± Cale¡¯s hope was that Toonka would remain in recovery until he left. Amiru, as well as the knights who were with her in the capital, all looked toward Cale with warm gazes. Cale did not have time to pay attention to such gazes. He had enough of a headache trying to figure out why Toonka arrived here so early. ¡°Youngdy Amiru, could you please show us to our rooms?¡± ¡°Of course. You are still not at full strength yet, right?¡± ¡°Yes. I am still hurt.¡± ¡°...Oh no, let¡¯s hurry then.¡± Cale only had a single thought in his head as Amiru started to walk quickly with a serious expression on her face before slowing back down to Cale¡¯s speed. ¡®Billos may be a Flynn and is extremely talented, but how was he so sure about the Civil War? How did he find out so early?¡¯ It was because Cale had read the novel that he knew about Billos¡¯s abilities. However, Billos was still ostracized as a bastard son right now. There had to be a limit to his information gathering. That meant that the fact that Billos knew about it meant that the story was changing. ¡®The Civil War must be happening earlier than in the novel.¡¯ If Cale thought about it that way, everything made sense. But what would have brought forth the Civil War? However, Cale did not think long about this question. The fact that Toonka was shipwrecked meant that his ship was destroyed by the mages¡¯ attacks and that he had returned from the north after gaining strength. That meant that, even if it was moved up, the story itself did not change. The strength that instilled fear in the mages. The peak of human potential when it came to physical strength. Toonka survived through the sea, mountain, desert, jungle, volcano, and ciers with just his physical strength alone. Toonka had survived through nature and its harshest elements. There was no way that mages, who use mana, a power that is drawn from nature, could defeat such a person. ¡®Maybe a dragon can kill him.¡¯ A dragon could probably still kill Toonka with a single hit. Cale said that he needed to rest as soon as he arrived at the residence and sent everybody out of his room before looking up at the ceiling and starting to speak. ¡°Hey.¡± ¡°What is it, human.¡± The ck Dragon revealed itself. Cale started to seriously speak to the dragon. ¡°Stay by my side without going anywhere for awhile.¡± Cale had realized something through the situation with Choi Han and the ck Dragon. If he tried to avoid Toonka, he could instead end up with even more baggage. He needed to prepare for that moment. ¡°I will do whatever I want.¡± The ck Dragon snorted and turned away from Cale. However, the way the dragon¡¯s wings were pping let Cale know that the ck Dragon would listen to him. He was saying one thing, but his body was saying another. Cale felt much better after telling that to the ck Dragon. Cale then looked around his room. It was a residence that the head of the Ubarr family had built a while ago in this small vige. ¡®It doesn¡¯t really fit with the rest of the vige.¡¯ This luxurious room did not fit with the vige they were in. That meant that Amiru¡¯s mother, the head of the Ubarr territory, already had ns to develop this area when she originally started the construction of this residence. That vision was finally bing a reality 10 yearster. ¡®It probably took a while to draw in Gilbert¡¯s family and get the protection of the Wheelsman family.¡¯ Cale was scheduled to meet with Amiru¡¯s mother before leaving the Ubarr territory. She was going toe from the city with the Ubarr family¡¯s main estate around that time. Cale thought about that meeting for a bit before moving to stand in front of the window. He could see the entire vige through therge window, as well as the Cliff of Winds. The Cliff of Winds. For hundreds of years, the water in front of the cliff was ravaged by a whirlpool, causing headaches for the Ubarr citizens trying to head out into the sea. But there was a reason Amiru¡¯s family still considered this area to be important. There were two other viges that were by the sea, but this vige was at the center of the three. The shoreline that was in the shape of a crescent moon had this vige in the center with two cliffs on either side, making this the only vige that made it easy for boats to set out. Furthermore, inds of different sizes were visible from the vige, making it a pretty sight as well. It would be a great location for a military base. Cale was scheduled to go to the smallest ind tomorrow morning. The, ¡®Sound of the Wind,¡¯ that was the source of all of these whirlpools was located right next to that ind. Toonka had said the following about the Sound of the Wind in the novel. < ¡°It is a quiet but chaotic power.¡± > It was exactly what Cale was looking for. A power that would allow him to quickly and quietly run away while causing chaos for the strong. Cale started to slightly smile in anticipation of tomorrow morning. That smirk soon changed to a full-on smile that was full of satisfaction. ¡°Young master-nim! Uncle Beacrox made this seafood just for you!¡± ¡°Uncle is very excited about the sea!¡± ¡°Right! Cale-nim, please eat a lot!¡± Cale looked at the ten wolf children bringing food to his room with satisfaction. He had told the others that they were Lock¡¯s cousins and that they all lived in the same vige when their families were killed by bandits. Cale¡¯s smile became even thicker. It was not because he liked the ten of them. Cale¡¯s eyes were focused on Beacrox, who was bringing trays of food behind the children. Ron¡¯s son, a chef, and a torture expert. That was Beacrox. He usually wore clothes without any wrinkles nor even a speck of dust. It was the same right now. However, he had serious bags under his eyes. ¡°Please eat, young master Cale.¡± ¡°Great, thanks. It was a good decision to have you all help Beacrox in the kitchen.¡± Cale thanked Maes, the twelve-year-old who was the eldest of the 10 wolf children, before picking up his fork. ¡®Young master-nim, we want to work. Lock hyung told us we cannot leech off of you.¡± The wolf children, with Maes in the lead,had rushed into his carriage during their journey and asked him to put them to work. That was when Cale had them start assisting Beacrox. ¡®Mm, we think it will be better if we train with the knights, but we will still do our best.¡¯ The 12-year-old Maes was confident and calm, unlike Lock. He was also very aware of the strengths of the Wolf Tribe. That was why Cale was even more adamant about their helping Beacrox in the kitchen ¡®You are still children. It is still too early to do something dangerous like training with the knights. Help Beacrox with the kitchen stuff.¡¯ ¡®You really are like Lock hyung mentioned. Yes, we will do our best.¡¯ The children who said that they will work hard really did work hard. Maybe that was why, but Cale couldn¡¯t help but smirk at Beacrox, who seemed to get more tired each and every day. Beacrox just stood there while the wolf children set up the table and then headed out. ¡°Uncle, are you noting?¡± The wolf children were bright and pure. They called Beacrox uncle and treated him like family. ¡°...I¡¯ming.¡± The children headed out first after hearing hisment. All of them were dressed cleanly and had their hair well kept, as if they never lived in a remote vige before. It was inevitable with Beacrox¡¯s style. ¡®Now that I think about it, he would be a really good babysitter.¡¯ Cale avoided Beacrox¡¯s gaze, thinking that Beacrox woulde at him with his cooking knife if he knew what Cale was thinking about. Beacrox was living as a clean and respectful chef right now. He could not be cold to the wolf children. All he could do was re at Cale every so often. Cale watched Beacrox pick up a fork and knife and start to leave the room as he started to speak. ¡°Thanks for always giving me a delicious meal.¡± ¡°...Yes sir.¡± Click. Beacrox left the room and closed the door behind him. Cale looked at the door and started to speak. ¡°I don¡¯t know why he is trying to do his dad¡¯s job while his dad is gone.¡± There was no reason for Beacrox to bring the food to him. However, Beacrox was slowly doing Ron¡¯s work at any chance he got. Sadly, this prevented Cale from being able to enjoy the gap left from Ron¡¯s departure. The wolf children or Beacrox always showed up to take Ron¡¯s spot. Cale looked toward the corner of the room next and continued speaking. ¡°Come eat.¡± ¡°Cale¡¯s meal buddies, On, Hong, and the ck Dragon, rushed to the table and started to eat. Cale looked out at the sunset over the ocean as he leisurely ate his dinner. The next day. ¡°Hello.¡± ¡°Nice to meet you, young master-nim.¡± Cale exchanged greetings with an old man. This was a fisherman who had roamed across this Ubarr sea and battled against the whirlpool for tens of years. This old man, who was known as the greatest veteran of the Ubarr sea in this small seaside vige, had a very tan skin that represented just how much time he spent out at sea. ¡°Just trust me. I will safely take you to the central ind.¡± Amiru, who was next to Cale, nodded her head and added on. ¡°Right. He is an amazing individual, so you will be able to get to anywhere in the Ubarr sea as long as he is with you. I¡¯m sorry I cannot go with you even though I¡¯m supposed to show you around. I have some work to do.¡± ¡°That is okay. It is enough that you have introduced me to an expert fisherman.¡± It would beplicated if Amiru went with him. Cale had already determined the people who would go with him today. The fisherman asked. ¡°Is it just the three of you?¡± ¡°Yes. Let us go.¡± ¡°Yes sir. Please get on.¡± Cale got on the small but sturdy boat. The Vice Captain got on behind him. Since the Vice Captain will be with him, Cale did not need to take any other knights with him. It really shouldn¡¯t be a problem though, since the inds were uninhabited. ¡°Please be safe, young master.¡± ¡°Got it.¡± Deputy butler Hans had On and Hong in his arms as he watched Cale off. The kittens On and Hong were iling around, trying to get away from Hans, who was getting closer to the water. Although they liked the smell of the sea, On and Hong did not like water. - I will be flying. Naturally, the ck Dragon was nning on following them while remaining invisible. Cale joked with thest person getting on the boat. ¡°Beacrox, apparently thes near the ind tend to catch a lot of rare seafood. It will be great to broaden your pte.¡± ¡°...Thank you very much, young master Cale.¡± Beacrox, who ended up going with them at Cale¡¯s order, got onto the boat with a stiff expression. Cale ordered the fisherman once everybody was on board. ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡± ¡°Yes sir.¡± The fisherman, the captain of this small boat, started to row with his son. In this whirlpool filled sea, neither arge ship nor eleration magic was important. It was safer to be with an experienced fisherman and rely on their years of rowing experience. ¡°The boat may rock quite a bit, so please hold on tightly.¡± The old man casually announced as the boat departed. Cale started to curse soon after they left. ¡°Shit.¡± The boat was rocking. The boat was just barely avoiding the whirlpool that seemed like it would suck everything in. The force of the whirlwind was rocking the boat a lot. Ssh, rash. All sorts of water smashing sounds rang in Cale¡¯s ears as the old fisherman shouted. ¡°Hahaha. Young master-nim, isn¡¯t the whirlpool grand?¡± The fisherman was a very courageous man. Cale pushed away the hand of the Vice Captain who was grabbing onto his clothes with a pale expression. He was feeling seasick. 1. TL: Yet he got shipwrecked...clearly didn¡¯t survive the sea...(PR: Perservering = Survival) If you find any errors ( broken links, non-standard content, etc.. ), Please let us know < report chapter > so we can fix it as soon as possible.